TB Rule Reference Original 1st January 2014 Issue Pdf2304

Common Structural Rules for
Bulk Carriers and

Oil Tankers
Technical Background Rule Reference
01 January 2014 Release

EXTERNAL
RELEASE 1 APRIL 2013
Table of Contents
Part 1 :
General Hull Requirements
Part 2 :
Ship Types
PART 1
GENERAL HULL REQUIREMENTS

Table of Contents
Chapter 1:
Rule General Principles
Chapter 2:
General Arrangement Design
Chapter 3:
Structural Design Principles
Chapter 4:
Loads
Chapter 5:
Hull Girder Strength
Chapter 6:
Hull Local Scantling
Chapter 7:
Direct Strength Analysis
Chapter 8:
Buckling
Chapter 9:
Fatigue
Chapter 10:
Other Structures
Chapter 11:
Superstructure, Deckhouses and Hull Outfitting
Chapter 12:
Construction
Chapter 13:
Ship in Operation - Renewal Criteria
PART 1 CHAPTER
RULE GENERAL PRINCIPLES

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Application
1 Scope of Application
2 Rule Application
3 Class Notations
4 Application of the Rules of the Society
SECTION 2
Rule Principles
1 General
2 General Assumptions
3 Design Basis
4 Design Principles
5 Rule Design Methods
SECTION 3
Verification of Compliance
1 General
2 Documents to be Submitted
3 Scope of Approval
4 Workmanship
5 Structural Details
6 Equivalence Procedures
SECTION 4
Symbols and Definitions
1 Primary Symbols and Units

2 Symbols
3 Definitions
SECTION 5
Loading Manual and Loading Instruments
1 General Requirements
2 Loading Manuals
3 Loading Instrument
4 Loading Specific to Bulk Carriers
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 1 APPLICATION
HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES
SCOPE OF APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
These regulations clearly define the application of harmonised Common Structural Rules
(CSR-H) for bulk carriers and oil tankers.
1.1.2
These regulations give the typical structural arrangement of the ships concerned by the Rules.
1.1.3
Technical background is not considered necessary.
1.2
Scope of application for bulk carriers
1.2.1
The Rules apply to bulk carriers of length 90m and greater of typical arrangement fitted with
a double bottom structure and side structure of single skin or double skin construction and
constructed generally with a single deck and, in the cargo holds, with topside tanks and bilge
hopper tanks.
The word generally means that ships fitted with top side and hopper tanks have a typical
bulk carrier arrangement, but CSR are applicable to other arrangements, for example hybrid
type bulk carriers.
A hybrid bulk carrier is a bulk carrier where at least one cargo hold is constructed with
hopper tank and topside tank. It clearly means that these Rules apply to bulk carriers
without topside nor hopper tanks in some holds and having hopper tank and top side tank
in remaining hold.
This is in line with the interpretation of the expression constructed generally with single
deck, top-side tanks and hopper side tanks in cargo area, which means, according to MSC
Res 277(85), as amended , that ships are not considered outside the definition of bulk carriers
only on the grounds that they lack some or all of the specified constructional features.
The expression intended primarily to carry dry cargoes in bulk is to be understood in the
same way as MSC Res 277(85), as amended. The text of MSC Res 277(85) says: primarily to
carry dry cargo in bulk means primarily designed to carry dry cargoes in bulk and to
transport cargoes which are carried, and loaded or discharged, in bulk, and which occupy
the ships cargo spaces exclusively or predominantly.
Ore carriers and combination carriers are excluded from the scope of application of the Rules
due to their typical arrangement (see Figure 1).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 1/PAGE 1
Figure 1: Typical structural arrangement for Ore Carriers
The Rules also exclude from its scope of application the following ship types:
Woodchip carrier.
Cement, fly ash and sugar carriers provided that loading and unloading is not carried
out by grabs heavier than 10 tons, power shovels and other means which may damage
cargo hold structure.
Ships with inner bottom construction adapted for self-unloading.
The same ship types are excluded from MSC Res 277(85), as amended.
The definition of bulk carriers covered by the Rules is in accordance with SOLAS and MSC
Res 277(85), as amended, excepted for the pure ore carriers and combination carriers due to
their typical structural arrangement as mentioned above.
1.3
Scope of application of oil tankers
1.3.1 Length and structural arrangement application

1.3.2 Cargo temperature application

This requirement is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010) Sec 2, 3.1.8.4.
2
2.1
RULE APPLICATION
Rule description
2.1.1 Rule structure

2.1.2 Numbering
JANUARY 2014
2.2
Rule Requirements
2.2.1 Part 1
2.2.2 Part 2
2.2.3 Application of the Rules

2.2.4 General criteria

2.3
Structural requirements
2.3.1 Materials and welding

The rule requirements associated with the selection of materials for structural components
are based on the location, design temperature, through thickness stress, and criticality of the
component, see Sec 2, [3.4.4] and Ch 3, Sec 1.
The rule requirements are based on the assumption that the material is manufactured in
accordance with the rolling tolerances specified in IACS UR W13 (Rev 5, February 2012).
2.4
Ship parts
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Fore part

The structure in the forward part is defined as structure forward of the collision bulkhead in
principle, but the scope of applicability of the structural regulations for slamming of the
forward bottom and bow flare extends also to the structural parts aft of the collision
bulkhead. To avoid duplication and for convenience, the regulations are included in those
for the forward part.
2.4.3 Cargo area

2.4.4 Machinery space

The pump room is included in machinery space for strength assessment purpose although
SOLAS considers the pump room as part of the cargo area.
2.4.5 Aft part

2.4.6 Superstructures and deckhouses

JANUARY 2014
2.5
Limits of application to lifting appliances
2.5.1 Definition
This requirement specifies the fixed parts of lifting appliances considered as an integral part
of the hull, to be checked under the CSR requirements.
2.5.2 Rule application for lifting appliances

2.5.3 Structures supporting fixed lifting appliances

2.6
Novel designs
2.6.1
3
3.1
CLASS NOTATIONS
Class notation CSR
3.1.1 Application
This requirement defines the class notation CSR. Ships complying with the requirements of
these Rules will have the notation CSR placed in the ships public class. Mandatory or
voluntary procedures which previously resulted in class notations that are made redundant
by these Rules will no longer be applied to ships covered by the notation CSR. Additionally,
current notations from the Societies that indicate compliance with specific guides or
requirements that augment this standard will also be added to the ships public class records.
3.2
Class notation for bulk carriers
3.2.1 Additional service features BC-A, BC-B and BC-C

This regulation incorporates the requirements of IACS UR S25.3 (which is no longer in force).
3.2.2 Additional class notation GRAB [X]

The additional class notation GRAB[X] ensures compliance with Ch XII, Reg 6 of the SOLAS
Convention (as amended).
The External Advisory Group IACS used for consultation during harmonisation of CSR-BC
and CSR-OT, advised that GRAB(20), the design basis in CSR-BC, is too low for larger
vessels carrying iron ore and coal, compared to actual grabs used at terminals. The IACS
Hull Panel followed up this feedback by collecting information on actual grab weight from
owners association and IACS members and the following feedback were noted :
Source
Class 1
Industry org. 1
Industry org. 2
Class 2
( investigation from 1991)
JANUARY 2014
Extract of information received

(Grab weights refer to weight of empty grabss)
Most heavy grabs are found in Rotterdam and are 37t .
Grabs with weight 22-28 t are quite common.
Max weight is 42.7t for ore and 43.7t for coal
Max weights are 36-38 t
In Europe max weight is 37t and average weight is 19t
In Japan/Taiwan max deadweight is 31t and average 21t
The bulk carriers shall be designed for the most extreme grab weight that can be expected
during ship life and it is assumed that larger vessels are more likely to encounter the largest
grabs as they will more frequently carry coal and iron ore than handy size ships.
It is recognised that there are significant uncertainties related to scantlings needed to ensure
satisfactory robustness for cargo handling. Reduction of inner bottom and hopper scantlings
compared to CSR BC is therefore considered not acceptable. The minimum grab weights are
chosen to ensure inner bottom thicknesses similar to what used on the reference vessels.
The minimum mass of the grab is taken as 35t for vessels with length exceeding 250m , 30t
for ships between 200m and 250m and 20t for smaller vessels. The increased design grab
weight for larger vesseels is intended to take into account large grabs commonly used for
iron ore. The strength requirement for impact load of grab specified in Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec6 of the
Rules shall be satisfied.
Please refer to HSRTB2_Ch01_Sec06 for details about technical background and scantling
impact.
APPLICATION OF THE RULES OF THE SOCIETY
4.1
Structural parts not covered by these Rules
4.1.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 2 RULE PRINCIPLES
GENERAL
1.1
Rule objectives
1.1.1
The objectives of the Rules are to mitigate the risks of structural failure in relation to safety of
life, environment and property and to ensure adequate durability of the hull structure for its
intended life, see Figure 1. The Rule Objectives were categorised as given below.
Safety objectives:
The overall safety of the hull structure and hence structural requirements are specified in
such a way so that:
(a) The ships structural strength and watertight integrity are adequate for the
intended service of the ship.
(b) The minimum state of the structure is specified so that the minimum acceptable
structural safety level is adequate and the status of the structure with regard to
renewal criteria is known throughout the ships life.
Performance and durability objectives:
The Rules include structural requirements related to the satisfactory durability of the ship.
This implies that:
(a) The ship is capable of carrying the intended cargo with the required flexibility
in operation to fulfil its design role.
(b) The structure has sufficient durability in terms of corrosion margin and fatigue
endurance.
Overall safety /reliability
Figure 1: Structural safety and durability

Existing rules
As-built level
Durability
Minimum acceptable safety level
Time
1.1.2
JANUARY 2014
GENERAL ASSUMPTIONS
2.1
International and national regulations
2.1.1
Ships are designed, constructed and operated in a complex regulatory framework laid down
by IMO and implemented by flag states or by classification societies on their behalf.
Statutory requirements set the standard for statutory aspects to ships, such as life saving,
subdivisions, stability, fire protection, etc. These requirements influence the operational and
cargo carrying arrangements of the ship and may therefore affect its structural design.
2.1.2
The intent is to identify the National and International Regulations that have a structural
requirement content and make the relevant requirements a part of the classification
requirements by either re-stating the requirements or clearly referencing the applicable
regulations. The Rule requirements do not replace the corresponding National and
International regulations but are additional requirements that have to be complied with.
The principal regulations typically applicable are given below:
International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS).
Ch II-1, Construction - structure, subdivision and stability, machinery and electrical

installations:
(a) Reg 3-2, Protective coatings of dedicated seawater ballast tanks in all types of
ships and double-side skin spaces of bulk carriers.
(b) Reg 3-3, Safe access to tanker bows.
(c) Reg 3-4, Emergency towing arrangements and procedures.
(d) Reg 3-6, Access to and within spaces in, and forward of, the cargo area of oil
tankers and bulk carriers.
(e) Reg 12, Peak and machinery space bulkheads, shaft tunnels, etc.
(f) Reg 15, Openings in the shell plating below the bulkhead deck of passenger
ships and the freeboard deck of cargo ships.
(g) Reg 16, Construction and initial tests of watertight doors, sidescuttles, etc.
(h) Reg 16-1, Construction and initial tests of watertight decks, trunks, etc.
Ch V, Safety of Navigation:
(a) Reg 22, Navigation bridge visibility.
2.2
Application and implementation of the Rules
2.2.1
2.2.2
This section identifies what the primary responsibilities of each party is in the design and
construction of a ship. In particular, it should be noted that industry also set requirements
which affect the structural design and the responsibility to implement these requirements is
between the owners and designers/shipbuilders.
JANUARY 2014
DESIGN BASIS
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.1.2
This regulation corresponds to the functional requirements specified in the Tier II.3 of Goal
Based Standards, GBS.
3.1.3 Residual strength

3.1.4 Finite element analysis

3.1.5 Fatigue life

3.1.6
3.1.7
3.2
Hull form limit
3.2.1
3.3
Design life
3.3.1
The design life is the nominal period that the ship is assumed to be exposed to operating
and/or environmental conditions and/or the corrosive environment and is used for selecting
appropriate ship design parameters. The ships actual service life may be longer or shorter
depending on the actual operating conditions and maintenance of the ship throughout its life
cycle.
The relationship between the design life that is specified for a ship at the time of design and
construction and the actual safe working life is dependent on the operational history and the
maintenance regime. It follows that two identical ships that are operated differently or
maintained under different maintenance regimes may have different actual lives.
JANUARY 2014
3.4
Environmental conditions
3.4.1 North Atlantic wave environment

To cover worldwide trading operations and also to deal with the uncertainty in the future
trading pattern of the ship and the corresponding wave conditions that will be encountered,
a severe wave environment is used for the design assessment.
3.4.2 Wind and current

3.4.3 Ice
3.4.4 Design temperatures

3.4.5 Thermal loads

3.5
Operating conditions
3.5.1
3.5.2
For avoiding sloshing and impact loads, the ballast cargo hold is not to be partly filled in
seagoing operations. Ballasting and deballasting operations are not to be performed in unfair
weather condition to avoid sloshing and impact loads in the ballast cargo hold.
3.6
Operating draughts
3.6.1
It is only required that the scantling draft is required to be greater than the draft
corresponding to the specified freeboard. The purpose of the operational limitations for
minimum draughts forward (at FP) is to control the design slamming loads.
The scantlings are to be approved for minimum draught forward, at FP applicable for all seagoing conditions of which for the following cases:
TF-e in m, with any of double bottom ballast tanks in bottom slamming area empty.
TF-f in m, with all double bottom ballast tanks in bottom slamming area.
3.7
Internal environment
3.7.1 Oil cargo density for strength assessment

The objective with the strength assessment is to ensure satisfactory structural behaviour for a
worst case scenario and a value equal to seawater density is to be used unless a higher
value is specified by designer/owner.
JANUARY 2014
3.7.2 Oil cargo density for fatigue assessment

The reason for having a different value of SG (specific gravity) for fatigue and strength
assessment lies in the way that the fatigue and strength assessment capacities are evaluated.
The objective with the fatigue assessment is to capture an average value for the entire trading
life of a ship; hence a conservative mean SG value of 0.9 is selected for this purpose. The
specified cargo SG of 0.9 for fatigue assessment is a minimum value. A higher value may be
specified by the owner or designer.
3.7.3 Dry cargo density

3.7.4 Water ballast density

3.8
Structural construction and inspection
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.9
Maximum service speed
3.9.1
3.10 Owners extras

3.10.1
4
4.1
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
Overall principles
4.1.1 Introduction
JANUARY 2014
4.1.2 General
4.1.3 Limit state design principles

4.2
Loads
4.2.1 Design load scenarios

4.3
Structural capacity assessment
4.3.1 General
The structural capacity models used in the Rules are classified according to limit state
principles. The criticality class as identified in the systematic review for each structural
component is applied to link the specified design load scenario to the structural requirement.
Yielding and buckling are controlled explicitly by the application of structural strength
criteria. Rupture is controlled implicitly by limits applied to the yielding failure modes.
Brittle fracture is controlled implicitly by the selection of suitable materials associated with
location of the structural component.
Fatigue cracks are caused by cyclic loads and are controlled explicitly by the application of
fatigue strength criteria for selected critical structural elements. The nature of fatigue
cracking is different to the strength failure modes and consequently assessed using different
capacity models.
4.3.2 Capacity models for ULS, SLS and ALS

The strength failure modes are controlled by means of structural capacity models. Capacity
models are considered to include two related parts:
(a) Selection of structural response model. The means of determination of stresses
and deformations are related to the selected strength assessment method and
the magnitude of the design loads.
(b) Selection of strength assessment criteria. The strength assessment method is
capable of analysing the failure mode in question to a suitable degree of
accuracy. The assessment method for the various rule requirements may be
different, even for the same failure mode, as the degree of utilisation of the
capacity may differ.
The following aspects are the basis for selection of strength capacity models:
Whether the structural member is also assessed at a higher level in the hierarchy and/or
at a later stage by more accurate methods or by more accurate response calculations.
Simplified capacity models where some of the stress components are neglected are
always give conservative results.
Appropriate methodology to assess the failure mode.
Probability level of the load.
Capability of response calculations to represent the physical behaviour of the structure

up to the given load level.
JANUARY 2014
Complexity of structure.
Complexity of loads.
Criticality of the structural member. This will primarily have an impact on the
assessment criteria, but needs to be considered in conjunction with selection of the
appropriate methodology for structural assessment.
The ultimate capacity of the hull girder or structural member is assessed by methods that are
capable of determining the structural capacity beyond the elastic response range. This
implies that these methods account for redistribution of forces, large deformations and nonlinearities. The acceptance criteria regulate the permissible extent of plasticity and
deformation.
Other methods used are capable of assessing the structure beyond the elastic range, but not
to the full utilisation of the capacity. The acceptance criteria regulate the permissible extent
of plasticity and force redistribution.
The load effects in terms of structural responses are determined by analytical methods on a
prescriptive format or by direct calculations. Direct calculations usually refer to 3D analysis
based on linear finite element methods. The method adopted to determine the structural
response matches the requirements given by the assessment methods.
4.3.3 Capacity models for FLS

The accumulated damage caused by the cyclic loads over the entire design life is considered.
The fatigue life depends on the local hot spot stress and hence is related to the design of
structural details and quality of workmanship.
The fatigue assessment method is based on the expected number of cyclic loads and
structural response from trading based on the design life in the design external environment
(25 years in the North Atlantic environment). The method is based on a linear cumulative
damage theorem (i.e. Palmgren-Miners rule) in combination with S-N curves, a
characteristic stress range and an assumed long-term stress distribution curve. The long-term
stress distribution range curve is assumed to follow a Weibull probability distribution.
The method accounts for the combined effect from global and local loads.
4.3.4 Net scantling approach

4.3.5 Intact structure

5
5.1
RULE DESIGN METHODS

General
5.1.1 Design methods

The purpose of the various design methods is to ensure satisfactory levels of safety,
serviceability and durability. To verify this, calculations are performed according to a chosen
design method. The safety margins for the various elements reflect the consequence of a
failure.
JANUARY 2014
The classification of the criticality of each structural component with respect to the
consequences to Life, Environment and Property in the hierarchical tree allowed each
structural component to be assigned a criticality class. This facilitated the selection of
acceptance criteria and capacity models such that the more critical elements have stricter
requirements and hence a lower probability of failure than less critical elements.
A schematic diagram of the criticality class for all structural elements in the cargo region is
shown in Figure 2. A top-down approach is used; i.e. starting at the top level (hull girder)
of the hierarchy (i.e. the hull girder) and working downwards through all levels of the
hierarchy to the plates and stiffeners. The criticality at the next higher level is always set to
be equal to or higher than the level below.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 2: Criticality class of structural elements in the cargo region

LOCAL
PRIMARY
MAJOR
GLOBAL
1.1
Deck panel
L
1.1.1
1.1.2
Deck long.
P
Deck plate
P
Deck
L
1.2 & 1.3

Deck girders
L
2
Double bottom
L
2.2
Btm. shell panel
L
Deck girder web
2.1
Inner btm. panel
L
1.2.2 & 1.3.2
2.1.1
E
2.2.1
E
2.3 & 2.4

Bottom girders
L
0
Hull girder
L
3
Double side
L
3.2
Side shell panel
L
Btm. shell plate

L
3.1.1
3.2.1
Inner side plate

L
3.2.2
Side shell long.

L
3.1.2
Inner side long.
Side shell plate

L
3.3.2 & 3.4.2
Side girder web
4.1
Long. bhd. panel
Btm. girder web
3.3 & 3.4

Side girders
L
2.3.2 & 2.4.2
3.1
Inner side panel
Inner btm. plate
2.2.2
Btm. shell long.

L
2.1.2
Inner btm long.

L
4.1.1
4.1.2
Long. bhd. long.

L
Long. bhd. plate

L
Long. bulkhead
L
4.2
L. bhd. girders
L
Low
Lbhd. girder web
5.1
Tr. bhd. panel
Criticality
color code:
4.2.2
5.1.1
5.1.2
Tr. bhd. stiff.

L
Tr. bhd. plate

L
Tr. bulkhead
Medium
5.2
Tr. bhd. girders
L
5.2.2
Tbhd. girder web

L
High
Symbols:
L
Life
Environment
Property
JANUARY 2014
The following design methods are considered in the Rules:

(a) The working stress design (WSD) method, also known as the permissible or
allowable stress method.
(b) The partial factor (PF) method, also known as load and resistance factor design
method (LRFD).
The PF method separates the influence of uncertainties and variability originating from
different causes by means of partial factors for each load and capacity component. The WSD
method addresses the same limit states as the PF method but accounts for the influence of
uncertainty by a single usage factor as an allowable stress or similar such criteria. The PF
method allows for a more flexible and optimal design assessment when complex load and
structural models are employed.
The working stress design (WSD) format is used as the main method to verify the structural
design in the Rules. Both the WSD and PF methods have to ensure a consistent and
acceptable safety level for all combinations of static and dynamic load effects. The acceptance
criteria for both the WSD method and PF method were calibrated for the various rule
requirements such that a consistent and acceptable safety level for all combinations of S
(static) and S+D (static plus dynamic) load effects were achieved.
5.2
Minimum requirements
5.2.1
5.3
Load-capacity based requirements
5.3.1 General
5.3.2 Design loads for SLS, ULS and ALS

5.3.3 Design loads for FLS

5.3.4 Structural response analysis

5.4
Acceptance criteria
5.4.1 General
5.4.2 Acceptance Criteria

5.5
Design verification
5.5.1 Design verification hull girder ultimate strength

JANUARY 2014
5.5.2 Design verification global finite element analysis

5.5.3 Design verification fatigue assessment

5.5.4
Relationship between prescriptive scantling requirements and FE analysis
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 3 VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
GENERAL
1.1
Newbuilding
1.1.1
1.1.2
The requirement defines the items that the Society carries out during construction, which
have been done in order to verify the compliance for new building in a conventional manner.
1.1.3
1.1.4
Refer to TB [1.1.2].
1.1.5
1.2
Ships in service
1.2.1
DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
2.1
2.1.1
Documentation and data requirements

Loading information
2.1.2
Calculation data and results
Further detailed requirements for information to be submitted to support the calculations

can be found in the relevant chapter of the Rules.
2.2
2.2.1
Submission of plans and supporting calculations

Plans and supporting calculations are to be submitted for approval
Plans, documents and calculation data necessary for the approval and the follow up of the
fabrication/construction of the ship shall be submitted to the plan approval office for
approval process.
2.2.2
Plans to be submitted for information
Plans to be submitted for approval process are listed in TB [2.2.1].
2.2.3
Plans or instruments to be supplied onboard the ship
One key requirement is for provision of steel renewal thickness information on the plans
provided to the Shipowner for retention onboard the ship. Note the need also to provide hull
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC3/PAGE 1
girder sectional properties. This is to enable the consistent application of the net thickness
concept throughout the life of the ship.
SCOPE OF APPROVAL
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
Requirement of international and national regulations
3.2.1
Responsibility
The responsibilities are clearly defined to describe the current position and to avoid any
ambiguity.
WORKMANSHIP
4.1
Requirements to be complied with by the manufacturer
4.1.1
Base Standards, GBS.
4.2
Quality control
4.2.1
This regulation is based on the functional requirements specified in the Tier II.11 of Goal
STRUCTURAL DETAILS
5.1
Details in manufacturing documents
5.1.1
This regulation is based on the functional requirements specified in the Tier II.11 of Goal
EQUIVALENCE PROCEDURES
6.1
Rule applications
6.1.1
JANUARY 2014
6.1.2
6.2
Novel designs
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
Alternative calculation methods
6.3.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 4 SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS
PRIMARY SYMBOLS AND UNITS
1.1
General
1.1.1
Definitions of primary symbols and units used in the Rules are specified.
SYMBOLS
2.1
Ships main data
2.1.1
Definitions of ship main data are specified.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Definitions of symbols used for the characteristics of materials are specified.
2.3
Loads
2.3.1
Definitions of symbols used for loads are specified.
2.4
Scantlings
2.4.1
Definitions of symbols used for scantlings are specified.
DEFINITIONS
3.1
3.1.1
Principle Particulars
L, Rule length
The definition is in accordance with IACS UR S2 (Rev 1, May 2010), however measured on
the summer load waterline has been changed to scantling draught, which is the
maximum permissible draught with respect to hull scantlings. This definition avoids that a
ship may be assigned with different rule lengths depending of freeboard selected.
3.1.2
LLL, freeboard length
The definition is in accordance with International Convention on Load Lines (ICLL).
3.1.3
Moulded breadth
3.1.4
Moulded depth
3.1.5
Draughts

JANUARY 2014
3.1.6
Moulded displacement
3.1.7
Maximum service speed
3.1.8
Block coefficient
The definition is in accordance with IACS UR S2 (as amended).
3.1.9
Lightweight
3.1.10 Deadweight
3.1.11 Fore end

3.1.12 Aft end

3.1.13 Midship
3.1.14 Midship part

3.1.15 Forward freeboard perpendicular

3.1.16 After freeboard perpendicular

3.2
3.2.1
Position 1 and Position 2

Position 1
3.2.2
Position 2
3.3
Standard height of superstructure
3.3.1
The definition is in accordance with International Convention of Load Line (ICLL).
3.3.2
JANUARY 2014
3.4
3.4.1
Type A and Type B freeboard ships

Type A ship
3.4.2
Type B ship
3.4.3
Type B-60 ship
3.4.4
Type B-100 ship
3.5
3.5.1
Operation definition
Multiport
This definition is added for avoiding the ship sails on long trips during long time which
could have impact on the fatigue strength.
3.5.2
Sheltered water
3.6
Reference coordinate system
3.6.1
3.7
3.7.1
Naming convention
Structural nomenclature
Nomenclature is in accordance with IACS Rec 82 (July 2003), Surveyors Glossary - hull
terms and hull survey terms.
3.8
3.8.1
Glossary
Definition of terms
Terminology is in general in accordance with IACS Rec 82 (July 2003), Surveyors Glossary hull terms and hull survey terms. Additional terms and definitions have been added when
needed.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 1, SEC 5 LOADING MANUAL AND LOADING INSTRUMENTS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
Application
1.1.1
TB is not considered necessary.
1.1.2
The regulation is based on IACS UR S1 (Rev 7, May 2010) and S1A (Rev 6, May 2010).
1.1.3
The regulation is based on IACS UR S25 (which no more in force).
1.1.4
1.2
Annual and class renewal survey
1.2.1
The regulation is based on IACS UR S1.1.3 (Rev 7, May 2010).
1.2.2
1.2.3
LOADING MANUALS
2.1
2.1.1
General requirements
Definition
2.1.2
Condition of approval
2.1.3
Loading conditions
2.1.4
Operational limitations
The regulation lists major design limits used as the basis for the standard rule requirements
and that may have an impact on operational flexibility. These operational limitations are
used in the rule structural design process. If there is a wish/need to exceed these limits
during operation of the vessel the extended limits are to be specified and included in the
design assessment and are therefore required to be included in the loading manual.
JANUARY 2014
2.2
Requirements specific to oil tankers
2.2.1
2.3
Requirements specific to bulk carriers
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
LOADING INSTRUMENT
3.1
3.1.1
Definition
3.1.2
Conditions of approval of loading instruments
3.2
Requirements specific to bulk carriers
3.2.1
General
3.2.2
Conditions of approval
LOADING SPECIFIC TO BULK CARRIERS
4.1
4.1.1
Guidance for loading/unloading sequences

Scope of application
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
JANUARY 2014
4.1.6
4.1.7
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DESIGN

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
General
1 General
SECTION 2
Subdivision Arrangement
1 Watertight Bulkhead Arrangement

2 Collision Bulkhead
3 Aft Peak Bulkhead
SECTION 3
Compartment Arrangement
1 Cofferdams
2 Double Bottom
3 Double Side
4 Fore End Compartments
5 Fuel Oil Tanks
6 Aft End Compartments
7 Ballast Tanks
SECTION 4
Access Arrangement
1 Closed Spaces
2 Cargo Area and Forward Spaces
PT 1, CH 2, SEC 1 GENERAL
GENERAL
1.1
General
1.1.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 2, SEC 2 SUBDIVISION ARRANGEMENT
WATERTIGHT BULKHEAD ARRANGEMENT
1.1
Number and disposition of watertight bulkheads
1.1.1
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12 of the SOLAS Convention.
1.1.2
To give ships with an electrical propulsion plant the safety level as same as other type of
ships, both the generator room and engine room are to be enclosed by watertight bulkheads.
1.1.3
The bulkheads in the cargo area are to be fitted taking into account the floodability and
damage stability in accordance with the requirements in the SOLAS Convention and other
relevant International (as request in Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.1.2]) and National regulations.
1.1.4
This requirement is based on SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 11 (as amended) but the number of
bulkhead comes from RINA Rules.
1.1.5
1.2
Openings in watertight bulkheads
1.2.1
The requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 13.1 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
1.2.2
COLLISION BULKHEAD
2.1
Extent and position of collision bulkhead
2.1.1
The requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
2.1.2
The requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12.2 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
2.2
Arrangement of collision bulkhead
2.2.1
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12.4 of the SOLAS convention (as amended).
2.2.2
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12 of the SOLAS convention (as amended).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 2, SEC 2 SUBDIVISION ARRANGEMENT
AFT PEAK BULKHEAD
3.1
General
3.1.1
The aft peak bulkhead is required in this rule, although SOLAS require it only for passenger
ships in Ch II-1, Reg 12.9 (as amended).
3.1.2
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12.9 of the SOLAS Convention, although it is for
passenger ships.
3.1.3
3.1.4
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 2, SEC 3 COMPARTMENT ARRANGEMENT
COFFERDAMS
1.1
Definition
1.1.1
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 2, Sec 2, [1.1.1] (based on the Reg 2,
Sec 1, Ch 2, Pt A of the RINA Rules, January 2013).
1.2
Arrangement of cofferdams
1.2.1
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 2, Sec 2, [2.1.1] (based on 2.1.1, Sec 2,
Ch 2, Pt B of the RINA Rules, January 2013).
1.2.2
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 2, Sec 2, [2.1.3] (based on the first
sentence of 2.1.3, Sec 2, Ch 2, Pt B of the RINA Rules, January 2013).
1.2.3
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 2, Sec 2, [2.1.4] (based on 2.1.4, Sec 2,
Ch 2, Pt B of the RINA Rules, January 2013).
DOUBLE BOTTOM
2.1
General
2.1.1
2.2
Extent of double bottom
2.2.1
For bulk carriers, this requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 9.1 of the SOLAS Convention (as
amended), which is for passenger ships and cargo ships other than tankers. For oil tankers,
this requirement is based on Annex I, Ch 4, Reg 22 of MARPOL (as amended).
2.2.2
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 9.2 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended), which
is for passenger ships and cargo ships other than tankers.
2.3
Height of double bottom
2.3.1
For bulk carriers, this requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 9.2 of the SOLAS Convention (as
amended). For oil tankers, this requirement is based on Annex I, Ch 4, Reg 19.3.2 of
MARPOL (as amended). Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt2_Ch01_Sec02_BC Double Bottom
Arrangement.
JANUARY 2014
2.4
Small wells in double bottom tank
2.4.1
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 9.3 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended), which
is for passenger ships and cargo ships other than tankers.
DOUBLE SIDE
3.1
Double side width
3.1.1
Oil tanker
This requirement is based on Annex I, Ch 4, Reg 19.3.1 of MARPOL (as amended).
3.1.2
Bulk carriers
This requirement is based on Ch XII, Reg 1.4 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended). The
minimum double side width is in accordance with SOLAS, Ch XII, Reg 6 (as amended).
3.2
Minimum clearance inside the double side
3.2.1
Definition
This requirement is based on Ch XII, Reg 6.2.2.5 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
3.2.2
Minimum clearance dimensions
This requirement is based on Ch XII, Reg 6.2.2 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
FORE END COMPARTMENTS
4.1
General
4.1.1
This requirement is based on Ch II-2, Reg 4.2.2.3.1 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
FUEL OIL TANKS
5.1
Arrangement of fuel oil tanks
5.1.1
This requirement is based on SOLAS, Ch II-2, Reg 4.2 (as amended) and MARPOL, Annex I,
Ch 3, Reg 12A (as amended).
AFT END COMPARTMENTS
6.1
Sterntube
6.1.1
This requirement is based on Ch II-1, Reg 12.10 of the SOLAS Convention (as amended).
JANUARY 2014
BALLAST TANKS
7.1
Capacity and disposition of ballast tanks
7.1.1
For bulk carriers, this requirement is based on UR S25 (which no more in force). For oil
tankers, this requirement is based on Annex I, Ch 4, Reg 18 of MARPOL (as amended).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 2, SEC 4 ACCESS ARRANGEMENT
CLOSED SPACES
1.1
General
1.1.1
Special measures for inspection and maintenance are usually to be put in place by
shipbuilder. Inspection plug can be accepted for this purpose.
CARGO AREA AND FORWARD SPACES
2.1
2.1.1
General
Ship structure access manual
This requirement is based on SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 3.6 (as amended).
2.1.2
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
STRUCTURAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Materials
1 General
2 Hull Structural Steel
3 Steels for Forging and Casting
4 Aluminium Alloys
5 Other Materials and Products
SECTION 2
Net Scantling Approach
1 General
SECTION 3
Corrosion Additions
1 General
SECTION 4
Corrosion Protection
1 General
2 Sacrificial Anodes
SECTION 5
Limit States
1 General
2 Criteria
3 Strength Check Against Impact Loads
SECTION 6
Structural Detail Principles
1 Application
2 General Principles
3 Stiffeners
4 Primary Supporting Members (PSM)
5 Intersection of Stiffeners and Primary Supporting Members
6 Openings
7 Double Bottom Structure
8 Double Side Structure
9 Deck Structure
10 Bulkhead Structure
11 Pillars
SECTION 7
Structural Idealisation
1 Structural Idealisation of Stiffeners and Primary Supporting Members
2 Plates
3 Stiffeners
4 Primary Supporting Members
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 1 MATERIALS
GENERAL
1.1
Standard of material
1.1.1
Since regulations related to material standards, material tests, and manufacturing methods
exist in the rules of every Society, general regulations have been specified to refer to them.
1.1.2
1.2
Testing of materials
1.2.1
1.3
Manufacturing process
1.3.1
HULL STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.1
2.1.1
General
Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio
2.1.2
Steel material grades and mechanical properties
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR W11 (Corr. 1, February 2009). The term
normal was adopted in IACS UR W11 (Corr. 1, February 2009) and it is used here.
2.1.3
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR W11 (Corr. 1, February 2009).
2.1.4
High tensile steel
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR W11 (Corr. 1, February 2009).
2.1.5
Onboard documents
2.2
Material factor, k
2.2.1
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR S4 (Rev 3, May 2010).
2.3
Steel grades
2.3.1
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR S6.1 (Rev 6, May 2010)).
JANUARY 2014
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
Structures exposed to low air temperature
2.4.1
It has been decided to apply the Rules for Material of each Society for the requirements
concerning the material of structures exposed to low air temperature. The reference low air
temperature is equal to -10C since IACS UR S6.1 (Rev 6, May 2010) was developed based on
worldwide service using a lowest mean daily average temperature of -10C.
2.5
Through thickness property
2.5.1
This requirement is from CSR OT, Sec 6/1.1.5.1 (July 2010).
2.6
Stainless steel
2.6.1
STEELS FOR FORGING AND CASTING
3.1
General
3.1.1
This requirement is from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 3, Sec 1, 3.1.1 (based on BV Rules (January
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.1.1).
3.1.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.1.2).
3.1.3
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.1.3).
3.2
Steels for forging
3.2.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.2.2).
3.3
Steels for casting
3.3.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.3.1).
JANUARY 2014
3.3.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.3.3).
ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
4.1
General
4.1.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.1.1).
4.1.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.1.2).
4.1.3
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.1.3).
4.1.4
4.2
Extruded plating
4.2.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.2.1).
4.2.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.2.2).
4.2.3
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.2.3).
4.2.4
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.2.4).
4.3
Mechanical properties of weld joints
4.3.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.3.1).
4.3.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.3.2).
JANUARY 2014
4.3.3
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.3.3).
Material factor, k
4.4
4.4.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.4.1).
4.4.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 4.4.2).
4.5
Others
4.5.1
This requirement is from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/1.3.2 (based on LR Rules (January 2013),
Pt 4, Ch 9, 2.3.1).
4.5.2
This requirement is from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/1.3.2 (as amended and based on based
on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 9, 2.3.1). Aluminium may, under certain circumstances
give rise to incendiary sparking on impact with oxidised steel. A particular risk is where an
aluminium component is dragged or rubbed against the uncoated steel structure creating a
thin smear of aluminium on the surface. Subsequent high energy impact by a rusted
component on that smear could generate an incendiary spark capable of igniting any
surrounding inflammable gas.
OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
5.1
General
5.1.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 5.1.1).
5.1.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 5.1.2).
5.2
Iron cast parts
5.2.1
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 5.2.1).
5.2.2
2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 1, 5.2.2).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 2 NET SCANTLING APPROACH
GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Application
Net thickness approach
1.1.2
Local and global corrosion
1.1.3
Exceptions in gross scantling
The structural scantlings in the Rules are based on the net scantling approach, but for
massive structures such as superstructure, deckhouse, rudder structure, and massive pieces
of forgings and castings, the scantlings of which are decided by empirical formulae, one
cannot distinguish clearly the scantlings according to strength and the scantlings according
to corrosion and thickness diminution; therefore, the non-application of the net scantling
approach has been noted here.
1.2
1.2.1
Gross and net scantling definitions

Gross required thickness
The formula provided in these paragraphs reiterates the most significant relationships which
can be derived from Figure 1.
1.2.2
Gross offered thickness
1.2.3
Net offered thickness
1.3
Scantling Compliance
1.3.1
1.3.2
Compliance with the Rules can be broadly divided into two types as follows:
(a) Required thickness determined from rule formulae.
(b) Scantling that determines the structural properties, such as section properties from rule
formulae, or thickness assessed from direct strength calculations, longitudinal bending
strength, or fatigue strength assessment.
Item (a) was defined as the required net thickness, while item (b) was defined as the offered
scantling. In each case, the application method of the corrosion addition was clearly defined.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 2 NET SCANTLING APPROACH
Table 1: Assessment for corrosion applied to the gross scantlings (Refer to Rules)
For assessment of overall strength by the direct strength calculation or assessment of hull
girder strength, the assumption that the thickness of all structural members to be assessed
reduces to the permissible wastage amount is an assumption on the side of excessive safety.
Considering the variation in the corrosion phenomenon, reduction in thickness to the
average wastage amount may be assumed, where half the corrosion addition may be
considered as the average wastage amount. In assessing the buckling strength of stiffeners or
panels, stresses acting on the stiffeners or panels are used assuming that complete structures
are in a fully corroded state. Since critical buckling stresses in stiffeners or panels are for local
structures, these structures are assumed to be in a fully corroded state of 100% of corrosion
addition for assessment on the side of safety.
Repetitive loads encountered within the assumed service period were considered for the
fatigue strength assessment. Assessment is difficult for the elapsed period from the time of a
new ship when the members to be assessed are not corroded at all, until the members to be
assessed are in the wasted condition with the corrosion amount assumed for the assumed
service period. It was therefore decided to assume an average corrosion and reduced
thickness condition during the assumed service period. In the application of average
corrosion amount in the fatigue strength assessment, since corrosion is minimal during the
period the painting is effective, the assessment is very much on the safe side.
For fatigue strength assessment of local structures, a net thickness deducting half the
corrosion addition from gross thickness is applied. In keeping with this, hull girder stresses
for fatigue check are to be based on deducting a quarter of the corrosion addition from gross
scantlings. Hull girder stresses based on this approach corresponds approximately to stresses
in a model deducting half of the corrosion additions from gross scantlings multiplied by a
correction factor of 0.95. In order to maintain consistency with other corrosion models,
therefore, a corrosion model deducting half of the corrosion addition from gross scantlings is
applied for hull girder stress determination in fatigue assessment.
As a conclusion, two corrosion models are considered; that is 100% corrosion additions are
taken for the local scantling formulae and buckling capacity assessment and 50% corrosion
additions are taken for hull girder check, FEA and fatigue check.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 3 CORROSION ADDITIONS
GENERAL
1.1
Applicability
1.1.1
Regarding the application of stainless steel, stainless clad steel and aluminium materials, it is
recognised that while these materials may experience little or no corrosion in service,
structures comprising of these materials in the ship might be subjected to mechanical wear
and abrasion in service. To allow for this a corrosion addition of 0.5mm (tres) has been
specified consistent with the practice in the existing rules of many societies.
Regarding other materials that are not shipbuilding quality carbon steels, since no specific
corrosion data has been considered in the development of these Rules on steels other than
carbon steel (general steel), separate considerations are required for setting the corrosion
addition.
1.2
Corrosion addition determination
1.2.1
The corrosion addition for each structural member, particularly those that form the
boundaries of compartments, is to be determined after considering the application to each
side of the member. The corrosion amount for each factor of the corrosive environment is in
0.1mm units. However, considering the relationship of the corrosion amount with the
renewal criteria and that the nominal thickness of steel is generally in 0.5mm units, the value
obtained by adding the value of the corrosive environment on one side to that of the other
side is rounded up to 0.5mm units, and to this value, the maximum value of corrosion
amount estimated to progress during the survey interval (2.5 years) of 0.5mm is added to
arrive at the value of corrosion addition.
1.2.2
Minimum value of corrosion addition
A 2mm minimum corrosion addition is to generally be applied to all structure, consistent

with Table 1. The general minimum of 2mm is not necessary for internals of dry spaces and
pump rooms as the corrosion data used to generate these requirements shows a much
reduced corrosion in service for these items.
1.2.3
Stiffener
1.2.4
This requirement avoids the complications which would arise from single structural
elements having multiple corrosion additions.
The corrosion additions are set as the estimated value of corrosion in a 25 years period from
progressive corrosion models based on the probabilistic theory and thickness measurement
data of several hundred thousands of points. Reference is made to the TB Report TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch03_Sec03_Corrosion Additions for additional details on the background to the
corrosion additions presented in Table 1.
Table 1: Corrosion addition for one side of a structural member (Refer to Rules)
Additional notes to Table 1:
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 3 CORROSION ADDITIONS
1) This 1.0mm increase in corrosion addition is to address the increased corrosion

caused by the mechanical action of the chain cable.
2) This increase in the corrosion addition for structural members between water ballast
tanks and heated cargo oil tanks, fuel oil or lube oil tanks is due to the increased
corrosion in these areas which was highlighted by the collected data.
3) See Note 2.
4) This requirement for a higher corrosion addition in the upper part of the tank is
because of the increased corrosion experienced due to heating from the sun and more
aggressive environmental conditions, as also observed from collected data.
5) Technical background is not considered necessary.
6) Technical background is not considered necessary.
7) Transverse plane bulkheads at the forward end of the fore cargo hold and at the aft
end of the aft cargo hold are to be treated in three zones in the same way that they are
treated for corrugated bulkheads.
8) Corrosive substances (e.g. ballast water, water condensate, sludge etc.) may occur
inside the duct keel space making the environment to which the inner surface of the
outer shell plating is exposed to be more like that of a ballast tank causing increased
corrosion.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 4 CORROSION PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.1
Structures to be protected
1.1.1
Dedicated seawater ballast tanks
Regulations for structures of dedicated seawater ballast tanks to be protected against

corrosion are specified based on SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 3-2 (as amended).
1.1.2
Cargo oil tanks
Only the locations where paint is to be applied are specified. Thus, compartments carrying
fuel oil mentioned herein are subject to treatment similar to the CSR BC and CSR OT rules
(July 2010).
1.1.3
Bulk carriers
1.1.4
Narrow spaces
Only the locations where paint is to be applied are specified. Thus, narrow compartments
not mentioned herein are subject to treatment similar to the CSR BC and CSR OT rules.
Narrow compartments can be filled generally with dry air.
SACRIFICIAL ANODES
2.1
Attachment of anodes to the hull
2.1.1
This regulation is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/2.1.2.4 (based on DNV Rules
(January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3, Sec 7, B300 and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 2, 3.3 and 3.4).
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Cargo oil tanks
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 5 LIMIT STATES
GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Limit states
Definition
This regulation defines the limit states such that the definitions coincide with those in ISO
2394 (as amended).
1.1.2
Serviceability limit state
1.1.3
Ultimate limit state
1.1.4
Fatigue limit state
1.1.5
Accidental limit state
This regulation defines the limit states such that the definitions coincide with those in ISO
2394. The flooded condition is considered as accidental limit states like IACS UR S17 (Rev 8,
May 2010), S18 (Rev 8, May 2010) and S20 (Rev 5, May 2010).
1.2
Failure modes
1.2.1
1.2.2
Yielding
1.2.3
Plastic collapse
1.2.4
Buckling
1.2.5
Rupture
1.2.6
Brittle fracture
1.2.7
Fatigue cracking
JANUARY 2014
CRITERIA
2.1
General
2.1.1
The hull structure was classified into local structures considering local loads such as plates
and stiffeners, primary supporting structures taking up loads on structural bodies such as
girders, and the hull girder in which the entire hull structure is treated as a beam, for
studying the strength characteristics to be assessed in CSR. The structural assessment items
required for each structural category are shown in Table 2.
2.2
2.2.1
Serviceability limit states

Hull girder
This regulation gives the load level for the yielding check of the hull girder corresponding to
the serviceability limit state. The strength criterion is based on the working stress design
method for the stress obtained by the beam theory. This philosophy is the same of IACS UR
S11 (Rev 7, November 2010).
2.2.2
Plating
This regulation gives the load level for the yielding and buckling strength check for platings
constituting primary supporting members corresponding to the serviceability limit state. The
stress of platings constituting primary supporting members are obtained by the Finite
Element Analysis (FEA) based on the elastic theory. The strength criterion is based on the
working stress design method.
2.2.3
Stiffeners
This regulation gives the load level for the strength check for ordinary stiffener
corresponding to the serviceability limit state. The strength criterion is based on the working
stress design method for the stress of ordinary stiffeners obtained by the beam theory.
2.3
2.3.1
Ultimate limit states

Hull girder
This regulation gives the load level for the ultimate strength check of the hull girder
corresponding to the ultimate limit state. The strength criterion is based on the partial safety
factor design method.
2.3.2
Plating
This regulation gives the load level for the ultimate strength check of the platings
corresponding to the ultimate limit state. The strength criterion is based on the working
stress design method.
2.3.3
Stiffeners
This regulation gives the load level for the ultimate strength check of the ordinary stiffener
corresponding to the ultimate limit state. This strength check is included in the buckling
check of stiffeners.
JANUARY 2014
2.4
2.4.1
Fatigue limit state

Structural details
Fatigue strength of structural details such as connections of ordinary stiffeners and primary
supporting members is assessed based on the linear cumulative fatigue damage procedure
considering the cyclic loads during ships life. This regulation gives the reference loads level
for fatigue strength check.
For fatigue assessment, the expected load history needs to be defined. We assume that the
load history can be approximated by a two-parameter Weibull distribution. The parameters
are the scaling factor and the shape parameter. The probability level of 10-2 has been selected
for the determination of scaling factor (loads) as it has been identified as the most
contributing probability level to the fatigue damage. Refer to Ch 4, Sec 1.
2.5
2.5.1
Accidental limit state

Hull girder
2.5.2
Double bottom structure
2.5.3
Bulkhead structure
3
3.1
STRENGTH CHECK AGAINST IMPACT LOADS

General
3.1.1
Impact loads differ from general wave loads, and it is difficult to debate the load level of an
impact load. This regulation has been specified for general items, while only the concepts of
strength criteria used in the Rules have been given in [3.1.2].
3.1.2
This regulation has been specified for the concepts of strength criteria used in the Rules.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 6 STRUCTURAL DETAIL PRINCIPLES
APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
2.1
2.1.1
Structural continuity
General
Structural continuity is to be ensured and abrupt changes are to be avoided.
2.1.2
Longitudinal members
2.1.3
Primary supporting members
2.1.4
Stiffeners
2.1.5
Plating
When connecting plates of different thicknesses in the same plane, the regulation of not
permitting difference in thickness greater than 50% of the thickness of the thicker plate was
specified as a practical measure. If the difference in thickness is greater than 50%, an
intermediate plate has to be inserted, and the thicker plate is to be tapered to the thickness of
the thinner plate to maintain continuity.
2.1.6
Weld joints
2.2
2.2.1
Local reinforcements
Reinforcements at knuckles
The figure accompanying this text was selected, because it represents a typical knuckle found
on tankers. General text has been included to clarify that some knuckles, such as main deck
camber are, in general, exempted from the requirements of knuckle reinforcement because of
their configuration and the manner in which they are loads.
2.2.2
Reinforcement in way of attachments for permanent means of access
This is a general requirement to note that structural elements which have access cut outs
included in them are to be reinforced as necessary. Similarly attachment points for access
walkways, hand grabs, etc., are to be kept clear of stress concentration points. Where the
loads imposed on the structure are large then suitable reinforcement is to be provided.
2.2.3
Reinforcement of deck structure in way of concentrated loads
JANUARY 2014
2.2.4
Reinforcement by insert plates
2.3
Connection of longitudinal members not contributing to the hull girder

longitudinal strength
2.3.1
Where steels of different strengths are mixed in a hull structure, due consideration is to be
given to the stress in the lower tensile steel adjacent to higher tensile steel.
Where stiffeners of lower tensile steel are supported by primary supporting members of
higher tensile steel, due consideration is to be given to the stiffness of primary supporting
members and scantlings to avoid excessive stress in the stiffeners due to the deformation of
primary supporting members. Where primary supporting members are constructed of higher
strength steel, particular attention is to be paid to the design of the end bracket toes in order
to minimise stress concentrations.
Note: mild steel for the flat bar on the double bottom girder may be accepted provided that
the stress level due to hull girder bending in such flat bar is within the permissible level of
mild steel.
2.3.2
Precautions for treatment of connections of high tensile steel members to structural members
of lower strength were established referring to the regulations of various classification
societies. Members fitted to deck or bottom shell such as bilge keel and hatch-side coaming
are not installed as longitudinal strength members. However, since they are subjected to
longitudinal bending effects, they are required to be of materials with the same strength as
the materials of the deck and bottom shell.
When stiffeners not continuous in the longitudinal direction are connected to girders installed
as hatch coamings or longitudinal strength members such as stiffeners sniped at both ends
and fitted to prevent buckling, the material of the stiffeners should have the same strength as
the member to which they are fitted.
Note: mild steel for the flat bar on the double bottom girder may be accepted provided that
the stress level due to hull girder bending in such flat bar is within the permissible level of
mild steel.
STIFFENERS
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
Bracketed end connections
3.2.1
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July2010 (based on ABS Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 2, Sec 5, 1.5 and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 10, 3.3.1 and 3.5.1). The scantlings
JANUARY 2014
formulas for the brackets are based on DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C200. The
formulas are changed to net scantlings and to a ratio of yield stress instead of material factor
in order to be in line with CSR philosophy.
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Net web thickness
The scantlings formulas for the brackets are based on CSR OT, July 2010 (based on DNV
Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C200). The formulas are changed to net scantlings and
to a ratio of yield stress instead of material factor in order to be in line with CSR OT
philosophy.
3.2.5
Brackets at the ends of non-continuous stiffeners
The scantlings formulas for the brackets are based on CSR OT, July 2010 (based on DNV
Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C200). The formulas are changed to net scantlings and
to a ratio of yield stress instead of material factor in order to be in line with CSR OT
philosophy. Figure 2 of the Rules clarifies the application of the requirements, based on LR
and DNV practices.
3.2.6
Brackets with different arm lengths
3.2.7
Edge stiffening of bracket
3.3
Bracketless connections
3.3.1
3.4
Sniped ends
3.4.1
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July 2010 (based on DNV Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C204 and ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 2, 15). The equation is the
same as the one presently used in the DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C204, with
the DNV corrosion addition, tk, removed.
3.4.2
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July 2010 (based on DNV Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C204 and ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 2, 15).
JANUARY 2014
PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS (PSM)
4.1
General
4.1.1
This regulation is specified for the case where the requirement of arrangement of primary
supporting members specified in the rules differs from the actual arrangement of primary
supporting members.
4.2
Web stiffening arrangement
4.2.1
4.3
Tripping bracket arrangement
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
Arm length
The requirements are in accordance CSR BC, July 2010 (based on Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 3, 4.7.6 of the
BV Rules, January 2013).
4.4
End connections
4.4.1
General
4.4.2
Scantling of end brackets
The principles of the requirement are based on the fact that the connection with bracket
cannot be weaker than the PSM itself. The formulae for the bracket arms are empirical
formulae.
4.4.3
Arrangement of end brackets
The requirements are in accordance CSR BC, July 2010 (based on Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 3, 4.4 of the
BV Rules (January 2013) and Pt C, 1.1.14 of NK Rules, January 2013).
INTERSECTION OF STIFFENERS AND PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS
5.1
Cut-outs
5.1.1
JANUARY 2014
5.1.2
5.1.3
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July 2010 (based on LR Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 10, 5.2.1).
5.1.4
5.1.5
The objective of the requirement on soft heels for PSM web stiffeners is to reduce the local
stress at the connection of the longitudinal to the web stiffener and is an implicit fatigue
control. Ships in operation service records show problems with cracks in the coating and web
stiffener itself at these connections. The problem is a combination of high and low cycle
fatigue with the high cycle fatigue being the dominant factor for the side shell connections
while the low cycle fatigue is the critical effect for the bottom and inner bottom longitudinals.
The latter is a result of the loading and unloading of the vessel which gives high stress and
strain at the heel of the web stiffener.
By providing a keyhole at the heel of the web-stiffener the local stress and strain at this
location is significantly reduced and hence the probability of experiencing cracks in the web
stiffener or coating is significantly reduced. The requirement to provide a keyhole only
applies to relatively highly stressed members, which have been defined here as 80% of the
permissible stress. Connections with a double side bracket and connections at watertight
bulkheads and where the primary support member web is welded to the stiffener face plate
are considered to have local stresses at the heel of the web stiffener such that the keyhole is
not required.
5.1.6
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July 2010 (based on LR Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 10, 5.2.2).
5.2
Connection of stiffeners to PSM
5.2.1
The first sentence clarifies the application of requirements [5.2.2] to [5.2.4].
The requirements [5.2.2] and [5.2.3] are applicable to PSM in case of lateral pressure inclusive
the sloshing pressure, while [5.2.4] is applicable to bottom slamming or bow impact loads but
not to the sloshing pressure loads.
5.2.2
The requirements are derived from LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 10, 5.2.3 to 5.2.15. The
details of these requirements have been modified to take account of the CSR Rule
development philosophy, in terms of net thickness, loads and acceptance criteria.
5.2.3
5.2.4
JANUARY 2014
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
OPENINGS
6.1
Openings and scallops in stiffeners
6.1.1
The figures are copied from a general ship building standard in order to show some example
of common shapes of scallops. The range of 0.5 to 1.0 for the ratio of a/b is based on
experience and generally accepted practice.
6.1.2
The basis of these requirements is LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 10, 5.3.3. Text has been
added to limit the 200mm distance to a distance measured along the stiffener towards midspan and to limit the distance to 50mm in the opposite direction. Also, the requirement has
been modified to permit holes and scallops at locations of known low shear stress.
6.1.3
The special requirements are in accordance with LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 10, 5.3.3.
Text has been added to clarify what is meant by closely spaced and to also make this
requirement applicable to stiffeners that are not longitudinal strength members, consistent
with present practice.
6.2
6.2.1
Openings in primary supporting members

General
6.2.2
Manholes and lightening holes
The requirements are in accordance CSR OT, July 2010 (based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt
3, Ch 10, 4.6.1 for single skin and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 1, 8.2.8 and Pt 4, Ch 9, 9.3.7
for double skin).
6.2.3
Reinforcements around openings
The requirements are in accordance with DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C606.
The criteria have been updated to suit the CSR acceptance criteria sets. Similar requirements
are contained in the ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, 11.17. When slots and
JANUARY 2014
lightening holes are cut in transverses, webs, floors, stringers and girders, they are to be kept
well clear of other openings. The slots are to be neatly cut and well rounded.
Lightening holes are to be located midway between the slots and at about one-third of the
depth of the web from the shell, deck or bulkhead. Their diameters are not to exceed onethird the depth of the web. In general, lightening holes are not to be cut in those areas of webs,
floors, stringers, girders, and transverses where the shear stresses are high. The equivalent
net shear sectional area approach is based on C15.2.3 of NK Guidance and Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 3,
4.6.5 of the BV Rules (January 2013).
6.3
Openings in the strength deck
6.3.1
General
6.3.2
Small opening location
This article is based on CSR BC, July 2010 (based on BV Rules (January 2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 6,
6.1).
DOUBLE BOTTOM STRUCTURE
7.1
7.1.1
General
Framing system
It is specified that the longitudinal framing system is mandatory for ships of length 120m and
greater.
7.1.2
Variation in height of double bottom
7.1.3
Breadth of inner bottom
7.1.4
Drainage of tank top
7.1.5
Striking plate
7.1.6
Duct keel
The arrangement of girder plating was revised, when developing CSR BC, referring to the
actual arrangements in existing ships.
7.2
Keel plate
7.2.1
The width of one strake of the keel plate has been specified referring to the regulations of
shear strake and bilge strake in Pt C, 1.1.11 of NK Rules (January 2013).
JANUARY 2014
7.3
7.3.1
Girders
Centre girder
7.3.2
Side girders
7.4
7.4.1
Floors
Web stiffeners
7.5
7.5.1
Bilge keel
Material
Since a large number of comments from shipowners have been received about bilge keel and
prevention of damage to its ends, it was decided that the material of the bilge keel should
have the same strength as the bilge strake. Similar to long hatch side coamings of 0.15L
specified in the IACS UR, S6 (Rev 6, May 2010), if the length of the bilge keel is greater than
0.15L, the grade material of the bilge keel and of the ground bar is required to be the same as
that of the bilge strake.
7.5.2
Design
The purpose of these requirements is to ensure that failure of the bilge keel system does not
induce damage to the hull structure itself.
7.5.3
Ground bars
The butt weld of the ground bar is to be made with removable backing strip for avoiding
cracking inside the side shell due to root failure. The ground bar and the bilge keel butt welds
are not to be in the same transverse plan for avoiding stress concentration leading to cracks.
7.5.4
End details
The requirements are based on CSR OT, July 2010 (based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3,
Ch 10, 5.6).
7.6
7.6.1
Docking
General
Docking arrangement has never been a class item and should continue to be so, for the simple
reason that many aspects are not beyond verification by the Surveyor. However, a docking
plan is required for large vessels by each of the three societies. Since structural arrangement
in some instances is dependent upon the docking arrangement, the builder is held
responsible to furnish the vessel a docking plan appropriate to the particular vessel; but, the
majority of its contents will be outside the scope of classification, its approval by the society is
not required.
7.6.2
Docking brackets
JANUARY 2014
DOUBLE SIDE STRUCTURE
8.1
General
8.1.1
8.1.2
If the double side skin part is to be used as a void space, and cargo of high density is to be
carried in the cargo holds, then local loads are not presumed to act on the side structure of the
cargo hold on the double skin side. Even in such cases, appropriate thickness exceeding the
minimum thickness is considered necessary. As a conclusion, even if the double skin side
part is a void space, it is treated as a ballast tank and assessment of local strength is specified.
Corrosion addition for the actual service environment, that is, void space, is also specified.
8.2
Structural arrangement
8.2.1
8.2.2
Transverse stiffeners
8.2.3
Longitudinal stiffeners
8.2.4
Sheer strake
Requirement on sheer strake width comes from IACS UR S6 (Rev 6, May 2010).
8.2.5
Plating connection
In principle, continuity of structure similar to that in double bottom structure has been
specified. Without hopper plating, the stress concentration is to be minimised and detail
needs to comply with yielding and fatigue criteria. In addition no scallop is allowed in way of
the knuckle.
DECK STRUCTURE
9.1
9.1.1
Framing system
9.1.2
Stringer plate
Requirement on sheer strake width comes from IACS UR S6 (Rev 6, May 2010).
9.1.3
Connection of deckhouses and superstructures
JANUARY 2014
9.2
Deck scantlings
9.2.1
The requirements are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
10 BULKHEAD STRUCTURE
10.1 Application
10.1.1
10.2 General
10.2.1
This paragraph allows tapering of vertical primary supporting members on bulkhead to take
into account the fact that generally the lateral loads considered in the lower part of the
bulkhead are greater than the loads on the upper part of the bulkhead.
10.2.2
Reinforcement is to be provided for avoiding buckling in way of the girder and to have a
smooth load transmission.
10.2.3
Requirement is provided for preventing buckling in way of the girder.
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.3 Plane bulkheads

10.3.1 General
10.3.2 End connection of stiffeners

10.3.3 Sniped end of stiffener

This paragraph aims to limit the use of sniped end stiffeners on bulkheads subjected to
hydrostatic pressure.
10.4 Corrugated bulkheads

10.4.1 General
CSR requires that strength assessment of primary supporting members to be performed
based on the direct strength calculation, and also requires hull girder ultimate strength and
fatigue strength assessment to be performed for ships of length 150m and greater. This
regulation also covers strength requirements during flooding of IACS UR S17 (Rev 8, May
JANUARY 2014
2010), S18 (Rev 8, May 2010), S20 (Rev 5, May 2010), and also IACS UR S25 (which is no more
in force) specified for ships of 150m and greater. These applications are considered for
consistent treatment. The treatment of stools in corrugated bulkheads considering
construction that is more robust than used currently, has been made more stringent by
application of the regulations for ships of length 190m and greater in IACS UR S18 (Rev 8,
May 2010) to ships of length 150m and greater.
10.4.2 Construction
In principle, this regulation is based on IACS UR S18 (Rev 8, May 2010).
10.4.3 Corrugated bulkhead depth

This requirements is based on the ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, 17.5.1 (for the
oil tanker part) and provide a minimum stiffness requirement.
10.4.4 Actual section modulus of corrugations

10.4.5 Span of corrugations

10.4.6 Structural arrangements

10.4.7 Bulkhead end supports

10.4.8 Bulkhead stools

10.4.9 Lower stool

10.4.10 Upper stool

10.5 Non-tight bulkheads

10.5.1 General
10.5.2 Non-tight bulkheads not acting as pillars

This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 3, Sec 6, 10.5.1 (based on 4.1.1, Sec 7, Ch
4, Pt B of the BV Rules, January 2013).
10.5.3 Non-tight bulkheads acting as pillars

This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 3, Sec 6, 10.5.2 (based on 4.2, Sec 7, Ch 4,
Pt B of the BV Rules, January 2013).
JANUARY 2014
10.6 Watertight bulkheads of trunks and tunnels

10.6.1
This regulation is in accordance with a part of the Ch II-1, Reg 19 of the SOLAS (as amended).
11 PILLARS
11.1 General
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
Pillars in tanks are to be of solid or open type section to avoid problems that could occur in
case of hollow type sections, such as explosive gas being trapped inside the pillar, or internal
corrosion not detectable from visual inspections, etc.
11.2 Connections
11.2.1
This article is based on BV Rules (January 2013), Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 6, 4.2.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 7 STRUCTURAL IDEALISATION
STRUCTURAL IDEALISATION OF STIFFENERS AND PRIMARY SUPPORTING

MEMBERS
1.1
1.1.1
Effective spans
General
1.1.2
Effective bending span of stiffeners
The reason why the span is reduced in way of brackets is that they provide a significant
increase of section modulus/inertia compared to the cross section of the stiffener itself which
results in a different load transfer than for a stiffener without brackets. The pressure applied
to the stiffener in way of the stiffer ends (when bracket are fitted) will be, to a larger degree,
transferred straight the support and not to be distributed to the two ends of the stiffener.
This in effect results in smaller bending moment in the stiffener outside the bracket area than
is found for the configuration without brackets and equal distance between supports.
When the brackets are fitted to the attached plating on the side opposite to that of the
stiffener the change in section modulus/inertia is not significant as the added area is close to
neutral axis and hence the stiffness effect is not pronounced and no reduction is given in the
span length. In case of very large brackets on the attached plate side, typically seen for
primary support members, the size of such brackets are taken into account in the definition
of the effective bending span.
The span definition in case of brackets is based on ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4,
Figure 5. No reduction in bending span is given in case of web stiffeners without a backing
bracket as mentioned in the Rules as this will provide little or no rotational support for the
passing longitudinal. As the connection will not be symmetric at the primary supporting
member the passing stiffener will experience a slight rotation at the support. This rotation
effectively gives an increase to the bending moment at the heel of the web stiffener. Based on
this no reduction to the span length is given. If a backing bracket is fitted the end connection
will be more symmetric and will not rotate and hence the web stiffener may be assumed
effective even though it is sniped at the end not attached to the stiffener in question.
For single skin structures, FE analysis has shown that the tripping bracket without backing
has very little effect on the effective bending span. The reason is that that the tripping bracket
will rotate as the structure is non-symmetric and there is no adjoining structure to restrict the
rotation. The effect of the rotation is that the bending moment is slightly reduced at the toe of
the tripping bracket but increased at the heel of the tripping bracket. As an alternative to
using a reduced span with a correction for the rotation the rules require that the full span be
used for the calculations.
It is noted that soft toe bracket gives significantly lower stresses compared to a straight type
bracket. This is however not due to the effect on the span but on the stress concentration
around at the termination of the bracket.
1.1.3
Effective shear span of stiffeners
The reason why the shear and bending span are different is because for the shear loads, the
bracket has an immediate and significant effect on the shear area which more than
compensates for the increase in shear load towards the end support. Hence verification of the
shear load at the end of the bracket is normally acceptable (provided the bracket is not too
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 3, SEC 7/ PAGE 1
long and flat, hence the 1:1.5 bracket angle requirement). For the bending moments, over the
first portion of the bracket, the bending moment is increasing more than the increase in
section modulus of the beam including the bracket. At about the bracket half depth position,
then the section modulus including the bracket has increased to such an extent that it is able
to nullify the increase in bending moment and hence able to provide sufficient end rotation
support.
The bracket has an immediate effect due to increase in shear area versus increase in shear
force. The increase in shear area is independent of which side of the stiffener (face plate or
attached plate) the bracket is fitted and hence reduction is given also for brackets fitted on
the side of the attached plating.
The minimum reduction in effective shear span is given to account for the pressure that is
not transferred to the support through shear in the stiffener but that is transferred directly to
the short edge of the panel. For a plate subject to pressure the load is transferred to the
closest support. This effectively gives constant shear force along the last s/2 of the stiffener
as the pressure applied to the plating at the last s/2 is transferred directly to the short edge
which typically is the primary support member.
For single skin structures FE analysis has shown that the tripping bracket has very little
effect on the effective shear span. The reason is that that the tripping bracket will rotate as
the structure is non-symmetric and there is no adjoining structure to restrict the rotation. The
effect of the rotation is that the shear force will be slightly reduced at the stiffener end in way
of toe of the tripping bracket but increased at the stiffener end in way of heel of the tripping
bracket. As an alternative to using a reduced span with a correction for the rotation the rules
require that the full span be used for the calculations. The span definition in case of brackets
is based on ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, Figure 7.
1.1.4
Effect of hull form shape on span of stiffeners
The definition of the length of the stiffener is in accordance with DNV Rules (January 2013),
Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 6, A201 and ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, 7.5. For a stiffener in
bending the smallest section modulus is typically at the face plate (free edge for flat bar) of
the stiffener. Consequently, the length is measured along the flange/free edge of the stiffener.
Plates and stiffeners in ship structures are typically subject to pressures acting normal to the
plate. When assessing curved plates and stiffeners the pressure is not corrected for the
curvature effect but the length of the stiffener is corrected. It can be demonstrated that the
integration of the pressure along the curved plate gives the same total force as the
application of the pressure along the chord. The member is in other words assessed based on
the projected length.
1.1.5
Effective span of stiffeners supported by struts
For the treatment of struts between primary supporting members (floors) in a double bottom
structure, the regulation of Pt B, Ch 4, Sec 3, 3.2.2 of the BV Rules (January 2013) has been
incorporated. For installing a strut, the demands of ship owners has been considered, and
provision of struts is not approved in ships of length 120m and greater mainly due to the risk
of puncture of the hull/double hull by the struts in case of damage.
1.1.6
Effective bending span of primary supporting members
The definition of bending span of primary support members is based on ABS Rules (January
2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, Figure 8. The definition of the span is also related to how the member
is assessed. For a primary supporting member subject to pressure loads the bending moment
JANUARY 2014
will increase towards the ends of the member. Where brackets are fitted the section modulus
of a cross section will also increase when inside of the toe of the bracket.
The objective of the Rule is to ensure that for any cross section along the length of the PSM
that the capacity is greater than the acting load response, e.g. section modulus versus
bending moment. In order to simplify the calculations, the CSR Rules require that the section
modulus clear of the bracket is assessed against the bending moment at the end of the
effective span. In case of a continuous face plate the section modulus increases more quickly
than for brackets without continuous face plate and this is reflected in the definition of the
span.
1.1.7
Effective shear span of primary supporting members
The definition of shear span of primary support members is based on ABS Rules (January
2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 4, Figure 7.
1.1.8
Effective brackets definition
The reason why the shear and bending span are different is because for the shear loads, the
bracket has an immediate and significant effect on the shear area which more than
compensates for the increase in shear load towards the end support. Hence verification of the
shear load at the end of the bracket is normally acceptable (provided the bracket is not too
long and flat, hence the 1:1.5 bracket angle requirement). The 1:1.5 limits for the effective
bracket defines the applicability of the assumption related to increase of section modulus
versus increase of bending moment.
1.2
1.2.1
Spacing and load supporting breadth

Stiffeners
1.2.2
1.2.3
Spacing of curved plating
1.3
1.3.1
Effective breadth
Stiffeners
To assess the bending strength of stiffeners, the sectional characteristics of stiffeners should
be assessed. In this case, the effective width of the plating attached to the stiffener needs to
be considered. The regulation of Pt C, 1.1.13-3 of NK Rules (January 2013), which gives a
simple index based on Shade's theory, is adopted for the effective width of plating.
The 600mm limit for the attached plating for thickness less than 8mm is based on LR Rules
(January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3, Sec 3. The associated limit thickness of 8mm has been adjusted
compared to the limit given in the source Rules to account for the net thickness concept of
the CSR Rules.
1.3.2
The definition of effective breadth of attached plate flanges of primary supporting members
for strength evaluation is based on the theoretical background published by Henry Schade
"The effective breadth of stiffened plating under bending loads", SNAME Transactions, Vol.
JANUARY 2014
59, 1951, and by G. Vedeler, DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C402. The
theoretical formulation has been verified by FE analysis.
The effective breadth of attached plating, beff in m, for calculating the section modulus
and/or moment of inertia of a primary supporting member is to be obtained from the
following formula:
1.3.3
Effective area of curved face plate and attached plating of primary

supporting members
The definition of effective area of curved face plates/attached plating of primary support
members is based on DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C406-7.The theoretical
background is based on a paper by R.W. Westrup and P. Silver: Some Effects of Curvature
on Frames, Aero/Space Sciences, September 1958.
The formula represents the efficiency of a curved faceplate in terms of bending moment. The
efficiency is given as a fraction of the area of the face plate. The reason for the correction is
that a curvature gives a change of force direction. The moment capacity of a member with
curved face plate is given by its possibility to transfer the change in shear to the face plate.
The wider a curved face plate is the less efficient the section becomes. Similarly a small
radius will given a larger change in force and hence less efficiency.
1.4
1.4.1
Geometrical properties of stiffeners and primary supporting members

Stiffener profile with a bulb section
Stiffeners with bulb section are treated as equivalent sections, the simplified formulae that
give the equivalent section modulus, section area, and so on were incorporated from Pt B,
Ch 4, Sec 3, 3.1.2 of the BV Rules (January 2013).
1.4.2
Net elastic shear area of stiffeners
The net elastic shear area definition is based on CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 4/2.4.2.1.
1.4.3
Effective shear depth of stiffeners
The effective shear depth is based on CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 4/2.4.2.2.
1.4.4
Elastic net section modulus of stiffeners
The elastic net section modulus is based on CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 4/2.4.2.3.
1.4.5
Effective net plastic shear area of stiffeners
The elastic net shear area is equal to the plastic net shear area for a stiffener.
1.4.6
Effective net plastic section modulus of stiffeners
The bf-gr and the tf-gr in Table 1 and Table 2 of the Rules are given in order that the net plastic
section modulus of bulb profiles can be determined with consideration of the effect of the
corrosion deduction (tc) and the fact that the web thickness of HP bulbs of given height is not
a fixed number.
JANUARY 2014
1.4.7
Primary supporting member web not perpendicular to attached plating
Same as [1.4.4] for stiffeners, except that the section modulus is to be directly calculated for
any angle less than 75.
1.4.8
Shear area of primary supporting members with web openings
This requirement explains how to consider the web height effective for member shear
strength in case of opening in web near the location of the shear strength assessment.
PLATES
2.1
Idealisation of EPP
2.1.1
EPP
2.1.2
Strake required thickness
2.1.3
2.2
Load calculation point
2.2.1
Yielding
2.2.2
Buckling
STIFFENERS
3.1
Reference point
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1

LCP for Pressure
3.2.2
LCP for hull girder bending stress
3.2.3
Non-horizontal stiffeners
JANUARY 2014
PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS
4.1
4.1.1
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
LOADS
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Introduction
1 General
SECTION 2
Dynamic Load Cases
1 General
2 Dynamic Load Cases for Strength Assessment
3 Dynamic Load Cases for Fatigue Assessment
SECTION 3
Ship Motions and Accelerations
1 General
2 Ship Motions and Accelerations
3 Accelerations at any Position
SECTION 4
Hull Girder Loads
1 Application
2 Vertical Still Water Hull Girder Loads
3 Dynamic Hull Girder Loads
SECTION 5
External Loads
1 Sea Pressure
2 External Pressures on Exposed Decks
3 External Impact Pressures for the Bow Area
4 External Pressures on Superstructure and Deckhouses
5 External Pressures on Hatch Covers
SECTION 6
Internal Loads
1 Pressures Due to Liquids

2 Pressures and Forces Due to Dry Bulk Cargo
3 Pressures and Forces Due to Dry Bulk Cargoes in Flooded Conditions
4 Steel Coil Loads in Cargo Holds of Bulk Carriers
5 Loads on Non-Exposed Decks and Platforms
6 Sloshing Pressures in Tanks
7 Design Pressure For Tank Testing
SECTION 7
Design Load Scenarios
1 General
2 Design Load Scenarios for Strength Assessment
3 Design Load Scenarios for Fatigue Assessment
SECTION 8
Loading Conditions
1 Application
2 Common Design Loading Conditions
3 Oil Tankers
4 Bulk Carriers
5 Standard Loading Conditions for Fatigue Assessment
APPENDIX 1
Hold Mass Curves
1 General
2 Maximum and Minimum Masses of Cargo in Each Hold
3 Maximum and Minimum Masses of Cargo of Two Adjacent Holds
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 1 INTRODUCTION
GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Application
Scope
1.1.2
Equivalent Design Wave EDW
An EDW is defined as a regular wave that reproduces the same response value as the
reference design value, hence the envelope value at a certain probability level of a maximised
response.
The EDW is defined by its period, amplitude and heading. The wave period (T0) and heading
(0) are defined based on the peak value of the Response Amplitude Operator (RAO) of the
maximised response.
Figure 1:
Definition of EDW heading and period
The amplitude (AEDW) is defined by the ratio between the long term value of the response at a
certain probability level and the peak of the RAO given at the period T0 and for the heading
0.
Longterm value
AEDW =
RAO(T0 , 0 )
By applying the method above described, an EDW is derived for each maximised response,
that we call dominant load. The way the other responses, or subjected loads, are combined
with the maximised load under the EDW is obtained by the load combination factors (LCFs).
The load combination factor Cj,i (also called superimposition ratio) for a given subjected load
JANUARY 2014
can be determined for each equivalent design using the response functions and long term
predictions of the dominant load component by the following equation.
RAO j ( Ti , i )
A
C j , i = EDW i
cos{ j ( Ti , i ) i ( Ti , i )}
AEDW j RAO j max
where,
i
j
AEDW i
AEDW j
i(Ti,i)
j(Ti,i)
RAOj(Ti, i)
RAOj max
Index used for the dominant load.

Index used for the subjected load.
Amplitude of EDW of the i-th dominant load component.
Amplitude of EDW of the j-th subject load component.
RAO phase angle of the dominant load component under the i-th EDW.
RAO phase angle of the subjected load component under the i-th EDW.
Amplitude value of the RAO of the subjected load component under the i-th
EDW.
Maximum amplitude of the RAO of the subjected load component.
The LCFs are defined for the hull girder loads and acceleration components. For the external
pressure, the distribution obtained directly for the EDW is defined. Therefore, the LCFs are
not necessary for the external pressure or implicitly taken into account on the formulations.
1.1.3
Probability level for strength and fatigue assessments
The wording strength assessment is used for all strength criteria excluding fatigue. The
strength assessments to be carried out are:
Extreme operational at sea: associated to the sea loads encountered by the ship once
in her lifetime (25 years). It corresponds to a probability of exceedance of the loads of
approximately 10-8.
Ballast water exchange: associated sea loads encountered by the ship once in a year
(probability factor of 0.8). This probability factor accounts for the fact that the ship
will not exchange ballast water in very severe (extreme) weather conditions.
Flooding conditions: associated to a joint probability factor of 0.8.
Harbour conditions: associated to a joint probability factor of 0.4 that accounts for the
probability of the vessel of being in harbour and for the reduction on wave properties
comparing to the North Atlantic scatter diagram used for the seagoing conditions.
The wording fatigue assessment is used for the fatigue criteria. The sea loads used for
fatigue assessment are defined at the representative level of probability at 10-2. In fact, the
loads at 10-2 are used as the scaling factor of the two-parameter Weibull distribution that
together with the shape parameter and the mean period will be used to define the expected
load history.
1.1.4
Dynamic load components
Technical Background is not considered necessary.
1.1.5
Loads for strength assessment
The sea loads for strength assessment have been derived based on the following assumptions:
A representation of the North Atlantic wave environment. The North Atlantic scatter
diagram is given in IACS Rec 34 (Corr. 1, November 2001).
Pierson-Moskowitz wave spectrum.
Angular spreading of the wave energy given by the function cos.
Equal heading probability.
3D linear with 30 degrees step of ship/wave heading.
JANUARY 2014
Design life of 25 years.

Speed of 5 knots.
The 5 knots speed has been considered, as tankers and bulk carriers are full-form ships with
very low manoeuvring speed in heavy weather. The following graph shows an example of
the speed reduction with respect to wave height.
Figure 2:
Speed reduction with respect to wave height
For scantling requirements and strength assessment, correction factors to account for nonlinear wave effects are applied to the linear loads.
Each design load scenario is composed of the static loads and the dynamic loads when
applicable. The EDW approach has been used for the setting of the dynamic loads including
hull girder loads, motions, accelerations and external dynamic pressures.
1.1.6
Loads for fatigue assessment
For fatigue assessment, the expected load history needs to be defined. We assume that the
load history can be approximated by a two-parameter Weibull distribution. The parameters
are the scaling factor and the shape parameter. The probability level of 10-2 has been selected
for the determination of scaling factor (loads) as it has been identified as the most
contributing probability level to the fatigue damage.
The definition of the loads at 10-2 probability level is also based on the EDW approach. The
graph below provides an example of the contribution to the fatigue damage of a certain
structural element. Calculations performed for different structural elements and SN curves
have confirmed the results. It can be observed that almost the total damage is obtained up to
the probability level of 10-5. However, the most contributing probability level is around 10-2.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 3:
1.E-10
Contribution of fatigue damage with respect to probability level

1.E-09
1.E-08
1.E-07
1.E-06
1.E-05
1.E-04
1.E-03
1.E-02
1.E-01
1.E+00
0.06
1.00
0.90
Contribution to total damage

0.05
Cumulative contribution
0.80
0.70
0.04
0.60
0.03
0.50
0.40
0.02
0.30
0.20
0.01
0.10
0.00
0.00
Log(p)
In theory, any probability could be chosen if the shape parameter is precise enough.
However, if the value that contributes the most to the fatigue damage is better approached,
the errors made in the assumption of the shape parameter have less impact on the total
fatigue damage, and more than that, it is demonstrated that the impact is minor. Therefore,
the shape parameter can be kept constant (e.g. equal to 1.0) irrespectively to the dynamic
load case. The graph below shows the influence of the shape parameter on the fatigue life for
different choices of scaling factor. It can be observed that the variation of fatigue life is minor
for shape parameter varying from 0.8 to 1.2 if the scaling factor is chosen at 10-2 probability
level.
Figure 4:
Influence of shape parameter on fatigue life
200%
180%
1E-01
160%
1E-02
Fatigue life
140%
1E-03
120%
1E-04
100%
1E-05
80%
1E-06
60%
1E-07
40%
1E-08
20%
0%
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
Weibull shape parameter
A probability factor is used to bring down the loads defined at the probability level at 10-8 to
the 10-2 probability level. This probability factor accounts for the speed changing from 5knots
for 10-8 to 75% of service speed at 10-2, which is considered as a mean speed during the ship
JANUARY 2014
life. Mathematically, the probability factor corresponds to the ratio between the long term
value at 10-2 and the long term value at 10-8.
fp =
(
(
Longterm value 10 8
Longterm value 10 2
1.2
1.2.1
)
)
Definitions
Coordinate system
1.2.2
Sign convention for ship motions
1.2.3
Sign convention for hull girder loads
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 2 DYNAMIC LOAD CASES
Symbols
flp
: Factor applied to change the sign of the LCFs of vertical wave shear force from the
aft to the fore part of the ship.
GENERAL
1.1
Definition of dynamic load cases
1.1.1
Structural analyses of double hull oil tankers and bulk carriers have been carried out in order
to identify which EDWs were critical for the structure. Therefore, only the following EDWs
have been selected.
Table 1:
EDW
HSM
HSA
FSM
BSR
BSP
OST
OSA
1.2
Definition of dynamic load cases
(Design wave encountering angles)

180 deg (head sea, the wave comes from bow)
180 deg (head sea, the wave comes from bow)
0 deg (following sea, the wave comes from stern)
90/270 deg (beam sea, the wave comes from portside/starboard
90/270 deg (beam sea, the wave comes from portside/starboard
60/300 deg (Oblique sea, the wave comes from stern of portside/starboard)
120/240 deg (Oblique sea, the wave comes from bow of portside/starboard)
Application
1.2.1
DYNAMIC LOAD CASES FOR STRENGTH ASSESSMENT
2.1
Description of dynamic load cases
2.1.1
Table 1 to Table 3 provide a description of the simultaneous response of the ship under each
EDW.
2.2
Load combination factors
2.2.1
The way the other responses, or subjected loads, are combined with the maximised load
under the EDW is obtained by the load combination factors (LCFs). For further information,
refer to Sec 1, [1.1.2].
The load combination factors have been derived through direct analysis for a significant
number of oil tankers and bulk carriers covering ballast, full load and intermediate loading
conditions.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 2 DYNAMIC LOAD CASES
DYNAMIC LOAD CASES FOR FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
3.1
Description of dynamic load cases
3.1.1
The load components that are maximised for the strength analyse are exactly the same load
components that are maximised for fatigue analyse. However, due to speed effects, the EDW
that maximises the vertical acceleration is the same EDW that maximises the vertical wave
bending moment. Therefore, the load cases HSA and OSA were eliminated as they were
redundant with load case HSM.
The EDWs for fatigue lead to long term value corresponding to 10-2 probability level. Table 7
to Table 9 provide a description of the simultaneous response of the ship under each EDW.
3.2
Load combination factors
3.2.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 3 SHIP MOTIONS AND ACCELERATIONS
Symbols
a0
: The common acceleration parameter is a basic vertical acceleration parameter

representing surge, sway and heave motions.
: The vertical rotational centre is assumed to be the smaller of D/2 and (D/4 + TLC/2),
which is an approximation of the vertical centre of gravity of the ship.
GENERAL
1.1
Definition
1.1.1
Ship motions and accelerations are assumed to vary periodically. The amplitude of ship
motions and accelerations calculated from the formulae in this section is assumed as half the
value from the peak to the trough.
SHIP MOTIONS AND ACCELERATIONS
2.1
Ship motions
2.1.1
Roll motion
The roll period T is the natural period of roll estimated as follows:

T = 2
(k
+ Ar )
g GM
where,
kr
Roll gyration radius.
Displacement of the vessel.

Ar
Added mass due to roll.
GM
Transverse metacentric height.
By assuming that the roll added mass is approximately 30% of the roll inertia, and replacing
Ar by (0.3 kr2 ) in the above equation, the Rules equation can be easily derived.
The values of gyration radius of roll kr and transverse metacentric height GM are basically
the values from the Loading Manual corresponding to the considered loading condition. If
these values have been derived during the initial design stage, then the values shown in
Table 1 for oil tankers or Table 2 for bulk carriers are be used.
The values of kr, GM in the intact condition are different from those in flooded condition.
However, it is difficult to develop the simplified formulae of GM for flooded conditions.
Considering that the effect to the roll value due the difference between GM in intact and
flooded conditions will be very small, GM in the intact condition is used for the
corresponding flooded condition.
An adjustment factor fp is used to change the probability level of the response taking account
of the appropriate design load scenario. For fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for
speed effects.
JANUARY 2014
2.1.2
Pitch motion
The pitch period T corresponds to the period for which the pitch response function RAO is
maximised due to the maximisation of the pitch excitation moment. The speed effect on pitch
period is considered negligible.
The regular wave length at which the pitch motion response function becomes maximum is
practically the same as the regular wave length at which the vertical wave bending moment
amidships becomes maximum.
The pitch angle depends on the speed of the vessel, or, more consistently, with the Froude
number. For strength evaluation, V is taken equal to 5 knots (2.57 m/s).
V
2.57
=
for strength evaluation.
gL
gL
Fn =
V is fixed in the pitch angle formulation as the probability factor fp already includes the speed
effects.
An adjustment factor fp is used to change the probability level of the response taking account
of the appropriate design load scenario. For fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for
speed effects.
2.2
Ship accelerations at the centre of gravity
2.2.1
Surge acceleration
2.2.2
Sway acceleration
2.2.3
Heave acceleration
2.2.4
Roll acceleration
2.2.5
Pitch acceleration
The speed effects on pitch acceleration are not the same as for pitch motion. The pitch
acceleration is considered to increase proportionally to a factor equal to ( 1.2Fn + 1.0 ) . In the
same way as for pitch motion, the vessel speed was set to 2.57 m/s (5knots) in the Rules
formula as the speed effects are already taken into account in the fp value.
ACCELERATIONS AT ANY POSITION
3.1
General
3.1.1
Expressions for accelerations along body-fixed x-axis (longitudinal), y-axis (transverse) and
z-axis (vertical) are given. The accelerations are combinations of the basic rigid body motion
accelerations in all six degrees of freedom expressed at the centre of gravity of the ship. The
JANUARY 2014
accelerations are defined with respect to the ship fixed coordinate system; hence they include
the roll and pitch static components.
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
Accelerations for dynamic load cases

General
The expressions correspond to a snapshot of the accelerations under the selected EDW load
cases. The load combination factors should be applied to the basic acceleration components
which are combined considering the rigid body motions.
3.2.2
Longitudinal acceleration
3.2.3
Transverse acceleration
3.2.4
Vertical acceleration
3.3
Envelope accelerations
The envelope accelerations expressions predict the longitudinal, transverse and vertical
accelerations at the probability level corresponding to each design load scenario. The
probability factors are included in the calculation of the basic acceleration components.
3.3.1
Longitudinal acceleration
The envelope of longitudinal acceleration is contributed by the surge, pitch and yaw
acceleration. The longitudinal acceleration is constant along the ships length, assuming that
the yaw acceleration is negligible. The yaw term is therefore not included in the expression.
The static component due to pitch motion is included.
The pitch and surge accelerations are assumed to be statistically independent for larger ships.
However for shorter ships, the accelerations start cancelling each other. A factor of L/325 to
account for this is included.
3.3.2
Transverse acceleration
The envelope of transverse acceleration is contributed by the sway, roll and yaw
accelerations. The transverse acceleration is constant along the ships breadth, assuming that
the yaw acceleration is negligible. The yaw term is therefore not included in the expression.
The static component due to roll motion is included.
The roll and sway transverse accelerations are assumed to be statistically independent.
3.3.3
Vertical acceleration
The envelope of vertical acceleration is contributed by heave, roll and pitch accelerations.
The motion reference point is assumed to be at centreline and 0.45L from the aft end of L.
JANUARY 2014
The vertical acceleration due to roll motion is multiplied by a factor of 1.2 to account for the
phase difference between roll acceleration and the combined heave and pitch acceleration.
The vertical acceleration due to pitch motion is multiplied by a factor of (0.3+L/325) to
account for the different phase relation between the acceleration components. This phasing is
dependent on the ship length.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 4 HULL GIRDER LOADS
Symbols
Cw
The wave coefficient given as a function of ship length and used in the expressions
for wave pressures and global hull girder wave loads. The Cw values are valid for
world wide service and are representative for the North Atlantic wave statistics.
For dynamic load cases where the load is maximised in beam sea, a correction factor
of 0.8 is applied to the dynamic load components. The factor of 0.8 corresponds to a
reduction of the probability of occurrence of the EDW from 10-8 to 10-6.5 (1 year return
period). Reducing the return period from 25 years to 1 year takes into account the
joint probability of loss of propulsion or similar events in which case the ship is
unable to maintain steerage in severe weather in beam sea.
APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
1.1.2
2
2.1
VERTICAL STILL WATER HULL GIRDER LOADS

General
2.1.1 Seagoing and harbour/sheltered water conditions

2.1.2 Flooded condition

2.1.3 Still water loads for the fatigue assessments

2.2
Vertical still water bending moment
2.2.1 Minimum still water bending moment

The minimum rule hull girder still water bending moment is included in order to ensure that
all ships have a certain operational flexibility regardless of conditions in the loading manual.
The formulation for the minimum hull girder still water bending moment was developed
based on IACS UR, S7 (Rev 4, May 2010) and UR, S11 (Rev 7, November 2010). The UR, S7
(Rev 4, May 2010) defines a minimum hull girder section modulus, while the UR, S11 (Rev 7,
November 2010) defines an allowable hull girder stress and hull girder wave bending
moment. By combining the two requirements, an expression for the still water bending
moment which satisfies the two criteria can be derived.
The rule minimum still water bending moment for sagging was calibrated against the
permissible still water bending moments found in loading manuals for oil tankers by
multiplication factor of 0.85.
JANUARY 2014
The minimum still water bending moments were also compared to permissible still water
bending moments for bulk carriers in order to ensure that these values would not drive the
scantlings for this type of vessel. The minimum values have been found lower than the
permissible values in the loading manual in all the cases evaluated.
2.2.2 Permissible vertical still water bending moment in seagoing condition

The permissible vertical still water bending moment is to be provided by the designer. It is to
envelop:
The most severe value in the loading manual for hogging and sagging condition.
The most severe value for the loading conditions defined in the Rules.
The minimum value.
2.2.3 Permissible vertical still water bending moment in harbour/sheltered water

and tank testing condition
The permissible vertical still water bending moment in harbour/sheltered water and tank
testing condition is to be defined by the user and is to envelop:
The most severe value in the loading manual for hogging and sagging condition.
The most severe value for the loading conditions defined in the Rules.
The minimum value increased by 25%. The Rule minimum hull girder still water
bending moment for harbour operations is taken as 25% higher than the Rule
minimum allowable still water bending moment for the seagoing operations to allow
for reasonable flexibility during loading and unloading operations. The 25% value
was determined based on review of actual at-sea and in-port conditions and
discussions with operators.
For preliminary design stage, a default value is provided which correspond to the total
permissible bending moment, given by the sum of the permissible still water bending
moment and the vertical wave bending moment in seagoing condition, minus the vertical
wave bending moment in harbour condition, which is considered to be 0.4 the vertical wave
bending moment in seagoing condition. Therefore, an increase of the permissible still water
bending moment by the value of 0.6 the vertical wave bending moment in seagoing
condition is derived (1.0Mwv 0.4Mwv).
2.2.4 Permissible vertical still water bending moment in flooded condition at sea
The permissible still water bending moment in flooding condition is to be provided by the
designer and is to envelop:
The most severe value calculated for the flooding loading conditions defined in the
Rules.
The most severe still water bending moments for the flooding loading conditions
defined in the loading manual.
2.3
Vertical still water shear force
A minimum still water shear force is defined for oil tankers while there is no minimum value
defined for bulk carriers. It has been considered that the bulk carriers cargoes have very
different densities and therefore it is harder to derive a simplified shear force formulation
based on the hold volume. In addition, the loading manual of bulk carriers contain enough
number of loading conditions to derive a permissible still water shear force that already
allows for operational flexibility of the ship.
JANUARY 2014
2.3.1 Minimum still water shear force in seagoing conditions for oil tankers
The minimum Rule hull girder still water shear force is included to ensure that all oil tankers
have a certain operational flexibility regardless of the conditions included in the loading
manual.
The formulae represent the local shear force that is generated by the difference of cargo
weight, steel weight and buoyancy between adjacent holds. The hull girder still weight, in
kN, between transverse bulkheads is expressed as:
W steel weight = 0.1gBlocal ltk TSC
where,
Density of cargo/seawater, not to be taken less than 1.025 t/m3.

Blocal Local breadth at TSC at the mid-length of the tank under consideration, in m.
ltk
Length of cargo tank under consideration, taken at the forward or aft side of the
transverse bulkhead under consideration, in m.
TSC
Scantling draught.
This simplification has through verification on typical tankers ranging from product carriers
to VLCCs shown to be representative for the actual steel weight. For the bulk carriers, due to
the different ship types and cargo densities, it has been found difficult to derive a single
formula for the minimum still water shear force.
2.3.2 Minimum still water shear force in harbour conditions for oil tankers
2.3.3 Permissible still water shear force in seagoing condition

2.3.4 Permissible still water shear force in harbour/sheltered water and tank
testing condition
2.3.5 Permissible still water shear force in flooded condition at sea

DYNAMIC HULL GIRDER LOADS
3.1
Vertical wave bending moment
3.1.1
The vertical wave bending moment values are in accordance with IACS UR, S11 (Rev 7,
November 2010). The formulae specified in UR, S11 have been rewritten in order to explicitly
give the non-linear factors used.
The hogging condition is assumed to be linear. Therefore, the non-linear factor applied to the
sagging condition is equal to the ratio between sagging and hogging bending moments:
C + 0.7
110 C B + 0.7
f nl s =
= 0.58 B
190 C B
CB
For fatigue assessments the non-linear factors are set to 1.0, meaning that the non-linearity is
considered negligible at the response levels that contribute to the fatigue. An adjustment
JANUARY 2014
factor fp is used to change the probability level of the response taking account of the
appropriate design load scenario. For fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for speed
effects. The influence of whipping is not included in the non-linear effects.
3.2
Vertical wave shear force
3.2.1
The vertical wave shear force values are in accordance with IACS UR, S11 (Rev 7, November
2010). The formulae specified in UR, S11 (Rev 7, November 2010) have been rewritten in
order to explicitly give the non-linear factors used.
The formulae in UR, S11 (Rev 7, November 2010) specify the shear force obtained at L
when the vessel is in sagging condition. In order to derive the linear wave shear force
(hogging condition), the formulae has been divided by the sagging non-linear factor
specified in [3.1.1].
Q WV = 0.30 f q f p C w LB(C B + 0.7 )
CB
1
= 0.52 f q f p C w LBC B
0.58 C B + 0.7
Differently from the vertical wave bending moment formulae, the non-linear factors for the
vertical wave shear force have been included in the fq definition. Therefore the shape
distribution factors fq are not limited to 1.0 due to the inclusion of the non-linear factors.
Same as the vertical wave bending moment, an adjustment factor fp is used to change the
probability level of the response taking account of the appropriate design load scenario. For
fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for speed effects.
3.3
Horizontal wave bending moment
3.3.1
The horizontal wave bending moment accounts for different loading conditions by using the
draught as input to the formulae. Same as the vertical wave bending moment, an adjustment
factor fp is used to change the probability level of the response taking account of the
appropriate design load scenario. For fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for speed
effects.
3.4
Wave torsional moment
3.4.1
The wave torsional moment formulae correspond to formulation in CSR BC (July 2010) and
are associated to the moment obtained at baseline with a probability of exceedance of 10-8.
Same as the vertical wave bending moment, an adjustment factor fp is used to change the
probability level of the response taking account of the appropriate design load scenario. For
fatigue assessment, this factor also accounts for speed effects.
3.5
Hull girder loads for dynamic load cases
3.5.1 General
The hull girder loads for the load cases correspond to the values defined for the appropriate
design load scenario and multiplied by the LCFs defined in Ch 4, Sec 2 for each EDW load
case. As the LCFs already contain the sign of the responses, the absolute values of the
envelopes defined are to be used.
JANUARY 2014
3.5.2 Vertical wave bending moment

3.5.3 Vertical wave shear force

3.5.4 Horizontal wave bending moment

3.5.5 Wave torsional moment

JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 5 EXTERNAL LOADS
SEA PRESSURES
1.1
Total pressure
1.1.1
1.2
Hydrostatic pressure
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
External dynamic pressures for strength assessment

General
The hydrodynamic pressure in the Rules results from a series of direct computations for oil
tankers and bulk carriers in different loading conditions under the selected EDW. The
hydrodynamic pressure distribution associated to each load case is obtained by multiplying
the response function (RAO) of hydrodynamic pressure in each EDW (frequency and
heading) by the regular wave amplitude of the corresponding EDW. The wave height
associated to each EDW is presented below:
Table 1:
EDW
1.3.2
H (Regular wave height, in m)
HSM
1.31 C w
L + 125
L
HSA
1.09 C w
L + 125
L
FSM
1.31 C w
L + 125
L
BSR
0.88C w
L + 125
L
BSP
1.5C w
L + 125
L
OST
1.38C w
L + 125
L
L + 125
L
: Regular design wave length for each EDW, im m.
: Wave coefficient in m, to be taken as:
Cw = 10.75-{(300-L)/100}1.5
90 L 300m
Cw = 10.75
300 < L 350m
Cw = 10.75-{(L-350)/150}1.5
350 < L 500m
OSA
Cw
Wave height associated to each EDW
1.38C w
Hydrodynamic pressures for HSM load cases
The distributions of wave pressure for HSM-1 and HSM-2 are the distributions in equivalent
design wave HSM at which the vertical wave bending moment becomes minimum (sagging)
and maximum (hogging), respectively.
JANUARY 2014
The amplitude coefficient ka represents the variation of the pressure amplitude along the
length of the vessel with respect to the amplitude amidships. Therefore, ka is always equal to
1.0 at midship section. The phase coefficient kp represents the phasing of the pressure with
respect to the EDW, which varies between -1.0 to 1.0.
The non-linear coefficient fnl of 0.9 is considered based on the results of model tests for wave
pressure for load cases HSM, HSA and FSM at the exceedance probability level of 10-8
(extreme sea loads). For lower probability levels the non-linearity is decreased. An
adjustment factor for strength assessment fps is used to change the probability level of the
response taking account of the appropriate design load scenario.
A minimum deck pressure has been considered in accordance with requirements of ICLL
1966 (as amended) for hatchways. This minimum pressure is only applicable to head sea and
following sea EDWs.
1.3.3
Hydrodynamic pressures for HSA load cases
The distributions of wave pressure for HSA-1 and HSA-2 are the distributions in equivalent
design wave HSA at which the vertical acceleration at FP becomes maximum and minimum,
respectively. The hydrodynamic pressure amidships for HSA load cases corresponds to 80%
of the pressure amidships for HSM load cases. For further explanation refer to TB [1.3.2].
1.3.4
Hydrodynamic pressures for FSM load cases
The distributions of wave pressure for FSM-1 and FSM-2 are the distributions in equivalent
design wave HSM at which the vertical wave bending moment becomes minimum (sagging)
and maximum (hogging), respectively. No significant variation of the pressure at midship
section with respect to the draft has been found for the FSM load cases. For further
explanation refer to TB [1.3.2].
1.3.5
Hydrodynamic pressures for BSR load cases
The distributions BSR-1 and BSR-2 are the distributions in equivalent design wave BSR at
which the roll angle becomes maximum and minimum, respectively. The distribution of
wave pressure comprises the fluctuating part of the hydrostatic pressure from the roll angle
(first term of the formula) and the fluctuating part due to heave (second term of the formula).
The non-linear coefficient fnl of 0.8 is considered for wave pressure for load cases BSR at the
exceedance probability level of 10-8 (extreme sea loads). For lower probability levels the nonlinearity is decreased.
1.3.6
Hydrodynamic pressures for BSP load cases
The distributions BSP-1 and BSP-2 are the distributions in equivalent design wave BSP at
which the hydrodynamic pressure at waterline becomes maximum and minimum at weather
side, respectively. The non-linear coefficient 0.65 consists of a non-linear coefficient 0.8 at the
exceedance probability level of 10-6.5 multiplied by the heading correction factor f of 0.8.
1.3.7
Hydrodynamic pressures for OST load cases
The distributions OST-1 and OST-2 are the distributions in equivalent design wave OST at
which the torsion moment at 1/4L becomes maximum and minimum at weather side,
respectively. The non-linear coefficient fnl of 0.8 is considered for wave pressure for load
cases OST at the exceedance probability level of 10-8 (extreme sea loads).
JANUARY 2014
1.3.8
Hydrodynamic pressures for OSA load cases
The distributions OSA-1 and OSA-2 are the distributions in equivalent design wave OSA at
which the vertical acceleration at FP becomes maximum and minimum at weather side,
respectively. The non-linear coefficient fnl of 0.8 is considered for wave pressure for load
cases OST at the probability level of 10-8 (extreme sea loads).
1.3.9
Envelope of dynamic pressure
1.4
External dynamic pressures for fatigue assessments
1.4.1
General
The hydrodynamic pressure distributions in the EDWs for fatigue assessment are defined for
exceedance probability of 10-2. The hydrodynamic pressure distributions have been
completely reformulated for fatigue assessment due to difference on the ship speed.
Due to speed effects, the equivalent design waves HSA, OSA and HSM were confounded.
Therefore, only the EDW HSM is necessary to maximise the vertical wave bending moment
and vertical acceleration at FP.
The stretching of pressure above the waterline has been done for a probability level of 10-4
(assuming Weibull shape parameter of 1.0), which is equivalent to CSR BC and CSR OT
stretching (July 2010). This is to avoid the underestimation of the fatigue damage on
elements that are wetted at probability level lower than 10-2. There is not any non-linear
correction considered at the probability level of 10-2.
1.4.2
Hydrodynamic pressures for HSM load cases
1.4.3
Hydrodynamic pressures for FSM load cases
1.4.4
Hydrodynamic pressures for BSR load cases
1.4.5
Hydrodynamic pressures for BSP load cases
1.4.6
Hydrodynamic pressures for OST load cases
EXTERNAL PRESSURES ON EXPOSED DECKS
2.1
Application
2.1.1
The external pressures on deck are not to be considered for fatigue assessment.
2.1.2
The simultaneous consideration of the green sea loads and deck cargo loads is not to be
envisaged.
JANUARY 2014
2.2
Green sea loads
2.2.1
Pressure at an exposed deck
External pressures on exposed deck specified in [2] also apply to the exposed decks of
superstructure and deckhouses.
2.2.2
The green sea pressures are to be considered regardless of the existence of water breakers on
the exposed deck.
2.2.3
HSM, HSA and FSM load cases
The green sea pressure in HSM, HSA, FSM load cases is function of the side-shell wave
pressure at the deck corner defined in [1.3.2] to [1.3.4], but is not to be taken less than the
value specified in ICLL (or, IACS UR, S21, Rev 5, May 2010) considering the appropriate
coefficient for the exposed deck position (, coefficient depending on the height of deck
which becomes smaller as the height of deck increases).
2.2.4
BSR, BSP, OST and OSA load cases
The green sea pressure in BSR, BSP, OST and OSA load cases is function of the side-shell
wave pressure at the deck corner defined in [1.3.5] to [1.3.8]. The variation of the pressure
across the deck is obtained by a linear interpolation between the green sea pressure value
obtained at deck corner on starboard and on portside.
2.2.5
Envelope of dynamic pressures on exposed deck
The green sea pressure in BSR, BSP, OST and OSA load cases is function of the side shell.
2.3
Load carried on exposed deck
2.3.1
Pressure due to distributed load
When the exposed deck is loaded with distributed cargo load (such as lumber, etc), the static
and dynamic loads due to such cargo should be considered.
2.3.2
Concentrated force due to unit load
When unit load is carried on the exposed deck (such as outfitting items), the static and
dynamic forces due to this unit load must be considered.
EXTERNAL IMPACT PRESSURES FOR THE BOW AREA
3.1
Application
3.1.1
The impact pressures are not to be envisaged for fatigue assessment.
3.2
Bottom slamming pressure
3.2.1
The bottom slamming pressure formula based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 5, 1.5.8.
The reduction of the bottom slamming pressure to account for the counter-acting head of
ballast water is allowed and is based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 5, 1.5.8.
JANUARY 2014
The LR Rules slamming pressure formula is an empirical formulation based on the results of
a study into the bottom slamming pressures for a range of general cargo and full form ships
using the Ochi-Motter approach. In this study, the slamming velocities and relative vertical
motions were derived using ship motion analysis and based on short term statistical analysis
of motions in North Atlantic sea states. Bow shapes of typical ships were used to derive the
impact shape coefficients. The study included forward speed.
The LR rule application has been revised with respect to the forward draughts to be used for
the bottom slamming assessment in order to match the Rule design basis. Hence, two sets of
minimum draughts forward are to be specified:
One set specifies the minimum draught forward with each double bottom ballast
tank (or fore peak/forward deep tank) empty.
The other set specifies the minimum draught forward applicable with each ballast
tank is filled, hence reducing the effective slamming pressure due to the counteracting ballast water.
The minimum draughts forward are to be specified by the designer and are not to be taken
less then the minimum draughts obtained in the loading manual. If only one draught is
provided, it will be considered as being the minimum draught with ballast tank empty, and
no counter-pressure will be considered.
3.2.2
Loading manual information
3.3
3.3.1
Bow impact pressure

Design pressures
The bow impact pressure formula is based on the CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 7/4.4. The bow
impact pressure is due to frontal impact force in the longitudinal direction, which is
converted to the pressure to the bow area.
The bow impact pressure is approximately proportional to the square of relative impact
velocity based on experimental and theoretical studies by Hagiwara and Yuhara:
Pim Vim2
where:
Density of seawater, in kg/m3.

Vim
Relative impact velocity, in m/s2.
The impact velocity represents the relative velocity between the ship and the fluid. The ship
speed is estimated to be 75% of the ship service speed, taking into account voluntary and
involuntary speed reduction due to slamming, bow sub-mergence and added wave
resistance. The velocity of the critical encountering waves is assumed to be associated to a
wave length of 65% of the ship length. These two components are estimated based on the
study by Ochi and Tasai. The formulation does not include any contribution from bow flare
slamming pressure.
JANUARY 2014
EXTERNAL PRESSURES ON SUPERSTRUCTURE AND DECKHOUSES
4.1
Application
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
Exposed wheel house tops
4.2.1
4.3
Sides of superstructures
4.3.1
4.4
End bulkheads of superstructures and deckhouse walls
4.4.1
The pressure acting on the superstructure bulkheads and deckhouse walls is estimated
according to the longitudinal position and height on the bulkhead (wall).
EXTERNAL PRESSURES ON HATCH COVERS
5.1
Application
5.1.1
5.2
Green sea loads
5.2.1
The green sea loads are obtained according to [2.2]. The minimum deck pressure defined in
ICLL is applied with coefficient equal to 1.0.
5.3
Load carried on hatch covers
5.3.1
When cargo is loaded on hatch covers, the static and dynamic loads due to the loaded cargo
are specified in [2.3] according to the type of cargo.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 6 INTERNAL LOADS
PRESSURES DUE TO LIQUID
1.1
Application
1.1.1 Pressures for the strength and fatigue assessments of intact conditions
1.1.2 Pressures for the strength assessments of flooded conditions

1.2
Static liquid pressure
1.2.1 Normal operations at sea

1.2.2 Harbour/sheltered water operations

1.2.3 Sequential ballast water exchange

1.2.4 Flow through ballast water exchange

1.2.5 Ballasting using ballast water treatment system

1.2.6 Static liquid pressure for the fatigue assessment

1.3
Dynamic liquid pressure
1.3.1
Under the assumptions that the tank or compartment of any type is fully filled with the
homogeneous liquid of unique density L, and the tank wall is rigid, the dynamic liquid
pressure, Pld, in kN/m is defined by the formula:
Pld = f fcdL [aZ (z0 z) + full-l aX (x0 x) + full-t aY (y0 y)]
The ullage factors full-l and full-t have been taken in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010). It
considers that the Rules are developed for the tank completely full, whether in reality cargo
tanks will normally not be more than 98% full. Therefore, the ullage factors represent the
difference between the tank pressure at 98% tank filling and 100% tank filling at the tank
sides.
The acceleration components (aX, aY, aZ) are measured at the centre of the tank G (xG, yG, zG)
and the reference point O (xo, yo, zo) is defined as the point with the highest value of Vj. The
value of Vj is computed for all points that define the upper boundary of the tank or ballast
hold by the formulae:
Vj = ax (xj xG) + aY (yj yG) + (aZ + g) (zj - zG)
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1:
Definition of reference point coordinate x0
In fact, Vj is the projection of the position vector (originated at COG) to the total acceleration
vector:
A = A (aX, aY, aZ + g)
That is, the reference point O (xo, yo, zo) should be defined by a mathematical formulation like
O = Pj, for max (Vj, j = 1, 2, 3, ) where Pj is the j-th point along the tank boundary with
coordinates Pj (xj, yj, zj). In principle, all particular points like vertex/summits of tank
boundary should be considered in the choice of Pj. Some possible (not exhausted) examples
are as follows:
Figure 2:
JANUARY 2014
Cargo hold of Bulk Carriers
Figure 3:
Cargo tank of Tankers (considering camber)
Figure 4:
Figure 5:
JANUARY 2014
Ballast tank
Curved plans and sides
1.4
Static pressure in flooded conditions
1.4.1 Static pressure in flooded compartments

1.5
Dynamic pressure in flooded conditions
1.5.1 Dynamic pressure in flooded compartments

PRESSURES AND FORCES DUE TO DRY BULK CARGO
2.1
Application
2.1.1
2.2
Hold definitions
2.2.1 Geometrical characteristics

2.2.2 Fully and partially filled cargo holds

For the computation of the dry bulk cargo pressure it is important to define the filling ratio
of the hold which is dependent on the loading patterns envisaged for the structural
assessment of the holds. These loading patterns are defined in details in Sec 8. However, the
relevant parameters for the pressure computation are defined in this section. Two filling
conditions are considered:
Cargo hold filled up to the hatch coaming;
Cargo hold not completely filled
2.3
Dry cargo characteristics
2.3.1 Definition of the upper surface of dry bulk cargo for full cargo holds
When the hold is filled up to the top of hatch coaming, the upper surface of the bulk cargo
should be taken ignoring the topside tanks, based on practicality and safety and taking into
account the friction effects between the cargo and the wall surfaces.
The height of surface contour of loaded cargo (hC, vertical distance from the inner bottom
plating to the assumed bulk cargo upper surface) is determined assuming loaded condition
with width equal to the width between side shell plating or longitudinal bulkheads
surrounding the cargo in the cargo hold considering an equivalent volume of cargo.
2.3.2 Upper surface of dry bulk cargo for partially filled cargo holds
When the cargo hold is loaded with heavy cargo, the upper surface of the cargo may not
reach the position of the upper deck. To set the cargo pressure applied on the inner bottom
plating on the safe side, the height of the shape of the surface of cargo (hC) should be set
assuming that the volume and mass (M) of the cargo remain unchanged, the upper surface of
the cargo is considered as having a plane surface of width BH/2 on the centreline (BH is the
mean width of the cargo hold), and the shape of the cargo has inclined parts with an angle
equal to half the angle of repose (/2) at sides.
JANUARY 2014
2.3.3 Mass and density

Further to examination of CSR BC (July 2010) requirements of Ch 4, Sec 7 based on IACS UR,
S25 (which is no more in force), it appears that the consideration of the maximum cargo
density only, may not lead to the most severe cases against yielding, flooded (IACS UR, S18,
Rev 8, May 2010) and fatigue criteria. This is particularly true for the upper parts of the cargo
holds or transverse bulkheads.
Therefore, the lowest cargo density corresponding to the complete filling of the cargo hold
should be considered in the structure assessment in agreement with CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 4,
Sec 7, [2.1.2] in homogeneous loading and [3.4.2] in alternate loading.
For yielding and flooding, this leads to the fact that for BC-A and BC-B two loading
conditions are to be considered in each cargo hold for homogeneous conditions and for BC-A
two other for alternate conditions, as follows:
For BC-A & BC-B ships loaded in homogeneous conditions:
One loading condition with highest cargo density.
One loading condition with the lowest cargo density corresponding to the complete
filling of the cargo hold.
For BC-A ships loaded in alternate conditions:
One loading condition with highest cargo density.
One loading condition with the lowest cargo density corresponding to the complete
filling of the cargo hold.
The loading patterns used for pressure calculation for fatigue assessment were considered
the same as the ones defined in CSR BC for FEM calculations (CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 4,
App 3, Table 1 and Table 2).
2.3.4 FE application
2.4
Dry bulk cargo pressures
2.4.1 Total pressure

The total (static + dynamic) pressure should be zero for any load point of cargo boundary
above the level of cargo surface given by hc.
2.4.2 Static pressure

The static pressure depends on the height of the cargo upper surface and the coefficient KC
(KC = cos2 + K0 sin2 ) which takes the coefficient of the earth pressure at rest K0, and the
angle of the slant plate as parameters.
The coefficient of earth pressure at rest applicable to the inclined wall for the estimation of
static pressure is examined referring to the experimental results. The comparisons of earth
pressure at rest using Jakys formula and Rankines formula are shown in the figure below
together with the experimental results. It can be noticed that the Jaky's formula is found to be
in good agreement with the experimental results and on the safer side of the estimation
compared with Rankines formula. Therefore, Jaky's formula was adopted as the coefficient
of earth pressure at rest. Furthermore, the correction method of the surface shape of bulk
cargo has been developed considering the effect of mutual friction between bulk cargoes to
estimate bulk cargo pressure accurately.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 6:
Comparison of KC with respect to angle of panel

Comparison of Kc
1.0
0.8
Kc
0.6
0.4
Full loading(Exp.)
66% loading(Exp.)
Jaky's formula
Rankine's formula
0.2
0.0
0
20
40
Angle of panel
60
80
2.4.3 Dynamic pressure

The dynamic pressure due to inertial force of the grain cargo depends on the height of the
cargo upper surface, the coefficient KC, and the longitudinal, transverse and vertical
accelerations obtained at the centre of gravity of the considered compartment (cargo hold) as
defined in Ch 4, Sec 3, [3.2] and for each load case defined in Ch 4, Sec 2.
Based on the experimental results, the dynamic pressure induced by dry bulk cargo due to
static inclination of pitch or roll can be approximately obtained by multiplying g (or, g)
by the distance from the centre of gravity of the cargo hold to the load point considered and
a correction factor C. Here, and are the single roll amplitude and single pitch amplitude
respectively. The correction factor C is to be taken 0.25 based on the experimental results.
2.5
Shear Load
2.5.1 Application
The shear load is considered to guarantee the balance between the overall internal pressure
or force of the FE model in direct structural analysis. The shear load is considered only for
direct structural analysis.
2.5.2 Static shear load on the hopper tank and lower stool plating
To consider a balance between the overall internal pressure or force (gravity and inertial
force due to vertical acceleration) in the vertical direction of the FE structural model in direct
structural analysis, shear load according to the calculation formula in Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.5.2]
should be considered in addition to the static internal pressure according to the calculation
formula in Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.4.2].
2.5.3 Dynamic shear load on the hopper tank and lower stool plating
To consider a balance between the overall internal pressure or force (gravity and inertial
force due to vertical acceleration) in the vertical direction of the FE structural model in direct
structural analysis, shear load according to the calculation formula in Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.5.3]
should be considered in addition to the dynamic internal pressure according to the
calculation formula Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.4.3].
2.5.4 Dynamic shear load along the inner bottom plating for FE analyses
Only inertial forces due to longitudinal and transverse accelerations exist in the longitudinal
and transverse directions of the ship because of basically the same reasons as in [2.5.2] and
[2.5.3], and therefore, shear load is applied on the inner bottom plating to consider the
JANUARY 2014
balance of overall forces (inertial force due to acceleration) in the longitudinal and transverse
directions of the FE structural model.
3
3.1
PRESSURES AND FORCES DUE TO DRY BULK CARGOES IN FLOODED

CONDITION
Vertically corrugated transverse watertight bulkheads
3.1.1 Application
The requirements are in accordance with the regulation of IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010).
For each cargo hold, the flooded condition is considered independently.
3.1.2 General
The requirements are in accordance with IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010).
3.1.3 Flooded level

3.1.4 Flooded patterns

3.1.5 Pressures and forces on vertically corrugated transverse bulkheads of

flooded cargo holds
3.1.6 Pressures and forces on vertically corrugated transverse bulkheads of nonflooded cargo holds
3.1.7 Resultant pressures and forces on vertically corrugated transverse

bulkheads of flooded holds
3.2
Double bottom in cargo region of bulk carrier in the flooded condition
3.2.1 Application
The regulation is based on the regulation of IACS UR, S20 (Rev 5, May 2010). For each cargo
hold, the flooded condition is considered independently.
3.2.2 General
The regulation is based on the regulation of IACS UR S20 (Rev 5, May 2010).
3.2.3 Flooded level

JANUARY 2014
4
4.1
STEEL COIL LOADS IN CARGO HOLDS OF BULK CARRIERS

General
4.1.1 Application
The steel coil loads are defined in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010). CSR BC formulas
have been modified in order to include physical details but with the same results. Additional
information concerning the steel coil loads is given in the TB Report, TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch04_Sec06_Steel Coil Loads.
4.1.2 Arrangement of steel coils on inner bottom

As steel coils are loaded on a wooden support (dunnage) provided on the inner bottom
plating and bilge hopper plating, the concentrated loads due to steel coils act on the plating
through the dunnage.
However, as the location of concentrated loads and the distance between concentrated loads
depend on the loading pattern and size of dunnage, it is assumed that the concentrated load
is transformed to a line load with a small breadth (hereinafter referred to as rectangular
load) which acts on the most severe conditions (load point and distance between load
points).
Based on this assumption, the specific formulae for dimensioning the plating and ordinary
stiffeners under steel coil loading are introduced in the Rules separately from those based on
uniformly distributed loads. Steel coils are usually secured to each other by means of steel
wires. Heavier steel coils are loaded with one or two tiers, and lighter ones are loaded with
two or more tiers. Examples of steel coil loading are shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8 below.
Figure 7:
Loading conditions of one tier

key coil
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
Inner bottom plating
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
(A) with key coil

Figure 8:
(B) without key coil

Loading conditions of two tiers
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
The load due to steel coils acts on an elementary plate panel as a concentrated load through
dunnages. However, it is difficult to treat concentrated loads directly because the location of
concentrated loads and the distance between concentrated loads depend on the loading
pattern and size of dunnage. Then, the following assumptions regarding the loads due to
steel coils are considered.
JANUARY 2014
1. Loads due to steel coils act along a centreline of a plate panel.

2. A rectangular load instead of concentrated loads is used in order to be on the safer side
considering the interaction between concentrated loads.
Figure 9:
Convert concentrated loads to rectangular loads
Steel coil
l
x
Floor
Floor
dunnage
Elementary plate panel

l
l'
l
As it is the most severe when loads act on the inner bottom vertically, the vertical
acceleration is considered for the scantling formula of inner bottom structures.
4.1.3 Arrangement of steel coils independently of the floor locations

The number of load points per elementary plate panels is defined in accordance with CSR BC
(July 2010).
4.1.4 Arrangement of steel coils between floors

The number of load points per elementary plate panels and the distance between outermost
load points are defined in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010).
4.1.5 Centre of gravity of steel coil cargo

If the actual centre of gravity in steel coil loaded condition is known, it is better to use the
actual one in calculating the acceleration. If the actual centre of gravity is not known, the
default position of the centre of gravity is given by the following:
x : 0.5 H
y : Bh 4 , measured from the centreline
z
: h DB + 1 + (n 1) 3 2 d SC 2
where,
H : the cargo hold length, in m
dsc : The diameter, in m, of steel coil
hDB : The height, in m, of double bottom
Bh : breadth, in m, at the mid of the hold
: 1.0 when a port side structural member is considered,
-1.0 when a starboard side structural member is considered.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 10: The height of steel coils
2 3 dSC
2
3 dSC
2
dSC
2
hDB
dSC
2
Inner bottom
plating
hDB
Bottom plating
4.2
Total loads
4.2.1 Total load on the inner bottom

The total load acting on the inner bottom due to steel coils is decomposed into static and
dynamic loads weighted by their respective load combination factors.
4.2.2 Total load on the hopper side

The total load acting on the hopper side due to steel coils is decomposed into static and
dynamic loads weighted by their respective load combination factors.
4.3
Static loads
4.3.1 Static loads on the inner bottom

The static load acting on the inner bottom is due to gravitational acceleration applied on an
equivalent mass of steel coils which is determined in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010).
4.3.2 Static loads on the hopper side

The static load acting on the hopper side is due to gravitational acceleration applied on an
4.4
Dynamic loads
4.4.1 Tangential roll acceleration

The tangential roll acceleration is determined in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010).
4.4.2 Dynamic load on the inner bottom

The dynamic load acting on the inner bottom is due ships acceleration applied on an
4.4.3 Dynamic loads on the hopper side

The dynamic load acting on the hopper side is due to ships acceleration applied on an
JANUARY 2014
LOADS ON NON-EXPOSED DECKS AND PLATFORMS
5.1
Application
5.1.1 General
5.2
Pressure due to distributed load
5.2.1
5.3
Concentrated force due to unit load
5.3.1
SLOSHING PRESSURES IN TANKS
6.1
General
The sloshing pressures were defined in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010) which is based
on DNV Rules (January 2010), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 4.
6.1.1 Application
Sloshing pressures are pressure induced by the movement of liquid in tanks due to ship
motions and only applied to the tanks of large volume.
6.1.2
The sloshing pressure is applicable for tanks with effective breadth and length within bslh
0.56B and lslh 0.13L respectively. As a result of MARPOL requirements (as amended), it is
rare to see an oil tanker that has an effective tank length greater than 0.13L. Likewise the
stability requirements do not allow larger ships to have full breadth cargo tanks. A full
breadth forepeak ballast tank will generally have a significant amount of internal stiffeners
and webs that reduce the effective sloshing breadth. Based on this no effort was put on
unifying the sloshing loads for such tanks in the present version of the common Rules.
6.1.3 Sloshing pressure on tank boundaries and internal divisions

6.2
Minimum sloshing pressure
6.2.1
The minimum sloshing pressure, Pslh-min, is included in order to ensure that all internal
structures are able to withstand the pressures due to fluid motion in the tank.
6.3
Sloshing pressure due to longitudinal liquid motion
6.3.1 Application
JANUARY 2014
6.3.2 Effective sloshing length

The sloshing pressure acting on the transverse bulkhead and transverse wash bulkhead are
different since the effective sloshing length is different. The sloshing pressure formulation
takes into account the internal web-frames and transverse swash-bulkheads that reduce the
fluid motion in the tanks, by reducing the effective sloshing length of the tank.
6.3.3 Sloshing pressure in way of transverse bulkheads

The coefficient fslh is based on the fact that the maximum calculated sloshing pressure is
found at a filling level of 0.7hmax. This will be the case for all tank configurations without
wash bulkheads or transverse struts, i.e. with only vertical webs in the tank. For tanks with a
strut/cross tie the maximum sloshing pressure will typically be found at a filling level
between 0.7hmax and 0.8hmax. Sloshing pressure on internal web frames or transverse stringers
adjacent to a transverse bulkhead.
6.3.4 Sloshing pressure on internal web frames or transverse stringers adjacent to

a transverse bulkhead
The sloshing pressure due to longitudinal fluid motion is also assumed to act on the 1st
internal web-frame away from the transverse tight/wash-bulkhead. This pressure arises due
to the reflection of the liquid from the transverse bulkhead under consideration and is
consequently lower than pressure acting directly on the transverse bulkhead. The closer the
web-frame is to the bulkhead in question the higher the pressure will be. The distribution of
sloshing pressure on web-frames and stringers gives a reduction towards the free edge to
account for limited possibility of pressure build up.
6.4
Sloshing pressure due to transverse liquid motion
6.4.1 Application
6.4.2 Effective sloshing breadth

The sloshing pressure formulation takes into account the internal longitudinal girders and
longitudinal wash-bulkheads that reduce the fluid motion in the tanks. The sloshing breadth
in cargo tanks will normally be equal to the tank breadth. The reduced sloshing breadth will
mainly be applicable for sloshing assessment of aft- and fore peak ballast tanks.
6.4.3 Sloshing pressure in way of longitudinal bulkheads

The sloshing pressure acting on the tank-sides/longitudinal bulkheads and longitudinal
wash-bulkhead are different due to different sloshing breadths. This gives lower sloshing
pressure in way of wash bulkheads compared to tight bulkheads.
6.4.4 Sloshing pressure on internal girder or longitudinal stringers adjacent to

longitudinal bulkheads
The sloshing pressure due to transverse fluid motion is also assumed to act on the 1st
internal girder away from the longitudinal tight/wash bulkhead. The pressure is however
reduced somewhat from that calculated for the longitudinal bulkhead, as the sloshing
pressure on the frame arises as a reflection of the liquid motion acting on the longitudinal
bulkhead. The greater distance the girder is away from the bulkhead in question the lower
the pressure is. The distribution of sloshing pressure on girders and stringers gives a
reduction towards the free edge to account for limited possibility of pressure build up.
JANUARY 2014
DESIGN PRESSURE FOR TANK TESTING
7.1
Definition
7.1.1
During local strength assessment of plate members and stiffeners for which hydrostatic
testing is required, the still water pressure due to the hydrostatic test is estimated from the
water head of the hydrostatic test, and compartments and positions of structural members.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 7 DESIGN LOAD SCENARIOS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
For the strength assessment, the design load combination consists of either S (Static) loads or
S+D (Static+Dynamic) loads. For the accidental flooding design load scenarios, the design
load combinations are preceded by the letter A, which stands for Accidental. There are
some additional design load combinations to be considered which relate to impact (I) loads
and sloshing (Sl) loads.
For fatigue assessment, the design load combination S+D is considered preceded by the letter
F, which stands for Fatigue. For fatigue assessment, the dynamic loads are used to obtain the
stresses range while the static loads are used to obtain the mean stresses for the fatigue
damage correction. Both types of loads do not need to be considered simultaneously.
DESIGN LOAD SCENARIOS FOR STRENGTH ASSESSMENT
2.1
Principal design load scenarios
2.1.1
For strength assessment in harbour and sheltered water design load scenario, the S and S+D
design load combination are considered because different acceptance criteria are applied.
Also, the accidental flooding is checked for S and S+D loads.
2.2
Additional design load scenarios
2.2.1
DESIGN LOAD SCENARIOS FOR FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
3.1
Design load scenarios
3.1.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 4, SEC 8 LOADING CONDITIONS
APPLICATION
Ships having a length L of 150m and above
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Design loading conditions for strength assessment
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
Standard design load conditions for fatigue assessment
Bulk carriers having a length L less than 150m
1.2
1.2.1
This regulation was adopted from the CSR BC (July 2010).
1.3
Dynamic load cases
1.3.1
Seagoing conditions
1.3.1
Beam and oblique sea dynamic load cases
This requirement does not mean that there are two possible methods because the expected
final results should be exactly the same for ships with structure symmetrical about the
centreline and loaded with a pattern symmetrical to centreline In other words, it is expected
to provide exactly the same yielding and buckling results:
a) If beam and oblique sea load cases calculated for both port and starboard side are
directly applied to the model.
b) If beam and oblique sea load cases calculated only for port side (those designated
with a P in their name) are applied and then the results from each of these load cases
are mirrored across the centreline.
For ships with structure symmetrical about the centreline but loaded with a pattern not
symmetrical to centreline, refer to TB of [3.2.5].
COMMON DESIGN LOADING CONDITIONS
2.1
Definitions
2.1.1
JANUARY 2014
2.1.2
Departure conditions
2.1.3
Arrival conditions
2.2
Partially filled ballast tanks
2.2.1
Partially filled ballast tanks in ballast loading conditions
2.2.2
Partially filled ballast tanks in cargo loading conditions
2.3
Seagoing conditions
2.3.1
2.4
Harbour and sheltered water conditions
2.4.1
During harbour and sheltered water conditions observance of the permissible shear forces
and bending moments must be ensured. Consequently following conditions must be
included in the loading manual:
a) Conditions representing typical complete loading and unloading operations.
b) Docking condition afloat.
c) Propellers inspection afloat condition.
2.5
Loading conditions
2.5.1
Alternative design
OIL TANKERS
3.1
3.1.1
Specific design loading conditions

Seagoing conditions
3.1.2
Additional loading conditions
3.2
Design load combinations for direct strength analysis
3.2.1
Design FE load combinations for direct strength analysis are adopted from CSR OT based on
the following:
JANUARY 2014
(a)
A finite element load combination is the combination of a loading pattern defined in

Table 2 to Table 9 of the Rules and a dynamic load case defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2 of
the Rules. The corresponding dynamic load cases for each loading pattern are
indicated under the column Dynamic Load Cases in Table 2 to Table 9 of the Rules.
(b)
The standard FE analysis considers loading patterns, ship draughts, hull girder still
water bending moments and shear forces that are intended to provide an envelope of
the typical loading conditions anticipated in operations. The operation envelope
stipulates:
A maximum ship draught equal to 90% of the ships scantlings draught and a
minimum ship draught equal to 60% of the ships scantlings draught for seagoing
partial load conditions.
For tankers with two longitudinal bulkheads, a maximum ship draught equal to
the ship's scantling draught and a minimum ship draught equal to 25% of the
ships scantlings draught for harbour and tank testing conditions.
For tankers with one centreline longitudinal bulkheads, a maximum ship draught
equal to the ship's scantling draught and a minimum ship draught equal to 33.3%
of the ships scantlings draught for harbour and tank testing conditions.
Seagoing and harbour hull girder still water bending moments and shear forces
specified by the designer as included in the ship's loading manual.
(c)
The seagoing ship draughts considered are to provide adequate flexibility for partial
load conditions in normal operations. Full scantling draught is normally not achieved
when one or more cargo holds are empty unless the master intentionally increases the
draught by filling a number of ballast holds. Hence, it is considered that partial
loading conditions with full scantling draught, and one or more cargo holds empty,
are not necessary as a mandatory requirement for all designs. Instead, a maximum
ship draught equal to 90% of the ships scantlings draught is used. The minimum
ship draught considered for seagoing partial load conditions is 60% of the ships
scantling draught.
(d)
For harbour and tank testing load cases, shallow draught conditions could be critical
for the double bottom structure. The minimum draught chosen for the analysis is
based on the smallest draught that can be achieved with the loading pattern
considered for a given tank arrangement, see item (b). Note that the minimum ship
draught used in harbour/tank testing conditions is less than that for the seagoing
conditions to allow additional flexibility during these operations. The strength of the
hull structure under harbour permissible still water bending moment and still water
shear force is also assessed for shallow and full scantling draught conditions.
(e)
A deep draught condition with an empty cargo tank is critical for the bottom
structure due to high upward acting static and wave pressure on the bottom shell and
no counteracting tank pressure. When a wing cargo tank is empty in a deep draught
condition, the side and transverse structures are also under critical condition in beam
seas due to lack of counteracting tank pressure against the static and wave dynamic
pressure on the ship side. Likewise, shallow draught with a full tank is also a critical
loading condition for the bottom structure due to high downward acting static and
dynamic tank pressure and little counteracting external sea pressure. When a wing
tank is full with a shallow draught, the side and transverse structures are also under
considerable load due to small counteracting pressure on the ship side. It is therefore
extremely important to note that if the required operational draughts for partial load
conditions are greater than the maximum draught and/or lesser than the minimum
draught used in the standard FE analysis, the required draughts must be specified
and included in the FE analysis.
(f)
JANUARY 2014
(g)
Fully loaded condition and normal ballast condition are not included in the FE
loading patterns, as these conditions do not impose the most onerous loads on the
main supporting structural members as the net load on the double hull structure is
small in both cases, i.e. full cargo tank with deep draught and empty cargo tank with
shallow draught. Fully loaded and normal ballast conditions are important for
determination of hull girder bending strength, which is adequately checked by the
longitudinal strength calculation described in Pt 1, Ch 5 of the Rules.
(h)
Where the designer requests an operation envelope that is not covered by the
standard FE load combinations, the additional loading conditions must be specified
(i)
The loading patterns used in the finite element analysis were chosen such that the
most severe static pressure loads, localised shear forces and bending moments are
imposed on the primary supporting structure of the hull (i.e. frame and girder
system). The loading patterns chosen consist of possible alternative tank partial load
conditions, where adjacent holds are in various configurations of fully loaded and
empty condition in both longitudinal and transverse directions, to maximise the
loads acting on the structure using an optimized number of loading patterns.
(j)
For each of the loading pattern analysed, the distribution of cargo and ballast is only
defined within the three-tank length FE model. The use of actual still water bending
moment from the loads applied to the three tank FE model may be non-conservative
as this does not take into account the loads applied along the whole ship length
outside the extent of the model. For this reason, the permissible seagoing and harbour
still water hull girder bending moments are used in the seagoing and harbour FE
load combinations respectively.
(k)
The hull girder still water shear force is most critical for loading conditions with
either all cargo holds abreast empty (and all adjacent cargo holds abreast full) or all
cargo holds abreast full (and all adjacent cargo holds abreast empty), whilst the hull
girder still water shear force resulting from other 'checker board' loading patterns is
less critical. This full or empty across loading condition is analysed using FE
loading patterns A3, A5, A11, A13, B3, B6, B8 and B11 in combination with the
dynamic load cases with maximum wave shear force to assess the hull strength
against hull girder shear loads. For these load case combinations, shear force
correction procedure is to be applied, where necessary, to ensure that the required
combined seagoing permissible still water and maximum wave shear force is
achieved in the sea going FE load combinations and harbour permissible still water
shear force is achieved in the harbour/tank testing FE load combinations. By
carefully matching of the FE loading pattern with ship draught, only minor
adjustment of shear forces are needed to obtain the required hull girder shear forces.
Shear force correction procedure is not required to be applied to other checker
board FE loading patterns where the hull girder shear force is less critical, unless
this hull girder shear force exceeds the permissible value.
(l)
(m)
The finite element load combination (i.e. combination of static and dynamic loads for
seagoing conditions and static loads only for harbour conditions) are to generate the
most severe combination of global and local loads on the structure for the loading
patterns considered.
The following general considerations are given in combining a loading pattern with
dynamic load cases:
(n)
The hull girder loads are maximised by combining a static loading pattern with
dynamic load cases that have hull girder bending moments/shear forces of the
same sign.
JANUARY 2014
The net local load on primary supporting structural members is maximised by

combining each static loading pattern with appropriate dynamic load cases,
taking into account the net pressure load acting on the structural member and
influence of loads acting on an adjacent structure. The general principle of
maximising the net local pressure loads is explained in Table 1.
Table 1:
Principle of maximising the net local pressure loads
Loading pattern
Ship draught
Internal tightbulkheads
Full tank/adjacent
tank empty
NA
Double bottom or
double side
Empty tank
Deep still water

draught
Double bottom or
double side
Full tank
Shallow still
water draught
(o)
(p)
Dynamic loads
Maximise load due to
accelerations in fully loaded
holds
Maximise external sea
pressure (head sea wave crest
condition or weather side
beam/oblique sea condition)
Maximise internal pressure
due to accelerations. Minimise
external sea pressure (head sea
wave trough condition or lee
side beam sea condition)
The global hull girder loads and local loads are to be combined in such a way that the
stresses due to net local pressure loads acting on the primary support members and
hull girder loads are additive to maximise the stress in certain parts of the structure.
For example, hull girder maximum sagging condition (i.e. dynamic load case HSM-1,
defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2 of the Rules, with maximum wave sagging bending
moment in a wave trough, and maximum sagging still water bending moment) is
combined with a loading pattern with fully loaded holds (middle hold of FE model)
and shallow draught to generate maximised tensile stress at the outer bottom.
Similarly, hull girder maximum hogging condition (i.e. dynamic load HSM-2, defined
in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2 of the Rules, with maximum wave hogging bending moment in a
wave crest, and maximum hogging still water bending moment) is combined with a
loading pattern with empty holds (middle holds of FE model) and deep draught to
maximise compressive stress at the outer bottom.
(q)
For seagoing finite element load combinations, several different dynamic load cases
may require to be combined with one loading pattern in order that critical conditions
for different structural members can be examined.
(r)
For the harbour FE load combinations, only static loads are to be applied. The
required still water bending moment and shear force for these FE load combinations
are based on harbour permissible still water bending moments and shear forces.
(s)
A study was carried out for a number of designs of various configurations and sizes
to further minimise the required number of combinations of loading pattern and
dynamic load cases.
From the loading principles enumerated from (a) to (s) it is possible to make an educated
guess about which primary supporting members are more likely to be challenged by each FE
Load combination: most cases have been explicitly cited (e.g. double bottom, double side,
bottom plating).
However, linking the FE Load combination to a limited set of primary supporting members
for which it is bound to be critical is not a priori certain because the outcome may depend
JANUARY 2014
from different design options. The development of FE load combinations for aftmost and
foremost cargo hold models is in progress.
3.2.2
The still water draughts given in Table 2 to Table 9 of the Rules for Tankers type A and type
B are required for typical tankers of a typical arrangement i.e. VLCC, suezmax, aframax and
product carriers. For other designs with cargo tanks of shorter lengths, e.g. tankers for
chemicals and oil products, more severe draughts can be archived than the required
draughts for standard designs: a deeper draught for loading condition with all cargo tanks
abreast empty (and all adjacent cargo tanks abreast full) and a more shallow draught for
loading condition with all cargo tanks abreast empty (and all adjacent cargo tanks abreast
full). The separate draught requirements apply for ships where the ration between the ship
rule length and the length of cargo tank is lesser than 0.15 for Tankers Type A and 0.11 for
tankers Type B.
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Ships with structure symmetrical about centerline
In case a ship has structure symmetrical to centreline and is loaded with an unsymmetrical
loading pattern (e.g. A7a and A12a in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 8, Table 2), then the loading pattern that
is symmetrical across the centreline (A7b and A12b in our example) may be omitted
provided that the results (either for each FEM load combination or the worst one and for
each element) is mirrored across the centreline.
3.2.6
Tankers with two oil-tight longitudinal bulkheads and a cross tie

arrangement in the centre cargo tanks
For tankers with two oil-tight longitudinal bulkheads and a cross tie arrangement in the
centre cargo holds, special asymmetrical loading patterns with one wing tank abreast full (i.e.
seagoing condition A7 and harbour condition A12) are analysed to verify the strength of the
longitudinal bulkhead and support structure (in way of the empty wing tank) under the
punching load exerted by the cross tie in the middle tank as a result of the fluid pressure in
the full wing tank. In the seagoing condition, this loading pattern is combined with the beam
sea dynamic load case to obtain the maximum combined static and dynamic tank pressure
acting on the longitudinal bulkhead in way of the full wing tank.
Loading pattern A12 is mandatory and is to be analysed for the possibility of unequal filling
level in paired wing cargo holds in harbour or tank testing operation operations and to
account for accidental non-symmetric filling of holds. Loading pattern A7 is optional and is
only required to be analysed if such loading pattern is included in the ship loading manual
as a condition for seagoing operation, therefore GM and kr values contained in the loading
manual for this loading condition are to be used: only in case these values are not given in
the loading manual, then the values in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 3, Table 1 and Table 2 are to be used.
These asymmetrical loading patterns are not critical for the longitudinal bulkhead and
supporting structure for ships with no cross-tie structure in the middle tank, and therefore
these loading patterns do not need to be analysed for ships with no centre tank cross-tie
structure.
JANUARY 2014
3.2.7
For tankers with two oil-tight longitudinal bulkheads (typical for VLCC designs), loading
condition with all cargo holds abreast empty (and all adjacent cargo holds abreast full) is not
typically adopted for all designs. This loading condition in combination with a deep draught
will result in still water shear forces much higher than that of other loading conditions; and
will require additional strengthening of side shell, inner hull, bottom girders, hopper plate
and longitudinal bulkheads. For this design configuration, it is considered not necessary to
include deep draught and shallow draught for this loading condition as a mandatory
requirement. Instead, less demanding draught conditions are used in the FE loading patterns
A3, A5, A11 and A13 to assess the hull strength against the required hull girder shear loads.
However, if all cargo holds abreast empty (with all adjacent cargo holds abreast full) loading
conditions are required in operation for a particular vessel, where the maximum
seagoing/harbour draughts specified in the ship's loading manual for these conditions are
greater than the default draughts used in the FE loading patterns A3 and A13, then the
specified maximum draughts should be used in the FE loading patterns to assess the hull
strength against the required maximum negative hull girder shear forces at sea and in
harbour.
Similarly, the minimum seagoing/harbour draughts specified for the condition with all
cargo holds abreast full (and all adjacent cargo holds abreast empty) in the ship's loading
manual are to be used in the FE loading patterns A5 and A11 to assess the hull strength
against the required maximum positive hull girder shear forces, should the minimum
seagoing/harbour draughts specified for a particular vessel be smaller than the standard
default draughts used in FE loading patterns A5 and A11.
The design draughts for FE loading patterns A3, A5, A11 and A13 required in CSR OT (July
2010), are adjusted in the Rules, as follows:
The maximum realistic draught in the loading condition with all cargo tanks
abreast empty (A3, A11).
The minimum realistic draught in the loading condition with all cargo tanks
abreast full (A5, A13).
The design draughts are considered to provide adequate flexibility for partial load
conditions in normal seagoing and harbour operations.
3.2.8
3.2.9
Refer to TB item (c) of [3.2.1].
3.2.10 Ballast Conditions

Gale/emergency ballast condition is only required to be analysed if the condition is specified
in the ships loading manual. If the actual loading pattern as specified in the loading manual
is different from load pattern B7, e.g. ballast tanks adjacent to ballasted cargo tanks are
empty or unsymmetrical filling the ballast in cargo tanks, then the actual is to be used in the
FE analysis. Additional strength assessment needed for unsymmetrical filling will be
evaluated by the individual class societies.
JANUARY 2014
BULK CARRIERS
4.1
Specific design loading conditions
These requirements is providing improved transparency with regard to the cargo carrying
capabilities of bulk carriers by assigning harmonised notations and applying corresponding
unified design loading conditions among the societies. A bulk carrier may in actual
operation be loaded differently from the design loading conditions specified in the loading
manual, provided limitations for longitudinal and local strength as defined in the loading
manual and loading instrument onboard and applicable stability requirements are not
exceeded.
4.1.1
Seagoing conditions
This regulation was adopted from the CSR BC (July 2010) and IACS UR, S25 (which is no
more in force).
4.1.2
Cargo loading conditions for BC-C
4.1.3
Cargo loading condition for BC-B
To reflect the most onerous condition, the homogeneous cargo loaded condition with
maximum density of the cargo that the ship is allowed to carry is to be considered for cases
where the cargo density applied for this loading condition is different from 3.0 t/m.
4.1.4
Cargo loading condition for BC-A
To reflect the most onerous condition, the alternate loaded condition with maximum density
of the cargo that the ship is allowed to carry is to be considered for cases where the cargo
density applied for this loading condition is different from 3.0 t/m.
4.1.5
Additional ballast conditions
4.1.6
Steel coils or heavy cargoes
4.2
4.2.1
Design load combinations for direct strength analysis

Applicable general loading patterns
more in force).
4.2.2
Multiport conditions
4.2.3
Alternate conditions
4.2.4
Heavy ballast condition
4.2.5
Additional harbour conditions for all bulk carriers
JANUARY 2014
4.2.6
Additional harbour conditions for bulk carrier with {No MP}
4.2.7
Design load combination for direct strength analysis
Loading patterns to be considered in direct strength analysis are categorised by type of ship
(by notation) summarised in Table 10 of the Rules.
4.2.8
Design FE load combinations for direct strength analysis are adopted from CSR BC based on
the following:
(a)
A finite element load combination is the combination of a loading pattern defined in

Table 12 to Table 21 of the Rules and a dynamic load case defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2
of the Rules. The corresponding dynamic load cases for each loading pattern are
indicated under the column Dynamic Load Cases in Table 12 to Table 21 of the
Rules.
(b)
The standard FE analysis considers loading patterns, ship draughts, hull girder still
water bending moments and shear forces that are intended to provide an envelope of
the typical loading conditions anticipated in operations. The operation envelope
stipulates:
Seagoing and harbour hull girder still water bending moments and shear forces
specified by the designer as included in the ship's loading manual and fulfilling
the minimum requirements in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 4. However, still water vertical
bending moments that do not normally occur are exempted. Moreover, still water
vertical bending moment in the homogenous loading condition is taken as 50% of
the permissible value.
A maximum ship draught equal to 100% of the ships scantlings draught and a
minimum ship draught equal to of the deepest ballast draught of the ship.
The seagoing ship draughts considered are to provide adequate flexibility for multiport and alternate block load conditions. Full scantling draught in these partial load
conditions is not necessary as a mandatory requirement for all designs.
(c)
(d)
An alternate condition with an empty cargo tank is critical for the bottom structure
due to high upward acting static and wave pressure on the bottom shell and no
counteracting cargo pressure. The side and transverse structures are also under
critical condition due to lack of counteracting cargo pressure against the static and
wave dynamic pressure on the ship side. Likewise, in the loaded hold of an alternate
condition a critical condition for the bottom structure exist, due to high downward
acting static and dynamic tank pressure and little counteracting external sea pressure.
The side and transverse structures are also under considerable load due to small
counteracting pressure on the ship side.
(e)
In heavy ballast condition the shallow draught with the full heavy ballast hold is also
a critical loading condition for the bottom structure due to high downward acting
static and dynamic tank pressure and little counteracting external sea pressure.
(f)
For harbour load cases, shallow draught conditions could be critical for the double
bottom structure. The minimum draught chosen for the analysis is based on the
smallest draught that can be achieved with the loading pattern. The strength of the
hull structure under harbour permissible still water bending moment and still water
shear force is also assessed for shallow draught conditions only.
(g)
Normal ballast condition are not included in the FE loading patterns, as this
condition do not impose the most onerous loads on the main supporting structural
members as the net load on the double hull structure is small with empty cargo tank
JANUARY 2014
and low shallow draught. Normal ballast conditions are important for determination
of hull girder bending strength, which is adequately checked by the longitudinal
strength calculation described in Pt 1, Ch 5 of the Rules.
(h)
Where the designer requests an operation envelope that is not covered by the
standard FE load combinations, the additional loading conditions must be specified
(i)
The loading patterns used in the finite element analysis were chosen such that the
most severe static pressure loads, localised shear forces and bending moments are
imposed on the primary supporting structure of the hull (i.e. frame and girder
system).
(j)
For each of the loading pattern analysed, the distribution of cargo and ballast is only
defined within the three tank length FE model. The use of actual still water bending
moment from the loads applied to the three-tank FE model may be non-conservative
as this does not take into account the loads applied along the whole ship length
outside the extent of the model. For this reason, the permissible seagoing and harbour
still water hull girder bending moments are used in the seagoing and harbour FE
load combinations respectively.
(k)
The hull girder still water shear force is most critical for alternate and heavy ballast
conditions. These loading patterns in combination with the dynamic load cases with
maximum wave shear force in head or following sea assess the hull strength against
hull girder shear loads. For these load case combinations, shear force correction
procedure is to be applied, where necessary, to ensure that the required combined
seagoing permissible still water and maximum wave shear force is achieved in the
sea going FE load combinations. By carefully matching of the FE loading pattern with
ship draught, only minor adjustment of shear forces are needed to obtain the
required hull girder shear forces. For all other load combinations the actual shear
forces that results from the application of static and dynamic local loads to the FE
model are to be used. Where this shear force exceeds the required value, corrections
of vertical loads are to be applied to adjust the shear force down to the required value.
(l)
The finite element load combination (i.e. combination of static and dynamic loads for
seagoing conditions and static loads only for harbour conditions) are to generate the
most severe combination of global and local loads on the structure for the loading
patterns considered.
(m)
The following general considerations are given in combining a loading pattern with
dynamic load cases:
(n)
The hull girder loads are maximised by combining a static loading pattern with
dynamic load cases that have hull girder bending moments/shear forces of the
same sign.
The net local load on primary supporting structural members is maximised by

combining each static loading pattern with appropriate dynamic load cases,
taking into account the net pressure load acting on the structural member and
influence of loads acting on an adjacent structure. The general principle of
maximising the net local pressure loads is explained in Table 1.
The global hull girder loads and local loads are to be combined in such a way that the
stresses due to net local pressure loads acting on the primary support members and
hull girder loads are additive to maximise the stress in certain parts of the structure.
For example, hull girder maximum sagging condition (i.e. dynamic load case HSM-1,
defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2 of the Rules, with maximum wave sagging bending
moment in a wave trough, and maximum sagging still water bending moment) is
combined with a loading pattern with fully loaded holds (middle hold of FE model)
and shallow draught to generate maximised tensile stress at the outer bottom.
JANUARY 2014
(o)
Similarly, hull girder maximum hogging condition (i.e. dynamic load HSM-2, defined
in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 2 of the Rules, with maximum wave hogging bending moment in a
wave crest, and maximum hogging still water bending moment) is combined with a
loading pattern with empty holds (middle holds of FE model) and deep draught to
maximise compressive stress at the outer bottom.
(p)
For seagoing finite element load combinations, several different dynamic load cases
may require to be combined with one loading pattern in order that critical conditions
for different structural members can be examined.
(q)
For the harbour FE load combinations, only static loads are to be applied. The
required still water bending moment and shear force for these FE load combinations
are based on harbour permissible still water bending moments and shear forces.
A study was carried out for a number of designs of various configurations and sizes to
further minimise the required number of combinations of loading pattern and dynamic load
cases.
From the loading principles enumerated from (a) to (q) it is possible to make an educated
guess about which primary supporting members are more likely to be challenged by each FE
Load combination: most cases have been explicitly cited (e.g. double bottom , side, bottom
plating).
However, linking the FE Load combination to a limited set of primary supporting members
for which it is bound to be critical is not a priori certain because the outcome may depend
from different design options.
The development of FE load combinations for aftmost and foremost cargo hold models
specified in Table 18 to Table 21 is in progress.
4.3
Hold mass curves
4.3.1
more in force).
4.3.2
STANDARD LOADING CONDITIONS FOR FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
5.1
Oil tankers
5.1.1
For normal ballast condition, the average draught corresponding to 50% of consumables
would be the most representative one for fatigue assessment. Since the difference between
the minimum draught for normal ballast condition, TBAL, and the average draught is small;
then TBAL is to be used for simplicity.
5.2
Bulk carriers
5.2.1
The loading patters and dynamic load cases must be combined as specified in Table 23 to
Table 25 of the Rules. The required still water vertical bending moments are listed in these
tables. The actual shear forces that results from the application of static and dynamic local
loads to the FE model are to be used. Where this shear force exceeds the target value, the
JANUARY 2014
corrections of vertical loads are to be applied to adjust the shear force down to the target
value. The still water shear force was decided to be taken as 100% of permissible SWSF for
alternate and heavy ballast condition, based on the collected database of actual and
permissible SWSF from nine societies.
For normal and heavy ballast conditions, the average draughts corresponding to 50% of
consumables would be the most representative ones for fatigue assessment. Since the
differences between the minimum draughts for normal and heavy ballast conditions, TBAL,
and TBAL-H, and the average draughts are small; then TBAL and TBAL-H are to be used for
simplicity.
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
HULL GIRDER STRENGTH

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Hull Girder Yielding Strength
1 Strength Characteristics of Hull Girder Transverse Sections

2 Hull Girder Bending Assessment
3 Hull Girder Shear Strength Assessment
SECTION 2
Hull Girder Ultimate Strength
1 Application
2 Checking Criteria
SECTION 3
Hull Girder Residual Strength
1 Application
2 Checking Criteria
APPENDIX 1
Direct Calculation of Shear Flow
1 Calculation Formula
2 Example of Calculations for a Single Side Hull Cross Section
APPENDIX 2
Hull Girder Ultimate Capacity
1 General
2 Incremental-Iterative Method
3 Alternative Methods
PT 1, CH 5, SEC 1 HULL GIRDER YIELDING STRENGTH
STRENGTH CHARACTERISTICS OF HULL GIRDER TRANSVERSE SECTIONS
1.1
General
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Hull girder transverse sections

General
1.2.2
Net scantling
Since the Rules is based on the net scantling approach, the assessment of hull transverse
section characteristics are required to be performed taking scantlings equal to the offered
scantling minus 0.5tc. See the Technical background of Ch 3, Sec 3.
1.2.3
Structural members not contributing to hull girder sectional area
Structural members not contributing to hull girder sectional area are specified taking into
account the hull girder stress transmissions.
1.2.4
Continuous trunks and longitudinal hatch coamings
Considering that usual structural proportions of continuous trunk and longitudinal hatch
coamings, they may be included in the hull girder transverse sections. This requirement is in
accordance with IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010).
1.2.5
Longitudinal stiffeners or girders welded above the strength deck
When the section modulus at deck is calculated, longitudinal stiffeners and girders welded
above the strength deck are to be considered as defined in [1.4.3]. This requirement is based
on IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010).
1.2.6
Longitudinal girders between hatchways, supported by longitudinal

bulkhead
Considering hull girder stress transmission, longitudinal girders between hatchways are
considered to be effective if they are supported by longitudinal bulkheads. This requirement
is based on IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010).
1.2.7
Longitudinal bulkheads with vertical corrugations
Longitudinal bulkheads with vertical corrugations are not effective for hull girder loads
bending because their longitudinal stiffness is small due to out-plane displacements of
corrugations. For hull girder shear the out-plane displacement is smaller, and corrugation
may be considered effective.
1.2.8
Members in materials other than steel
In this requirement, equivalent areas of members having Young's modulus not equal to
2.06105 N/mm are calculated. This requirement is in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010),
Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.2.6] (based on 2.1.6, Sec 1, Ch 6, Pt B of the BV Rules, January 2013).
1.2.9
Definitions of openings
This requirement is based on IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010).

JANUARY 2014
1.2.10 Large openings

1.2.11 Isolated small openings

1.2.12 Lightening holes, draining holes and single scallops

1.2.13 Non-continuous decks and longitudinal bulkheads

This requirement is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 4/2.6.3.10.
1.3
Strength deck
1.3.1
This requirement is in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.3.1] (based on 2.2.1
of Sec 1, Ch 6, Pt B of the BV Rules, January 2013).
1.4
Section modulus
1.4.1
Section modulus at any point
The equation in this requirement can be obtained from the linear beam theory.
1.4.2
Section modulus at bottom
The requirement is based on IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010) and the equation in this
requirement can be obtained from the linear beam theory.
1.4.3
Section modulus at deck
The requirement is based on IACS UR S5 (Rev 1, May 2010) and the equation considers the
shear lag of deck members.
1.5
Moments of inertia
1.5.1
HULL GIRDER BENDING ASSESSMENT
2.1
General
2.1.1
2.1.2
This requirement is in accordance with CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 5, Sec 1, [4.1.2] (based on 4.2.3
of Sec 2, Ch 6, Pt B of BV Rules, January 2013). See Technical background of Ch 3, Sec 1 for
factor k.
JANUARY 2014
2.2
Normal stresses
2.2.1
IACS UR S11 (Rev 7, November 2010) takes the permissible stress in the 0.4L region
amidships based on the gross scantling approach as 175 N/mm2 (based on mild steel). In
CSR which uses the net scantling approach, since the figure is 0.9 times the original section
modulus, which becomes the renewal criterion of various classification societies for hull
transverse section, the permissible stress in the gross scantling approach is divided by 0.9 to
arrive at the value of 190 N/mm2 as the permissible stress (17.5 kgf/mm2/0.9 9.81 = 190).
The corrosion amount specified in Ch 3, Sec 3 is applicable to existing ships (5 types of ships
namely VLCC, Aframax, Capesize BC, Panamax BC and Handymax BC). The figure here
after shows the ratio of the section modulus of deck and bottom to the original section
modulus for each type of ship. From this figure, since the section modulus is about 0.9 times
the original section modulus for all ship types, evaluation with the net scantling approach
using the permissible value is equivalent to the method used in the existing rules.
Figure 1: Section modulus considering corrosion of BC and Tankers
Generally, scantling of members contributing to the hull girder longitudinal strength may be
gradually reduced, outside 0.4L amidships. In CSR, the gradual reduction of scantlings of
structural members contributing to hull girder strength are unified by setting the allowable
stress outside 0.4L amidships.
2.2.2
The calculation formula for normal stress arising from vertical bending moment in the intact
condition (non-flooded condition) is shown, and it is the same as in the existing rules.
In harbour conditions, only the (S) design load is considered as specified in Table 1 of Ch 4,
Sec 7.
According to IACS UR S17 (Rev 8, May 2010), the requirement of longitudinal strength of
hull girder in flooded condition is to be complied with in respect of the flooding of any cargo
JANUARY 2014
hold of bulk carriers with notation BC-A or BC-B. The calculation formula for normal stress
due to vertical bending moment in flooded condition is given, and it is the same as in the
existing rules.
2.2.3
Normal stress when a material other than steel is used is to be calculated by simplified
formula using the ratio of Young's modulus.
2.3
Minimum net moment of inertia and net section modulus at midship section
2.3.1
This regulation is based on IACS UR, S4 (Rev 3, May 2010).
2.3.2
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S7 (Rev 4, May 2010) taking into account the
coefficient 0.9 based on the corrosion deduction, 0.5tc.
2.4
Extent of high tensile steel
2.4.1
Vertical extent
The vertical extent of higher strength steel considers hull girder bending stresses only and
takes into account the actual hull girder bending stress in deck or bottom. Similar to the
longitudinal extent of higher strength steel the requirement of vertical extent of higher
strength steel is included to ensure that the stress level in the structural members outside the
high strength steel area are not above the allowable in relation to the material in this area.
2.4.2
Longitudinal extent
The longitudinal extent of material with higher strength steel is to be carried through to a
position where the hull girder stress is below the permissible for mild steel or high tensile
steel of lower yield stress if this is used.
HULL GIRDER SHEAR STRENGTH ASSESSMENT
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.2
Hull girder shear capacity
3.2.1
Permissible shear stress for seagoing operations (S+D condition) is increased from 110/k
N/mm2 for gross scantlings (IACS UR, S11, Rev 7, November 2010) to 120/k N/mm2 to
reflect the net thickness approach. The acceptance criteria for harbour/tank testing
operations is 87.5% of that for the seagoing conditions. The corresponding ratio for the
allowable bending stress is 75%. The reason for the difference is that the ratio between
dynamic and the static component is different for the two responses.
Whereas the wave bending moment is typically 1.5-2 times the static bending moment the
situation is opposite for shear where the design static shear forces is about 2 times the wave
shear. The 87.5% for the harbour is set such that 100% is achieved by adding half the
dynamic component which is the hull girder wave shear force.
JANUARY 2014
3.3
3.3.1
Acceptance criteria
Permissible vertical shear force
The required vertical shear forcer can be obtained from summation of permissible still water
shear force and wave induced shear force. This required vertical shear force is to be smaller
than the total vertical hull girder shear capacity QR. For bulk carriers, the shear force
correction which is caused by shear force transmission in longitudinal girders may be taken
into account. In harbour conditions, only the (S) design load is considered as specified in
Table 1 of Ch 4, Sec 7.
3.3.2
Vertical still water shear force
The corrected vertical still water shear force, whatever the considered loading condition is, is
to be smaller than the permissible still water shear force.
3.4
Effective net thickness for longitudinal bulkheads between cargo tanks of oil
tankers
3.4.1
Towards each end of the cargo tanks, the shear force carried by longitudinal bulkheads,
inner hull and side shell departs from closed cell shear flow theory, due to local shear force
distribution effects.
3.4.2
Local shear force distribution is due to the shear load being transferred into the
longitudinal structure via the transverse structure such as floors to the longitudinal
bulkheads and girders into the transverse bulkheads. The local shear force distribution is
accounted for by applying a thickness deduction, t, to the longitudinal bulkhead thickness
used in the calculation of shear capacity. This thickness deduction represents the proportion
of the longitudinal bulkhead shear capacity that is required to resist the local shear force
distribution effects and hence can not be utilised as part of the longitudinal shear capacity.
t sfi n 50 = t i grs 0.5t c t i
t i =
Q3
hblk i perm
x
1 blk
0.5l tk
2( z p hdb )
2
hblk
The additional shear stress caused by the local shear force distribution is assumed to be a
triangularly distributed with the maximum value at the inner bottom level decreasing to
zero at upper deck, hence the vertical distribution of the thickness deduction also linearly
decreases. This distribution is consistent with that seen in 3D FEM analysis results.
It is assumed that the maximum thickness reduction, tmax, due to the shear force correction
will be close to transverse bulkhead just above inner bottom, hence where xblk = 0 and zp = hdb,
see Figure 2, and that the reduction is linearly tapered from this maximum value to zero in
middle of the tank (xblk = 0.5tk).
2 Q 3
t max =
h blk i perm
JANUARY 2014
Figure 2: Shear force correction for longitudinal bulkheads
3.4.3
Shear force correction for a ship with a centreline longitudinal bulkhead
The term Q3 represents the mean value of local shear force that is transferred to the
longitudinal bulkhead via the floors. This value is dependent on the cargo tank configuration
as well as the bottom structure arrangement and stiffness. In all cases, the magnitude of Q3
is based on the worst case differential net load on the double bottom structure.
Q 3 = 0.5K 3 Fdb
For tankers with a centre line bulkhead the local load distribution factor, K3, is calculated
depending on the structural arrangement. The formulation for K3 assumes there are no
partial girders fitted to the design. It is known that maximum Q3 occurs in the loading
condition with the greatest downwards net load in the cargo tanks.
3.4.4
Shear force correction for a ship with two longitudinal bulkheads between
the cargo tanks
For tankers with two longitudinal bulkheads the local load distribution factor, K3, is
calculated depending on the structural arrangement. Based on previous studies, it is known
maximum Q3 occurs in the loading condition with the greatest downwards net load in the
centre cargo tank.
3.4.5
Vertical force on double bottom
For consistency of calculation of maximum resulting (or net load) force (or net load) on the
double bottom, Fdb, the loading patterns used in the design verification by finite element
analysis are also used to derive the maximum net load on the double bottom. For standard
tankers and simplicity Fdb can be expressed as a function of the principal dimensions of the
cargo tank and the ships draught.
JANUARY 2014
3.4.6
Equivalent net thickness of corrugated bulkhead
This statement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 4/2.6.4.4 and 2.6.4.5. The equivalent net
thickness for corrugated plate is reduced by the ratio between projected length of the
corrugation and expanded length of the corrugation. This equivalent net thickness represents
the shear stiffness of the corrugation.
3.5
Effective net thickness for longitudinal bulkheads between cargo tanks of oil
tankers - Correction due to loads from transverse bulkhead stringers
3.5.1
It is known from the results of 3D FEM analysis that loading conditions which feature wing
and centre tanks abreast filled with adjacent cargo tanks fore/aft empty result in very high
shear stress at longitudinal bulkhead in the vicinity of transverse bulkhead below the
horizontal stringers. This is due to the local shear force transferred from the transverse
bulkhead stringers into the longitudinal bulkheads. This phenomenon can be address using
finite element analysis. However, in the Rules, it was therefore decided that the assigned
shear forces should account for this additional local shear stress in an explicit and
transparent way.
Accordingly the rule formulation for permissible hull girder shear force accounts for the
additional shear stress components acting in this loading condition by reducing the effective
longitudinal bulkhead thickness used in the hull girder shear capacity calculation. The main
areas affected are the longitudinal bulkhead plating in way of the ends of the transverse
bulkhead stringers. The maximum local shear stresses are experienced when the transverse
bulkhead is only loaded from one side. For example, with a combination of all cargo tanks
across being empty on one side of the bulkhead and all full on the other side, see Figure 3,
this induces the maximum net load across the bulkhead and hence the maximum
reaction/support forces in the ends of the bulkhead stringers.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 3: Region for stringer correction for a Tanker with two stringers
3.5.2
The total stringer supporting force (Fst-k) in way of a longitudinal bulkhead may be divided
into three parts:
(a) Below the stringer, complimentary shear acting downwards (Qst-k) which adds to the
hull girder longitudinal shear stress.
(b) Above the stringer, complimentary shear acting upwards (Qu-k) which will subtract
from the hull girder shear stress.
(c) Direct stresses in way of toe and heel of stringer connection to longitudinal bulkhead
(axial stress in longitudinal or platform in way of termination of stinger).
Note: k denotes the k-th bulkhead stringer from the deck.
Correspondingly, the shear force above the stringer (Qu-k) will produce a shear stress (u-k)
with opposite sign to the hull girder shear stress. The total shear stress below a stringer must
satisfy the following:
JANUARY 2014
HG + k C t yd
The actual hull girder shear stress in way of a stringer is given by:
HG =
tr i perm
tk
hence
tr i perm
tk
Qst k
Ct yd
st k tk
and consequently,
tr =
tk
i perm
Q
Ct yd st k
st k tk
where,
Ct
: 0.90 permissible shear stress coefficient.
yd
: Specified minimum shear yield stress of the material, in N/mm2.
tr
: The available or equivalent thickness in way of the k-th stringer based on the hull
girder shear stress assessment taking into account the shear load from stringers.
i-perm
: Permissible hull girder shear stress.
In the Rules, the thickness, tr, has been redefined as the equivalent net thickness, tsti-k-n50. This
thickness is the thickness that is available to be used in the hull girder shear capacity
assessment after deducting a proportion of that thickness which is used to resist the local
shear stresses arising from the bulkhead stringers. Hence tsti-k-n50 is given by:
t sti k n 50 =
t sfi n 50
Ct yd Qst k
st tsfi n 50
i perm
where,
tsfi-n50
: Effective net plating thickness after correction for the local shear correction for
longitudinal bulkheads between cargo tanks.
This stringer correction is to be carried out in the full length of the stringer connection
(buttress) and from the level of the considered stringer to a level 0.5hk below, see Figure 1.
For the lowermost stringer, the stringer correction to be applied down to the level of the
inner bottom, see also Figure 2.
Based on FEM analyses the total shear force in the longitudinal bulkhead was found to be 7580% of the total stringer supporting force (Fstr-k) and with the remaining force carried by
direct stresses in way of toe and heel of the stringer connection. The distribution between
the stringer shear force above and below the stringer connection was found to be dependent
on the relative distance to the inner bottom and upper deck. From this the following
expressions for the stringer shear forces Qstr-k and Qu-k were developed:
z h db
z h db
and Q u- k = 0.8 Fst - k st - k
Q st - k = 0.8 Fst - k 1 st - k
h blk
h blk
where,
h db z st - k h blk + h db
JANUARY 2014
3.6
Shear force correction for bulk carriers
3.6.1
The formula of shear force correction is obtained by supposing that the girders are simply
supported by transverse bulkheads. Moreover, the ratio of the total stress transmitted to the
girders in the cases of the following hypothesis is determined.
(a) The frames are supposed by be simply supported.
(b) A ratio takes into account the fact that the frames have a certain degree of fixity.
The loads transmitted by the double bottom longitudinal girders to the transverse bulkheads
are estimated by the function of the aspect ratio of the double bottom structure, 0/b0.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, SEC 2 HULL GIRDER ULTIMATE STRENGTH
APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
The hull girder strength is the most critical failure mode for hull structure. As the ships
length becomes longer, this strength is more important. Hence, the hull girder ultimate
strength check is required to ships with length (L) not less than 150m.
1.1.2
Since the bending moment is quite small in fore and aft, it is not relevant to do the ultimate
strength check.
1.1.3
The conditions for which the hull girder ultimate bending capacity is to be checked are listed
for bulk carriers and oil tankers.
CHECKING CRITERIA
2.1
General
2.1.1
The conditions that need to be checked are different for Bulkers and Tankers, due to the
difference in operation pattern, loading distribution, and structural configurations.
The condition B is to be checked especially for tankers, with consideration of the operational
full load condition rather than the limit values of the bending moment. The partial safety
factors have been calibrated with direct reliability analysis.
Failure in sagging is identified as the most critical failure mode for double hull tankers in the
full load condition due to the way they are loaded and due to the conventional structural
arrangement with a double bottom and single skin deck. Hence only sagging is included for
condition B.
2.1.2
The hull girder ultimate capacity is an explicit control of one of the most critical failure
modes of a double hull tanker. Therefore, the criterion for the ultimate strength of the hull
girder is given in a partial safety factor format. The partial safety factor for the vertical hull
girder ultimate bending capacity is to be taken equal to:
R = M DB
where M is the partial safety factor for the vertical hull girder ultimate bending capacity,
covering material, geometric and strength prediction uncertainties; in general, to be taken
equal to 1.1 and DB is the partial safety factor for the vertical hull girder ultimate bending
capacity, covering the effect of double bottom bending, to be taken equal to 1.25 for BC-A
bulk carriers in in hogging condition, 1.1 for oil tankers in hogging condition and BC-B/BCC bulk carriers in hogging condition and 1.0 for oil tankers and bulk carriers in sagging
condition.
Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt2_Ch01_Sec02_BC Double Bottom Arrangement and TB
Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_HG Longitudinal Strength.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, SEC 2 HULL GIRDER ULTIMATE STRENGTH
2.2
Hull girder ultimate bending loads
2.2.1
Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_HG Longitudinal Strength.
2.3
Hull girder ultimate bending capacity
2.3.1
Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_Sec02_Iterative Method for HGULS.
2.3.2
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, SEC 3 HULL GIRDER RESIDUAL STRENGTH
APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
As the ships length becomes longer, this strength is more important. Hence, the hull girder
residual strength check is required to ships with length (L) not less than 150m.
1.1.2
1.1.3
It has been decided that the hull girder residual strength is to be checked within the cargo
area and the machinery space since damages in the fore and aft peaks have limited influence
on the hull girder strength.
CHECKING CRITERIA
2.1
General
2.1.1
The residual strength is to be checked for both hogging and sagging conditions.
2.1.2
The criterion for the residual strength of the hull girder is given in a partial safety factor
format.
2.2
2.2.1
Damage conditions
General
The two damage conditions taken into account are collision and grounding.
2.2.2
Collision
The damage extent for collision is described. The capacity of the damaged transverse cross
section is calculated with the damage extent on one side, the ship kept in upright position. In
addition, a figure illustrates how h and d is measured for ship with camber is attached in
Figure 1.
Figure 1: Damage extent for ship with chamber
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, SEC 3 HULL GIRDER RESIDUAL STRENGTH
2.2.3
Grounding
The damage extent for grounding is described. The damage is to be considered on the
bottom in the most unfavourable transversal position as regard to the structure considered
by the damage, i.e. the damage extent is to be shifted on the bottom line to find the most
unfavourable position based on actual design.
2.3
Hull girder ultimate bending loads in the damaged condition
2.3.1
For the residual strength case, which is a major incident with a high uncertainty as to the
magnitude and location of the damage, it is reasonable to accept a more all-round evaluation,
and a factor of 1.1 on Msw is intended to cover the potential increase in still water loads at the
location of the damage. This factor also ties in with the minimum Msw-f which is to be at least
1.1 times the Msw.
The residual strength criterion is likely to be a different scenario than a flooding scenario
because:
(a)
Collision and grounding are more likely to take place closer to the coast, and in
milder environmental conditions than e.g. flooding due to hatch cover problems that
may occur in severe weather, open sea.
(b)
The residual strength is an issue after a rather unlikely event leading to major
damage and a significant reduction in the structural strength which calls for an
immediate repair. Flooding may occur under a number of other circumstances that
have a less significant effect on the residual strength. Flooding then is a more
frequent even than the residual strength situation.
For these reasons it is rationale to argue for a lower factor (i.e. 0.67) in the residual strength
case. SD is the partial safety factor for the still water bending moment in the damaged
condition, to account for increased still water bending moment due to accidental flooding
and WD is the partial safety factor for the vertical wave bending moment in the damaged
condition, accounting for 3 months exposure in the worldwide condition. Refer to TB Report,
TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_Sec03_HG Residual Strength.
2.4
Hull girder ultimate bending capacity in the damaged condition
2.4.1
Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_Sec03_HG Residual Strength and TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch05_Sec02_Iterative Method for HGULS.
2.4.2
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, APP 1 - DIRECT CALCULATION OF SHEAR FLOW
CALCULATION FORMULA
1.1
General
1.1.1
The shear flow q, working along a ship cross section due to hull girder shear force, at each
location in the cross section, can be obtained by summing the determinate shear flow, qD,
calculated according to the method given in TB [1.2] and the indeterminate shear flow, qI
calculated according to the method given in TB [1.3].
(1)
1.2
Determinate shear flow
1.2.1
Lets consider that the thin-walled beam is bending under lateral loads and the equilibrium
of force into a small piece element as shown in Figure 1, we can obtain the following
equations.
(2)
Axial stress, x can be calculated from bending moment, M working in the thin-walled beam
as:
(3)
where,
M
: Bending moment.
Iy
: Moment inertia about y-axis.
zG
: Z coordinate of horizontal neutral axis.
Substituting Equation (3) into Equation (2), we can obtain the formula of determinate shear
flow as follows:
(4)
Figure 1: Small elements in thin-walled beam
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, APP 1/PAGE 1
1.2.2
The formula defined in TB [1.2.1] can be obtained if you assume that the thin-walled beam is
composed of line segments and discretise Equation (4).
1.2.3
The requirement is just an explanation of the way to calculate determinate shear flow.
1.2.4
The requirement is just an explanation of the way to calculate determinate shear flow.
1.3
Indeterminate shear flow
1.3.1
The Strain energy, I of the thin-walled beam can be written as:
(5)
Since indeterminate shear flow, qI around each closed cell, arise so as to minimise the strain
energy of the beam, the following equation holds:
(6)
qIk
: Indeterminate shear flow of closed cell k.
Substituting Equation (5) into Equation (6), we can obtain the following equation as qIk is
included only in the terms of the walls constituting closed cell k.
(7)
Total shear flow along closed cell k can be written as:
(8)
If closed cell k and closed cell i have a common wall. Substituting Equation (8) into Equation
(7), the following equation can be obtained.
(9)
1.3.2
The formula defined in TB [1.3.1] of the rule can be obtained if you assume that the thinwalled beam is composed of line segments and discretise Equation (9).
1.4
Computation of several properties of the cross section
1.4.1
JANUARY 2014
1.4.2
1.4.3
EXAMPLE OF CALCULATIONS FOR A SINGLE SIDE HULL CROSS SECTION
2.1
Cross section data
2.1.1
The coordinates of the node points (filled black circles on Figure 4) are given in Table 1.
2.1.2
The Z coordinate of neutral axis and the inertia moment about the neutral axis are calculated
according to the methods given in TB [1.4].
2.2
Calculations of the determinate shear flow
2.2.1
The determinate shear flow, qD, is calculated according to the method given in TB [1.2].
2.3
Calculations of the indeterminate shear flow
2.3.1
The indeterminate shear flow, qI, is calculated according to the method given in TB [1.3].
2.3.2
2.4
Summation
2.4.1
The shear flows, q, is obtained by summing the determinate shear flow, qD, and the
indeterminate shear flow, qI.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 5, APP 2 HULL GIRDER ULTIMATE CAPACITY
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
The definition of the hull girder ultimate longitudinal bending moment capacity is given.
1.2
Methods
1.2.1
Incremental-iterative method
There is a method of deriving the hull girder ultimate bending capacity in sagging included
in the Rules. This method is the incremental-iterative method for calculation of the
progressive failure of the hull girder.
1.2.2
Alternative method
There are many methods for deriving hull girder ultimate strength capacity. They can be
grouped as simplified formula, progressive failure analysis approach or non-linear FEM
approach. Comparison studies performed indicate that the results of the methods are
similar.
1.3
Assumptions
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
INCREMENTAL-ITERATIVE METHOD
2.1
Assumptions
2.1.1
The incremental-iterative method is based on the following simplifying assumptions:
Each cross section is made of an assembly of independent elements or components:
plate panels, stiffened plate panels and hard corners, thus enabling to determine the
structural behaviour for each component.
Transverse cross-sections of the ship hull remain plane after deformation and
perpendicular to the neutral surface, enabling to calculate the strain E for any
curvature , according to the following formula: E = z (z being the distance from the
element under consideration to the neutral axis).
JANUARY 2014
Collapse occurs for panels located between two adjacent transverse primary members.
Elasto-plastic behaviour of each component is determined both in tension and in
compression.
Influence of shear stresses is neglected.
Calculations are made considering the net scantlings of the section.
The method takes advantage of the possibility to determine for each component the
relevant load-end curves "-", as indicated hereafter. The load-end curves "-" are based on
the elasto-plastic collapse for lengthened components and on the buckling collapse for
shortened components. The method adopted for determination of the load-end shortening
curves "-" is based on the following two assumptions:
Variation of the effective width of attached plating with the strain E, as originally
proposed by Gordo and Soares.
Generalisation of the Johnson-Ostenfeld correction to any strain level.
2.2
2.2.1
Procedure
General
Refer to TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch05_Sec02_Iterative Method for HGULS.
2.2.2
Modelling of the hull girder cross section
2.3
2.3.1
Load-end shortening curves

Stiffened plate element and stiffener element
2.3.2
Hard corner element
2.3.3
Elasto-plastic collapse of structural elements
2.3.4
Beam column buckling
2.3.5
Torsional buckling
2.3.6
Web local buckling of stiffeners made of flanged profiles
2.3.7
Web local buckling of stiffeners made of flat bars
2.3.8
Plate buckling
JANUARY 2014
ALTERNATIVE METHODS
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.2
Non-linear finite element analysis
3.2.1
3.2.2
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
HULL LOCAL SCANTLING

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
General
1 Application
SECTION 2
Load Application
1 Load Combination
2 Design Load Sets
SECTION 3
Minimum Thicknesses
1 Plating
2 Stiffeners and Tripping Brackets
SECTION 4
Plating
1 Plating Subjected to Lateral Pressure

2 Special Requirements
SECTION 5
Stiffeners
1 Stiffeners Subject to Lateral Pressure
SECTION 6
Primary Supporting Members and Pillars
1 General
2 Primary Supporting Members Within Cargo Area
3 Primary Supporting Members Outside Cargo Area
4 Pillars
APPLICATION
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
Required scantlings
1.1.4
Additional local strength requirements
1.2
Acceptance criteria
1.2.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 2 LOAD APPLICATION
LOAD COMBINATION
1.1
1.1.1
Hull girder bending

Normal stresses
This requirement specifies the normal stress to be considered for the strength check of
plating and stiffeners contributing to the hull girder longitudinal strength.
1.2
1.2.1
Lateral pressures
Static and dynamic pressures in intact conditions
The basic concept considered related to loads are static loads and dynamic loads
corresponding to static and dynamic load cases, induced by the sea, cargoes, other liquids
and various type of loads.
1.2.2
Lateral pressure in flooded conditions
Flooding pressures on boundaries of compartments carrying liquids are generally less than
pressures in intact conditions and/or tank testing pressures because air pipes of such
compartments are fitted above the freeboard deck. On external shell such as bottom and side
shell, flooding pressures are reduced due to the consideration of counter pressures from the
external sea. Therefore, lateral pressure in flooded conditions is considerable only to the
compartments not intended to carry liquids excluding external shell.
1.3
1.3.1
Pressure combination
Elements of the outer shell
1.3.2
Elements other than those of the outer shell
2
2.1
2.1.1
DESIGN LOAD SETS

Application of load components
Application
Design load sets applicable to both ship types are defined in this section. Design load sets for
primary supporting members in cargo area are ship type-specific and defined in each
chapter of Pt 2.
2.1.2
Load components
Load components, Pin, Pex, Pdl, etc are defined in Ch 4, Sec 7, Table 1 for the various
combination of compartments and design load scenarios being considered.
2.1.3
Design load sets for plating, stiffeners and PSM
In general, maximum pressure of two sides of the boundary at the corresponding draft is to
be used except bottom and side shell for which net pressure difference between tank
pressure and sea pressure is to be used. Table 1 is introduced for common understandings on
this principle.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 2 LOAD APPLICATION
For bottom and side shell in static condition tank testing (Design Load Set WB-3, WB-6,
TK-2), 0.25TSC is to be used for the net pressure difference of internal ballast pressure and
external sea pressure irrespective of vessel configuration.
Tank testing is assumed carried out filling half of ballast tanks fully for zig-zag loading. Then,
testing draught may be assumed as the average of lightship draft and normal ballast draft.
Following table shows that 0.25TSC as testing draft from CSR OT (July 2010) is less than the
average of two drafts, therefore 0.25TSC is taken as a reasonable and conservative-side
approximation of testing draft.
Table 1:
BC-1
BC-2
BC-3
BC-4
OT-1
OT-2
Testing draft, 0.25TSC for different vessels
Tsc
[m]
Lightship
draft [m]
N. Ballast
draft [m]
Average
[m]
0.25Tsc
[m]
11.50
13.00
14.55
18.20
12.30
22.60
2.26
2.33
2.23
2.68
2.56
3.40
4.88
5.92
5.78
8.10
6.69
9.60
3.57
4.13
4.01
5.39
4.63
6.50
2.28
3.25
3.64
4.55
3.08
5.65
In case of tank testing in dry dock, the pressure on bottom shell will typically increase about
20% if counter pressure 0.25TSC is disregarded. The static case shall also address frequent
loads and the dry dock testing can be handled as an extreme load AC-SD which has 20%
higher allowable stress. Longitudinal stresses can also be ignored, so this case will not be
relevant for design verification.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 3 MINIMUM THICKNESSES
PLATING
1.1
Minimum thickness requirements
1.1.1
These requirements are applicable to the entire hull structure. The requirements are derived
from a combination of the existing rule requirements of CSR for tankers and bulk carriers
(July 2010). It is emphasised that the existing minimum requirement formulas were
developed based on sound service history over many years and also served to add a degree
of robustness to implicitly take care of issues not explicitly handled in the rules such as;
vibrations, vibration-induced fatigue, impact loads, contact loads, local buckling in way of
large curved panels, etc, which are prevalent in the area near the propeller.
In order for an effort to maintain the minimum scantlings as much as those required in the
current CSR (July 2010), conservative approach that takes whichever greater requirements
between CSR for tankers and CSR for bulk carriers has been made. However, unlike its CSR
requirement for tankers (July 2010), CSR requirements for bottom and side shell plating of
bulk carriers are different. Such discrepancy used to be a source of ambiguity during
scantling application especially for non-parallel body of vessels where the boundaries of
bottom and side shell or bilge are not clear. Therefore, it has been decided to adopt CSR
requirement of bottom plating for bulk carriers applicable to both of the bottom and side
shell/bilge plating since it closely simulates a derived formula from linearisation of two
requirements.
The parameter ship length has been limited to 300m. This limitation has been adopted from
CSR for tankers (July 2010). This limitation is feasible because tanker designs with length
over 300m confirm the validity of this limit within the tanker rules, while no bulk carriers
which comply with CSR for bulk carriers (July 2010) and which are larger than 300m exists.
The detailed comparison study between CSR for tankers and CSR for bulk carriers has been
carried out and the results are shown in Table 1.
Table 1:
Description
Keel
Bottom shell
Side shell
(Aft end)
Side shell
& Bilge
Weather deck &
Strength deck
Platform deck
(Machinery)
JANUARY 2014
Comparison of minimum thickness for plating (net)

L (m)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
150
11.0
12.0
12.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
11.0
10.5
11.0
9.0
10.5
10.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
8.5
6.5
8.5
200
12.5
13.5
13.5
10.5
11.5
11.5
12.5
12.0
12.5
10.5
12.0
11.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
6.5
8.5
250
14.0
15.0
15.0
12.0
13.0
13.0
14.5
13.5
14.5
12.0
13.5
13.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
8.5
6.5
8.5
300
15.5
16.5
16.5
13.5
14.5
14.5
16.0
14.5
16.0
13.5
14.5
14.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
8.5
6.5
8.5
350
15.5
16.5
13.5
14.5
16.0
16.0
13.5
14.5
10.5
10.5
8.5
6.5
8.5
Inner bottom
Inner bottom
(Machinery)
Hopper, Top side
(BC only)
Hull internal tank
Trans/Longi
WT BHD
Non-tight/
Wash BHD
Pillar BHD
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
10.0
10.0
9.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
6.0
6.5
6.0
7.5
7.5
11.5
11.5
10.5
11.5
11.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
7.5
7.5
13.0
13.0
11.5
12.5
12.5
11.0
11.0
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
7.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
7.5
14.5
14.5
12.5
14.0
14.0
12.0
12.0
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
7.5
6.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
14.5
12.5
14.0
12.0
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
7.5
6.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
STIFFENERS AND TRIPPING BRACKETS
2.1
2.1.1
This requirement specifies minimum net thickness of web and tripping bracket, based on the
one indicated in the existing rule requirements of CSR for tankers (July 2010), see Table 2
below. The requirement for web thickness of side hold frames is based on requirement of
IACS UR S12.3 (Rev 5, May 2010) of which length L has been limited to 200m. In addition,
some ratio between web thickness of stiffener and thickness of attached plating is specified
to allow a suitable weldability.
Table 2:
Comparison of minimum thickness for stiffener web/tripping bracket (net)

Description
Tight boundary
Elsewhere
Ordinary side
hold frame
(BC only)
Tripping BKT
JANUARY 2014
L (m)
150
200
250
300
350
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
5.0
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
5.5
5.5
10.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
6.5
6.5
11.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
12.0
10.0
9.5
9.5
8.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
10.0
9.5
9.5
3.1
3.1.1
The requirements are derived from combination of the existing rule requirements of CSR for
tankers and bulk carriers. In order for an effort to maintain the minimum scantlings as much
as those required in the current CSR (July 2010), conservative approach that takes whichever
greater requirements between CSR for tankers and CSR for bulk carriers has been made.
The minimum web plating thickness of primary supporting members in cargo compartments
0.6 L 2 , was increased to 0.7 L 2 in aft and forward part regions considering actual as built
thicknesses. These requirements are based on CSR for bulk carriers (July 2010) and RINA
Rules (January 2013). The required minimum thickness for floors and web plating of primary
supporting structures derived from the criteria were compared with the scantling
requirements for CSR vessels. Comparisons for primary supporting members are shown in
Table 3.
JANUARY 2014
Table 3:
Description
DB CL girder
Machinery space
DB CL girder
Elsewhere
Bottom girder
Machinery space
Bottom girder
Fore part
Bottom girder
Elsewhere
Duct keel
Machinery space
Bottom floor
Machinery space
Bottom floor
Fore part
Bottom floor
Elsewhere
Aft peak floor
Web
Aft/Fore
Web
Elsewhere
JANUARY 2014
Comparison of minimum thickness for PSM (net)

L (m)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
CSR OT (mm)
CSR BC (mm)
CSR-H (mm)
150
9.5
11.5
11.5
9.5
7.5
9.5
8.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
8.5
12.5
12.5
8.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
200
10.5
12.5
12.5
10.5
8.5
10.5
9.5
11.0
11.0
9.5
10.0
10.0
9.5
8.5
9.5
14.0
14.0
9.5
11.0
11.0
9.5
10.0
10.0
8.0
8.5
8.5
9.5
10.0
10.0
9.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
8.5
8.5
250
12.0
13.5
13.5
12.0
9.5
12.0
10.5
11.5
11.5
10.5
11.0
11.0
10.5
9.5
10.5
15.0
15.0
10.5
11.5
11.5
10.5
11.0
11.0
8.5
9.5
9.5
10.5
11.0
11.0
10.5
11.0
11.0
9.5
9.5
9.5
300
13.0
14.0
14.0
13.0
10.5
13.0
11.5
12.5
12.5
11.0
12.0
12.0
11.5
10.5
11.5
16.5
16.5
11.5
12.5
12.5
11.0
12.0
12.0
9.5
10.5
10.5
11.5
12.0
12.0
11.5
12.0
12.0
10.0
10.5
10.5
350
13.0
14.0
13.0
10.5
13.0
11.5
12.5
11.0
12.0
12.0
11.5
10.5
11.5
16.5
16.5
11.5
12.5
11.0
12.0
12.0
9.5
10.5
10.5
11.5
12.0
12.0
11.5
12.0
12.0
10.0
10.5
10.5
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 4 PLATING
SYMBOLS
p
: Aspect Ratio Correction
This correction is based on non-linear analysis carried out during development of CSR OT
(July 2010) for evaluation of aspect ratio. The results are in good agreement with the existing
DNV formulation. Since the curve in the existing DNV formulation is nearly straight for s/l
ratio between 0.4 and 1.0, the format of the equation is changed similar to that in the existing
LR Rules (January 2013).
ABS Rules:
DNV Rules:
LR Rules:
CSR-H:

2.077
s
,(max 1.0 )
k( ABS ) =

+ 0.272
s
2
s
k( DNV ) = 1.1 0.25 , (max 1.0 )

3.075
k( LR ) = 1.1 0.4
s
, (max 1.0 )

This curve used
This format used
s
2100
max .1.0 , s(mm ), (m )
k( CSR ) = 1.2
Figure 1: Plate aspect ratio for BC and OT
: Coefficient
The coefficient, , is applicable for boundaries of flooded compartments, which are not
intended to carry liquids (i.e. dry and void spaces or cargo holds carrying dry cargo in bulk),
except bulkhead structure covered by Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec 3, [3]. The standard acceptance criteria
is adjusted for the collision bulkhead and other watertight boundaries by the coefficient
JANUARY 2014
which represents the ratio of permissible stress in flooded condition to that in intact
condition. The coefficient is calibrated in order to maintain similar severity in flooded
condition with CSR for bulk carriers (July 2010).
The coefficient, , also reduces allowable stress on inner bottom and hopper in cargo holds of
bulk carriers:
= 0.7 for plates

= 0.9 for stiffeners and primary supporting members
The purpose is to adjust scantling requirement for plate and stiffeners in this Rules to be
similar to required scantlings in CSR BC (July 2010) and to reflect the expected variation in
local load level for bulk cargos. For simplicity the same value is also applied for liquid
pressures on inner bottom and hopper of bulk carriers.
PLATING SUBJECTED TO LATERAL PRESSURE
1.1
1.1.1
Yielding check
Plating
Technical background is provided for:

Capacity formula.
Allowable stress for Ca.
Coefficient .
Plate aspect ratio correction p.
The capacity formula:
The requirement to net thickness, in mm, of plate subject to lateral pressure is given by the
following formula:
t = 0.0158 p s
C a R eH
The formula is derived considering a beam having section with a unit width (1) and depth of
plate thickness; the bending moment distribution when both ends are fixed is as follows:
JANUARY 2014
Figure 2: Plate panel surrounded by local/primary support members

l
Section of the unit beam
Ps 2
12
Elastic BM
Ps 2
12
Ps 2
24
t
1
Plastic BM
Elastic bending moment at both ends = Ps2/12
Ps 2
16
Ps
16
Ps 2
16
Plastic bending moment at both ends = Ps2/16
If the above model is loaded until plastic hinges are created at the mid-span and at the ends
then:
Moment at both ends and mid-span
Plastic section modulus
Assuming allowable stress
= Ps2/16
= t2/4
= Ca ReH
= M/SM = Ps2/(4t2)
Therefore,
t=
s
P
2 C a R eH
where,
s
is in mm.
P
is in N/mm2.
ReH is in N/mm.
Converting the unit of P from N/mm2 to kN/m2:
P
s
P
t=
= 0.0158 s
C a R eH
2 1000 C a R eH
Allowable stress factor, Ca:
The permissible bending stress factor (Ca) was determined during development of CSR OT
(July 2010) and based on non-linear finite element analysis as outlined below.
JANUARY 2014
The study investigated plastic strain and permanent deformation of a long plate with
characteristic as given in Table 1. All edges were fixed against rotation and kept straight.
The material curve has a linear strain hardening of ET =1000 N/mm2 for stresses exceeding
yield stress, ReH. Youngs modulus was E = 206,000 N/mm2, and Poisson ratio was set to =
0.3.
The plate was subject to incremental lateral pressure until Ca = 1.0 and different
combinations of transverse and longitudinal membrane stresses. The plate was loaded with
due consideration to loading sequence in order to apply the load history which give the
lowest possible plate bending capacity.
Table 1: Characteristics of finite element models used
Plate thickness
t (mm)
10
13
16
800
HT32
Length of plate, l (mm)

4800
HT32
MS, HT32, HT36
HT32
Summary analysis results:

1. The results show that the bending strength of plates is particularly sensitive to
transverse compression.
2. Also longitudinal compression reduces the plate bending strength, but primarily
when acting in combination with transverse compression.
3. The evaluation of the results has mainly focused on the permanent plastic strain.
Benchmark giving permanent plastic surface strain based on the following upper limitations:
1. Load combination a (static loads, functional loads or loads with short return period) 2
times yield.
2. Load combination b (static loads and dynamic loads at 10-8 probability level) 4 times
yield strain.
3. The maximum strain value for load combination b corresponds to a maximum
permanent deformation of 0,004s. This is significantly lower than the standard
imperfection level used in buckling strength assessment (0.05s) as well as production
standard given in IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010).
Based on the above analysis, the formula for permissible bending stress factors, Ca was
determined with factors given in Table 2.
hg
Ca = -
R eH
JANUARY 2014
Table 2: Permissible bending stress factors

Acceptance
Criteria Set
AC-S
AC-SD
Structural Member
Longitudinally
stiffened plating
Longitudinal
Transversely or
Strength Members
vertically stiffened
plating
Other members
Longitudinally
stiffened plating
Longitudinal
Transversely or
Strength Members
vertically stiffened
plating
Other members, including watertight
boundary plating
Ca-max
0.9
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.05
0.5
0.95
1.05
1.0
0.95
1.0
1.0
For plating subjected to hull girder stresses, acceptance range for various combinations of
hull girder stresses and local pressure based stresses are as follows:
Figure 3: Permissible bending stress coefficient for plate
1.2
1.2.1
Plating of corrugated bulkheads

Cold and hot formed corrugations
Corrugated bulkhead may have significant in plane stresses (uni-axial in the direction of the
corrugation). In addition, corrugated bulkhead has less redundancy than plane bulkhead
where loads may be redistributed by membrane stresses in case of local failure. A local
JANUARY 2014
failure at lower end or corrugation mid-span will in most cases result in a total collapse of
the bulkhead. Hence permissible bending stress coefficients for corrugated bulkhead (Ca
factor) are set at slightly lower values than that for plane bulkhead.
1.2.2
Built up corrugations
The formula is based on DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 9, C101.

This formula considered different plate thickness for web and flange of a corrugation in
relation to the scantling requirement of corrugation, built with uniform thickness. The
thickness of the thicker plate is increased in relation to the uniform thickness by the same
portion, as the thickness of the thinner plate is smaller than the required one for uniform
thick corrugation.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
Minimum thickness of keel plating
2.1.1
This requirement specifies the thickness of the keel in respect to the thickness of the adjacent
bottom plating.
2.2
2.2.1
Bilge plating
Definition of bilge area
2.2.2
Bilge plate thickness within 0.4L amidships
This paragraph contains scantling requirements for bilge plating located within 0.4L
amidships.
(a) The consideration of adjacent plate thickness ensures a sufficient continuity of strength.
(b) The formula of the bilge minimum thickness is based on buckling requirements for
transverse stiffened curved plates under lateral pressure and axial hull girder bending
stress. Longitudinally stiffened bilge plating has to be considered as stiffened flat plates
taking into account yield check according to Ch 6, Sec 4 and Buckling in Ch 8.
Curved plates where the transverse extent ( R/2) is greater than the distance between
transverse members, the plate thickness is not to be less than the minimum resulting
from the application of this formula and the capacity formula given in [1.1.1].
2.2.3
Bilge plate thickness outside 0.4L amidships
This paragraph contains scantling requirements for bilge plating located outside 0.4L
amidships. General plating requirements including minimum thickness for bottom and side
shell plating are to be considered.
2.2.4
Transverse extension of bilge minimum plate thickness
The extent of application of this requirement is limited in side shell and bottom direction
based on the distance of the next welding seams to the endpoints of curvature.
2.2.5
Hull envelope framing in bilge area
This paragraph restricts the distance between the first longitudinal stiffeners and the end of
the bilge curvature. If the distance exceeds the s1 or s2, the assumptions made for the
derivation of the scantling requirement, given in Ch 6, Sec 4, [2.2.2] are no longer valid.
JANUARY 2014
2.3
2.3.1
Side shell plating

Fender contact zone
The requirements are based on fender contact requirements in accordance with CSR OT (July
2010) and DNV Rules (January 2013). The coefficient in the formula has been adjusted for the
net scantlings.
2.3.2
Application of fender contact zone requirement
The whole length of the cargo area is to be checked between minimum ballast draught and a
horizontal line 0.25TSC (minimum 2.2m) above the scantling draught. Trim is not considered.
2.4
2.4.1
Sheer strake
General
2.4.2
Welded sheer strake
This requirement specifies the thickness of the sheer strake in respect to the thickness of the
adjacent side plating. Additional requirements to ensure that no stress concentrations can
occur at the bottom edge of the sheer strake in the area of high hull girder bending stresses.
2.4.3
Rounded sheer strake
This requirement specifies the thickness of the sheer strake in respect to the thickness of the
adjacent deck plating. This is an additional requirement to ensure that no stress
concentrations can occur at the top edge of the rounded sheer strake.
2.5
Deck stringer plating
2.5.1
2.5.2
This requirement specifies the thickness of the deck stringer plate in respect to the thickness
of the adjacent deck plating and is inline with common practice for ship design.
2.6
2.6.1
Supporting structure in way of corrugated bulkheads

General
2.6.2
Lower stool
This requirement is generally based on IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010), which considers
flooded conditions only. It is extended for all loading conditions and design checks equal to
CSR OT (July 2010).
2.6.3
Upper stool
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010) and CSR OT (July 2010).
2.6.4
Local supporting structure in way of corrugated bulkheads without lower

stool
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010) and CSR OT (July 2010).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 5 STIFFENERS
STIFFENERS SUBJECT TO LATERAL PRESSURE
1.1
1.1.1
Yielding check
Web plating
The formula given in the Rules for stiffener web thickness is based on general elastic beam
theory with the both ends fixed in general. fshr for horizontal stiffeners of 0.5 is for the
uniform pressure distribution. fshr for vertical stiffeners of 0.7 is for the lower end of the
stiffener with linearly varying pressure distribution. The factor of 0.5 has been considered for
upper end of vertical stiffeners taking the conservative approach.
The values of permissible shear stress factor (Ct) of 0.75 for AC-S and 0.9 for AC-SD are
consistent with the values of permissible bending stress factors (Cs) not subjected to hull
girder stresses.
This formula is applicable for boundaries of flooded compartments, which are not intended
to carry liquids (i.e. dry and void spaces or cargo holds carrying dry cargo in bulk). The
standard acceptance criteria is adjusted for the collision bulkhead and other watertight
boundaries by the factor which represents the ratio of permissible stress in flooded
condition to that in intact condition. The factor is calibrated in order to maintain similar
severity in flooded condition with CSR for bulk carriers (July 2010).
1.1.2
Section modulus
Stiffener bending:
The stiffener section modulus formula given in the Rules is based on general elastic beam
theory with the both ends fixed in general. fbdg for horizontal stiffeners of 12 is based on the
bending moment at ends of P s bdg 2 / 12 assuming uniform loading.
fbdg for vertical stiffeners of 10 is based on the bending moment at lower end of
P s bdg 2 / 10 for linearly varying pressure distribution (higher loads at lower end of the
stiffener) and also assuming certain degree of carry over bending moment transmitted from
the adjacent lower stiffener. The factor of 12 has been considered for upper end of vertical
stiffeners taking the conservative approach.
The same formula is applicable for boundaries of flooded compartments, which are not
intended to carry liquids (i.e. dry and void spaces or cargo holds carrying dry cargo in bulk).
The standard acceptance criteria is adjusted for the collision bulkhead and other watertight
boundaries by the factor .
Permissible bending stress factor (Cs):
Permissible bending stress factor (Cs) for stiffener is to be considered in elastic range (unlike
plate). The total permissible bending stress factor based on combined local pressure based
stress and hull girder stress are basically set to be 1.0 for Static+Dynamic condition and
0.85 for Static condition respectively (with maximum limit of 0.9 and 0.75 respectively for
local pressure only).
Cs factor for the member subjected to hull girder stresses:
For stiffeners subjected to hull girder stresses, acceptance criteria for various combinations of
hull girder stresses and local pressure based stresses are as follows:
JANUARY 2014
Refer to Table 1 and Table 2 in the Rules.

Table 1:
Coefficient of CS for stiffeners

Stiffeners
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
Cs
0.6
AC-SD
0.5
AC-S
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
hg/ReH
Where the member is subjected to hull girder stresses, the local pressure based stress is
simply added on the hull girder stress. Where the directions of hull girder stress and local
pressure based stress are different, the net total stress is to comply with the permissible
limit with the exception that the local pressure based stress ratio itself should not exceed the
maximum limit (Cs-max). Also, hull girder stress itself should not exceed the hull girder stress
limit.
1.1.3
Group of stiffeners
This requirement indicates practical criteria to check scantlings of stiffeners gathered in

group having the same actual scantlings.
1.1.4
Plate and stiffener of different materials
This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 3/5.2.6. When the section modulus
requirement of stiffener has been determined based on the higher strength material, this
requirement is to make sure the plate of the lower yield stress material does not yield before
the stiffener side reaches the minimum yield stress.
The formula has been derived as follows:
Assuming s/s = 1.0, the minimum yield stresses of the plate side and stiffener side at an
equilibrium state are expressed as follows respectively in conjunction with a given critical
bending moment;
Mp
M
+ hg R eH S = s + hg
R eH P =
ZP
Z
Hence;
JANUARY 2014
M p = Z P R eH P hg and M s = Z R eH S hg
Since the plate side should not yields before the stiffener side yields, Mp should not be less
than Ms;
Z P R eH P hg Z R eH S hg , then it becomes;
ZP
R eH P hg + hg R eH S
Z
where,
Mp
:
Ms
:
ReH-S :
ReH-P :
hg
:
Z
ZP
s, s
Critical bending moment at the attached plate kNm.

Critical bending moment at the stiffener kNm.
Minimum specified yield stress of the material of the stiffener, in N/mm2.
Minimum specified yield stress of the material of the attached plate, in N/mm2.
Maximum hull girder stress in sagging and hogging conditions for S and S+D, in
N/mm2, |hg| is not to be taken less than 0.4ReH-P.
: Net section modulus, in way of face plate/free edge of the stiffener, in cm3.
: Net section modulus, in way of the attached plate of stiffener, in cm3.
: Coefficients defined in Table 2.
The 1.35 criterion of the material ratio as well as the lower bound of 0.4 ratio of hg indicate
the criteria from practical experience in the past.
1.2
1.2.1
Beam analysis
Direct analysis
This requirement specifies the parameters to take into account for the determination of
normal and shear stresses in a stiffener with reduced end fixity and variable load or
stiffeners being part of grillage such as multi-span stiffeners.
1.2.2
Stress criteria
This requirement indicates the admissible normal and shear stresses to consider for the check
of stresses based on a direct analysis.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 6 PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS AND PILLARS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS WITHIN CARGO AREA
2.1
Flooded condition
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
Bulk carriers
2.2.1
Bulk carriers having a length L of 150m and above
Double bottom structures of bulk carriers are constructed in a complex grillage of floors and
girders. Typically, floors and girders have comparable spacing to vessel's intended loads.
Deck girders in way of the cross deck are cantilever beams in which stress distribution is
more dependent on global deformation of the vessel than local pressures. Hence, direct
analysis, (e.g. finite element analysis) is used for the evaluation of yielding and buckling of
primary supporting members.
2.2.2
Bulk carriers having a length L less than 150m
2.3
Oil tankers
2.3.1
PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS OUTSIDE CARGO AREA
3.1
Application
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
Scantling requirements
Net section modulus
The criteria for primary support members incorporates flexibility and judgment with respect
to analysis of the required bending and shear strength by way of the selection of bending
moment and shear force distribution factors (as per Table 2 of the Rules). The applied
bending moment and shear force distribution factors are based on selected formulas for
simple beam analysis. This analysis approach is consistent with criteria in portions of Rule
requirements.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 6, SEC 6 PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS AND PILLARS
3.2.2
Net shear area
3.3
Advanced calculation methods
3.3.1
Direct analysis
Direct analysis shall be applied for complex structure when simple modelling with bending
moment and shear force distribution factors given in Table 2, are considered not satisfactory
to verify that stress level is in compliance with [3.2].
3.3.2
Analysis criteria
The permissible stress criteria given in [3.3] apply for more advanced beam analysis.
PILLARS
4.1
4.1.1
Pillars subjected to compressive axial load

Criteria
Buckling requirements are given for pillar type structures subject to axial loading only.
Compressive load acting in pillars is required to be less than the permissible load derived
from the critical buckling stress.
4.2
4.2.1
Pillars subject to tensile axial load

Criteria
Pillars subject to tensile axial load are to be evaluated with yield criteria. Buckling criteria
given in [4.1.1] of the Rules is not applicable.
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
DIRECT STRENGTH ANALYSIS

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Strength Assessment
1 General
2 Net Scantling
3 Finite Element Types
4 Submission of Results
5 Computer Programs
SECTION 2
Cargo Hold Structural Strength Analysis
1 Objective and Scope
2 Structural Model
3 FE Load Combinations
4 Load Application
5 Analysis Criteria
SECTION 3
Local Structural Strength Analysis
1 Objective and Scope

2 Local Areas to be Assessed by Fine Mesh Analysis
3 Screening Procedure
4 Structural Modelling
5 FE Load Combinations
6 Analysis Criteria
PT 1, CH 7, SEC 1 STRENGTH ASSESSMENT
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
This chapter describes the calculation methods for direct strength assessment of bulk carriers
and oil tankers for with the Rules are applicable.
Cargo hold structural strength FE analysis is applicable to:
a) Double hull oil tankers greater or equal to 150m in length.
b) Bulk carriers greater or equal to 150m in length.
1.1.2
The analysis required in Sec 2 will give the scantling of primary supporting members and the
Sec 3 is for the local reinforcement of stress concentration area.
1.1.3
For the fatigue analysis, please refer to TB for Ch 9.
1.1.4
Stress used for FE analysis considered the following:
For yield strength assessment: primary and secondary stress
For fatigue assessment: primary, secondary and tertiary stress
1.1.5
1.1.6
NET SCANTLING
2.1
Net scantling application
2.1.1
The corrosion amount given in Ch 3 is the maximum expected value by which the thickness
is considered to decrease during the design life of a ship. Deducting the required wastage
amount from all the members of the hold model used was considered excessive; it was
considered more appropriate to deduct the average wastage amount. The average wastage
amount was set as half the required amount, and it was decided as the deduction amount for
the model.
However, 100% corrosion in each panel is fairly appropriate when determining the critical
buckling stress, and therefore, the corrosion deduction is taken as 100% in this case.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 7, SEC 1 STRENGTH ASSESSMENT
FINITE ELEMENT TYPES
3.1
Used finite element types
3.1.1
3.1.2
SUBMISSION OF RESULTS
4.1
Detailed report
4.1.1
A detailed report is required in order to allow the Society to assess the correctness of the
model, of the boundary conditions, of the loads and of the loading conditions and to check
the values of stresses in the entire model.
It is recommended that section modulus and neutral axis in FEM is checked and compared to
actual value in order to check for a correct modelling.
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
5.1
Use of computer programs
5.1.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 7, SEC 2 CARGO HOLD STRUCTURAL STRENGTH ANALYSIS
OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE
1.1
General
1.1.1
The assessment procedure is applicable to with the following configurations:
For double hull oil tankers as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.2] of the Rules.
For bulk carriers as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.3] of the Rules.
The assessment procedure is applicable to with the following configurations:
For double hull oil tankers as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.32] of the Rules.
For bulk carriers as defined in Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.23] of the Rules.
1.1.2
The FE structural assessment is mandatory for all longitudinal hull girder structural
members, primary supporting members and bulkheads within the cargo area. This also
applies to structural members forward, the collision bulkhead and structural members in
engine room with extent given in Ch 7, Sec 2, [5.1.2].
1.1.3
For the purpose of defining which holds are to be considered for the midship region strength
assessment, holds in the midship cargo region are defined as holds with their longitudinal
centre of gravity position at or forward of 0.3L from AP and at or aft of 0.7L from AP. This
follows the logic that if a hold with over 50% of its length is within the traditional definition
of the midship region (i.e. 0.3L < < 0.7L), then this hold should be considered for the
midship region strength assessment.
In practise, for design with 5 cargo holds along its length, this would normally mean that no.
3 and 4 holds (no. 1 hold is the foremost hold) will be considered as midship cargo hold
region. For design with 6 cargo holds along its length, it would normally mean that no. 3, 4
and 5 holds (no. 1 hold is the foremost hold) will be considered as midship cargo hold region.
For design with 7 cargo holds along its length, it would normally mean that no. 3, 4, 5 and 6
holds (no. 1 hold is the foremost hold) will be considered as midship cargo hold region. For
design with 9 cargo holds along its length, it would normally mean that no. 4, 5, 6 and 7
holds (no. 1 hold is the foremost hold) will be considered as midship cargo hold region.
Consequently, forward and after cargo hold regions are defined as holds located forward
and after the midship cargo hold region. The foremost cargo hold(s) and the aft most cargo
hold(s) are defined as separate regions. This result with 5 cargo hold regions:
Aftermost cargo hold(s).
After cargo hold region.
Midship cargo hold region.
Forward cargo hold region.
Foremost cargo hold(s).
For each cargo hold region applies separate design FE load combinations which are defined
in Ch 4, Sec 8 of the Rules.
JANUARY 2014
1.2
Cargo hold structural strength analysis procedure
1.2.1
Procedure description
1.2.2
Mid-hold definition
In case of the FE model in the aftmost cargo hold region of oil tankers, the forward holds of
the three-hold length FE model is to be cargo holds no. N-1 (i.e. No. 5 cargo holds in case of 6
cargo holds along its length within cargo area), and the after holds is to be engine room.
In this particular case, the mid-hold of the three hold model represents the cargo holds no. N
and slop tanks located from the engine room bulkhead to the forward bulkhead of cargo
holds no. N.
1.2.3
Scantling assessment with individual cargo hold method (IM)
The evaluation area for FE analysis, as defined in Ch 7, Sec 2, [5.1.1], includes forward and
aft transverse bulkhead of the mid-hold of the FE model. All transverse bulkheads except
collision bulkhead and the aft bulkhead of the aftmost hold, are included in the results from
two FE analyses, as shown in Figure 1. The scantlings in way of these bulkheads are to be
evaluated based on two corresponding FE analyses.
Figure 1:
Scantling assessment with individual cargo hold method (IM)
STRUCTURAL MODEL
2.1
Members to be modelled
2.1.1
The choice of modelling thickness is in accordance with the Rule net thickness philosophy
described in Ch 3, Sec 2.
The cargo tank FE model is to represent the overall corroded state of the hull. It is not
realistic to assume that the whole hull structure is corroded by the maximum corrosion
addition thickness for each individual member. In the assessment of the overall strength of
JANUARY 2014
the hull, it is assumed that all plates of the structure are corroded by 50% of the corrosion
addition thickness. This is consistent with the assessment of global hull girder properties as
well as consistent with the in-service global hull girder gauging requirements to be followed
throughout the life of the vessel.
The examples of other structural members which contribute to hull girder strength are listed
and are not limited to as below;
Longitudinally continuous trunks as defined in Ch 5, Sec1, [1.2.4].
Longitudinal girders welded above the strength deck as defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.2.5].
Longitudinal girders between hatchways, supported by longitudinal bulkhead as

defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.2.6].
2.2
Extent of model
2.2.1
Longitudinal extent
Boundary conditions applied at the ends of the cargo hold model in general will introduce
abnormal stress responses in way of the constrained areas due to the constraint of model
displacements. The area in the model where the stress responses are to be assessed must be
adequately remote from the model boundary so that the constraint applied will not have
significant effect on the stress responses.
A three-hold length finite element (FE) model is used for the following reasons:
(a)
A three-hold length FE model is used to ascertain that the area in the model where
the stress responses are assessed are adequately remote from the model boundary so
that the constraint applied will not affect the stress result. It is to be noted that the
area in the model for assessing against the acceptance criteria covers structure within
the longitudinal extent from the termination of the transverse bulkhead
stringer/buttress aft of middle hold to the termination of the bulkhead
stringer/buttress forward of the middle hold. A three-hold length FE model is
considered more appropriate than a +1 + hold length model in this case,
especially with correction bending moment applied to the model ends, otherwise, the
effect of the end constraints may be significant as the ends of the model could be only
two web frame spaces from the areas that are required to be assessed.
(b)
With the presence of the transverse bulkheads at both ends of the three-hold length
model, the three hold model ascertains that the middle hold of the model has similar
deformation as the one for the whole vessel.
(c)
A three-hold length model is used in conjunction with the procedure of applying

adjustment forces, bending and torsional moments to obtain the required shear force,
bending and torsional moment distributions along the model length. The required
distributions are difficult to achieve with a + 1 + model.
2.2.2
Hull form modelling
In the FE models of the foremost and aftmost cargo hold regions, the hull forms in the model
should be represent the actual shell curvature to get correct FE stresses and pressure loads.
To avoid any complication in the FE modelling of foremost and aftmost cargo hold regions,
simplified procedures without influencing the results of the mid-hold of the three hold
model can be used as follows;
Foremost cargo hold model

The hull form is to be modelled up to the first forward transverse web frame from the
middle of the fore parts. The middle of the fore part is located at the mid position of
JANUARY 2014
the longitudinal distance between the collision bulkhead and the model end where
the reinforced ring or web frame remains continuous from the base line to the
strength deck.
Aftmost cargo hold model

The hull form is to be modelled up to the first aft transverse web frame from the
middle of the machinery space.
The properties of the transverse web frames in the extrusion parts are to be same to those of
the transverse web frame at the starting point of the extrusion. The transverse web frame
spacing is also considered as one of the properties of the transverse web frame.
2.2.3
Transverse extent
Where asymmetrical loads are applied, if the structure is symmetrical about the ships
centreline, the analysis could theoretically be carried out using a half breadth FE model by
combining the stress responses obtained from the analysis of a number of symmetrical and
anti-symmetrical load cases with appropriate boundary conditions imposed at the centreline
plane. The procedure is complicated and increases risk in introducing user errors in the
analysis. The requirement of a full breadth FE model is to simplify the analysis of
asymmetrical loading conditions and hence reduce the probability of introducing errors in
the analysis process.
2.2.4
Vertical extent
It is important to include all structural members above the upper deck which contribute in
hull girder strength, such as longitudinal trunk structure when fitted.
2.3
Finite element types
The stresses and strains to be used in this finite element analysis are in linear functions one
of the other. Using linear theory also displacements are controlled by stresses.
2.3.1
Two node beam elements and three or four node shell elements are sufficient for the
representation of the hull structure and are most commonly used by Societies, shipbuilders
and designers for carrying out the finite element analysis. These elements are recommended
to be used for the construction of the FE models. Additional information can be found in TB
of Ch 7, Sec 1.
2.3.2
The eccentricity of the neutral axis of the ships stiffener systems allows determining the
representation of the actual structural response as closely as possible. It is considered to be
factual for stiffened panels under lateral pressure load as well as for stiffened panels where
no lateral pressure is applied. In addition, a common way of modelling of all stiffeners
minimises the discrepancy in the result which helps to achieve common scantlings in the
application of the Rules.
2.3.3
Modelling of face plates of primary supporting members with plate elements normally will
require using elements with aspect ratio more than 3, as limited in Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.3.2]. It is
sufficient to represent face plates with rod or beam elements to obtain main stress
component in the flange which is axial stress.
JANUARY 2014
2.4
2.4.1
Structural modelling
Aspect ratio
The elements used in the Finite Element Method have limitations with respect to the mesh
used. Elements with high aspect ratio as well as distorted elements will give inaccurate
results and should be avoided. It is considered that element with aspect ratio not more than 3
are sufficient to obtain correct results for the FE analyses required by the Rules.
2.4.2
Mesh
Modelling the ships plating and stiffener systems as closely as possible to the actual
structure allows a more accurate structural response to be determined, and minimises the
discrepancy in the result which helps to achieve common scantlings in the application of the
Rules. In addition, modelling plate mesh that follows the stiffening system eliminates the
need of approximating the property of group of stiffeners by a single line element at the
edges of a plate element. This modelling procedure also makes the process of extracting
stresses for buckling assessment of panels easier and more accurate.
It should be noted that the aim of the cargo hold finite element analysis is to assess the
overall strength of the structure and is not intended to determine the stresses at structural
details and discontinuities, as the mesh size employed is too coarse to correctly represent
their geometry. Instead, fine mesh finite element analysis is used to determine such stresses.
2.4.3
Finer mesh
In the case where the geometry of a structural detail cannot be adequately represented by the
coarse mesh in the cargo hold finite element model, then a finer mesh analysis can be used
to obtain the stress for comparison with the criteria. It is to be noted that this analysis option
is only applicable to area of stress concentration. Average stress calculated over an area
equivalent to the mesh size of the cargo hold finite element model is not to exceed the
allowable stress required by the cargo hold finite element analysis (i.e. below yield) to retain
the consistency between finer mesh analysis and cargo hold analysis. The average stress is
calculated based on weighted average of Von Mises stress and area of elements within the
equivalent area.
2.4.4
Corrugated bulkhead
For corrugated bulkheads, it is important to retain the correct geometrical shape of the
corrugation. A difference in geometry alters the sectional inertia and cross sectional area of
the corrugation which will result in incorrect stress response. Inaccurate modelling of
corrugation shape is better to be avoided.
2.4.5
2.4.6
Sniped stiffener
Small sniped end stiffeners less than the edge of a plate element (e.g. 150mm) do not need to
be modelled. Stiffeners, with one end or both ends sniped, which are longer than the edge of
a plate element should be included. It is to be noted that it is not the intention to accurately
represent the sniped termination of the stiffener but to get a more realistic representation of
the stiffness of such stiffeners and their contribution to stress reduction in the primary
support members. However, it should be noted that the correct dimensions of the panel
according to the web stiffener arrangement are to be used in assessment of panel buckling
strength.
JANUARY 2014
The modelling of the stiffeners allows clear identification of the dimensions, applied FE
stresses and pressure load for each plate panel which helps enhancing the efficiency and
consistency of the panel buckling assessment. Web stiffeners parallel and close to the face
plate of stringer or web frame contribute to the section modulus of that structural member
and hence reduce the stress. If sniped end stiffeners are not corrected in some way the stress
in the face plate of the stringers/web frames will be underestimated. The modelling
principles of snipped stiffeners are based on CSR OT (July 2010) (1). The original formula is
simplified with required reduction of the depth of stiffener web.
2.4.7
On transverse web frames and bulkhead stringers, the arrangement of web stiffeners can
become irregular. In order to avoid undesirable element mesh (such as introduction of
triangular or highly skewed elements) in way, consideration may be given to slightly
adjusting the end points of the web stiffener in line with the primary element mesh. In
general, it is considered acceptable if the adjusted distance does not exceed 0.2 times the
stiffener spacing. Provided that this tolerance is met the stresses and buckling capacity
models may be taken from the FE model and do not need to be adjusted. The use of rod
elements representing the web stiffeners on primary supporting members are to be limitedly
used to the unstiffened panels only as defined in Ch 8, Sec 4, Table 1.
2.4.8
Face plate on primary supporting member
The technical background is based on a paper by R.W. Westrup and P. Silver, Some effects
of curvature on frames, Aerospace Sciences, September 1958.
The formula represents the efficiency of a curved faceplate in terms of bending moment. The
efficiency is given as a fraction of the area of the face plate. The reason for the correction is
that a curvature gives a change of force direction. The moment capacity of a member with
curved face plate is given by its possibility to transfer the change in shear to the face plate.
The wider a curved face plate is the less efficient the section becomes. Similarly a small
radius will given a larger change in force and hence less efficiency.
2.4.9
Openings
The cargo hold analysis is only intended for assessing the overall strength of the structure.
Local stresses in way of an opening is in addition assessed using fine mesh finite element
analysis, as required by Ch 7, Sec 3 of the Rules, with accurate modelling of the opening
geometry.
For large openings, i.e. with ho/h 0.5 or go 2.0, it is considered necessary to include the
geometry of the opening in the cargo hold model in order to obtain an acceptable result, see
Ch 7, Sec 2, Table 1 of the Rules for definitions of lo, ho and go. In this case, fine mesh finite
element analysis is mandatory in order to determine the local stress in way of the opening.
See in the TB of Ch 7, Sec 3.
For other openings, i.e. with ho/h < 0.5 and go < 2.0, it is considered not necessary to include
such openings in the cargo hold model. Instead, shear stresses in way of cut-outs in webs
need to be corrected for the loss in shear area according to Ch 7, Sec 2, [5.2.6]. In all cases the
geometry of an opening can be included in the cargo hold finite element model.
However, it should be noted that the screening formula, given in Ch 7, Sec 3 of the Rules for
determining whether it is necessary to perform a fine mesh analysis of the opening, is only
applicable for the cases where the geometry of an opening has not been included in the cargo
JANUARY 2014
hold model. If the geometry of an opening is included in the cargo hold model, fine mesh
analysis is to be carried out to determine the local stress in way of the opening.
2.5
Boundary conditions
2.5.1
General
2.5.2
Application
The boundary conditions are applicable for three cargo hold length FE model analysed with
the design load application given by the Rules.
2.5.3
Boundary conditions
Rigid links in y and z are applied at both ends of the cargo hold model so that the constraints
of the model can be applied to the independent points. Rigid links in x-rotation are applied
at both ends of the cargo hold model so that the constraint at fore end and required torsion
moment at aft end can be applied to the independent point.
The x-constraint is applied to the intersection between centreline and inner bottom at fore
end to ensure the structure has enough support. The reasons for selecting this point for xconstraint are (1) the physical FE node exits at this point and (2) it is close to the independent
point so the resultant vertical bending moment due to this constraint, if any, will be
minimum.
2.5.4
End constraint beams
The end beams are applied at both ends of the cargo hold model to simulate the warping
constraints from the cut-out structures. For three-hold model, the stiffness from the cut-off
part of the hull girder shall be represented. Under torsional load, this out of plan stiffness
acts as warping constraint. The influence of the cut-off parts on the hull girder bending is
simulated by adding out-of-plane bending stiffness to the end sections of the model. It is
accomplished by adding a series of end constraint beams at the both end sections along all
longitudinally continuously structural members, including cross deck plate for bulk carrier.
FE LOAD COMBINATIONS
3.1
Design load combinations
3.1.1
FE load combination definition
Refer to TB in Ch 4, Sec 8.
3.1.2
Mandatory load combinations
3.1.3
Additional loading conditions
4
4.1
LOAD APPLICATION
General
One important aspect of FE analysis is to determine the response of the structure as

accurately as possible for a given set of applied loads. For this reason, the Rules require that
JANUARY 2014
all simultaneously acting hull girder and local loads are to be applied directly to the FE
model. This ensures that the effect of the interaction of all structural parts is included in the
solution.
The method of superimposition of stresses derived from FE analysis for local loads and
simplified beam theory model for hull girder loads is not adapted as important structural
interaction cannot be preserved. Refer to TB in Ch 4, Sec 8.
4.1.1
Structural weight
It is important to include the static effect of structural steel weight of the ship in the analysis
as this weight represents a significant proportion of total weight carried by the ship. For
example, for a typical VLCC, the lightship weight is equal to 12% to 16% of the total weight
of the cargo carried for a typical full load condition (cargo density of 0.85 t/m3) and 40% to
50% of the total weight of the ballast carried based on typical normal ballast condition.
4.1.2
Sign convention
4.2
External and internal loads
4.2.1
External pressure
External sea pressures are to be applied to the FE model explicitly according with Ch 4, Sec 6.
The green sea loads are to be applied along the top of hatch coaming in such way that sum of
distributed forces along the hatch coamings is equal to sum of loads from green sea pressure
acting on the corresponding hatch cover.
4.2.2
Internal pressure
Internal pressures are to be applied to the FE model explicitly according with Ch 4, Sec 6.
4.2.3
Pressure application on FE element
It is considered that the application of a constant pressure or a linear pressure distribution on

a plate element results with insignificant difference in stress results for the strength
assessment required by the Rules.
4.3
Hull girder loads
4.3.1
General
As the three-holds FE model is only representing part of the ship simply supported at both
ends, when the required local loads (i.e. static and dynamic hold pressure, static sea and
dynamic wave pressure and structural weight) are applied to the model, the global hull
girder loads generated may not necessarily reach the required target values specified in [4.3].
The hull girder loads need to adjusted by applying additional forces and moments to the
model. The adjustments are calculated and applied to each hull girder component separately,
as follows:
a) Hull girder vertical shear force.
b) Hull girder vertical bending moment.
c) Hull girder horizontal bending moment.
d) Hull girder torsional moment.
JANUARY 2014
All hull girder components can be controlled independently, however some adjustments
need to be calculated in correct order, see more in [4.4].
4.3.2
Target hull girder vertical bending moment
The hull girder vertical bending targets represent the maximum nominal design hull girder
vertical bending moments for a given FE load combination. For FE strength assessment, the
vertical bending moment target consists of the following basic components:
(a) Still water bending moment, Msw, for Static load scenarios (S).
(b) Still water bending moment, Msw, and vertical wave bending moment, Mwv-LC, for
Static plus Dynamic load scenarios (S+D).
Still water bending moment, Msw, is a permissible still water bending moment at the
considered longitudinal position for seagoing and harbour conditions as defined in Ch 4, Sec
4, [2.2.2] and Ch 4, Sec 4, [2.2.3] respectively. The still water bending moment is reduced by
CBM-LC factor for loading patterns where the maximum permissible value cannot be reached.
Vertical wave bending moment, Mwv-LC, is a bending moment for the dynamic load case
under consideration, calculated in accordance with Ch 4, Sec 4, [3.5.2].
In the midship cargo region, the vertical bending moment target is given by one value, which
is the maximum combination of Msw and Mwv-LC within considered mid-hold of the FE-model,
since the still water permissible bending moments may not be necessary constant as well
wave vertical bending moment within 0.3L to 0.7L. Outside midship the combination of Msw
and Mwv-LC gradually sloping toward the ships fore and aft ends. Hence the targets outside
midship region are defined at each web frame/transverse bulkhead position along the
considered FE model.
4.3.3
Target hull girder shear force
The hull girder shear stress is considered to give the most onerous combination with stress
due to local loads close to transverse bulkheads. The hull girder shear force is adjusted to
reach the required maximum value defined by the hull girder shear force targets, as
described in [4.4.5].
The targets are defined for the forward and aft transverse bulkheads of the mid hold of the
FE model. The hull girder shear force targets represent the maximum nominal design hull
girder shear forces. For FE strength assessment, the shear force target consists of the
following basic components:
(a) Still water shear force, Qsw, for Static load scenarios (S).
(b)
Still water shear force, Qsw, and wave shear force, Qwv-LC, for Static plus Dynamic
load scenarios (S+D).
Still water shear force, Qsw, is a permissible still water shear force given at considered
forward and aft transverse bulkheads of the midhold of the FE model. The still water shear
force is reduced by CSF-LC factor for loading patterns which the maximum permissible value
cannot be reached, e.g. chess loading pattern. The sign of the permissible still water shear
force is determined by the sign of the shear force due to local loads applied to the FE model.
For bulk carriers, the permissible still water shear force, Qsw, is based on the shear force
envelope after shear force correction, as defined in Ch 4, Sec 4, [2.3.3] and [2.3.4]. In order to
account the nominal value of the shear force, the shear force correction is to be added to Qsw.
The basis for the shear force corrections are followed according to Ch 5, Sec 1 [3.6.1].
JANUARY 2014
Vertical wave shear force, Qwv-LC, is included for the dynamic load case under consideration,
where the value and the sign of the shear force is defined at the considered transverse
bulkhead position in accordance with Ch 4, Sec 4, [3.5.3].
4.3.4
Target hull girder horizontal bending moment
The global hull girder horizontal bending moment needs to be considered for the beam sea
and oblique sea dynamic load cases. Horizontal wave bending moment target, Mwh-LC, for the
dynamic load case under consideration is to be calculated in accordance with Ch 4, Sec 4,
[3.5.4].
Following the same argument given in [4.3.2], in the midship cargo hold region the
horizontal bending moment target is given by one target value. Outside midship region the
targets are defined at all web frame and transverse bulkhead positions of the FE model
under consideration.
4.3.5
Target hull girder torsional moment
The global hull girder torsional moment needs to be considered for the beam sea and oblique
sea dynamic load cases. For designs with a closed cross section, such as oil tankers, the
influence from the hull girder torsional moment is considered to be negligible. Hence targets
are defined only for bulk carriers. Wave torsional moment target, Mwt-LC, for the dynamic
load cases OST and OSA, is to be calculated in accordance with Ch 4, Sec 4, [3.5.5].
In order to apply the maximum Mwt-LC to the FE model, the target is defined at forward
bulkhead or aft bulkheads of mid-hold, depending on the longitudinal location of the
considered mid-hold. The reference position of 0.531L represents a zero crossing location of
the rule torsional moment. For irrelevant cases with respect to the hull girder torsion
moment, the target, Mwt-LC, is zero at the middle of the mid-hold. This requires the balancing
of the model which is comparable to a fixation of rotations (x) at both ends of the FE model.
4.4
4.4.1
Procedure to adjust hull girder shear forces and bending moments

General
The final hull girder shear needs not to exceed the target hull girder shear force at the target
bulkhead locations. The final hull girder bending moment needs not to exceed the target hull
girder bending moment at any location within the middle cargo. In order to reach all desired
targets, it is important that all adjustments related to shear forces are to be calculated before
the adjustments of the corresponding bending moments.
4.4.2
Local loads distribution
The longitudinal station close to the transverse bulkhead should be defined such that the
accurate hull girder shear forces right before and after target bulkhead can be obtained so
that the maximum absolute hull girder shear at target bulkhead location can be used for the
hull girder shear adjustment.
4.4.3
Hull girder forces and bending moment due to local loads
The method used to calculate the hull girder bending moment and shear force along the
length of the cargo hold finite element model should be consistent with that used in the
longitudinal strength calculation and ships loading computer, which is used for calculating
the still water bending moment and shear force of the ship in operation. The hull girder
bending moment and shear force due to local loads is to be calculated based on a simple
beam model, where the applied loads are aggregated from the FE model.
JANUARY 2014
It should be noted that a ships loading computer calculates the bending moments and shear
forces based on a simple beam and does not take into account abreast distribution of
cargo/ballast in tanks. When a ship is loaded unevenly abreast, due to the effect of local
loads, the longitudinal stress and shear stress will be increased in some parts of the hull
girder more than that of an evenly loaded condition for the same amount of hull girder
bending moment and shear force. The stress increase due to local loads resulting from
uneven abreast tank loading distribution is checked by the finite element analysis to ensure
adequate hull strength when the ship is subjected to the maximum permissible still water
bending moment and shear force in uneven abreast tank loaded conditions.
4.4.4
Longitudinal unbalanced force
The unbalanced longitudinal force is applied by the distributed longitudinal forces at fore
end so that correction force, if any, will not create significant high stress spot and spurious
bending moment.
If total net longitudinal force of the model is not equal to zero, the unbalanced longitudinal
force, Fl, exists in the model and need to be balanced to avoid additional vertical bending
moment generated by the longitudinal reaction force. It is to be done by applying the counter
longitudinal distributed forces to all end section elements, which are effective for hull girder
bending, at the end of the model where the translation on x-direction is constrained, so that
any effect on the model of the reaction force is avoided.
4.4.5
Hull girder shear force adjustment procedure
The vertical hull girder shear force adjustment procedure in principle can be applied also to
FE load combinations other than those enumerated in Ch 4, Sec 8 provided that the relevant
FE load combinations parameters are taken based on the principles stated in Ch 4, Sec 8 for
similar loading conditions.
These parameters are:
1) Loading Pattern
2) Draught
3) CBM-LC: % of perm. SWBM
4) CSF-LC: % of perm. SWSF
5) Weather it is to be considered as a "Max SFLC" or not
6) For (S+D) LC the dynamic load cases
It is important to remember that both bulkheads of the mid-hold are to be checked, therefore
for "Max SFLC" not enumerated in Ch 4, Sec 8, dynamic load cases are to be chosen so that
each dynamic load case targets the shear force at only one bulkhead.
For "Max SFLC" the mid-hold bulkhead location for shear force adjustment is chosen
according to Ch 7, Sec 2, Table 6.
Table 1 contains a graphical depiction of the families of "Max SFLC" necessary to check both
mid-hold bulkheads along the length of the cargo area. Each shear force diagram in Table 1
corresponds to a family of "Max SFLC" (e.g. for A3 outside midship cargo hold region HSM2 and FSM-2 dynamic load cases are one family).
JANUARY 2014
Table 1: SF adjustments to target in the mid-hold of FE models considered in cargo area

Load
scenario
(S+D)
Local SF at
fwd blhd
mid-hold
Qfwd>0
Wave
condition
Sagging
Qtrag-aft
(S+D)
(S+D)
Qfwd0
Qfwd0
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
0.5 L Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
0.5 L
Sagging
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
0.5 L
Hogging
Qtrag-aft
0.5 L
(S+D)
Qfwd>0
Qtrag-fwd
Hogging
Qtrag-fwd
JANUARY 2014
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd

(S)
(S)
Qfwd>0
Qfwd0
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft 0.5 L Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-fwd0.5 L Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-aft
Qtrag-fwd
Qtrag-fwd
The 2 Methods introduced here (Method 1 and Method 2) are not two possible alternative
ways of achieving the same results; their nature is different and each has to be applied when
specified in this article.
If shear force is to be adjusted, the procedure of Method 1 is considered better (or preferable
compared to the one of Method 2) because it does not introduce along the FE model any
adjustment force: the effect is that the slope of shear force due to local loads is kept (with a
more "physical" outcome).
In practice Method 2 is used only if with Method 1 the resulting shear force exceeds the
target (permissible) value at the other mid-hold bulkhead. In other words the procedure of
Method 2 is to be used only because otherwise in some cases it would be possible that
permissible shear force value is exceeded within the results evaluation area, complicating a
lot the task of checking the FE results.
The logic process of choosing between Method 1 (M1) and Method 2 (M2) is shown in
Figure 2 for both SF-LC and Non SF-LC. The N/A box means that no vertical shear force
adjustment is needed for that FE Load combination.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 2:
Application of shear force adjustment methods.
SF-LC
Non SF-LC
Yes
SF under
target at both
bulkheads?
No
SF exceeds
target at both
bulkheads?
Yes
No
SF exceeds
target when
M1 is
applied?
Yes
SF exceeds
target when
M1 is
applied?
No
No
M1
4.4.6
Yes
M2
N/A
M1
M2
Method 1 for shear force adjustment at one bulkhead
With Method 1, only loads at the boundary of the FE model are used to adjust the vertical
hull girder shear force, i.e. no vertical and horizontal internal forces are added to the local
loads (calculated for each independent loading scenario).
4.4.7
Method 2 for vertical shear force adjustment at both bulkheads
The procedure described in Method 2 consists in two logical steps:
JANUARY 2014
First a shift of SF curve due to local loads parallel to itself by means of end bending moments
(similarly to Method 1). Secondly a (subsequent) correction of SF curve slope to meet the
targets (actually one target and one permissible value) at mid-hold bulkheads
The first step is performed to minimise the amount of vertical internal forces that will have to
be introduced with the second step, thus practically obtaining the minimum change in shear
force curve slope compared to the one due to local loads. Method 2 can be also seen as a
continuation of Method 1 that however has to come into play only when necessary: the result
is that for borderline situations the transition from Method 1 to Method 2 is absolutely
smooth.
The proportion of vertical force to be distributed to longitudinal continuous member of each
cross section is determined by a shear flow calculation. Both vertical and horizontal force
components calculated with the shear flow method are to be applied because it was found
that applying only the vertical component (as could have been possible) gave too much
spurious distortion when applied to sloped and horizontal structures (i.e. out of structure
plane).
4.4.8
Procedure to adjust vertical and horizontal bending moments for midship

cargo hold region
In midship cargo hold region, the hull girder vertical and horizontal bending moment is
adjusted by applying a vertical and a horizontal bending moment to the model ends to
obtain the specified value within of the middle hold, as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3:
BM adjustments to required target for the midship cargo hold region

Bkhd
Target bending moment
Bkhd
Adjusted bending moment

Bending moment due to local
Men
4.4.9
Men
d
Procedure to adjust vertical and horizontal bending moments outside

midship cargo region
Outside midship cargo hold region, the hull girder vertical and horizontal bending moment
is adjusted by applying a vertical and a horizontal bending moments, mi, to all web frame
and transverse bulkhead positions of the FE model under consideration to obtain the
specified target values, as shown in Figure 3. Similarly as the bending moment adjustment in
midship cargo hold region, shear forces are not induced by this adjustment.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 4:
BM adjustments to required target for outside midship cargo hold region
Target bending
Bkhd
Bkhd
Adjusted bending
moment
Bending moment due
to local loads
mend
mnt
mi
m3
m2
m1
4.4.10 Application of bending moment adjustments on the FE model

The required vertical and horizontal bending moment adjustments including shear force
adjustments by end bending moments, as given in [4.4.6] are to be applied by nodal forces in
longitudinal direction. Their distribution based on the stress distribution at the considered
section according to simple beam theory. Since there is no rigid link in x-translation, yrotation and z-rotation at the model ends, bending moments at the end cross sections must
be also applied by the equivalent longitudinal forces.
4.5
4.5.1
Procedure to adjust hull girder torsional moments

General
The arguments given in [4.5] apply to the adjustment of hull girder torsional moments.
4.5.2
Torsional moment due to local loads
It is very important to refer the correct torsion moment reference point for sectional torsional
moment calculation. The horizontal reaction force needs to be included at the model end
with free rotation (x).
4.5.3
Hull girder torsional moment
The torsional moments are accumulated starting from the model end with free rotations (x)
applied in boundary constrains.
4.5.4
Procedure to adjust hull girder torsional moment to target value
The adjustment, MT-end, is to be applied only to independent point at the model end with free
rotation (x). The torsional moment due to local loads will be lift up or down to the target, as
shown in Figure 5.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 5:
Torsional moment adjustment to required target

Target torsional moment
Bkhd
Bkhd
adjusted torsional moment
torsional moment due to local
x fixed
4.6
MTd
Summary of hull girder load adjustments
4.6.1
ANALYSIS CRITERIA
5.1
5.1.1
General
Evaluation areas
Verification of results against the acceptance criteria is carried out within the longitudinal
extent of the middle hold of the three-hold FE model, and the regions forward and aft of the
middle holds up to the extent of the transverse bulkhead stringer and buttress structure. The
FE result in this region is considered to be valid for assessment against the acceptance criteria,
as:
The analysis procedure ascertains that the required hull girder bending moments and
shear force are correctly applied within middle-hold region of the model. Also see Ch 7,
Sec 2, [4.3] to [4.5] of the Rules for a detailed explanation of the procedure for adjusting
hull girder bending moments and shear forces.
The boundary of the model is sufficiently remote from the area under assessment so that
the constraint applied at the model ends will not affect the stress responses. Also see
Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.4] for further information.
5.1.2
Structural members
5.2
Yield strength assessment
Yield and buckling are two main failure modes of structure under static and dynamic loads
related to Serviceability Limit State. The structural strength capability against these two
modes of failure is verified by the cargo hold strength assessment. The structural analysis is
to demonstrate that the permissible von Mises stress criteria and utilisation factor against
buckling for plate and stiffened panels are not exceeded. The permissible were considered
for the severest conditions of operation in a 25 year period in the North Atlantic route.
5.2.1
Von Mises stress
The stresses are to be taken at the mid-plane of the shell elements to eliminate the bending
effect due to local pressure load. Most finite element analysis programs will have output for
stress evaluated at the element centroid. Where element centroid stress is not available, it can
JANUARY 2014
be calculated using the stresses at the Gauss points based on the shape function of the
element.
The calculation method is described in most finite element text books and software manuals.
Figure 6 shows an example for a simple four node element with four interior Gauss points. It
is important to note that the shape functions vary by element type and element order.
Figure 6:
Coordinates of Gauss points and element centroid
Note: For simple 4-node element, the centroid stress is equal to the average of the stresses at
the four Gauss points.
5.2.2
Axial stress in beams and rod elements
The axial stress in the flange (of the primary supporting member), modelled with beam or
rod elements, represents normal stress in the girder. Similarly, the axial stresses in the
intersections between the flange and web of the corrugations, modelled with beam and rod
elements, represent normal stresses in the corrugation. Evaluation of other beam and rod
elements included in the FE model is not required, see [5.2.4].
5.2.3
Coarse mesh permissible yield utilisation factors
The stress criteria are based on Von-Mises stress and an explicit criterion on pure shear stress
is not used. A von-Mises stress criteria will normally be more stringent than a pure shear
criteria (i.e. based on shear yield stress with the same factor of utilisation) as the calculation
of von-Mises stress includes shear stress and other additional axial stress components. Note
that shear and biaxial direct stresses are used in the calculation of the buckling utilisation
factor of panels.
The stress criteria are based on membrane stress of elements, which represents the stress due
to hull girder effect, deflection of primary support members and stiffener bending stress but
does not include plate bending stress.
The harbour/tank testing load cases (S design combination) are assessed based on static
loads only. The acceptance criteria on yield and buckling utilisation factors for harbour/tank
testing load cases (S design combination) is set at 80% of the corresponding criteria for
seagoing load cases (S+D design combination) which effectively allow a margin equal to 20%
JANUARY 2014
of the criteria for dynamic loads. This margin allows for some dynamic wave loads in
harbour and tank testing operations which may be carried out at sea in sheltered waters, and
also gives a safety margin to ensure that temporary accidental overloading will not cause
permanent deformations. These acceptance criteria are adopted from CSR OT (July 2010).
5.2.4
Yield criteria
For shell elements representing the corrugation of corrugated bulkheads under lateral
pressure from liquid load an additional factor of safety (equivalent to 10% reduction in
the stress and buckling acceptance utilisation factors) is applied to achieve the same level of
confidence for these members. These acceptance criteria are adopted from CSR OT (July
2010).
Corrugations of vertically corrugated bulkheads under bulk cargo pressure do not require
this additional factor of safety, similarly to CSR BC (July 2010), also because these critical
members are checked also by prescriptive requirements with more severe accidentally
flooded holds scenarios (even if checking for ultimate strength and not first yielding).
The stress acceptance criteria are set against a particular mesh size. These criteria should not
be used in conjunction with stress obtained from a model with mesh size larger than that
intended as this will lead to a non-conservative scantling requirement.
Where a lower bulkhead stool is not fitted to a vertically corrugated bulkhead, an additional
factor of safety (equivalent to 10% reduction in the stress and buckling acceptance utilisation
factors) is applied in the assessment of corrugated bulkhead and its supporting structure
when a lower bulkhead stool is not fitted to achieve the same level of confidence as in
designs fitted with a lower bulkhead stool.
Service experience indicates that vertically corrugated bulkhead designs without a lower
stool are more critical (e.g. prone to local fracture) than those fitted with a lower bulkhead
stool due to higher stress level and alignment problems with the supporting structure in the
double bottom. The reduction in acceptance utilisation factors is introduced also as a
measure to account for lack of prescriptive requirements for vertically corrugated bulkheads
without lower stool. These acceptance criteria are adopted from CSR OT (July 2010).
5.2.5
Corrugation of corrugated bulkhead
The stresses in the corrugation of corrugated bulkheads have a gradient over the flange
breath and web height therefore the evaluation is based:
(a)
For the von Mises stress in the shell elements on a 10% reduced acceptance criteria.
(only under lateral pressure from liquid loads).
(b)
5.2.6
On the axial stress, rod, in dummy rod elements, modelled with unit cross sectional
properties at the intersection between the flange and web of the corrugation. This is
due to the fact that in the dummy rod elements no stress gradient is present (as they
are 1d elements) therefore full permissible yield utilisation factor is adequate.
Shear stress correction for cut-outs
The element shear stress in way of openings in webs is to be corrected for loss in shear area
and is be calculated based on normal shear area in accordance with Ch 3, Sec 7, [1.4.8].
5.2.7
Exceptions for shear stress corrections for openings
The exception conditions for some standard configuration of girders webs are given in order
to limit the application of the shear force stress correction for cut-outs, as required in [5.2.6].
JANUARY 2014
For these standard configurations no correction of the shear stress (and thus of the von Mises
stress) is necessary. The correction is given in terms of a more convenient reduction factor of
the permissible yield criteria.
5.3
Buckling strength assessment
5.3.1
Technical background for buckling is given in Ch 8.
References:
1. IACS, Common Structure Rules for Double Hull Oil Tankers, July 2010.
2. IACS, Common Structure Rules for Bulk Carriers, July 2010.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 7, SEC 3 LOCAL STRUCTURAL STRENGHT ANALYSIS
OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE
1.1
General
1.1.1
1.1.2
The selection of locations for investigation is based on service experience and previous finite
element studies carried out on tanker and bulk carrier designs. Detailed description of the
locations is given in [2.1]and [3.2]. The locations identified cover the most critically stressed
areas in the midship region for conventional designs. As the number of locations that are
required to be investigated is extensive, a screening procedure has been developed, which is
based on a correlation study of the stresses obtained from the coarse mesh cargo tank FE
analysis and fine mesh FE analysis, to identify the critical locations that need to be assessed
using fine mesh analysis, and avoid unnecessary and repetitive analysis being carried out.
The screening criteria for fine mesh analysis are given in [3.3].
In view of the large number of locations that need to be investigated, a mathematical formula
based screening procedure, based on the stresses obtained from the coarse mesh cargo tank
FE analysis, has been developed to identify the critical locations that need to be assessed
using finite element fine mesh analysis to avoid unnecessary and repetitive analysis. The
screening procedure applies to common structural details including openings, bracket toes
and heels of primary support members. Fine mesh analysis is not required for structural
details that comply with the screening criteria.
1.1.3
Fine mesh analysis procedure
Evaluation of detailed stresses requires the use of refined finite element mesh in way of areas
of high stress. This localised stress cannot be obtained from the cargo tank FE model due to
the limited accuracy in representation of a structural detail and modelling simplifications
owing to the coarser mesh size used. The objective of the local fine mesh analysis is to verify
that detailed stress at critical locations, including the effects due to local structural geometry,
is within the acceptable limit.
1.1.4
Scope of fine mesh verification
LOCAL AREAS TO BE ASSESSED BY FINE MESH ANALYSIS
2.1
2.1.1
List of mandatory structural details

List of structural details
2.1.2
Hopper knuckle for ship with double side
Hopper knuckles for ship with double side are defined as the joints of below structural
members and not limited to:
(a) Lower Hopper Knuckle
Inner bottom
Transverse scarping bracket

JANUARY 2014
Hopper plate
Double bottom side girder
Transverse double bottom floor
Transverse web frame in way of hopper tank
(b) Upper Hopper Knuckle
Inner hull longitudinal bulkhead
Hopper plate
Horizontal girder in double side space
Transverse web frame in way of double side

The critical areas of hopper knuckle that require finite element fine mesh analysis are
selected based on service experience and previous finite element studies where are always
the high stress connections.
2.1.3
Side frame end brackets and lower hopper knuckle for single side bulk
carrier
Lower hopper knuckle for single side bulk carrier is defined as the joint of below structural
members and not limited to:
Inner bottom
Transverse scarping bracket
Hopper plate
Double bottom side girder
Transverse double bottom floor

By experience of service and previous FE studies, the lower knuckle, lower and upper end
bracket of side frame are always the high stress connections, furthermore the geometry of the
end bracket detail cannot be thoroughly represented by the coarse mesh in the cargo tank
finite element model, then a fine mesh analysis can be used to obtain the stress for
comparison with the criteria.
2.1.4
Large openings
If the geometry of an opening is roughly modelled in the cargo tank model, the stress
concentration usually occurs at the edge or corners. Fine mesh analysis is an effective
method to determine the exact local stress around the opening.
Among the same type of primary support members, those with the highest von Mises
stresses at the location of the same large openings from the cargo hold model analysis are to
be selected for the fine mesh analysis. Since large openings can be located at different type of
primary support members and even for the same type of primary support member large
openings may exist at different locations, in general, above selection may involve multiple
fine mesh analyses.
2.1.5
Connections between deck and double bottom longitudinal stiffeners and

adjoining structures of transverse bulkhead
The objective of the fine mesh analysis of end connections of longitudinal stiffeners at deck
and double bottom is to investigate the increased stresses caused by the relative deflection
between the stiffener supports, which may cause localised structural and/or paint cracks.
Selection of the stiffeners for analysis is based on maximum relative deflection between
primary supports and transverse bulkheads.
JANUARY 2014
Longitudinally, maximum relative defection of deck, inner and outer bottom longitudinal
stiffeners usually occurs in way of transverse watertight bulkheads and transverse swash
bulkhead. Transversely, maximum deflection usually occurs in way of the mid-tank position
between longitudinal bulkheads.
Originally, the Rules imposed a relative deflection criterion, which was derived based on a
simple beam under deflection and calibration with existing designs, to control the stress level
at the end connection of the stiffeners caused by the relative deflection between primary
support members. If the deflection criteria was not satisfied, a mandatory fine mesh analysis
was required to assess the total stress in way of the end brackets and attached web stiffeners
of longitudinal stiffeners of double bottom and deck, and adjoining vertical stiffener of
transverse bulkhead, where maximum relative deflection between primary supports exists. It
was later decided to delete the deflection criteria and require a local fine mesh analysis in all
cases.
The advantage of using a fine mesh analysis over a simple relative deflection criterion is that
the fine mesh analysis can provide a more accurate control of the stress level as the analysis
takes into account the actual geometry of the connection detail, bracket arrangement and all
load components. The intention of the fine mesh analysis is to verify that the structure has
adequate strength when subjected to the increased stress caused by the relative deflection of
the stiffener and all other applied loads.
2.1.6
Connections between corrugation and adjoining lower structure
For the connections of corrugated bulkhead to adjoining structures, where the structural
member connections are rather complex and their geometry of structural detail cannot be
adequately represented by the coarse mesh in the cargo tank finite element model. By
experience of service and previous FE analysis in design where is stress concentration and
structural discontinuity, then a fine mesh analysis can be used to obtain the stress for
comparison with the criteria.
SCREENING PROCEDURE
3.1
Screening areas
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
List of structural details

Cargo hold region
Screening criteria apply to the areas where the stress grads is higher but not to areas under
uniform stresses where no stress concentration exists. The screening procedure applies to
structural details including openings, bracket toes and heels of primary support members.
The screening criteria is used to predict whether the stress may exceed the permissible stress.
Fine mesh analysis is not required for structural details that comply with the screening
criteria.
Fine mesh finite element analysis is to be carried out if the structural details under
assessment do not comply with the screening criteria. The compliance with these criteria is to
be verified for all finite element load cases.
JANUARY 2014
It is to be noted that the screening formulae given are intended to provide a conservative
estimation of the localised stress in way of the structural details, based on the stresses
obtained from the cargo tank FE analysis, for the purpose of identifying the necessity for
carrying out a further fine mesh analysis. These formulae will not necessarily give accurate
prediction of the stress level.
The screening criteria were developed based on correlation studies of the stresses obtained
from the 'coarse mesh' cargo tank FE analysis and the fine mesh FE analysis. Unless the
requirements specified in [3.2.2] of the Rules for the construction of the cargo hold finite
element model are followed, any screening assessment carried out is not valid.
a)
As there are many openings in the web of primary support members, except the large
opennings which is mandatory as defined in [3.2], a further screening procedure is
introduced to identify openings in non-critical areas that need not be checked (using
the screening formula or fine mesh analysis). The deciding criterion is based on the
size of the opening and its location.
The screening verification can be performed for the one represented detail of the group with
the maximum yield utilisation factor and the results to this represented detail by the
screening verification can be applied to all the details in the considered group. Each
structural detail in the group inside the cargo region shall have same geometry and same
relative locations to those of one represented detail.
In each group, structural details shall have same geometrical properties as listed below:
The shape and the size of openings.
The arrangement of the edge stiffeners in way of openings.
The plate thickness and its geometrical shape.
The arrangement of the stiffeners in way of the structural details' area to be
evaluated by screening.
The geometrical shape of the flange in way of bracket toes in deck transverses,
vertical web frames on longitudinal bulkhead and horizontal stringers on
transverse bulkhead.
If the geometry and the relative locations of a structural detail is different from the group in
the consideration, this structural detail shall not be categorised as the same group of
structural details. Therefore, the screening verification for this structural detail should be
performed separately.
3.2.2
Outside midship cargo hold region
The screening procedure as described in Ch 7, Sec 3, [3.2.2] is applied to the structural detail
which is located outside miship cargo hold region and corresponding to a similar detail in
midship cargo hold region. The fine mesh result for the 'similar detail' in midship cargo hold
region can be a reference when verifying the specified structural outside midship cargo hold
region.
If for a specific structural detai outside midship cargo hold region, there is no similar
corresponding detail in midship cargo hold region which has been verified by the fine mesh
analysis, a separate fine mesh analysis can be performed for the one represented detail of the
group with the maximum yield utilisation factor and the results to this represented detail by
the separate fine mesh analysis can be applied to all the details in the considered group. Each
structural detail in the group outside midship cargo hold region shall have same geometry
and same relative locations to those of one represented detail.
JANUARY 2014
In each group, structural details shall have same geometrical properties as listed below:
The plate thickness and its geometrical shape.
The arrangement of the stiffeners in way of the structural details' area to be
evaluated by the separate fine mesh analysis from the one performed in the
midship cargo hold region.
The geometrical shape of the flange in way of side frame end brackets.
The shape and the size of large openings.
The arrangement of the edge stiffeners in way of large openings.
If the geometry and the relative locations of a structural detail is different from the group in
the consideration, this structural detail shall not be categorised as the same group of
structural details. Therefore, a separate fine mesh analysis for this structural detail shall be
performed.
3.3
Screening criteria
3.3.1
Screening factors and permissible screening factors
After coarse mesh analysis of ship structures, the presented results are the average stress on
each of coarse element area. For those local positions where the stress gradient is changed
sharply due to geometry complex, the real stress will much higher than the average stress on
the area of coarse mesh. Then, the fine mesh analysis is necessary for those positions to
investigate the real stress distribution.
By experience, some local structural positions where the stress is certainly high could be
picked out. Therefore, the mandatory fine mesh analysis for these positions is necessary. The
positions except mentioned in [2.1] is complex in geometry, should be screening by certain
criteria to determine positions where the stress is most probable to exceed safety criteria and
the fine mesh analysis should be carried for these positions only.
The numerical study of bulk carriers D1 and S1 by 5050 fine mesh analysis indicates that
stress of all elements at hatch corner of S1 ship and of most elements at hatch corner of D1
ship does not exceed permissible stress. That is because the stress at hatch corner is much
released and reduced by corners parabola shape and locally strengthened deck plate,these
detail of structural can't be presented in coarse mesh model. So that the CSR BCs screening
criteria for fine mesh analysis (95% of the coarse mesh allowable stress) is introduced for
hatch corner screening, and the fatigue analysis should be carried out mandatory.
The object of screening is to predict such kind of joints or locations where the fine mesh
stress exceeds the allowable stress:
fine _ mesh [ fine _ mesh ]
(1)
There must be a relationship between average stresses of coarse mesh element and of fine
mesh element as:
fine _ mesh = f g coarse _ mesh
(2)
The ratio between allowable stresses for two kinds of mesh size has already been given by
rules as:
fine _ mesh
1.7 element _ not _ adjacent _ to _ weld
(3)
fs =
={
[ coarse _ mesh ] 1.5 element _ adjacent _ to _ weld
Put Equation (2) and Equation (3) into Equation (1):

JANUARY 2014
f g . coarse _ mesh f s .[ coarse _ mesh ]

coarse _ mesh
fs
[ coarse _ mesh ]
fg
That means factor C = fs/fg is the screening criteria in the form of percentage of permissible
stress as used in CSR BC (July 2010). While the fs has been defined in rules, the key point is to
define the coefficient of fg =
fine _ mesh
coarse _ mesh
for different interested joints.
For each typical joins, the average ratios of fg is obtained for each structure plate, then the
biggest ratio of fg is obtained for the joint. This means every joint has one ratio for screening
criteria analysis. We separated all joints to two kinds: mandatory area and screening area.
Total average ratio of mandatory area and screening area is obtained. Considering the
current coarse mesh criteria 1.0 y, the Rules required fine mesh (5050mm) criteria is 1.5 y,
the margin value of 75% is accepted for screening criteria. The results are presented as
following table.
Table 1:
Stress screening criteria analysis of D1 and S1
Ship type
D1
Area kind
Mandatory
fg
fs
screening criteria
Conclusion for
screening areas
2.77
1.5
54%
Screening
area
1.96
1.5
77%
S1
Mandatory
2.43
1.5
62%
Screening
area
2.04
1.5
74%
75%(average of 77% and 74%)
Based on D1 and S1 ships, a correlation numerical analysis on a series of typical joints with
ss coarse mesh and 50mm50mm fine mesh are carried out. For each joint the stress
comparison is made and the factors fg are gained for all loading cases. For each joints, only
the fg from the loading case which corresponding to maximum fine mesh stress is pick out.
The final fg is taken the average of maximum fg for all joints and then the screening criteria is
found as C = 0.75[coarse_mesh].
It is reasonable to set the screening criteria C = 0.75[coarse_mesh] tentative. The data of
correlation analysis are not enough based on 2 ships only. The criteria may be modified
when more data of correlation comes from more ships.
Table 5: The screening formula for openings in primary supporting structural members
given in this table of the Rules is intended to predict the maximum stress at the corners of an
opening in a web plate. The intention of each term in the formula is given below:
y
The term x
in the formula is to account for the contribution from element axial
stresses in both x direction and y direction.
0.74
0.74
l0
h0
2 + + xy
2r
2r
The term
in the formula is to account for the
contribution from element shear stress.

The term of Ch is to account for the effect of limited height of a web. For an opening in
the web of main bracket or buttress, this effect is ignored and the value of Ch is set to
1.0.
JANUARY 2014
The coefficient of 0.85 is a factor derived from correlation of the stresses obtained
from the coarse mesh cargo tank FE analysis and fine mesh FE analysis.
Table 6: The screening formula for bracket toes of primary support members given in this
table of the Rules is intended to predict the maximum stress at the bracket toe in way of the
termination of the bracket flange. The intention of each term in the formula is given below:
b2

b
The term 1
0.5
vm
in the formula is to account for the stress contribution from
b2

b
the plate element in way of bracket toe, where the ratio 1
effect of steepness (angle) of bracket toe.
Abar net 50
b1tnet 50
The term
0.5
accounts for the
0.5
bar
is to account for the stress contribution from the
Abar net 50
bt
flange of the bracket, where the term 1 net 50
0.5
represents the effect of flange
size.
The term of Ca is a correction factor to account for the geometry of the bracket toe (i.e.
toe angle and length), which is not included in the cargo tank FE model.
The coefficients 0.75 and 0.55 to the above terms are derived from correlation of the
stresses obtained from the coarse mesh cargo tank FE analysis and fine mesh FE
analysis.
Table 7: Localised stress at the heel of side horizontal girder and transverse bulkhead
horizontal stringer was found to be proportional to the von Mises stress of the element in
way of the heel in the cargo tank FE model (see screening formula given in [3.2.1], Table 3 of
the Rules). A stress concentration factor of 3.0 was derived from correlation between stress
result from cargo tank and fine mesh analysis.
Localised stress at the heel of longitudinal bulkhead horizontal stringer and transverse
bulkhead horizontal stringer was found to be proportional to the longitudinal axial stress of
the element in way of the heel in the cargo tank FE model (see screening formula given in
this table of the Rules). A stress concentration factor of 5.2 was derived from correlation
between result from cargo tank and fine mesh analysis.
3.3.2
Screening criteria
STRUCTURAL MODELLING
4.1
General
4.1.1
JANUARY 2014
4.2
Extend of model
4.2.1
To ensure the reliable boundary displacements from global model, the local fine mesh model
should be cut along with main supporting members.
4.3
Mesh size
4.3.1
A maximum mesh size of 5050mm is chosen on the basis that this mesh size is required for
representing the actual geometry of structural details, such as toe of brackets and corner of
openings. Local stress is sensitive to the localised geometry of the structure and actual
modelling of the geometry is necessary to determine the stress level in different detailed
design.
4.3.2
The extent of fine mesh zone shall be no less than 500mm, i.e. 10 elements in each direction.
Smooth transition to coarse mesh zone is required to avoid abrupt change of stress
distribution.
4.4
Elements
4.4.1
Edge stiffener of opening, i.e. flat bar stiffener welded directly to the edge of the opening, is
to be modelled with plate elements. Web stiffener which is welded to the web plating but not
directly to the edge of the opening can be modelled using line elements. If the web stiffener
is located less than 50mm from the edge of the opening (i.e. less than the width of one
element in the fine mesh zone of mesh size 5050mm) then it can be represented by line
elements along the nearest plate elements boundary inboard of the opening edge. These line
elements are not to be located on the edge of the opening.
4.4.2
4.4.3
For openings, the minimum extent of the fine mesh zone is to be taken at least 100mm (two
layers of elements) from the opening edge. Area within the fine mesh zone is assumed to be
corroded half of the minimum allowance thickness.
4.4.4
4.5
Transverse web frames
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
JANUARY 2014
4.6
Transverse bulkhead stringers, buttress and adjacent web frame
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.7
Deck, double bottom longitudinal and adjoining transverse bulkhead

vertical stiffeners
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.8
Corrugated bulkheads
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6
4.8.7
JANUARY 2014
4.9
Hatch corner structures
4.9.1
4.9.2
FE LOAD COMBINATIONS
5.1
General
5.1.1
5.2
Application of loads and boundary conditions
5.2.1
General
The most common method used is to apply the nodal displacements as prescribed boundary
condition to the sub-model. Where the sub-model has additional grid points between the
common nodal points, multi-point constraint equations can be used to define the
displacements at the additional grid points. Linear multi-point constraint equation is
considered to be sufficient.
It is to be noted that multi-point constraint equations can appear in different forms in
different finite element software. However, as long as the displacements at the nodes on the
primary support members (such as girders and floors) are defined, the exact choice of multipoint constraint equations should not have significant effect on the stresses at the area of
interest, which should be located at adequate distance from the boundary of the model.
Where nodal forces are applied, it is common to hold the model at certain point(s) on its
boundary to prevent rigid body motion. As the system is itself in equilibrium, the net force at
the fixed point(s) should be negligibly small. In practice, prescribed nodal displacements will
usually be applied, as most finite element software caters for this method.
ANALYSIS CRITERIA
6.1
6.1.1
Strength assessment
General
Steel is ductile. Through ductility, structural steel is able to absorb extensive local yielding
without the danger of structural failure. Yielding commonly occurs in steel structures even
before the intended service loads are applied. For hull structures which are complex in
geometry as well as in connection details, local yielding is actually inevitable.
Yielding can occur during fabrication and erection. For instance, welding often produces
over-yield residual stresses in the heated zone, especially in the joint connections. Yielding is
also possible when structural members are fitted into positions and formed into desired
shapes. In most cases, the yielding is highly localised, and that will be surrounded by lower
stress regions causing load re-distributions, and as a result, constitutes no consequence to the
integrity of the structure.
JANUARY 2014
6.1.2
Reference stress
The reference stress is defined in Ch 7, Sec 2, [5.2.1] of TB.
6.1.3
Permissible stress
As the acceptance criteria are set against a given mesh size, these criteria should not be used
in conjunction with stresses obtained from a model with mesh size larger than that is
intended as this will lead to non-conservative scantling requirement. For models with a mesh
size smaller than that intended, an average scheme can be used to calculate the equivalent
stress over a patch size of 5050mm.
Average stress calculated over an area equivalent to the mesh size of the cargo tank finite
element model is not to exceed the allowable stress required by the cargo tank finite element
analysis (i.e. below yield) to retain the consistency between fine mesh analysis and cargo
tank analysis. The average stress is calculated based on weighted average of Von Mises stress
and area of elements within the equivalent area.
6.2
Acceptance Criteria
6.2.1
It is noted that in order to account for the redistribution of localised stresses as mentioned in
[6.1.1] above, ASME pressure vessel codes allow membrane stresses in the shell to go up to
yield strength, and for membrane plus bending, the allowable is 1.5 times yield. If local
bending is present due to a structural discontinuity, the allowable is two times yield. For
ship structures, there is no reason why very localised yielding, which occurs commonly
during construction, should then be prohibited during their service life.
It is well known that calculated stresses in linear finite element analysis can continue to
increase beyond yield as the mesh size decreases, particularly in way of structural
connections or discontinuities. It is important to note that all stresses that exceed the yield
point are direct results of linear finite element analysis based on a linear stress-strain
relationship. In reality, a stress in steel can only go slightly beyond the yield stress, and a
stress of 1.5 or 2 times yield does not exist physically. In other words, without resorting to
non-linear analysis for more accurate structural behaviour beyond yield, an over-yield stress
should really be evaluated in conjunction with the corresponding stress in the area in
question, with a view of load actions and not solely based on the magnitude of the over-yield
stress itself. Calibration of the load model, the structural model and the acceptance criteria
against service experience is therefore essential in the setting of the acceptance criteria.
The Rules adopted an approach commonly used by shipbuilding industries in which the
localised area acceptance stress criteria (For static and dynamic load cases; 1.7 times yield in
general and 1.5 times yield for element adjacent to a weld. For static load cases; 1.36 times
yield in general and 1.2 times yield for element adjacent to a weld.) are set against a standard
mesh size (5050mm) to obtain a standard of the scantling requirement. The acceptance
stress criteria are calibrated against the applied load model using existing service experience
of design details to ensure the set standard is not lower (and in many cases higher) than that
currently required.
Furthermore, it is noted that the over-yield stresses by linear finite element analysis at the
structural details where they are obvious that no fatigue problems exist will be surrounded
by lower stress region causing load redistribution, and as a result, constitutes no
consequences to the integrity of the structure. Therefore, from the yield strength point of
view, 20% lift-up of the localised area acceptance criteria with calibration of load and
JANUARY 2014
structural models and with the consideration of service experiences can be limitedly given to
the design details fully compliant with the requirements in very fine mesh analyses as
specified in Ch 9, Sec 2.
As the acceptance criteria are set against a given mesh size, these criteria should not be used
in conjunction with stresses obtained from a model with mesh size larger than that is
intended as this will lead to non-conservative scantling requirement. For models with a mesh
size smaller than that intended, an average scheme can be used to calculate the equivalent
stress over a patch size of 5050mm.
6.2.2
Lower stool not fitted to a transverse or longitudinal corrugated bulkhead
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
BUCKLING
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
General
1 Introduction
2 Application
3 Definitions
SECTION 2
Slenderness Requirements
1 Structural Elements
2 Plates
3 Stiffeners
5 Brackets
6 Other Structures
SECTION 3
Prescriptive Buckling Requirements
1 General
2 Hull Girder Stress
3 Buckling Criteria
SECTION 4
Buckling Requirements for Direct Strength Analysis
1 General
2 Stiffened and Unstiffened Panels
3 Corrugated Bulkhead
4 Vertically Stiffened Side Shell Plating of Single Side Skin Bulk Carrier
5 Struts, Pillars and Cross Ties
SECTION 5
Buckling Capacity
1 General
2 Interaction Formulae
3 Other Structures
APPENDIX 1
Stress Based Reference Stresses
1 Stress Based Buckling Assessment
2 Reference Stresses
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Assumption
1.1.1
It gives the scope of failure modes and elements regarding buckling strength criteria in this
chapter:
The failure modes (elastic overall and local buckling, and ultimate limit state).
The types of members (local supporting members, primary supporting members).
Other structures (pillars, corrugated bulkheads and brackets).
And states the requirements/criteria in this chapter are to be applied for design verification
of scantling requirements for Ch 6 and FE buckling check for Ch 7.
1.1.2
This criterion is basic principle for structural buckling design.
1.1.3
It states the net scantling approach is applied in bucking requirements and all requirements
/ parameters related to overall strength PSM, shear area, section modulus and moment of
inertia are to be calculated based on the gross offered thickness minus 50% of the corrosion
margin, tc considering the average corrosion. See also Ch 3, Sec 2, [1.1.2]. For other few
scantlings required n50 in the slenderness requirements, e.g. net cross sectional area of flange
for tripping brackets, might be based on the past engineering practice for the rule scantling
requirements.
1.1.4
It states the sign specification of compressive and tensile stresses applied for the buckling
requirements in this chapter.
APPLICATION
2.1
Scope
2.1.1
It gives the applications of buckling checks for Sec 2 to Sec 5, e.g. which section can be
applied to a certain type of the structural element.
2.1.2
Stiffener
For the stiffened panel, the stiffener buckling requirements in this chapter apply to the
stiffener fitted along the longer edge of its buckling panel in order to check this configuration.
For other stiffeners such as carling or secondary beam the buckling check, if needed, can be
performed using the column-beam mode described in Sec 5 of this chapter but the applied
loads and boundary condition etc. should be case by case considered.
2.1.3
Enlarged stiffener
Buckling strength of enlarged stiffeners (with or without web stiffening) used for Permanent
Means of Access (PMA) is controlled by,
(a) the slenderness requirements for Primary Supporting Members (PSM),
JANUARY 2014
(b) the prescriptive buckling requirements, and

(c) FE buckling requirements specified in Sec 4 respectively with different requirements
to enlarged stiffener web and enlarged stiffener/flange, i.e. plate or stiffener buckling.
Buckling strength of longitudinal PMA platforms without web stiffeners may also be
ensured using the criteria for Local Supporting Member (LSM), provided shear buckling
strength of web is verified in line with plate buckling.
DEFINITIONS
3.1
3.1.1
General
Buckling definition
It gives the explanation/definition of buckling generic term. Also the concept of ultimate
strength is introduced to be applied for the buckling capacity by taking into account the load
redistribution.
3.1.2
Buckling capacity
It gives the basic principle of buckling capacity and the basic principle of its calculation
method, which utilises the positive elastic post-buckling effect for plates and accounts for
load redistribution between the structural components.
3.1.3
Assessment methods
It gives the definition of two methods in this chapter depending on different types of
boundary condition, i.e. Method A and Method B. The relationship among ultimate strength
Method A (= M1), Method B (= M3) and elastic buckling (= M2) are shown in the Figure 1.
The boundary condition of Method A is that all the edges are forced to remain straight (but
free to move in-plane) due to surrounding structure/neighbouring plates. Under this
boundary condition, Method A can be regarded as taking the load redistribution and can
considered as the ultimate strength.
The boundary condition of Method B is that of long edges of the plate panel (parallel to the
stiffeners) is not forced to remain straight (or, called as free to pull-in) since there is no
surrounding structure to restrain the long edges in the in-plane direction. This is somewhat
more conservative compare to Method A depending on plate slenderness.
The application of Method A and Method B are defined in Sec 4, while for prescriptive
buckling requirements in Sec 3, only Method A is applied. The difference approach of
Method A and Method B is by using different c value in Case 2 of Sec 5, Table 2.
More details can be seen in the TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec04_In-plane Constraint Study.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1:
3.2
The relationship concerning capacity among ultimate strength (Method A),

Method B and elastic buckling
Buckling utilisation factor
3.2.1
It gives the definition of the utilisation factor, .
3.2.2
It gives the calculation formulae/method for the utilisation factor. The Figure 1 in this Rules
show the relationship between the applied loads and buckling strength/ultimate capacity.
The physical meaning of utilisation factor (the ratio of utilised factor) is different from the
usage factor; the latter is calculated directly from the interactive equation although the two of
them are similar when they close to 1.0.
The value of c is obtained by iteration in the different formulae in Sec 5, not the simple linear
relationship. The concept of the c is mentioned here.
3.3
3.3.1
Allowable buckling utilisation factor

General structural elements
Table 1 gives the allowable buckling utilisation factor for each structural component
corresponding to different utilisation factors for S+D and S load combinations as well as
for corrugated bulkheads. The possibility of occurrence can be used for simple explanation
for different utilization factors, i.e. for S+D load combinations, the utilisation factor can be
taken as 1.00, while for S, just 0.80, this is reasonable for less occurrence, take the more
relax requirements (higher utilisation factor).
The values are based on CSR OT (July 2010) and have been used for many years. Also, the
allowable buckling utilisation factor is consistence with the yielding usage factors; see also
TB of Ch 7, Sec 7 for reference.
JANUARY 2014
3.4
Buckling acceptance criteria
3.4.1
It gives the definition of buckling acceptance criteria.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 8, SEC 2 SLENDERNESS REQUIREMENTS
1
1.1
STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
General
1.1.1
It states all structural elements should be to comply with the slenderness and proportion
requirements given in this section. The requirements for the minimum proportions of local
and primary support members are based on elastic buckling capacity of plate panels, with an
aspect ratio (long edge/short edge) not less than one, given by:
tp
E = 0.9C E
1000 l a
tp
E = 0.9C E
1000 l a
N/mm2
N/mm2
where,
0.9 = 2/[12(1-2)]
= 0.3
The buckling coefficient is calculated for the critical buckling mode for each structural
member and is calibrated at the lower limit of slenderness area A and the upper limit of
slenderness area C. The Johnson-Ostenfeld correction is used to calculate the critical
buckling capacity from the elastic buckling capacity making allowance for the plasticity
effects.
The requirements are based on mild steel with a correction factor for higher material yield
strength, an example showing the requirements for the breadth of flange outstands to flange
thickness ratio is given below:
b f out R eH
235
b f out / t f = 12
tf =
mm
R eH
12
235
The requirements for the minimum thickness of the plate, web and flange are derived from
slenderness requirements of the corresponding structural parts. These slenderness
requirements are measurements for the relative difference between the elastic buckling
capacity and material yield strength. This is similar to the definition of the slenderness ratio
= (ReH/EL)0.5. Then, the slenderness ratios increase if the material yield strength increases.
Consequently, thicker plates are required if materials with a high tensile strength is used.
However, the rule allows using minimum yield stress of mild steel if the plates are checked
with prescriptive and FE buckling formulae. The details are:
(a) For plates and web plates assessed in accordance with Ch 8, Sec 3 (prescriptive
longitudinal material) and Ch 8, Sec 4 (FEM) using 235MPa also the slenderness
criteria in Ch 8, Sec 2 can be calculated based on 235MPa. This will typically cover all
plates and web plates in cargo area (both prescriptive and FEM) as well as
longitudinal material (plates) outside cargo area (only prescriptive).
(b) For members not assessed in accordance with Ch 8, Sec 3 (prescriptive longitudinal
material) and Ch 8, Sec 4 (FEM), this relaxation is not relevant, e.g. primary
supporting members, transverse bulkheads and other plates not taking part in hull
girder bending outside cargo area, where the only buckling scope is the slenderness
criteria.
JANUARY 2014
The slenderness requirements in this section including minimum thickness, proportion of

thickness/width ratio limit, stiffness, structural flexural and/or rotational rigidity and
minimum bending moment of inertia requirements can also be as the function that is to
avoid excessive deformation of hull girder and structural members because based on the
elastic buckling theory, the excessive deformation is not allowed.
In addition, densely stiffened panel structures with prescribed stiffener spacing generally
ensure good vibration behaviour of a local plate panel, a stiffened panel or a grillage. Thus, it
can be easily understood that the vibration which may damage or impair the ship structure,
equipment or machinery can be limited or controlled based on the slenderness requirements.
PLATES
2.1
Net thickness of plate panels
2.1.1
The requirement for the minimum proportions of plate panels between the stiffeners /
longitudinals is a maximum slenderness ratio and is calibrated based on current practice
with adjustments for the net thickness approach and using the upper limit of slenderness
area C. The proportional requirements are developed based on the assumptions shown in
Table 1. For consistency, bf-out is in net scantling.
Table 1: Proportions for plates and stiffeners, normal strength steel, ReH=235N/mm2
Comparison based on the assumption of axial compressive stresses
Requirement
EL
cr
s/t (1)
s/t (2)
dw/tw: L and T
dw/tw: Bulb (3)
dw/tw: FB
bf-out/tf
4.00
4.00
4.00
1.25
0.43
0.43
74
48
132
115
165
556
0.32
0.20
0.56
0.49
0.70
2.37
1.78
2.22
1.33
1.43
1.19
0.65
74
48
131
115
152
210
0.32
0.20
0.56
0.49
0.64
0.89
Required
slenderness
coefficient,
C
100
125
75
45
22
12
where,
F
Buckling edge constraint factor
EL
Elastic buckling stress, in N/mm2
K
Ratio between elastic buckling stress and yield stress, K = EL/ReH
Slenderness ratio = (ReH/EL)0.5
cr
Critical buckling stress (Johnson-Ostenfeld correction), in N/mm2
Utilisation factor relative to yield, = cr/ ReH
Notes: 1) Hull envelope and tank/hold boundaries.

2) Higher for slenderness for structures such as non-watertight bulkheads,
platforms and internal decks in machinery area, accommodations, etc.
3) The values are based on and edge constraint factor of 1.25 according to CSR OT
(Corr. 2).
JANUARY 2014
The relationship between the coefficients in Table 1 for the face plate is shown in detail
below:
E =
2 E t f
F
12( 1 2 ) b f out
E =
KR eH N/mm 2
N/mm 2
hence
b f out
tf
F
2
K 12( 1 2 )
0.4
tf
E
R eH
b f out
12
E
R eH
R eH
mm
235
where,
F
: 0.43, F = 0.425+(s/l)2 0.43 for plate that simply supported at 3 sides, and 1 edge
free side without loads.
K
: 2.36
In the Table 1, the required slenderness coefficients C is mainly based on experience both
from the CSR rules and other explicit design codes such as DNV-RP-C202 (Buckling strength
of shells, January 2013). The slenderness requirement for the plate, flatbars, T and L-bars, is
the same coefficient as in CSR OT (July 2010). The slenderness coefficient C for bulbs is tuned
using PULS in order to have the same safety level as for flatbar, i.e. the same strength relative
to the yield strength. This value is increased from 41 to 45 as compared the CSR OT (July
2010).
In order to prevent buckling of the face plate, the same requirement as in DNV-RP-C202
(January 2013) is used:
b f out R eH
E
=
t f = 0.4
R eH
12
235
STIFFENERS
3.1
3.1.1
Proportions of stiffeners
Net thickness of all stiffener types
The requirement for the minimum proportions of web plate is a maximum slenderness ratio
and is calibrated based on current practice with adjustments for the net thickness approach
and using the upper limit of slenderness area C in the Figure 1 below.
The requirement for face plate and flanges is specified such that torsional buckling of the
flange is inhibited; noting that torsional buckling of the flange is not covered by other
buckling criteria. The requirement is calibrated to give stocky proportions of the face plates,
based on existing practice with adjustments for the net thickness approach and using the
lower limit of slenderness area A in the Figure 1 below. The proportional requirements are
developed based on the assumptions shown in Table 1.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1: Critical buckling stress and slenderness
3.1.2 Net dimensions of angle and T-bars

This regulation is taken from CSR OT (July 2010) and is included to prevent torsional
instability of angle and T profiles.
3.1.3
Bending stiffness of stiffener
The purpose of the inertia stiffness requirement for stiffeners is to prevent lateral instability
and is based on the Euler buckling formula for a simply supported stiffener. The required
inertia stiffness is higher for longitudinals subject to hull girder stresses than for other
stiffeners. The criteria will effectively limit the use of flat bars for the deck longitudinals.
10 4 2 EI net
=
N/mm 2
E
2
l A eff
K R eH
hence
I net
= C l 2 A eff
R eH
cm 4
235
The inertia stiffness requirement has been based calibrated based on current practice with
adjustments for the net thickness approach to give a slenderness coefficient C of:
1.43. Based on K=1.24 for stiffeners subjected to hull girder stresses, which represents a
slenderness ratio of =0.90. This factor should be used for all longitudinal stiffeners, both
continuous and sniped stiffeners. The reason for using the same factor for sniped
stiffeners is because stresses will be distributed from the plating to the stiffener due to
shortening of the plate.
0.72. Based on K=0.61 for stiffeners not subject to hull girder stresses, which represents a
slenderness ratio of =1.28.
JANUARY 2014
In deriving the required inertia requirements, an effective breadth of attached plating not
exceeding 80% of the total width for cross sectional area and moment of inertia is to be
assumed for simplicity. Formulae for calculating the effective plate width are found in
several buckling codes. However, adopting such approach was not considered necessary for
this simplified approach.
The reference yield stress is to be taken for the attached plate. The purpose of the stiffener is
to stabilise the plate, and the higher yield stress of the plate which allows higher compressive
stresses in the panel should result in the higher moment of inertia to keep the panel in shape.
4.1
Proportions and stiffness
4.1.1 Proportions of web plate and flange

The requirements for the minimum proportions of PSM are based on the assumptions shown
in Table 2. The web spacing to thickness ratio, s/tw requirement is the same as for plate
panels making up the hull envelope plating or tank/hold boundaries. The breadth of flange
outstands to flange thickness ratio, bf-out/tf for stiffeners is also used for the PSM face flat to
ensure that the flange is stocky and hence supports the free edge of the PSM.
Table 2: Proportion to primary support members, mild steel, ReH=235N/mm2
Requirement
web plate s/tw
face flat bf-out/tf
EL
cr
4.0
0.43
74
554
0.32
2.36
1.78
0.65
74
210
0.32
0.89
Required
slenderness
coefficient,
C
100
12
4.1.2 Deck transverse primary supporting members

This requirement applies to the deck transverse PSM. For other transverse PSM this criteria
is not governing. The purpose of the overall stiffness criterion is to ensure that the transverse
primary supporting members have sufficient stiffness to ensure that axially compressed
longitudinals are effectively supported.
The criteria controls global lateral instability of the PSM and is based on S. P. Timonshenko
and J. M. Gere Theory of Elastic Stability and calibrated with current practice. For bulk
carriers, this requirement is applicable to deck transverse inside the top wing tank, but it is
not applicable to the transverse hatch coaming.
4.2
4.2.1
Web stiffeners of primary supporting members

Proportions of web stiffeners
The purpose of these criteria is to prevent instability of web stiffeners. The criteria are based
on Euler buckling equations and consider compressive stresses parallel and normal to the
direction of the web stiffening. The criteria are calibrated such that the web stiffeners provide
effective support for the web plate and hence the PSM.
4.2.2
Bending stiffness of web stiffeners
The criterion for web stiffeners parallel to compressive stresses as given in item (A) of
Table 2 in the Rules is identical to local support members, see [3.1.3]. The buckling mode for
JANUARY 2014
web stiffeners normal to the compressive stress as given in item (B) in Table 2 in Rules is
more complicated. The criterion is based on DNV, CN30.1 (Buckling strength analysis of bars
and frames, and spherical shells, April 2004).
It is assumed that out of plane force in the web plate is related to the thickness of the web.
Hence, the web stiffener inertia stiffness requirement to resist the out of plane forces
increases proportionally to the web-thickness. This requirement has been calibrated to
ensure that the web stiffener elastic buckling capability is higher that the elastic buckling
capability of the web plate. In case of slender web plates, this criterion will also provide a
higher elastic buckling capability in the web stiffener than the ultimate capacity of the web
plate.
BRACKETS
5.1
5.1.1
Tripping brackets
Unsupported flange length
The purpose of this requirement is to prevent torsional buckling of primary support

members. This is the only requirement covering the torsional buckling mode of PSM and
hence the requirement is calibrated to ensure that the flanges are stocky.
The correction for web-area Af-n50/(Af-n50+0.33Aw-n50) will require a smaller distance between
tripping brackets for primary support members with a large web depth to flange area ratio.
The requirement is based on the torsional buckling strength criteria in Ch 8.5 of DNV-RPC201 (Buckling strength of plated structures, October 2010). The slenderness coefficients
provide a torsional buckling capacity T as follows:
For symmetrical flanges, C=0.022:
T = 0,85ReH
For one sided flanges, C=0.033:
T = 0.96 ReH
It has been the intention to keep one sided flanges more stocky than the symmetrical ones,
due to the asymmetric bending behaviour of the members with one sided flanges. Tripping
brackets need not be spaced closer than 3.0m on PSM supporting tank or external boundaries,
i.e. subjected to tank pressures or sea pressures, based on ABS Rules and current practice.
Based on current experience, tripping brackets in other areas need not be spaced closer than
4.0m, e.g. in way of engine room and superstructure (excluding in way of tank boundaries
and external boundaries). For such PSM, which usually have small flange area and moderate
stress level, sbmin= 4.0 has been considered to be sufficient. In addition the stiffening between
tripping brackets will usually contribute with some tripping resistance for these primary
support members.
5.1.2
Edge stiffening
Where the length of the edge of tripping brackets exceeds 75 times the net thickness, then the
free edge is to be stiffened by a flange or edge stiffener. For a connection bracket this ratio is
50-55, however the stress level in the middle of a tripping brackets is lower than for end
brackets, as end brackets will have maximum compression near the midpoint of the edge
whereas tripping brackets act as a cantilever and hence the maximum compression is close to
the support. Rules have a value of 60, based on gross scantlings. For a typical tripping
bracket in a cargo tank, the gross thickness might be 12.5mm which corresponds to a net
thickness of 12.5-2.5=10mm (20-25% corrosion allowance) and hence the coefficient for net
scantlings becomes: 6012.5/10 = 75.
JANUARY 2014
5.2
End brackets
5.2.1
Proportions
The criteria are based on DNV Rules, Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C202 (January 2013). These Rules
specify that the length of the free edge of brackets is not to exceed 50 times the thickness,
calculated as gross thickness minus the corrosion addition specified in the Rules. In way of a
ballast tanks, this corrosion addition is typically 1.5mm which is 50% of tcorr as defined in Ch
3, Sec 3.
Assuming 20% wastage allowance applied in the current Rules, this ratio to be 55 (10%
increase from 50) for net scantlings as defined in CSR Rules (July 2010). Based on a standard
end bracket having a base angle, of 90 deg (see Figure 2) and with edge length/net
thickness ratio of 55, a number of other bracket geometries with same buckling strength have
been found, see [4.2.1].
The minimum thickness of end brackets satisfying the given buckling requirements is given.
The buckling formulation is based on the following assumptions; see also TB of Table 3 and
Figure 2:
Limiting the depth to thickness ratio of end brackets without edge stiffening to ensure
brackets are stocky i.e. in slenderness area A.
The triangular end bracket is idealised as a rectangular plate with short and long edge
taken as 2/3 of the length of free edge and 2/3 of the depth of the bracket, respectively.
The free edge of brackets without edge stiffening is allowed to move out of plane.
The loading pattern is triangular.
The thickness slenderness coefficient is applicable for a range off base angles
(50<<150). Studies have confirmed this to be adequate.
End brackets with edge reinforcements are based on the same assumptions as for end
brackets without edge reinforcement. The buckling coefficient for brackets with edge
reinforcement assumes that the edge reinforcement is sufficiently stiff to prevent
buckling of the bracket edge (simply supported edge).
Since this is a buckling requirement for brackets subjected to compression at edge, it is not
relevant for brackets only subjected to tensile stresses, e.g. internal brackets in a tank
surrounded by void spaces, and hence this buckling requirement is not applicable for these
brackets. However, other requirements to bracketed connections will apply to such brackets,
see Ch 3, Sec 6.
Table 3: Proportion to brackets, normal strength steel, ReH=235N/mm2
Requirement
Without edge
reinforcement
0.90
With edge
reinforcement
7.64
EL
498
2.12
0.69
cr
207
0.88
Required
slenderness
coefficient, C
d
20 + 16
l
where
d
0.25 1 / 0
l
650
2.77
0.60
214
0.91
70
where,
F : Buckling edge constraint factor based on the assumptions above (third bullet).
JANUARY 2014
2 /3
a=
b=
Figure 2: Definition of brackets
l
2/3
l
5.3
Edge reinforcement
5.3.1 Edge reinforcements of bracket edges

The requirement for the minimum depth of end bracket edge stiffening is calibrated to give a
stocky slenderness ratio, noting that the highest compressive stress occurring at the midspan, and hence K is taken as 4, where K is the elastic buckling strength to yield strength
ratio. This gives:
R eH
R eH
= 75 lstf
h w 2200 lstf
E
235
The requirement for the minimum depth of edge stiffening of tripping brackets or openings
takes into account the lower stress level at the mid-span of the edge stiffener and hence K is
taken as 2, which gives:
R eH
R eH
h w 1560 lstf
= 50 lstf
E
235
A minimum depth of 50mm for the edge stiffener is found reasonable and comparable with
existing practice.
5.3.2
Proportions of edge stiffeners
OTHER STRUCTURES
6.1
6.1.1
Pillars
Proportions of I-section pillars
For I-section pillars, the local buckling of the web and flanges of a pillar cross section are
controlled by limiting the slenderness proportional requirements that of ordinary stiffeners
as that defined in [3.1.1] and [3.1.2].
JANUARY 2014
Proportions of box section pillars
6.1.2
For box-section pillars, the local buckling of the web and flanges of a pillar cross section are
controlled by limiting the slenderness proportional requirements that of ordinary stiffeners
as defined in item (a) of [3.1.1].
Proportions of circular section pillars
6.1.3
For circular-section pillars, the local buckling of the web and flanges of a pillar cross section
are controlled by limiting the slenderness proportional requirements.
6.2
Edge reinforcements in way of openings
6.2.1 Depth of edge stiffener

The requirement for the moment of inertia of edge reinforcement stiffeners in way of
openings or cut outs is based on the Euler buckling formula for a simply supported stiffener.
It is assumed that only sectional properties of the edge reinforcement itself are used and that
the edge reinforcement is a flat bar stiffener, excluding the effective web plate flange which is
a conservative assumption.
10 4 2 E 2
E
i
N/mm 2
=
2
l stf
KR eH
hence,
i
100
lstf
ReH
E
cm
the radius of gyration, i for an flatbar stiffener is:

i
hw
2000 3K
l stf
hw
20 3
R eH
E
cm
mm
6.2.2 Proportion of edge stiffeners

It indicates that the proportional requirements of edge stiffeners are to comply with that of
ordinary stiffeners specified in [3.1.1] and [3.1.2].
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 8, SEC 3 PRESCRIPTIVE BUCKLING REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This section summarises the technical background of prescriptive buckling requirements for
plates and stiffeners subjects to hull girder bending/compressive and shear stresses. In
addition, the structural members such as corrugation mentioned in the rule, strut/pillar and
cross tie subjected to compressive stresses are also being included.
1.1.2
It emphasises that hull girder buckling strength check should be preformed along the full
length of the ship.
1.1.3
Design load sets
It introduces the design load sets for prescriptive buckling check. The load sets defined in
Ch 6, Sec 2, both intact and in flooded should be considered. For all design dynamic load set,
the lateral pressure should be considered according to the Ch 4 with the LCP defined in Ch 3,
Sec 7. The above lateral pressure should be combined with the hull girder stresses given in
[2.2].
1.2
Equivalent plate panel
1.2.1
If the thickness is not uniform within the width b, the equivalent width should be used. The
study using non-linear finite element analysis has been performed to check the validity on
the formula of equivalent plate panel. The results are shown based on the following plate
with a change of thickness over its width:
b = 850 mm
a = 2550 mm
t1 = 11.08 mm
t2 = 15.83 mm
ReH = 315 N/mm2
Three figures attached are shown for axial, transverse and shear stresses. The blue data
points show the plate reduction factors (i.e. Cx, Cy and Ctau) for a plate with a thickness
change over the width (see the bottom x-axis for the ratio of thinner plate width to total plate
width). The pink data points show the plate reduction factors (i.e. Cx, Cy and Ctau) for
equivalent plate panels with a thickness of 11.08 mm (see the upper x-axis for the ratio of
equivalent plate width to total plate width).
In the case of transverse and shear stresses, the plate reduction factors are always calculated
using the stress in the thinner plate (the stress in the thicker plate is reduced out of necessity
for force equilibrium). Furthermore, although a moment is introduced into the plating under
transverse and shear stresses (i.e. since mid-plane thicknesses are not coplanar), this moment
is not considered in the finite element analysis.
More analyses might be needed (e.g. other t1/t2, plate slenderness and aspect ratios).
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1:
Figure 2:
JANUARY 2014
Plate thickness change over width Axial stress
Plate thickness change over width Transverse stress
Figure 3:
Plate thickness change over width Shear stress
1.2.2
If the thickness is not uniform in transverse stiffening arrangement, each thickness should be
used and this will be able to find out the minimum capacity of the EPP.
1.2.3
Material
This requirement clarifies how to consider the case of a buckling panel made of several
materials. The minimum yield strength for different plate materials within the panel is to be
used for carrying out the panel buckling check.
HULL GIRDER STRESS
2.1
General
2.1.1
The hull girder bending stresses used for buckling check are determined according to Ch 6,
Sec 2 where shows the formula of hg.
2.1.2
It gives the formula of hull girder stresses used for buckling check. For shear stress
calculations, the corrected n50 thickness as defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [3.2.1] shall be used
because the buckling capacity shall be based on the full net thickness (full tc deduction)
without applying any shear correction, as defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [3.6].
2.2
Stress combinations
2.2.1
For plate buckling check, only the hull girder vertical bending stress and vertical shear stress
are considered. Two combinations are considered taking into account the global bending of
the hull and the maximum value of shear stress resulting from hull girder shear forces are
JANUARY 2014
not acting simultaneously (at the maximum values): one is with 100% of bending stress and
70% of shear stress; the other is with 70% of bending stress and 100% of shear stress. The
combination ratio between normal and shear stress is based on societys long-term
experience of the buckling assessment.
The following cases are to be used according to the type of stresses and framing system of
the plating:
1. For the normal compressive stress:
(a) For longitudinally framed plating: BLC1, the membrane stress in x-direction, x
being the normal stress, hg defined in [2.1.1].
(b) For transversely framed plating: BLC2, the membrane stress in y-direction, y
being the normal stress, hg defined in [2.1.1].
2. For the shear stress:
(a) BLC5, being the shear stress, hg defined in [2.1.2].
(b) BLC, Buckling Load Cases as defined in Ch 8, Sec 5, Table 2.
Figure 4:
Idealisation of elementary plate panels
BUCKLING CRITERIA
3.1
Overall stiffened panel
3.1.1
It gives the criterion of overall stiffened panel which the maximum utilisation factor can be
obtained as defined in Sec 5, [2.1].
3.2
Plates
3.2.1
It gives the criterion of plate elementary panel which the maximum utilisation factor can be
obtained as defined in Sec5, [2.2]. For prescriptive requirements, only SP-A can be chosen to
use.
This provision also applies to the vertically stiffened side shell plating (VSS plating) of single
side bulk carriers, and the clamped short edge case for VSS plating in Ch 8, Sec 5, Table 2
should be used in the calculation is mentioned.
JANUARY 2014
For transverse stress on VSS plating, since side shell plating are surrounded by the strong
structures such as hopper tanks and topside tanks and the role of VSS plates is not so
important for hull girder bending (see below), the average value is used, i.e. 0.5(y1 + y2)
with y = 1.0 are used for plate buckling check.
A study has been done in order to assess the maximum impact on hull girder buckling by the
removal of the stiffness in longitudinal direction of single side shell (P/S), only keeping the
shear stiffness.
Based on this conservative assessment a maximum increase of buckling utilisation of 8% was
found on side shell for the lower part in top side tank (top wing tank). Hence it may be
concluded that that transverse buckling of SSS between top wing and hopper of BC have
small impact on the overall hull girder buckling due to MH and MV. This shows that the
single side between top side and hopper is not a critical element for hull girder buckling due
to longitudinal stresses.
Accordingly, the new proposal of VSS plating is summarised as follows:
Updated Ky for Case 2 and Case 9 in Ch 8, Sec 5, Table 2.
Use clamped short edge, i.e. Case 9 in Ch 8, Sec 5, Table 2.
Use Ftran = 1.15, as requested by Ch 8, Sec 5, [2.2.5].

Use average stresses, i.e. x = y = 1.0, as requested by Ch 8, Sec 3, [3.2.1] for
prescriptive buckling requirements and by Ch 8, Sec 4, [4.1.1] for distributed
longitudinal stress associated with vertical and shear stress for FE buckling.
3.3
Stiffeners
3.3.1
It gives the criterion of stiffeners which the maximum utilisation factor can be obtained as
defined in Sec 5, [2.3]. This provision also applies to the vertically stiffened side shell frame
(VSS frame) of single side bulk carriers. In calculating, use the same x, y and as that of in
the corresponding VSS plating.
3.4
Vertically corrugated transverse and longitudinal bulkheads
3.4.1
It gives the criterion of vertically corrugated transverse and longitudinal bulkheads and the
formula of maximum shear corrugated utilisation factor.
3.5
For longitudinal bulkheads, the hull girder stress defined in [2.1.2].

For transverse bulkheads of bulk carrier, the shear stress defined in Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec 3,
[3.2.1] for the flooded condition is checked.
Horizontally corrugated longitudinal bulkhead
3.5.1
It gives the criterion of horizontally corrugated longitudinal bulkhead. The extension of each
corrugation is defined as half flange + web + half flange. The criterion is based on column
buckling.
JANUARY 2014
3.6
Struts, pillars and cross ties
3.6.1
It gives the criteria of struts, pillars and cross ties, also for different types. All requirements
should be in accordance with the Ch 8, Sec 5, [3.1].
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 8, SEC 4 BUCKLING REQ FOR DIRECT STRENGTH ANALYSIS
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This section summarises the background for the buckling assessment of finite element
analysis (FEA) subjected to compressive stress, shear stress and lateral pressure.
Note: Tensile stress components are still taken into account in the plate limit state and
ultimate buckling capacity of stiffener with the condition as specified in the Rules.
1.1.2
All structural elements in the finite element analysis carried out according to Ch 7 are to be
assessed individually for buckling assessments. It also means all stresses with the lateral
pressure (when necessary) are based on the FE results.
It indicates which kinds of elements listed in this provision have to be checked with buckling
requirements in FE analysis.
STIFFENED AND UNSTIFFENED PANELS
2.1
General
2.1.1
This section of the rules defines which structural member of the hull structure is to be
modelled as a stiffened panel or an unstiffened panel and also applied to Method A or
Method B respectively based on the locations those are related to the boundary condition of
the panels. See Table 1 and Figure 1 to Figure 9 for details.
It is noted that only UP-A is used for the vertical panels on the top wing tank of bulk carriers
shown in Figure 5 and Figure 7. For Method A and Method B methodology, please see the
TB of Sec 1, [3.1.3] and TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec04_In-plane Constraint Study.
2.1.2
Average thickness of plate panel
If the plate thickness along a panel is not constant, the weighted average thickness is to be
used which is in line with the FEM procedure in Ch 7 for simplification.
2.1.3
Yield stress of the plate panel
For safety, the panel yield stress is taken as the minimum value of the specified yield stress
of the elements within the panel.
2.2
Stiffened panels
2.2.1
It indicates the model extents of stiffened panel, i.e. one stiffener with its attached plate.
2.2.2
It indicates the way to deal with the stiffener properties or stiffener spacing varies within the
stiffened panel. By using this way, the most unfavourable/critical buckling failure mode of
the stiffened panel can be found.
JANUARY 2014
2.3
2.3.1
Unstiffened panels
Irregular plate panels
Since there is no analytical solution for irregular panels to determine their buckling capacity,
it is necessary to convert them into regular unstiffened panels those capacities have an
equivalent/similar as replaced irregular one, and then perform buckling assessment.
2.3.2
Modelling of an unstiffened panel with irregular geometry
This provision shows the detailed procedure of modelling for an unstiffened polygon panel.
They are from the CSR OT (July 2010).
2.3.3
Modelling of an unstiffened panel with triangular geometry
This provision shows the detailed procedure of modelling for an unstiffened triangular panel.
By performing numerical simulations (FEM), the suitable idealised regular geometrical
dimensions can be found based on an equivalent buckling capacity as the irregular panel.
More detailed information refers to TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec04_Unstiffened Panel with
Triangular Geometry.
2.4
Reference stress
2.4.1
It emphasises that the stress with its distribution should be from the results of FE analysis
and applied to the buckling mode.
2.4.2
The reference stresses is determined from Stress Based Method as defined in App 1 in the
Rules.
2.5
Lateral pressure
2.5.1
Lateral pressures have effects on the buckling strength of stiffeners, so they are considered in
the stiffener buckling strength assessment.
For plate buckling/ultimate capacity, such as in bottom shell and side shell, it is verified that
the effect due to lateral pressure is very limited. Therefore, the pressure is ignored in the
plate capacity. In the rule, the longitudinal stress to be considered has been modified for the
buckling. The modified value is now the maximum stress taking account indirectly of the
lateral pressure effect.
2.5.2
For simplicity, it is assumed to use the weighted average value to represents the nonuniform lateral pressure over a buckling panel.
2.6
2.6.1
Buckling criteria
UP-A
It gives the buckling criterion of unstiffened panel with Method A.
2.6.2
UP-B
It gives the buckling criterion of unstiffened panel with Method B.

JANUARY 2014
2.6.3
SP-A
It gives the buckling criterion of stiffened panel with Method A. For the utilisation factor SPA, the value should be taken as the maximum of the 3 buckling/ultimate strength failure
modes (for plate capacity, use method A) considered in the Rules.
It is noted that the overall panel capacity is regarded as threshold for the checking of the
buckling/ultimate capacity.
2.6.4
SP-B
It gives the buckling criterion of stiffened panel with Method B. For the utilisation factor SP-B,
the value should be taken as the maximum of the 3 buckling/ultimate strength failure modes
(for plate capacity, use method B) considered in the Rules.
It is noted that the overall panel capacity is regarded as threshold for the checking of the
buckling/ultimate capacity.
2.6.5
Web plate in way of openings
It gives the buckling criterion of the web plate in way of openings.
CORRUGATED BULKHEAD
3.1
General
3.1.1
It indicates that 3 buckling failure modes (corrugation overall column buckling, flange panel
and web panel buckling of corrugation) should be checked for the corrugated bulkheads.
3.2
Reference stress
3.2.1
It indicates that each corrugation flange and web panel should be checked.
3.2.2
It indicates to use the membrane stress at the element centred in FE buckling check. This
requirement is consistency with that of FE yielding check.
3.2.3
It gives the reference stresses to consider in the buckling criteria for the 2 worst
configurations, i.e. maximum normal stress parallel to the corrugation which could be found
at the ends of the corrugations or within its mid span and maximum shear stress. It also
defines the type of stress to be used for performing the buckling check, e.g. to take the
average stress value calculated for flange and for the web at the locations selected with the 2
above mentioned configurations. (see Figure 4)
For the selection of the maximum normal stress at corrugation ends, the rules consider 2
different situations:
The stress can be directly obtained at the read out point from the finite element,
The stress cannot be directly obtained at the read out point from the finite element.
JANUARY 2014
When the normal stress can be directly obtained from the FE at the read out point, the
stresses x, y and are directly used, and averaged. However when the normal stress cannot
be obtained directly from the FE, the stresses are to be interpolated at the read out point.
The read out point at corrugation end is different according to the fact that:
The corrugation is not fitted with shedder plate or gusset plate,

The corrugation is fitted with shedder plate or gusset plate.
When the corrugation is not fitted with shedder plate or gusset plate, the read out point is
located at a distance equal to b/2 for the corrugation end. When the corrugation is fitted with
shedder plate or gusset plate, the read out point is located at a distance equal to b/2 form the
intersection of the shedder plate or the gusset plate, measured at the mid breadth of the
flange or of the web.
The Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 show examples of read out points at b/2 from shedder
plates or gusset plates. The distance b/2 for the read out point is considered for using a
representative stress in the buckling criteria than the localised high stress due to the steep
stress gradient occurring in the area near the end of the corrugation.
In order to get a more robust solution, the interpolation shall be in accordance with Ch 8,
App 1, [1.2] for the regular panel on an equivalent buckling panel extending over 3b. This
means that the interpolation will be made using the 2nd order interpolation method for
regular panel for the normal stress x. For the shear stress linear interpolation between the
elements most close to b/2 is applicable.
Figure 1:
JANUARY 2014
Read out point at b/2 for symmetrical and unsymmetrical shedder plates
Figure 2:
Figure 3:
JANUARY 2014
Read out points at b/2 for symmetrical and unsymmetrical

gusset/shedder plates
Read out points at b/2 for asymmetrical gusset/shedder plates
Figure 4:
Detailed procedure for averaging the stresses
Detailed procedure for averaging the stresses

Averaging and Linear Interpolation of Element Stresses for
Flange Panel Buckling of Vertically Corrugated Bulkhead
Averaging element stresses in direction perpendicular to

corrugation knuckles is to be done first over the flange
width.
Averaging element stresses in direction parallel to

corrugation knuckles is not to be done.
The interpolation is to be applied where the stress value

at b/2 from lower end cannot be obtained directly from an
element.
After averaging the stresses over the flange width, and

after obtaining the stress at s/2 from lower end, the
maximum stress is to be used for compliance with the
buckling criteria.
vn
V11, V12, V21, V22: Vertical membrane stress evaluated at
element centroid;
Average stress from V11 and V12
Average stress from V21 and V22
Stress at b/2 obtained by linear interpolation between
V1 and V2
V3, V4, V5, V6, , Vn: Average vertical flange stresses
final = Max (b/2, V3, V4, V5, V6, , Vn)
V1 :
V2 :
b/2 :
v6
v5
v4
v3
v1
v11 v12
s/2
JANUARY 2014
v21 v22
s/2
v2
3.2.4
It gives the way to deal with varies thickness for the flange panel. This requirement is
consistency with the [2.2.2].
3.3
Overall column buckling
3.3.1
It gives the application of overall column buckling for corrugated bulkhead in Table 2 for
detail, and special requirements for vertical corrugated bulkheads subjected to local vertical
forces.
3.3.2
It gives the criterion of overall column buckling for each corrugated units. Figure 10 in Sec 4
and Figure 2 (grey shown below) give an illustration on the corrugation unit.
Figure 5:
Illustration of corrugation unit
3.3.3
It indicates that the end constraint factor, fend, is corresponding to pinned ends. If in way of
stool has the width exceeding 2 times the depth of the corrugation, it is to be regarded as
fixed end support due to strong end constraint.
3.4
Local buckling
3.4.1
It gives the criterion of local buckling of corrugated bulkheads. In accordance with [3.2.3],
two stress (normal and shear) combinations (max/in way of maximum of corresponding
stress) are to be specified in details with the values and the location to be obtained.
The aspect ratio =2, i.e. b2b of the buckling field is illustrated in Figure 6 below based on
past experience. For safety, it also specifies to use the plate thickness where the maximum
compressive / shear stress occur.
The attention is also drawn on the fact that the buckling assessment is to be performed for
each thickness in case the corrugation is made with different thicknesses along the
corrugation axis.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 6:
Illustration of buckling field with dimension b2b

Flange
Flange
Web
2b
VERTICALLY STIFFENED SIDE SHELL OF SINGLE SIDE SKIN BULK

CARRIER
4.1
4.1.1
Buckling criteria
Side shell plating
It provides the criterion of vertically stiffened side shell plating of bulk carriers. It also
indicates that 4 load combinations to be checked for buckling assessment in detail and
Method A is applied only for the buckling check here.
Figure 7 below provides an illustration on the buckling assessment case (a), (b), (c) and (d)
for side shell of bulk carriers, of which the reference stress models illustrate how reference
stresses are taken from real side frame panels and buckling assessment models show the
imaginary idealized panels to be used for buckling assessment.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 7:
Illustration of buckling fields [case (a), (b), (c) & (d)] for side shell
For transverse stress on VSS plating, average value is used in case (d), i.e. 0.5 (y1 + y2) with
y = 1.0 are used for plate buckling check. See also in TB, Ch 8, Sec 3, [3.2.1].
4.1.2
Side frames
The buckling assessment of side frames of single side skin bulk carriers is to be made
according to the stiffener buckling requirement as defined in Ch 8, Sec 5, [2.3]. The side
frames are considered with fixed ends due to the bracket requested at both ends. For the beff
calculation the cx coefficient to be used must correspond to the boundary condition of the
plating used in [4.1.1].
STRUTS, PILLARS AND CROSS TIES
5.1
Buckling criteria
5.1.1
It gives the criteria of struts, pillars and cross ties.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 8, SEC 5 BUCKLING CAPACITY
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This section is concerning the calculation of buckling capacities for structural members, e.g.
plate panels, stiffeners, primary supporting members, struts, pillars, cross ties and
corrugated bulkheads, etc. The application can be refers to [1.1.2].
Since buckling failure modes which the phenomenon are mainly excessive deformation,
torsion, warping those are translational and/or rotational displacement, the anti-buckling
design specified in the Rules (elastic buckling and ultimate buckling capacity requirements)
can also have a function to prevent or control the deformation from compromising the
integrity of ships structure.
1.1.2
It states the sections for the buckling application on prescriptive requirements (Sec 3) and FE
analysis requirements (Sec 4). Also, the applied loads/stresses (x, y and) used for different
requirements should be obtained from corresponding required sections.
1.1.3 Ultimate buckling capacity

It gives the method of calculating ultimate buckling capacity for plate panels, PSM and
stiffeners.
1.1.4 Buckling utilisation factor

The buckling utilisation factor should be taken as the highest value of all buckling modes.
The buckling utilisation factor for a buckling mode is equal to the reciprocal of which can
be obtained by appropriate iteration from the different buckling modes.
1.1.5 Lateral pressure

The lateral pressure contributes to bending stress and should be considered in stiffener
buckling assessment. However, for typical plate panels, lateral pressure has only marginal
effect on their buckling capacity and is not considered.
INTERACTION FORMULAE
2.1
Overall stiffened panel capacity
2.1.1
This limit state is based on both the elastic column and torsional buckling behaviours of a
simple beam subject to equivalent axial forces and lateral loads.
2.2
Plate capacity
2.2.1 Plate limit state

A new proof of plate capacity under combined in-plane loads is proposed. In order to
evaluate this new proof, extensive non-linear finite element analyses (NLFEA) have been
performed. Three (3) alternative proofs are first compared with the NLFEA results:
1) Existing CSR Proof (based on CSR BC)
JANUARY 2014
2) Provisional CSR Proof (based on CSR-H, ER 01 April 2013 version)

3) Proof from Recent Literature (based on Paik and Thayamballi, 2003 publication)
Followed by the newly proposed proof:
4) Proposed CSR Proof (based on CSR-H, TC 01 November 2013 version).
On the basis of these comparisons, the newly proposed proof is shown to have significantly
greater accuracy and precision than the alternative proofs over a broad range of plate aspect
and plate slenderness ratios. More details refer to TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec05_Formula of
Plate Capacity.
2.2.2 Reference degree of slenderness

The Table 2 is modified and supplemented (based on CSR BC and Society Rules) for the
buckling factor K formulation and considering the clamped boundary condition at the short
edge.
The reference degree of slenderness is relative value, and the formula is derived from the
Euler-elastic and shown as follows:
E
2E
P =
e= 2
K e
K
If slenderness related to the yield stress:
E
a =
K e = R eH _ P
R eH _ P
The reference degree of slenderness:
R eH _ P
= P
K e
a
K is buckling factor which depends on the aspect ratio , the edge stress ratio and on the
correction factors Flong or Ftran which describes the boundary condition of the plate edge a. Flong
= 1.0 for simply supported edge.
2.2.3 Ultimate critical stresses

The Cx, Cy and C are reduction factors related to ultimate capacity (yield collapse failure
mode). In the CFM, the difference between Method A and Method B is how to take the c1
coefficient in Case 2 in Sec 5, Table 3.
1
) 0 , which comes from the condition where y is
due to bending in DIN formulation. For Method B, c1 = 1.0, which comes from the
condition where y is due to direct loads that corresponds to a plate panel which edges
not restrained from pull-in which may result in non-straight edges as described in CSR OT
(July 2010).
For method A, c1 is taken as c 1 = ( 1
The Case 1, 2 and 11 which represent the simply supported boundary condition are for
general use. The Case 3, 4 and 5 are for different condition other than simply supported. For
vertically stiffened single side skin of bulk carrier and corrugation of corrugated bulkheads,
take UP-A.
JANUARY 2014
It is mentioned that for vertically stiffened single side plating of bulk carrier, the clamped
condition at short edge of the panel should be corresponding to the cases specified in the
Table 3. More details concerning Method A and Method B refer to TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec04
In-plane Constraint Study.
2.2.4 Correction factor Flong

As described in the Rules, Flong factors represent the degree of edge constraint affected by
different types of the stiffener fitted on the panel edge (for unstiffened panel, the factor is 1.0
means no affection). These values in Sec 5, Table 1 (based on CSR) have been checked or
updated by NLFEA studies. More details refer to TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec05_Correction
Factor Flong.
2.2.5 Correction factor Ftran

The coefficient Ftran is specified for the effect on the rotation restraint boundary condition
at the longer edge of the VSS plate panel provided by the side shell frame. For structures
other than VSS plate, this effect is not considered, i.e. Ftran = 1.0.
More details of Ftran and clamped factors refer to TB_Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec05_Correction
Factor Ftran and TB Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec05_Buckling with Short Edge Clamped.
2.2.6 Curved plate panels

The interactive formula in [2.2.1] is also applicable for Table 4. If the radius is larger than
(R/tp > 2500), the curved plate can be taken as plane/flat plate and Table 2 is available.
For the application of cases 1 and 2 of the Table 4, the item For curved single field must be
understood as a curved single field bounded by plane panels for example for a bilge strake
as it is shown in Ch 6, Sec 4, Figure 1.
The general application of cases 1 and 2 is to be used for other structural arrangements such
as longitudinal framing or when the curved single field is not directly bounded by plane
panels. The Note 1 of that Table 3 is applicable to curved plate panel whatever the radius.
The C value is to be taken as the maximum value between the value for the panel considered
as plane from Table 3 and the value of curved panel from Table 4.
2.2.7 Applied normal stress to plate panel

This provision provides the summary and procedure for how to take the normal stress for
the plate and stiffener buckling assessment, such as in the prescriptive requirements and in
FE buckling. For grillage analysis which method (beam theory) is different from the finite
element analysis, the Poisson correction should be taken into account as described in the
Rules.
However, Poisson effect is not considered in prescriptive buckling. More details refer to TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch08_Sec05_Poisson Effect.
2.3
Stiffeners
2.3.1 Buckling modes

Two buckling failure modes of stiffener are to be checked because the resultant axial stress
and compressive stress induced by lateral pressure in two different directions should be
considered, see Figure 1.
Stiffener induced failure (SI): check point B when this point is in compression.
Associated plate induced failure (PI): check point A when this point is in compression.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1:
Buckling modes
Neutral axis
2.3.2
Web thickness of flat bar
The stiffness of Flat bars is decreased significantly more than other types of profiles due to
local lateral deformation. To take into account this decrease, the web thickness of flat bar
stiffener used in the stiffener buckling strength is to be reduced by using the following
equation:
2
b
2 h w
1 eff 1
t w _ red = t w 1
3 s
s
Based on Elastic Large Deflection Analysis (ELDA), the following relation related to elastic
large deflection behaviour of plate can be obtained.
p
2
(1)
p =
+ 2 W pl 2
E 8a
where,
: Mean strain of plate after buckling.
p
p
: Mean stress of plate after buckling.
Wpl : Deflection coefficient of plate.
Also based on ELDA, the following relation related to elastic large deflection behaviour of
flat-bar stiffener can be obtained.
m2 2
(2)
Vs1 2
s = s +
2
E
12a
where,
s
: Mean strain of stiffener after buckling.
s
: Mean stress of stiffener after buckling.
Vs1 : Deflection coefficient of stiffener.
Further, due to the continuous condition of same angles of plate and stiffener at the
connection, the following equation can be derived.
h
(3)
Vs1 =
W pl
b
where,
b
: Breadth of plate.
h
: Height of stiffener web.
JANUARY 2014
Using the relation of Equation (3) from Equation (1) and (2), deleting Wpl and Vs1, mean stress
of stiffener, s can be expressed as follows:
2 2 h 2
s = E s
( ) ( E p p )
(4)
3 b
s
2 2 h 2 p p
(5)
=1
( ) (
)
E s
3 b
s E s
Here, both effective width of plate, be and effective thickness of stiffener web, te are defined
as follows:
be =
te =
E p
(6)
s
t
E s
(7)
Assuming the mean strain p = s until ultimate strength, and considering Equation (6) and (7)
into the Equation (5), the effective thickness of stiffener web can be obtained as follows:
b
2 2 h 2
t e = t[ 1
( ) ( 1 e )]
(8)
3 b
b
Figure 2:
Axial stress distribution of plate and stiffener web after local buckling
p
s
b
be
Es
Ep
However, the equation of beff, defined in Ch 8, Sec 5, [2.3.5] is determined by not only the
buckling of the attached plate, Cx but also the shear lag for stiffener bending S. Therefore, if
beff is determined by the shear lag, incorrect values such as negative may be obtained.
In order to solve the problem, we propose to define two types of effective width (breadth) of
the attached plate, beff1 in addition to beff and to use beff1 for the calculation of effective
thickness of flat bar.
b eff = min( C x b , s s )
b eff 1 = C x b
Related to the effective width of attached plating, the effective axial stress, a also should be
calculated with using beff1 instead of beff. Because the axial stress can increases due to the
buckling of the attached plate but shear lag for stiffener bending need not be taken into
account when considering the response for nominal axial stress, x.
JANUARY 2014
2.3.3 Idealisation of bulb profile

It gives the equivalent way to make the idealisation of the bulb bar. Also, this treatment of
the bulb profile to be idealised as equivalent angle bar should be applied to this section.
2.3.4 Ultimate buckling capacity

In addition to the buckling analysis for single plate fields stiffeners must have sufficient
buckling strength considering interactive lateral and warping (torsional induced) buckling
modes.
c a + b + warping
ReH
Lateral buckling
S =1
Warping buckling
The buckling calculation is based on the resultant stress on the stiffener, that is, firstly, the
axial stress a can be taken both for tension and compression, and then combined with the
bending stress and warping stress. If the total combined stress, a+b+w, are positive, that
means the considered point is in compression which we need to do the buckling check.
The following equation is the checking criterion:
c a +b +w
S=1
R eH
where,
: Stress multiplier factor ( = c for the loads with the formula = 1 ), and is considered
either explicitly or implicitly for all the axial, bending and warping stress.
In order to obtain the actual axial stress on the stiffener due to effective width of attached
plate, the following formula is to be used:
s t p + As
a =x
b eff 1 t p + As
For x, since the calculation models of FE and prescriptive assessment are different, for FE
analysis, x is the stress value in the considered attached plate elements (both two sides), for
prescriptive assessment, x is the stress value on the LCP of the considered stiffener directly
from the calculation results. For FE buckling assessment, the values of x and y are to be
corrected according to [2.3.6]. So the values x and y in the stiffener buckling verification
must be replaced by xcor and ycor respectively.
Lateral Buckling:
Proof of sufficient safety against lateral buckling is made by applying 2nd order
theory. Thereby the following loads are to be considered:
Compressive stresses in stiffener direction.
Compressive stresses perpendicular to the stiffener direction.
Shear stresses in the plate plane.
External lateral loads (e.g. water pressure).
JANUARY 2014
Calculated loads resulting from pre-deformations are considered in accordance with the
buckling curve b of DIN 18800, Pt 2, Sec 2.2 (as amended). These are valid, until the structure
complies with IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010) or recognised national shipbuilding
standards.
According to DIN 18800, Pt 2 (as amended), it is assumed that the in-plane stresses x, y and
xy with regard to the pre-deformation are applied by equivalent lateral loads to obtain
correct bending stresses in the stiffener. Here the cross section values of stiffener with
attached plating are determined using the effective width of second order.
The bending stress, b, can be obtained as the following equation:
M + M1
b = 0
1000 Z
where,
M0 is the bending moment due to the lateral deformation w of stiffener.
M1 is the bending moment due to the lateral load P.
For M1, use the simple beam formula:
Psl
Psl
, or M 1 =
M1 =
3
24.10
8.10 3
for different end constraint (the former is for the both ends constrained and/or for
continuous beams, the latter is for both ends simply supported).
Also, the w1 are same way,
5 Psl 4
Psl 4
,
or
=
w
C
w1 = C i
1
i
384.10 7 EI
384.10 7 EI
to obtain the formulae depending on the 2 different boundary conditions.
The initial deflection of stiffener, w0 is the factor that influences buckling capacity, such as
imperfections; it is based on DIN 18800 and IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010), Table 6.1,
Fairness of plating between frames. According to IACS Rec 47, the most standard values
are 4mm to 6mm, corresponding to w0 = span/1000, for span length are 4m to 6m in most
real cases on ships.
For M0, comes from 3 parts:

M0 Mx + My + M
where,
Mx : Moment caused by compressive stresses in x-direction.
My : Moment caused by compressive stresses in y-direction.
M : Moment caused by in-plane shear stress.
JANUARY 2014
JANUARY 2014
The procedure to obtain the elastic support provided by the stiffener cf, is as below.
The plate and stiffener induced failure pressure coefficients (CPI and CSI) should be used with
the pressure coefficients (Ci), in order to justify M1 or w1 get the positive (+1) or negative (-1)
efficiency under the lateral pressure in different directions.
PI failure mode
SI failure mode
PI pressure mode
CPI = +1
CSI = -1
SI pressure mode
CPI = -1
CPI = +1
Ci = CPI
Ci = CSI
Attached plate thickness tp in the calculation is to be in accordance with the following

requirements for either prescriptive or FE analysis, that is:
For prescriptive requirements, use the mean thickness of two attached plating panels.
For FE analysis, use the thickness of EPP on one side of the stiffener (one stiffener
with one side EPP and same stiffener with other side EPP, then take the maximum
value).
For torsional buckling requirements in CSR, based on some studies, it can improve lateral
buckling formula by incorporating torsion with warping, that is, combine lateral and
torsional buckling which can be considered by one improved formula as below.
a + b +
S < 1.0
R eH
where the warping stress is:
tf
1
w = Ey h w + 0
2
l
a
stf 1
ET
warping = 0
JANUARY 2014
for stiffener induced failure (SI).
for plate induced failure (PI).
Warping stress due to torsional deformation, w can be given by solving the following partial
differential equation.
2 2 0
= Ey z c z s 2
(1)
2
x
x
where,
: Torsional deformation of stiffener.

: Initial torsional deformation of stiffener.
z'c, z's, y : The distances as defined in Figure 3.
Figure 3:
Cross sectional properties of a stiffened panel
To solve the differential Equation (1) analytically, the relation between the compressive load,
P, and the deformation angel, are assumed as follows:
sin x
1 P Pcr
a
0 = 0 sin x
(2)
(3)
where,
Pcr
IT
IP
K
kp
m
0
2 EI
I
K
: Torsional buckling load, A 4 W 2 m 2 + 2 + 0.385 E T
IP
m
10 I P a
: St. Venants moment inertia about connection of stiffener to plate.
: Polar moment of inertia about connection of stiffener to plate.
: Spring coefficient of plate/stiffener interaction.
k p Et 3
a 4 10 6
(4)
K= 4
EI W 1.33k p h w t 3
3b 1 +
3
1000
bt
w

: Assumed compressive stress ratio.
: Number of half waves of torsional buckling.
: Maximum initial deformation angle, assuming that transverse deformation of stiffer
top is 0.1% of its span based on past experience.
JANUARY 2014
0 = 0.001
a
hw
(5)
For x=0.5 a in equation (2) and substituting and 0 into equation (1), then, the warping
stress at mid span of stiffener can be derived in the equation (6) below:
= Ey z c z s 0 1
(6)
1 P Pcr
As far as the practical range of the panel slenderness parameter, the equation (7) which is
obtained by the assuming P = 0.44 Y gives good approximate values of the warping stress.
Fig. 3 shows that the estimated warping stresses obtained by the equation (7) are close to the
actual values obtained from the equation (6). The same tendency is observed in other
stiffened panels, the following simplified formula is used for the evaluation of .
= Ey z c z s 0 1
1 0.4 A Y Pcr
Figure 4:
Figure 5:
JANUARY 2014
(7)
Cross-sectional geometries of stiffeners
Comparisons of warping stress of stiffened plates obtained by Eq. (6) and (7)
Figure 6:
Warping stress distribution at stiffener flange
2.3.5 Effective width of attached plating

Two different approaches were used for the determination of the effective width of the
attached plating for ordinary stiffeners. The minimum value determined for the two
approaches have to be used for further calculations. The first approach multiplies the
reduction factor Cx with the distance between the stiffeners b for longitudinal stiffeners.
The reduction factor for this approach is based on the plate buckling assessment for
elementary plate panels. For the second approach (shear lag effect), a reduction factor s is
multiplied with the distance between the stiffeners s. The calculation of the reduction factor
s is dependent of an effective length of the stiffener leff (dependent from supporting
conditions or moment distribution along the length of the stiffener). The calculation is with
the assumption, that ordinary stiffeners are loaded by uniformly distributed loads.
For x in tension (negative), there is no buckling problem, only shear lag effect. The formula
for s ;
The TB for the formula is given in TB Rep_Pt1_Ch03_Sec07_Effective Plate Breadth.

For flat bar, use beff1 = Cxb, see [2.4.2]. For beff in FE analysis and prescriptive requirements, it
gives the two different methods to deal with since they are two different calculation models.
2.3.6 FE corrected stresses for stiffener capacity

Based on Hookes law, plate stresses:
Substitute with uniaxial beam stresses also based on Hookes law:
where,
JANUARY 2014
x
y
* x
* y
x
y
:
:
:
:
:
:
Uniaxial beam stress in x-direction, N/mm2.

Uniaxial beam stress in y-direction, N/mm2.
Plate stress in x-direction, N/mm2.
Plate stress in y-direction, N/mm2.
Strain in x-direction.
Strain in y-direction.
(a)
Convert FE stresses to beam stresses (converting plate stresses including Poisson

effects into beam stresses without Poisson effect, e.g. to be used for stiffener buckling:
(b)
Convert beam stresses into plate stresses (applicable for beam stresses to be checked
by bi-axial plate formulation with Poisson effects):
2.4
2.4.1 Web plate in way of openings

The formulae for plate buckling are developed for regular geometry and idealised stress
patterns, whereas the geometry and stress gradients around openings and cut-outs are rather
complex. This complexity is taken into account by adoption of conservative assumptions for
the formulae for plate buckling.
The important stress components for buckling control of the web plate in way of openings
are the axial or tangential stress flow passing the hole and the shear stress. These stress
components used in the buckling criterion should account for the stress increase due to the
presence of the opening, see Sec 5, Table 6 in the Rules.
The normal stress component acting perpendicular to the opening is not considered critical
for buckling and may be neglected in the buckling assessment. For openings without edge
reinforcements, the calculation of the separate critical buckling compression stress, C yd,
assumes a plate buckling model of the web plate area in way of the opening with three edges
simply supported and one edge free (towards the opening), see Sec 5, Table 65(a) in the Rules.
For opening with edge reinforcements, the calculation of the critical buckling stress, Cyd,
assumes a plate buckling model with all four edges simply supported. The calculation of the
separate critical shear buckling stresses, Cyd/3, assumes a plate buckling model
comprising the web panel including the opening with all four edges simply supported if the
opening is not fitted with edge stiffeners, then Case 13 of Sec 5, Table 3 is assumed.
For the situation where the openings are fitted with edge stiffeners, then a plate buckling
model comprising the web plate area in way of the opening and Case 11 is assumed. Case 11
and Case 13 are defined in Sec 5, Table 3 in the Rules. The buckling interaction formula is
taken as [2.2.1] with: x = av, y = 0, and = av.
JANUARY 2014
In this provision, with or without opening in the FE model are also be considered for
obtaining the average shear stress since the correction due to the opening is pre-considered
in the formulae of case 13 in Table 3.
2.4.2 Reduction factors of web plate in way of openings

The reduction factors of the plate panel(s) of the web adjacent to the opening is to be as:
Cx
: Reduction factor according to Sec 5, Table 3, Case 1 or Case 3.
Cy
: Reduction factor according to Sec 5, Table 3, Case 1.
C
: Reduction factor according to Sec 5, Table 3, Case 11 or Case 13.
2.4.3
This provision is used for where web stiffeners are not connected to the intersecting
stiffeners, by doing this way, the FE analysis is to represent the actual structure in order to
derive realistic stress values for application to the equivalent rectangular panel.
3
3.1
OTHER STRUCTURES
Struts, pillars and cross ties
3.1.1 Buckling utilisation factor

It states that for struts, pillars and cross ties, the critical buckling stress should be taken as
lesser of column and torsional buckling stress, and gives the criteria. Axial compressive
stress can be use the average value.
For elastic buckling stresses exceeding 50% of stresses exceeding specified minimum yield
stress of the material, the critical compressive stress for global buckling is derived using the
Johnson-Ostenfeld plasticity correction factor.
Local buckling of the thin-walled part of the cross section is covered by slenderness
requirements as shown in Sec 2. In the formulae for the global buckling modes, it is assumed
that the cross sections are 100% effective.
Global buckling due to bending moments from lateral pressure is not considered.
3.1.2 Elastic column buckling stress

Column buckling (flexural buckling): Bending about the axis of least resistance of the cross
section. This may be the critical buckling mode of slender pillars with double symmetrical
cross sections or pillars not susceptible to twisting.
The formulae for the elastic buckling is based on Buckling of Bars, Plates and Pillars, Brush
and Almroth, McGraw-Hill, 1975. End constraint factors for calculation of effective span of
the pillars are also considered.
3.1.3 Elastic torsional buckling stress

Torsional buckling: Twisting of cross section without bending. This buckling mode may be
critical for some open, thin walled cross sections in which the shear centre and the centroid
coincide.
It gives special requirements for checking cross ties. Local plate buckling of cross-ties is also
checked using close-celled formulation as part of the cargo tank FEM strength verification
procedure.
JANUARY 2014
3.1.4 Elastic torsional/column buckling stress

Column (flexural)-torsional buckling: Simultaneous twisting and bending of cross section.
This buckling mode is only relevant for cross section whose shear centre and the centroid do
not coincide and which are torsionally weak.
3.2
Corrugated bulkhead
3.2.1
It gives special requirements for checking the flange and the web of corrugated bulkhead.
An aspect ratio equal to 2 is considered. The average stresses x, y and are also used for
the buckling check, i.e. a x and y equal to 1 is taken into account in the plate buckling
interaction formula defined in [2.2.1].
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 8, APP 1 STRESS BASED REFERENCE STRESSES
STRESS BASED METHOD
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1
This section shows the sample applications of Ch 8, Sec 4. The stress based method is that the
stress distribution along edges of the considered buckling panel is determined by 2nd order
polynomial curve, by linear approximation using least square method or by weighted
average stress, depending on the case.
1.1.2
Definition
This requirement provides a definition for regular and irregular panels. The irregular panels
are in line with Sec 4, [2.3.1].
1.2
1.2.1
Stress Application
Regular panel
The reference stresses defined for a regular panel in [2.1.1] can be used if the following two
conditions are both satisfied, otherwise average stress (irregular panel approach) should be
used:
at least, one plate element centre is located in each third part of the long edge a of a
regular panel and
this element centre is located at a distance in the panel local x direction not less than a/4
to at least one of the element centres in the adjacent third part of the panel.
Figure 1:
> a/4
Reference stress for Regular panel
< a/4
> a/4
> a/4
> a/4
> a/4
Satisfied
Not
satisfied
> a/4
> a/4
Satisfied
Satisfied
a/3
a
Element centre
1.2.2
Irregular panel
The reference stresses for irregular panel are defined in [2.2].
JANUARY 2014
REFERENCE STRESSES
2.1
Regular panel
2.1.1
Longitudinal stress
For plate buckling assessment 2nd order polynomial curve is considered to estimate
longitudinal stress of the buckling panel. At least three elements are required in lengthwise
to assume the stress distribution otherwise it is considered as irregular panel. Stress
distribution is assumed as 2nd order polynomial curve to consider bending effect. The area
of element is considered as a weighting factor. The unknown coefficients C, D and E can be
obtained.
C 1C 3D3 C 22D3 + C 2C 3D2 C 1C 4 D2 + C 2C 4 D1 C 32D1

C =
2C 2C 3C 4 + C 1C 3C 5 C 22C 5 C 1C 42 C 33
C 2C 3D3 C 1C 4 D3 + C 1C 5 D2 C 32D2 + C 3C 4 D1 C 2C 5 D1
D =
2C 2C 3C 4 + C 1C 3C 5 C 22C 5 C 1C 42 C 33
C 32D3 + C 2C 4 D3 C 2C 5 D2 + C 3C 4 D2 C 42D1 C 3C 5 D1
E =
2C 2C 3C 4 + C 1C 3C 5 C 22C 5 C 1C 42 C 33
where,
n
i =1
i =1
i =1
i =1
i =1
C1 = Ai , C 2 = Ai x i , C 3 = Ai xi2 , C 4 = Ai xi3 , C 5 = Ai xi4

n
i =1
i =1
i =1
D1 = Ai ix , D2 = Ai xi ix , D3 = Ai x i2 ix
For stiffener buckling assessment axial stress is to be calculated using a weighted average
stress for avoiding considering bending stress twice.
2.1.2
Transverse stress
At least two elements are required in lengthwise to assume the stress distribution otherwise
it is considered as irregular panel. Weighted least square method is considered to estimate
linearly varying transverse stress of the buckling panel. The area of element is considered as
a weighting factor. The unknown coefficients A and B can be obtained.
n
n
n
n
Ai iy
A
A
x
A
x
i
i
i
iy
i
i
A = i =1 i =1
i =1
i =1
n
n
n
Ai Ai x i2 Ai x i
i =1 i =1
i =1
n
n
n
n
Ai iy Ai x i2 Ai x i Ai x i iy
i =1
i =1
i =1
B = i =1
2
n
n
n
Ai Ai x i2 Ai x i
i =1 i =1
i =1
JANUARY 2014
2.1.3
Shear stress
The weighted average approach is also applied to the calculating the shear stress.
2.2
2.2.1
Irregular panel
Reference stresses
When the panel is irregular, the weighted average approach for longitudinal, transverse and
shear stresses is used.
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
FATIGUE
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
General Considerations
1 Rule Application for Fatigue Requirements

2 Definition
3 Assumptions
4 Methodology
5 Corrosion Model
6 Loading Conditions
7 Load Cases
SECTION 2
Structural Details to be Assessed
1 Simplified Stress Analysis
2 Finite Element Analysis
SECTION 3
Fatigue Evaluation
1 Fatigue Analysis Methodology
2 Acceptance Criteria
3 Reference Stresses for Fatigue Assessment
4 S-N Curves
5 Fatigue Damage Calculation
6 Weld Improvement Methods
7 Workmanship
SECTION 4
Simplified Stress Analysis
1 General
2 Hot Spot Stress
3 Hull Girder Stress
4 Local Stiffener Stress
5 Stress Concentration Factors
SECTION 5
Finite Element Stress Analysis
1 General
2 FE Modelling
3 Hot Spot Stress for Details Different From Web-Stiffened Cruciform Joints
4 Hot Spot Stress for Web-Stiffened Cruciform Joint
5 Limitations of Hot Spot Stress Approach
6 Screening Fatigue Assessment
SECTION 6
Detail Design Standard
1 General
2 Stiffener-Frame Connections
3 Scallops in way of Block Joints
4 Hopper Knuckle Connection
5 Horizontal Stringer Heel
6 Bulkhead Connection to Lower and Upper Stool
7 Bulkhead Connection to Inner Bottom
8 Lower and Upper Toe of Hold Frame
9 Hatch Corner
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
RULE APPLICATION FOR FATIGUE REQUIREMENTS
1.1
1.1.1
Scope
General
This chapter is applied mandatory for double hull oil tankers, single side skin and double
side skin bulk carriers having rule length L greater than 150m and less than 500m. For oil
tankers, the rules apply to the hull structures having length L greater than 150m and less
than 500m (refer to TB of Pt 1, Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.3.1]) and for bulk carriers, rules apply to hull
structures having length L of 90 m or above (refer to TB of Pt 1, Ch 1, Sec 1, [1.2.1]). But,
fatigue assessment is not applicable for bulk carriers less than 150 m because up to now
fatigue damage has not been observed for those types of bulk carriers.
According to GBS requirements, the target fatigue life specified by the designer is not to be
taken less than 25 years.
The fatigue assessment procedure is based on the following assumptions:
A list of details to be mandatory checked by simplified analytical stress analysis or

very fine finite element stress analysis in the cargo area only where accumulated
service experience have allowed identification of critical structural details.
A list of details that might be vulnerable to fatigue cracks if stress level becomes high
enough is given to be checked by a screening procedure.
The design life required by the Rules is to be taken as 25 years, refer to TB of Pt 1, Ch

1, Sec 2, [3.3.1].
North Atlantic wave environment data (1) is used to determine the fatigue design loads, refer
to TB of Pt 1, Ch 1, Sec 2, [3.4.1]. Only quasi-static wave induced loads are applied in the
fatigue assessment. Hull girder vibrations are implicitly accounted for the CSR-H fatigue
requirements. The fatigue calculation procedure has been developed and verified based on
experience with actual trading vessels. Hull girder vibrations have been present in trading
vessels used in the development and verification of the procedure. The use of the North
Atlantic wave environment provides a significant margin for the fatigue life of tankers on
typical worldwide trade. This margin exceeds the contribution of hull girder vibrations to
fatigue.
1.1.2
Assessed area
Most frequent fatigue failures modes in ship structures are:

1. Fatigue crack initiating from the weld toe and propagating into the base material is a
frequent failure mode. The crack initiates at small defects or undercuts at the weld toe
where the stress is highest due to the weld notch geometry. Generally, the fatigue
crack at toe can be detected by in service inspection.
2. Fatigue crack initiating in the base material at free edge of hatch corner, radius of
bracket, and growing into the base material. Fatigue cracks may initiate from surface
roughness at free edge, e.g. cutting surface.
3. Fatigue crack initiating from the weld root and propagating through the weld throat.
It is a failure mode that can lead to significant consequences because it is difficult to
detect internal defects in fillet/partial penetration welds by NDE (non-destructive
examination). They can not be discovered before the crack has propagated completely
through the weld.
JANUARY 2014
4. Fatigue crack initiating from the weld root and propagating into the plate section
under the weld. The number of cycles until failure for this failure mode is of similar
magnitude as fatigue cracking from the weld toe for common weld size. This means if
fatigue life improvement of the weld toe is required, fatigue cracking from the weld
root could become likely and it is also required to make improvement for the root, e.g.
full penetration weld.
Fatigue strength assessment proposed in the present rules is intended for fatigue crack
initiating from the weld toe and crack initiating in the base material at free edge, i.e. for cases
1 and 2 above.
There is no direct analysis methodology for root crack assessment in the present rules, i.e. for
cases 3 and 4 above. Weld root cracking avoidance is ensured by design standards.
Nevertheless, present rules provide welding requirement, e.g. minimum weld throat size at
critical hot spots location of structural details in order to avoid root crack failure.
1.1.3
Structural details to be assessed
This Rules provides a list of mandatory details to be checked by simplified analytical stress
analysis or finite element stress analysis in the cargo region. This approach is only
appropriate where accumulated service experience has allowed such identification.
Additional details may need to be analysed when non-standard details or arrangements are
used.
Rules require the systematic identification of areas prone to fatigue throughout the entire
ship. Fatigue evaluation is required for regions experiencing the most fatigue damages.
Therefore assessment is focused on structural details within the cargo region which is the
most critical region from fatigue point of view.
The details which have been selected to be checked by a complex analysis such as Finite
Element Analysis, based on very fine mesh model, correspond to those which have been
defined as the most critical from combined experience of IACS members supported by
analytical and experimental findings.
In addition, the Rules require a list of details to be checked by a systematic screening
procedure. The details which have been selected to be checked by a less complex method i.e.
screening procedure correspond to those which have been defined as the less critical from
experience feedback of fatigue damage in oil tankers and bulk carriers.
1.1.4
Detail design standard
1.1.5
Material
The fatigue assessment procedure is valid for steel material with specified minimum yield
stress ReH less than 390 N/mm2 when steel material is in seawater environment or when
steel is with free corrosion. (2) This limitation is due to the fact that the effectiveness of
cathodic protection in relation to fatigue has not yet been proven for structural steel details
with yield stress ReH higher than 390 N/mm2.
For steel with ReH value higher than 390 N/mm2 and for steels with improved fatigue
performance, i.e. steels with an improved S-N curve, the appropriate S-N curve is to be
agreed by the Society on a case-by-case basis. Depending on the properties of the steel
material an appropriate S-N curve may be one of the curves presented in this rule, one of the
JANUARY 2014
curves presented by IIW, a curve presented by other published standards or a curve

obtained from approved fatigue tests.
1.1.6
Wave loads
1.1.7
Loads other than wave loads
Fatigue due to low cycles such as cargo variations is not taken into account for trading ships
because the number of loading/unloading sequences for trading ships is relatively low (less
than 1000 cargo variation cycles during 25 years of service ships life will lead to a negligible
damage in comparison with the damage due to wave loads corresponding to around 108
cycles during the same duration).
Sloshing phenomenon very seldom in tanks/holds of oil tankers/bulk carriers because
holds/tanks are usually fully loaded. In addition, oil tanker deck transverses act to minimise
sloshing loads.
DEFINITION
2.1
Hot spots
2.1.1
2.2
Nominal stress
2.2.1
2.3
Hot spot stress
2.3.1
2.4
Local stress at free edge
2.4.1
2.5
Fatigue stress
2.5.1
ASSUMPTIONS
3.1
General
3.1.1
Fatigue assessment is based on the following assumptions:
JANUARY 2014
Fatigue life calculation under random wave loading is based on design S-N curves
approach under the assumption of linear cumulative damage (Palmgren-Miners
rule). This rule assumes that total damage experienced by the structure is expressed
as the accumulated damage from each load cycle at different stress levels,
independent of the stress cycles order.
Design life assumed in the fatigue assessment of ships is to be taken as 25 years, refer
to TB of Pt 1, Ch 1, Sec 2, [3.3.1]. Corrosion is accounted by use of net scantling
concept. Moreover, it is assumed that corrosion protection is partially effective, i.e.
that joints in way of water ballast, oil cargo hold and fuel oil holds, are efficiently
protected against corrosion during a certain amount of time (called effective corrosion
protection period) and during the remaining part of the design life, they are exposed
to corrosive environment because the corrosion protection is more questionable.
During the effective corrosion protection period (protected environment), the steel
surface is protected from the corrosive environment. Then, the steel may be
considered to be as in dry air condition. In this case, the fatigue strength may be
assessed with the S-N curves in air, refer to Sec 2, [4] for the effective corrosion
protection. During the remaining life when the joint is subjected to corrosive
environment, fatigue strength is to be assessed with the S-N curves in corrosive
environment, refer to Sec 2, [4].
Long term distribution of stress range of a structural detail may be approximated by a

two-parameter Weibull distribution. The parameters are the scaling factors and the
shape parameter. The probability level of 10-2 has been selected for the determination
of the scaling factor as it has been identified as the most contributing probability level
to the fatigue damage, refer to (3), [1.1.4]. However, it has been demonstrated that if
we consider the reference stress value at 10-2, the assumption of the shape parameter
has very low impact on the total fatigue damage. Therefore, the shape parameter can
be constant, e.g. equal to 1.0.
Quasi-static wave induced loads have been defined at 10-2 probability level by the
EDW (Equivalent Design Wave) method, refer to (3), [1.1.4].
The acceptance criterion is based on the fatigue life, calculated according to Pt 1, Ch 9

fatigue procedure, which has to be greater than the design fatigue life as defined in
[1.1.1] above.
METHODOLOGY
4.1
4.1.1
Principles
General
Fatigue strength is checked by means of two sets of approaches:
Fatigue strength assessment based on fatigue life calculation which include three
different methods: simplified analytical stress analysis, finite element stress analysis
and fatigue screening.
Fatigue design standards which is a qualitative approach for the design of ship
structural details used to improve fatigue performance of those details.
As mentioned in [1.1.4] above, fatigue strength assessment proposed in the present rules is
intended for fatigue crack initiating from the weld toe and crack initiating in the base
material at free edge, i.e. for cases 1 and 2 above.
For weld toe crack checking, fatigue assessment is based on hot spot stress approach. Hot
spot stress approach is considered to be an efficient engineering methodology for fatigue
JANUARY 2014
analysis of welded structures at weld toe. For structural details to be checked mandatory,
refer to Sec 6, [1] and [2], hot spot stress is calculated by simplified stress analysis or finite
element stress analysis depending on the type of structural detail under consideration.
For crack initiating from the free edge of non-welded details, fatigue assessment is based on
finite element stress analysis with specific meshing rules where local stress at free edge is
calculated.
4.2
Simplified stress analysis
4.2.1
Simplified stress analysis is used to determine hot spot stress at stiffener end connections.
Hot spot stress at stiffener end connections subjected to axial loading due to hull girder
bending and local bending due to lateral pressures are calculated based on beam theory
combined with tabulated Stress Concentrations Factors, SCF.
4.3
Finite element stress analysis
4.3.1
Finite element analysis is to be carried out for critical details where the loading and geometry
are more complex.
For standard welded details except for web-stiffened cruciform joints, a procedure for
determination of hot spot stress at weld toe is proposed. This procedure is based on the
methodology developed during the FPSO Fatigue Capacity JIP (6), for derivation of hot
spot stress at weld toes by use of shell elements applies to all structural details found in a
ship structure, except for web-stiffened cruciform joint. During the FPSO Fatigue Capacity
JIP (7), a proper link between the calculated hotspot stress and the fatigue capacity was
established and recommendations for how to perform the fatigue assessment based on FE
analysis stress results (5) combined with one S-N curve (8) was developed.
A specific procedure was developed particularly for web-stiffened cruciform joints for hot
spot stress determination at plate flange connection and hot spot stress determination in way
of the web of the web-stiffened cruciform joints. The procedure is specific for web-stiffened
cruciform like welded hopper knuckle connections, horizontal stringer heel joint, lower
stool-inner bottom connection to avoid too conservative results. (10)
4.4
Fatigue screening assessment
4.4.1
Fatigue screening assessment is to be carried out for a list of details corresponding to
screening areas provided in Ch 7, Sec 3, [3] located in high stress area and/or high stress
concentration area which are not included in the lists of critical details to be checked by
simplified stress analysis or very fine mesh FE analysis.
The details checked by the screening method are considered less critical for fatigue
compared to the details that are mandatory to be checked by very fine mesh FE. The details
subjected to screening assessment are considered critical if the stress level becomes high. The
screening assessment will select the details with high stress level for further fatigue
assessment by very fine mesh FE.
This procedure allows detecting potential fatigue areas using fine mesh (5050mm) finite
element models, refer to Ch 7, Sec 3, already used for strength assessment. This procedure
JANUARY 2014
allows avoiding carrying out FE fatigue analysis based on very fine mesh (tn50tn50) model,
refer to Sec 4 which are time consuming and costly task.
4.5
Fatigue design standards
4.5.1
Fatigue design standards provide a qualitative approach that may be applied to the design of
ship structural details to improve fatigue performance by providing guidance for the
following items:
Identification of the critical locations for each of the structural detail.
Requirements on geometrical configurations, scantlings, welding requirements and

construction tolerances.
Provision of a set of alternative improved configurations from which a suitable option

can be selected.
Post fabrication methods of improving fatigue life, such as weld toe grinding
It is required that the structural details described in this section shall be designed according
to the given design standard but alternative detail design configurations will be accepted
subject to demonstration of satisfactory fatigue performance.
CORROSION MODEL
5.1
5.1.1
Net thickness
General
The net thickness concept is adopted in the strength requirements. The strength criteria are
established so that the strength integrity can be maintained even though the thickness
diminution due to corrosion during the design life may occur. Damage phenomena like
yielding, buckling and ultimate strength are dominated by an excessive load. On the other
hand, fatigue phenomenon is dominated by the cyclic fatigue loading during the long period.
Therefore, the consideration of corrosion effect on fatigue strength is different from the
consideration against yielding, buckling and ultimate strength.
Fatigue strength is assessed according to the linear cumulative fatigue damage which is
proportional to the time. In this case, fatigue damage which is assessed based on the half of
corrosion addition can be the almost compatible damage with the value which is assessed
according to the consideration of corrosion progress. Therefore, the net thickness of local
support members is appropriate to be obtained by deducting 0.5tc from the gross thickness.
5.1.2
Stress correction
Corrosion amount is a spatial random variable which has wide scatter. Then, smaller the
assessed object, the more the effect of probabilistic nature of corrosion becomes large. On the
other hand, the more the assessed object is large, the more the effect of probabilistic nature of
corrosion becomes small. Therefore, when assessing the strength of structure or hull girder,
the assessment based on the corrosion model of average corrosion diminution is appropriate.
The average corrosion amount is almost corresponding to the half of corrosion addition.
Therefore, the net thickness of hull girder section and structural members in FE model is
appropriate to be obtained by deducting 0.25tc, which is the half of corrosion deduction of
local support members, from the gross thickness. The evaluated stress according to the 0.25tc
corrosion model is confirmed to be 0.95 times the evaluated stress according to the 0.5tc
corrosion model. In order to apply one common approach for the net thickness of hull girder
JANUARY 2014
stress and structural members in FE model they should be based stress obtained by use of
0.5tc and multiplying the stress with correction factor 0.95.
LOADING CONDITIONS
6.1
Description
6.1.1
6.2
Loading conditions for oil tankers
6.2.1
The two most representative loading conditions are chosen. The oil tankers will normally
operate in either fully loaded condition or normal ballast (IACS Rec 56, July 1999) (9).
6.3
Loading conditions for bulk carriers
6.3.1
For bulk carriers with different intended operations, the typical loading conditions were
selected: Full load homogeneous condition, Full load alternate condition, Normal ballast
condition and Heavy ballast condition.
The frequency of those typical loading conditions of standard bulk carriers is set based on
questionnaires given to the shipping companies and on the comments received.
LOADS CASES
7.1
Assumptions
7.1.1
7.1.2
Predominant load case

References:
1. IACS Rec 34, Standard Wave Data, Nov 2001.
2. Health and Safety Executive, Offshore Installations: Guidance on Design, construction
and certification, Fourth Edition, 1995.
3. Technical Background, CSR-H, Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 1 - Introduction, June 2011.
4. Technical Background, CSR-H, Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 4 - Load Cases, June 2011.
5. Fricke, Recommended Hot Spot Analysis Procedure for Structural Details of FPSOs and
Ships on Round Robin FE analysis, 11th ISOPE, Stavanger, March 2002.
6. Lotsberg, Fatigue design of plated structures using finite element analysis, Journal of
Ship and Offshore Structures, 2006, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 45-54.
7. Lotsberg, Overview of the FPSO Fatigue Capacity JIP, OMAE 2001, Rio de Janeiro.
8. Maddox, Recommended design S-N curve for fatigue assessment of FPSOs,
Proceedings of the 11th ISOPE 2001, Stavanger.
9. IACS Rec 56, Fatigue Assessment of Ship Structures, July 1999.
10. Lotsberg & al, A procedure for fatigue design of web stiffened cruciform connections,
Vol. 3, No. 2, pp. 113-126, SAOS, 2008.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 2 STRUCTURAL DETAILS TO BE ASSESSED
SIMPLIFIED STRESS ANALYSIS
1.1
1.1.1
The critical structural details for fatigue assessment by simplified analysis are based on
review by all Societies Design Offices.
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
2.1
2.1.1

Details to be checked by very fine mesh analysis
Summary of critical structural details for fatigue assessment by finite element method and
their applicability provided in Table 1 and Table 3 are presented based on review by all
Societies Design Offices.
The details in Table 1 and Table 3 that are mandatory for very fine mesh FE analysis are
selected based on their vulnerability for fatigue cracking, i.e. the most critical details in the
vessels are verified by use of very fine FE analysis. Details may also be designed to limit
possibilities for fatigue cracking. Very fine mesh FE analysis may be omitted for the details
listed in Table 3 provided that the design standard given in Ch 9, Sec 6 is complied with. The
design standards are based on accumulated in-service experience from all Societies.
Hot spots to be evaluated for critical structural details are provided in Table 4 to Table 18.
Hot spots were chosen based on extensive experience in fatigue assessments by finite
element method and reviewed by all Societies Design Offices.
2.1.2
Details to be checked by screening fatigue assessment
The details in Table 2 correspond to screening areas provided in Ch 7, Sec 3, [2] located in
high stress area and/or high stress concentration area which are not included in the lists of
critical details to be checked by simplified stress analysis (Ch 9, Sec 2, [1]), FE analysis (Ch 9,
Sec 2, [2]), or designed according to fatigue design standards (Ch 9, Sec 6), and opening in
way of primary support member.
The details checked by the screening method are considered less critical for fatigue
compared to the details that are mandatory to be checked by very fine mesh FE. The details
subjected to screening assessment are considered critical if the stress level becomes high. The
screening assessment will select the details with high stress level for further fatigue
assessment by very fine mesh FE.
2.1.3
Details in accordance with detail design standard
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 3 FATIGUE EVALUATION
FATIGUE ANALYSIS METHODOLOGY
1.1
Cumulative damage
1.1.1
The cumulative damage is calculated using the Palmgren-Miner linear damage summation
rule. The fatigue strength of the structure is formulated in terms of number of cycles to
failure for a fixed stress range. For variable amplitude loading the long term stress range
distribution may be divided into blocks with constant stress range. The damage
corresponding to the number of cycles within each block is calculated and the summation is
carried out linearly according to the Palmgren-Miner rule. The fatigue damage D is then
written as:
ntot
D=
i =1
ni
Ni
where,
ni
: Number of cycles at stress range i.
Ni
: Number of cycles to failure at stress range i.
ntot : Total number of stress range blocks.
This model for linearly damage accumulation is usually attributed to Palmgren (1) and Miner
(1945) (29), who independently proposed that failure will occur when the sum reaches unity.
This model does not take into account cycles order. Although the Palmgren-Miner rule is a
simple algorithm for predicting an extremely complex phenomenon (i.e., fatigue under
random stress processes), results of tests, however, have suggested that the Palmgren-Miner
rule is a reasonable engineering tool for predicting fatigue subjected to random loading.
1.1.2
With the assumption that the structural detail is subjected to ND stress cycles during the
design life, and these stress ranges are randomly distributed with the probability function
f(), the damage ratio is then:
N D f ( )
d
D=
N ( )
0
For ship structures it is assumed that the probability density function of the long term
distribution of stress range may be represented by a two-parameter Weibull distribution,
given by:

f (s) =
k k

exp
where,
= Stress range.
= Shape parameter.
k
= Characteristic value of stress range (slope parameter).
R
k=
(ln N R )1 /
NR = Number of cycles corresponding to probability level of exceedance 1/NR.
R = Stress range with probability of exceedance 1/NR.
JANUARY 2014
With long term Weibull distributed stress ranges and the number of cycles to failure, N()
given by S-N curve, the closed form equation for fatigue damage ratio may be derived:
N
Rm
m
D = D
1 + for one-slope S-N curve
m/
K 2 (ln N R )
D =
ND
Rm
m
1 + for two-slope S-N curve
m/
K 2 (ln N R )
where,

m
m + m
m
),
1 + (
1 + ,
= 1
m
( 1 + )
q
=
R
1.2
ln N R
Fatigue strength assessment
1.2.1
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
2.1
Fatigue life and acceptance criteria
2.1.1
REFERENCE STRESSES FOR FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
3.1
Fatigue stress range
3.1.1
The fatigue stress range corresponds to the maximum stress range among the several load
cases of each loading condition. The fatigue stress range corresponds to the range of cyclic
stresses defined as the difference between a stress peak and valley. The stress range may be
corrected to take into account several effects e.g. thickness effect [3.3], mean stress effect [3.2],
etc.
3.1.2
Welded joints
The fatigue strength of welded joints is assessed based on the so called structural hot spot
stress range. The stress does take into account the dimensions and geometry of the structural
detail itself while the local non-linear stress caused by the notch at the weld toe is not
accounted for. This notch effect is included in the hot spot S-N curve. The correct geometry
of the actual weld is not known at design stage. To account for variation in the local weld
geometry, a lower-bound S-N curve is used as the design curve and the lower bound quality
of the weld toe geometry will be considered in the analysis.
The hot spot stress can in principle be directly derived from the performed very fine mesh
FEA, or it can be derived through use of appropriate stress concentration factors and the
nominal stress from analysis.
JANUARY 2014
The hot spot stress concept is considered to be an efficient engineering methodology for
fatigue analysis of plated structures. During the last years a methodology for derivation of
hot spot stress based on FE analysis has been linked to a hot spot S-N curve giving a
consistent fatigue assessment procedure. The concept has been supported by full scale
measurements. The concept of structural hot spot stress is well documented trough work by
International Institute of Welding (IIW) (6), (7) and the work performed in the FPSO Fatigue
capacity JIP (2), (3), (4), (5).
Many fatigue design standards advise to use the largest principal stress range within 45 to
the normal to the weld toe together with an S-N curve derived for stress ranges normal to the
weld toe for fatigue design. Reference is made to BS 5400 (1980), BS 7608 (1993) and DNV CN
30.7 (2008). In IIW (2007) (7), it was decided to change the angle for largest principal stress
range direction from 45 to 60 which is now included in the present version of the IIW
fatigue design guidelines. During actual design cases it has been found that the new IIW
criterion can have significant impact on design of some special details and it is observed that
designers have difficulties to meet the required fatigue life at these hot spots when using this
procedure. Therefore, Lotsberg (18) decided to make a further assessment of recommended
design criteria based on review of some relevant fatigue test data from the literature, Kim
and Yamada (14).
The guideline suggested by Lotsberg (18) on how to calculate fatigue damage at weld toes
based on S-N data when the principal stress direction is different from that of the normal to
the weld toe has been adopted in CSR-H. With use of the hot spot stress methodology the
method as presented in Figure 1 (from Lotsberg (18), C2 = FAT100) is suggested.
The stress range in both the two principal directions should be assessed with respect to
fatigue. For principal stress direction 45 < 90 an S-N curve for stress direction parallel
with the weld can be used due to the effective stress reduction factor of 0.63 at = 45 as
shown in Lotsberg (18). The S-N curve FAT100 is accounted for in CSR-H by applying a
reduction factor 0.9 on the stress acting outside 45 to the perpendicular to the weld toe.
Figure 1:
S-N curve with hot spot stress methodology (D=FAT90, C2=FAT100)
Correction factor fwarp for warping stress effect is derived based on the study described in TB
Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec04_Warping Effect Fatigue Longitudinal. Correction factor
fwarp = 1.07 for the deck and top side sloping plate longitudinal stiffeners running next to the
JANUARY 2014
hatch opening at the location of the hatch corner, fwarp = 1.0 for all other longitudinal
stiffeners and locations.
3.1.3
Base material free edge
Hot spots located at the free edge of base material are not affected by an artificial singularity
in FE analysis. The relevant stress for fatigue could be read out directly at the hot spot
location (peak stress along the free edge) without any extrapolation. In order to ensure that
the hot spot stress is actually read out at the element edge it is required to use dummy beam
element that will capture both axial and bending component at the plate edge.
For base material, it is recognised that the fatigue strength improves in proportion to the
strength of the material such as tensile strength and yield strength. Figure 2 shows the
relation between yield strength and fatigue strength at 2106 cycles. Whereas the fatigue
strengths of weld joints are constant regardless of the yield strength, the fatigue strength of
base material clearly shows the correlation with the yield strength. Differences of fatigue
strength among the weld joints are coming from the differences of stress concentration due
to the joint type and the weld bead profile.
According to the results of base material, following regression result can be obtained:
( Y ) = 0.210 Y + 205
Then the correction factor for material can be defined as below:
f material =
254.35
1211.19
1200
(235 )
=
=
( Y ) 0.210 Y + 205 Y + 976.19 Y + 965
Relation between yield strength and fatigue strength at 2106
Fatigue Strength at 2106 cycles (Mpa)
Figure 2:
Base material
cruciform joint
(toe grinding)
cruciform joint
(profiling)
cruciform joint
(as-weld)
but joint
(as-weld)
Yield Strength (Mpa)
3.2
3.2.1
Mean stress effect

Correction factor for mean stress effect
Fatigue analysis of structures has a longer tradition related to land and offshore structures
than for ship structures. Thus, it might be questioned why a fatigue procedure for ship
structures are not more directly based on the experience from the existing fatigue assessment
standards. The answer to this is that ship structures are normally subjected to different
loading conditions during service life which may lead to more shake-down of residual
JANUARY 2014
stresses at significant hot spot areas and the effect of the mean stress on fatigue damage
becomes more evident.
In case of ship structures, the experiences of fatigue damages clearly demonstrated the effect
of mean stress on fatigue strength of welded structures, as presented by T. Yoneya, A.
Kumano, N. Yamamoto and T. Shigemi, 1993 (21). Effect of shakedown on residual stress is
described by Syahroni and Berge, 2010 (11). Laboratory measurements of residual stress after
pre-load as described by Kim and Lotsberg, 2005 (14) have been applied in the development of
the mean stress method.
The compressive part of the stress cycle that leads to crack closure is considered to provide
less fatigue damage than a tensile stress cycle that leads to crack opening. The effective
compression when considering crack closure is depending on residual tensile stress at the
connection. As residual tensile stress is reduced, the compressive stress part of the stress
cycle becomes less detrimental with respect to fatigue damage.
Even if the long term damage accumulation in ship structures is considered to be somewhat
different from that of other types of structures as explained above, the experience from other
industries and laboratory testing have been assessed in the harmonisation process of the
IACS CSR rules on fatigue (July 2010). In addition the procedure has been calibrated against
service experience in areas where other documented data are not available. These experience
data relate especially to effect of shake-down and effect of compressive mean stresses at the
hot spot areas. The mean stress correction factor on stress range in CSR-H is a further
development of the two procedures applied in CSR OT (9) and CSR BC (10).
Correction Factor
Illustration of mean stress correction factor applied for welded joints at

longitudinal stiffeners
Correction Factor
Figure 3:
Mean Stress / Stress Range (10-4)
Illustration of mean stress correction factor applied for welded joints at

primary support members
Correction Factor
JANUARY 2014
Correction Factor
Figure 4:
= y
= 0.75y
= 0.5y
= y
= 0.75y
= 0.5y
The mean stress correction factor developed for application in CSR-H is based on the
following considerations:
For mean stress around zero in Figure 3, the correction factor according to CSR OT (July 2010)
is given to be 0.8. This represents a situation with a detail with zero residual stress, i.e. a
structure where shakedown of residual stresses to zero have already occurred. The
correction factor of 0.8 around zero mean stress without residual stresses is based on test
data in Gurney, 1992 (12), e.g. for stress relieved connections as referred to in TB Report, TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec03_Mean Stress Effect.
If there are remaining residual stresses at the hot spot region, the correction factor should be
larger (and closer to 1.0) around zero mean stress as observed from laboratory testing, refer
to Lotsberg, 2006 (15) and Lotsberg et al, 2010 (16). A factor around 0.90 may also be argued
with reference to a connection with medium residual stresses at the hot spot area in IIW,
2009 (20), described in TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec03_Mean Stress Effect. In this
procedure for mean stress correction, the factor at zero mean stress is set to 0.9 in order to
account for details with less shake-down of residual stresses. The correction factor at zero
mean stress, equal 0.9, determines the correction factor for positive mean stress in Figure 3.
The actual stress range at 10-2 probability level is in the order only half of that at 10-4 level.
With use of stress range at 10-2 probability level the procedure would be more sensitive to
the actual level of remaining residual stress and of the mean stress than if the factor was
derived at a larger stress range (some error in assessment of mean stress will lead to an
increased error in the mean stress correction factor). In order to maintain the same sensitivity
as in CSR OT and CSR BC the dynamic stress range at 10-2 probability level used for mean
stress correction is increased with a factor 2.0. The factor 2.0 is the scaling factor to obtain the
stress range at 10-4 probability level when assuming Weibull distributed stresses with shape
parameter 1.0.
For the negative mean stress one do not want to lose the experience from the data base
behind the bulk carrier procedure. The lower limit of 0.3 on mean stress correction factor is a
result from calibration of the bulk carrier procedure against experience data. A lower limit
equal 0.5 may be substantiated based on test data under constant amplitude loading without
shake-down of residual stress, refer to Lotsberg and Landet, 2005 (17). This corresponds to the
mean stress to stress range ratio of -0.5 where the maximum stress is equal to zero. The mean
stress effect in this procedure goes through this point as shown in Figure 2. When the mean
stress to stress range ratio is equal to -0.5 (i.e. entire stress cycle is in compression side based
on mean (static) stress according to current procedure), the mean stress correction factor is
equal 0.5. Full benefit on compression side (correction factor of 0.3) is obtained after further
increase in compressive mean stress. The additional increase in compressive mean stress is
necessary to overcome residual stress remaining at the hot spot, i.e. it is assumed that full
shakedown has not occurred.
Above considerations are appropriate for the case that the value of mean stress is not so high
like stiffener end connection and for the case that the mean stress condition changes from
tension to compression due to the change in two loading conditions such as full loaded and
ballast conditions typically seen in tankers.
For bulk carrier which has typical four loading conditions one will often have the case that
the local tensile mean stress fully exceeds the material yield strength due to the large stress
concentration factor at hot spot. In general, a compressive residual stress is locally induced
after the application of large tensile stress larger than the material yield strength.
JANUARY 2014
In order to take into account this effect in the fatigue assessment of primary support
members of bulk carrier, the parameter maximum stress has been introduced in the mean
stress method. The maximum stress is among all load cases and loading conditions the
largest sum of the dynamic wave stress amplitude at 10-4 probability level and the mean
stress level. In cases where this maximum stress exceeds the rule actual yield strength the
method will assume that further shakedown (reduction) of the mean stress level will occur.
This correction hardly affect to the case of stiffener end connection and primary support
member of tankers. Since the dynamic wave stress amplitude at 10-4 probability level is
identical to the dynamic wave stress range at 10-2 probability level (assuming Weibull shape
parameter 1.0) the rule procedure is using the 10-2 probability level stress range to represent
the 10-4 probability level stress amplitude.
Stress range at 10-4 probability level is applied in the mean stress correction procedure.
Larger stress ranges at another probability level may result in tensile stresses and shift the
contribution of fatigue damage for larger compressive mean stresses. This shows that it is not
possible by a simple procedure to fully represent the physical behaviour for all stress cycles
and mean stress levels. It has to be accepted that the procedure is developed for a typical
long term stress range distribution and that one should be cautious to use the procedure
outside its intended use.
At unwelded base material no residual stress will be evident and the situation is similar to
that of a welded detail with full relaxation of residual stress. For mean stress around zero in
Figure 3 the correction factor is given to be 0.8. The correction factor of 0.8 around zero mean
stress without residual stresses is based on test data, refer to Gurney, 1992 (12), e.g. for stress
relieved connections as referred to in TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec03_Mean Stress
Effect.
For base material, a similar lower limit of 0.3 as used for welded joints is kept also for base
material. The slope for negative mean stress is moved to the right compared to welded joints
since no residual stress is present at the considered hot spot. Maximum benefit of mean
stress effect is obtained at mean stress to stress range ratio of -0.5, i.e. when the entire stress
cycle is in compression (maximum stress is equal to zero).
Figure 5:
Illustration of mean stress correction factor applied for base material
=y
=0.75y
=0.5y
3.2.2
Mean stress for base material free edge
In a given direction, the mean stress is equal to the average between the maximum stress and
the minimum stress during a stress cycle. For base material free edge, the principal local
stress range direction corresponds to the direction along the beam element coordinate system.
So, the mean stress is directly the average between the local stresses due to static and
dynamic load cases i1 and i2.
JANUARY 2014
3.2.3
Mean stress for simplified method
3.2.4
Mean stress for FE analysis
For welded joints, the direction to be used corresponds to the principal hot spot stress range
direction pX or pY (Figure 6). The principal direction pX is defined by the rotation of the xdirection (corresponding to the normal line to the weld toe) of the element coordinate system
by the angle and the direction pY is defined by the rotation of the pX-direction by the angle
90. The selected principal direction between pX and pY corresponds to this one associated to
the maximum of the two hot spot principal stress ranges for weld toe with mean stress effect
and thickness effect corrections.
For welded joints, mean stress corresponds to the average between the hot spot stress
components due to static and dynamic load cases i1 and i2 in the above selected principal
directions pX or pY (Figure 8).
Stress read out point element in the FEM model
Principal
stress range
directions
Normal line
to the weld
toe
pX
Figure 6:
pY
pX
pY
Stress read out point element
JANUARY 2014
Figure 7:
Hot spot stress components in the element coordinate system (x, y, z)
(HS)yy
(HS)xx
(HS)xy
(HS)xy
(HS)yx
(HS)xx
(HS)yx
(HS)yy
Figure 8:
Hot spot stress components in the principal directions coordinate system (pX,
pY, pZ)
pY
) xpx
( HS p
) xpy
( HS p
) xpy
( HS p
) y py
( HS p
) ypx
( HS p
pX
)
X pX
p
( HS
) ypx
( HS p
) ypy
( HS p
3.3
Thickness effect
3.3.1
The thickness exponent is proposed based on original work by Gurney (22) where the
thickness effect is taken care of by an exponential equation, 1/4 Rule with reference to the
fatigue strength of 22mm plates.
For t > 22mm,
22
S t = S 22
t
where St is the fatigue strength of welded component of thickness t, S22 is the fatigue strength
of welded component of reference thickness 22mm. In Hobbacher (20), the thickness exponent
of n=1/4 was first derived for specimens with transverse welded attachments.
The work by Yamamoto (30) indicates that the thickness effect of cruciform joints is
dominated by the stress concentration and stress gradient at weld toe which depend on the
JANUARY 2014
weld size. Therefore, the thickness effect of cruciform joints is sensitive to the attached plate
thickness rather than the main plate thickness. Then, the IIW recommendation (23) is
introduced for the cruciform joints.
Table 1 provides thickness exponents for number of welded details in as-welded condition
with references to research (experimental and numerical) where the thickness exponent was
obtained. Table 2 provides thickness exponents for cut edges of non-welded material.
Table 1:
No
1
2
4
5
6*
7
Thickness exponent in as-welded condition
Joint category description

Cruciform joints, transverse T-joints, plates with
transverse attachments
Transverse butt welds
Longitudinal welds or attachments to plate
edges
Longitudinal attachments on the flatbar or bulb
profile
Longitudinal attachments and doubling plates
Longitudinal attachments and doubling plates
supported longitudinally
Ref.
(22), (23),
0.25
(30)
0.2
(23)
0.1
(23)
n/a
0.2
(24)
0.1
(24)
* The example of stress analysis for longitudinal attachments and main plate of various
thickness using effective notch stress approach is provided in TB Report, TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec03_Thickness Effect for As Welded.
Table 2:
No
3a
3b
Cut edges of non-welded material

Any cutting of edges by machine or flame
cutting with a controlled procedure
Any cut edges are to be subsequently machined
or ground smooth*
Ref.
0.1
(23)
0.0
(25)
* It was found in (25) that the thickness effect is not of significance between the specimens
with edges machined with R=3mm and thickness varying from 22mm to 100mm if crack
initiation and crack propagation through thickness are considered. The technical background
for thickness exponents for welded joints improved by weld improvement methods are
provided in TB documentation of Sec 5.
Table 3 provides thickness exponents for number of welded details with weld toe treated by
weld improvement methods with references to research (experimental and numerical) where
the thickness exponent was obtained.
Table 3:
Thickness exponent for welded joints with weld after post-weld treatment
No
1
2
JANUARY 2014

Cruciform joints, transverse T-joints, plates
with transverse attachments
Transverse butt welds ground flush or
weld toe treated by post-weld
improvement method
Reference
(23)
(23)
3
4
Longitudinal attachments and doubling

plates
Longitudinal attachments and doubling
plates supported longitudinally, except
longitudinal end connections
(31)
(31)
S-N CURVES
4.1
4.1.1
Basic S-N curves

Capacity
The basic S-N curves used in this Rules are based on DEn, 1990 (27) and HSE, 1995 (28).
4.1.2
Design S-N curves
It is an industry standard to use the design S-N curves, which correspond to the mean S-N
curves (corresponding to 50% of survival of probability for relevant experimental data)
minus two standard deviations. Therefore, the design S-N curves correspond to survival
probability of 97.7%.
4.1.3
S-N curve scope of application
The S-N curves are applicable to normal and high strength steels up to a specified minimum
yield stress equal to 390 N/mm2. Special consideration is to be give if the material yield
stress is higher than 390N/mm2. Refer to Sec 1, [1.1.5].
4.1.4
In-air environment
The basic design S-N curves of B, C and D classes in DEn, 1990 (27) are defined in terms of
following parameters; constant related to the design S-N curve, inverse of slope with a
change at N = 107 cycles. The change of inverse of slope at N = 107 cycles is called Haibachs
effect, it corresponds to the fact that fatigue limit defined at N = 107 cycles under constant
stress ranges is not valid in case of random stress range.
Actual fatigue limit decreases in case of random stress range and to take into account this
phenomenon, a change of inverse of slope of S-N curve is performed at N = 107 cycles with a
second inverse of slope lower than this one corresponding to the first part before N = 107
cycles. The change inverse of slope proposed by DEn, 1990 (27) is equal to m+2 with m is the
inverse of slope of the first part of the S-N curve before N = 107 cycles.
4.1.5
Corrosive environment
The basic design curves in corrosive environment for D curve are adapted from the fatigue
data published in the DEn, 1990. In the same guidance, the following is recommended; for
unprotected joints exposed to seawater, the basic S-N curve is reduced by a factor of 2 on life
for all joint classes. (Note: for high strength steels, i.e. y > 400 N/mm2, a penalty factor of 2
may not be adequate). In addition, there will be no slope change for the S-N curve in the case
of unprotected joints in seawater.
The basic design curves in corrosive environment for B and C curves are adapted from the
fatigue data published in HSE, 1995 (28) which correspond to a reduction factor of 3 on fatigue
life without slope change.
JANUARY 2014
4.2
4.2.1
Selection of S-N curves

Welded joints
For fatigue assessment of welded joints, it is recommended to apply D curve for in air and
corrosive environment, respectively, with appropriate hot spot stress. The use of D curve as
the hot spot curve was originally recommended through the work of Maddox (5) and
Fricke (2) in the FPSO fatigue capacity JIP. It should be noted that use of the D curve as the
hot spot curve is closely linked to the procedure used for establishing hot spot stress from
very fine element models and the requirements given to very fine element models.
4.2.2
Base material free edge
For fatigue assessment of base material at free edge, S-N curves B or C as defined in
Table 2 of [4.1.4] and Table 3 of [4.1.5] are to be used for in-air and corrosive environment,
respectively.
4.2.3
Surface finishing factor
The surface finishing factor Ksf, as defined in Table 3 (Table 4 of rule text Sec2 [4.2.3]), is a
coefficient which depends on the cutting quality, post treatment and control quality of base
material. Ksf is derived by converting the fatigue curve recommended in Hobbacher, 2009 (20)
to the S-N curve applied in [4.1].
Three different surface finishing factors are given Table 3 due to different quality of surface
finishing depending on the likelihood of notching from corrosion, wear and tear in service.
The factors are derived as follows:
Example Joint No. 1:

Table 4:
No
1
Surface finishing factor
Description of joint
Rolled or extruded plates and sections as well as
seamless pipes, no surface or rolling defects.
Ksf
0.94
S-N curve
B
1.07
Recommended S-N curve is FAT 160 (m=4) in IIW,

Hobbacher, 2009 (2029).
2
Plate edge sheared or machine-cut by a thermal

process with surface free of cracks and notches,
cutting edges chamfered or rounded. Stress increase
due to geometry of cut-outs to be considered.
Recommended S-N curve is FAT 140 (m=4) in IIW,
Hobbacher, 2009 (20).
JANUARY 2014
Plate edge not meeting the requirements of type 2,

but free from cracks and severe notches.
Machine cut or sheared edge: Recommended S-N

curve is FAT 125 (m=3.5) in IIW, Hobbacher, 2009
(20).
1.00
Manually thermally cut: Recommended S-N curve is

FAT 100 (m=3.5) in IIW, Hobbacher, 2009 (20).
1.24
FATIGUE DAMAGE CALCULATION
5.1
General
5.1.1
During the design life, the vessel and the structural details are subjected to different loading
conditions of varying time fraction depending on the ships type. Moreover, during the 25
year design life, a structural detail is assumed to experience two consecutive periods
corresponding to in-air environment and corrosive environment respectively.
It is assumed that corrosion protection is partially effective, i.e. that joints in way of water
ballast, oil cargo hold and fuel oil holds, are efficiently protected against corrosion during a
certain amount of time (called effective corrosion protection period) and during the
remaining part of the design life, they are exposed to corrosive environment because the
corrosion protection is more questionable. During the effective corrosion protection period
(associated to protected environment), the steel surface is protected from the corrosive
environment. Then, the steel may be considered to be as in dry air condition.
In this case, the fatigue strength may be assessed with the S-N curves in-air, Sec 2, [4.1.4] for
the effective corrosion protection. During the remaining life when the joint is subjected to
corrosive environment, fatigue strength may be assessed with the S-N curves in corrosive
environment, Sec 2, [4.1.5]. Then, design life may be divided into one interval with protected
environment condition and one interval with unprotected environment condition. Each of
these intervals is divided into different loading conditions depending on each ships type.
As an example, the assumption made in the Rules is that coatings in ballast tanks are to be
provided and maintained. Therefore, the structure is assumed to spend most of the time in a
protected environment and the remaining time in a corrosive environment. The time in
corrosive environment, TC is assumed to be the last 5 years of the ships design life (TD = 25
years) when limited coating maintenance is expected.
5.1.2
According to the above information, total fatigue damage relative to the design life may be
calculated as the sum of the damage accumulated during the period in air environment and
the damage accumulated during the period in corrosive environment. Taking into account
the linearity of the damage accumulation, Sec 2, [1.1], each loading condition is considered
separately and is divided into a period of protected environment (called in-air) and a period
of unprotected environment (called in corrosive environment).
Combined fatigue damage is calculated for each loading condition. It corresponds to the
combination of damage accumulated in air and damage accumulated in corrosive
environment during a specific loading condition. Damage accumulated during a specific
JANUARY 2014
loading condition associated to a specific environmental condition (air environment or

corrosive environment) is calculated; it is called elementary fatigue damage.
5.2
Elementary fatigue damage
5.2.1
Elementary fatigue damage for each loading condition is calculated for both air and
corrosive environment and is based on fatigue stress range obtained for the predominant
load case, Sec 1, [6.2] and [6.3]. Elementary fatigue damage has a closed form format and is
based on the assumption that long term distribution of stress range of a structural detail in a
ship structure follows a two-parameter Weibull distribution with specific shape and slope
parameter, Sec 1, [3].
Elementary fatigue damage calculation is performed for the number of wave cycles, IACS
Recommendations No.56 (26) encountered during the design life corresponding to 25 years.
However 85% of the ships service life is considered as effective i.e. in operation at sea (26); the
remaining time (15%) corresponds to the non-sailing time for operations such as cargo
loading/unloading, inspection and maintenance. Elementary damage calculated for air
environment is based on basic design S-N curves of B, C and D classes in air environment,
UK DEn, 1990 (27) with change of inverse of slope at N = 107 cycles in order to take into
account the Haibachs effect for small stress range. In the case of air environment, coefficient
takes into account the change in inverse of slope of the S-N curve.
Elementary damage calculated for corrosive environment is based on basic design S-N
curves of B, C and D classes in corrosive environment, UK DEn, 1990 (27) and HSE, 1995 (28)
with a single inverse of slope m=3 for all stress ranges. In the case of corrosive environment,
coefficient is taken to be 1.0.
5.3
Combined fatigue damage
5.3.1
The combined fatigue damage for each loading condition is the sum of damage accumulated
during the period in-air environment (TD-TC) and damage accumulated during the period in
corrosive environment, TC. The damage accumulated during each period is calculated in
proportion of time spent in each environmental condition.
Values of time spent in corrosive environment are given in Table 4 according to the weld
joint or structural detail location. The values are consistent with the principles given in Pt 1,
Ch 1, Sec 3 and Pt 2, Ch 3, Sec 3.
Table 5:
Time in corrosive environment, TC
Location of weld joint or structural

detail
Time in corrosive
environment TC, in years
Water ballast tank

Oil cargo tank
Lower part(1) of bulk cargo hold

and water ballast cargo hold
Bulk cargo hold and water ballast
cargo hold except lower part(1)
JANUARY 2014
2
Void space and other areas

(1) Lower part means cargo hold part below a horizontal level located at
a distance of 300 mm below the frame end bracket for holds of single
side skin construction or 300 mm below the hopper tank upper end
for holds of double side skin construction.
5.4
Total fatigue damage
5.4.1
5.5
Fatigue life calculation
5.5.1
The calculated fatigue life, TF is calculated from the total fatigue damage in air environment
considering all loading conditions and the total fatigue damage in corrosive environment
considering all loading conditions.
Two cases of calculation are considered due to the fact that the damage rate differs according
to the environmental condition (air environment or corrosive environment) of the detail.
1. If the failure occurs during the period in-air, i.e. TF is inferior or equal to (TD-TC), the
calculated fatigue life, TF is calculated from the total fatigue damage in air.
T
T
TF = D if D ( TD TC )
Dair
Dair
2. If the failure occurs during the period in corrosive environment, i.e. TF is superior to
(TD-TC), calculation of TF requires to determine firstly the damage accumulated
during the period in-air, i.e. (TD-TC) and secondly to determine the remaining damage
accumulated during the period in corrosive environment. As the failure is assumed to
occur when the damage is equal to unity, then the damage accumulated during the
period in corrosive environment is equal to unity minus the last damage determined
above. The calculated fatigue life, TF is calculated as the sum of time spent in-air
environment, i.e. (TD-TC) and the time spent in corrosive environment calculated from
the damage accumulated during the period in corrosive environment.
TF = (Time in air = TD Tc ) + ( Life in corrosive environment )
The damage Dair,(Td-Tc) accumulated during the time in air (TD-TC) is written as:
Dair ,(TD TC ) =
Dair (TD TC )
TD
The damage accumulated during the life in corrosive environment (before fracture) is equal
to:
D (T T )
D =1.0 Dair ,(TD TC ) = 1.0 air D C
TD
As mentioned above:
TF = (Time in air = TD Tc ) + ( Life in corrosive environment )
Life in corrosive environment is taken as:
JANUARY 2014
D (TD TC ) TD
1.0 air

T
D
Dcorr
Time in air-environment is taken as TD-TC. Combining time in air and life in corrosive
environment the total fatigue life becomes:
D (TD TC ) TD

TF = TD TC + 1.0 air
T
D
Dcorr
T
D
TF = TD TC + D TD + TC air
Dair
Dcorr
where,
TD
TC
Dair
Dcorr
Dair,(Td-Tc)
=
=
=
=
=
Design fatigue life.

Time in corrosive environment.
Damage during 25 years in air-environment.
Damage during 25 years in corrosive-environment.
Damage during the actual time in air-environment.
WELD IMPROVEMENT METHODS
6.1
General
6.1.1
The post-weld treatments methods and procedures are based on recommendations by IIW
(32), (23).
6.1.2
Limitation of the benefit of post-weld treatment
The improvement factor on fatigue life that can be claimed on mild steel is 2.2 according to
IIW (32),(23). To avoid very high nominal stress level and low un-treated fatigue life it is
required that the life before post-weld treatment exceeds 17 years. This requirement is
adopted from CSR OT (33). With this requirement the effective improvement factor becomes
1.47 for design life 25 years. However, due to very early damage in the corrosion protective
coating on structural details inside a bulk cargo hold the calculated fatigue life at design
stage excluding post-weld treatment effects is not to be less than 25 years.
6.1.3
Post-weld treatment at fabrication stage
The description of the basic post-weld treatment method to improve fatigue strength at the
fabrication stage is adopted from IIW recommendations (32), (23).
6.1.4
Weld toe
The application of post-weld treatment methods to the weld toe is required according to IIW
recommendations (32).
6.1.5
Weld type for post-weld treatment
Full or partial penetration welds with a minimum root face according to Ch 12, Sec 3, [2.4] is
required based on recommendations by IIW (32).
JANUARY 2014
6.2
Weld toe burr grinding
6.2.1
The requirements for weld toe burr grinding are adopted from IIW recommendations (1) and
CSR OT (33).
6.2.2
The description of application of weld toe burr grinding is based on recommendations by
IIW (32).
6.3
Fatigue improvement factor
6.3.1
Fatigue improvement factor for weld toe burr grinding is based on recommendations by IIW
(32), (23).
6.4
Applicability
6.4.1
The limitations of post-weld improvement methods and fatigue improvement factors
provided in this section are adopted as follows:
High cycle fatigue limitation is based on IIW recommendations (32).

Limitation on thickness is based on on IIW recommendations (32), (23).
Consideration of burr grinding only is based on on IIW recommendations (32), (23).
Applicability of post-weld improvement benefit in corrosion free conditions is adopted
from IIW recommendations (32).
Longitudinal end connections are excluded from consideration as failure from weld toe
cannot be ensured.
Mechanical damages may introduce stress concentration area into weld toe improved by
weld improvement technique therefore fatigue improvement factor may not be achieved.
Treatment of inter-bead toes for large multi-pass welds is required based on
recommendations by IIW (32).
WORKMANSHIP
7.1
Application
7.1.1
7.2
7.2.1
Workmanship control for construction details

Building alignment and tolerance control
7.2.2
Weld profile control
Technical background is not considered necessary. Refer to TB of Ch 9, Sec 5.
7.2.3
Post-weld treatment methods

JANUARY 2014
7.2.4
Detail design standard

References:
1. A. Palmgren, Die lebensdauer von kugellagern, Zeitschrift der vereines deutches
ingenieure, No. 68(4), pp 339-341, 1924.
2. Fricke, Recommended hot spot analysis procedure for structural details of FPSOs
and ships on round robin FE analysis, 11th ISOPE, Stavanger, March 2002.
3. Lotsberg, Fatigue design of plated structures using finite element analysis, Journal
of ship and offshore structures, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp 45-54, 2006.
4. S. Lotsberg, Hot spot S-N curve for fatigue analysis of plated structures, OMAE,
FPSO 04-0014, Houston, 2004.
5. Maddox, Recommended design S-N curve for fatigue assessment of FPSOs, 11th
ISOPE 2001, Stavanger, March 2002.
6. Niemi, Fricke and Maddox, Fatigue analysis of welded components designers
guide to the structural hot spot stress approach, IIW-1430-00.
7. Hobbacher, Recommendations for fatigue design of welded joints and components,
IIW document, XIII-2151-07, June 2007.
8. BS 7608:1993, Code of Practice for Fatigue Design and Assessment of Steel
Structures, BSI.
10. IACS, Common Structure Rules for Bulk Carriers, July 2010.
11. N. Syahroni and S. Berge, Fatigue assessment of welded joints taking into account
effects of residual stress, OMAE 2010-20534.
12. T. R. Gurney, The influence of mean and residual stresses on the fatigue strength of
welded joints under variable amplitude loading some exploratory tests, TWI
Report 464/1992.
13. I. T. Kim and K. Yamada, Fatigue behaviour of fillet welded joints inclined to a
uniaxial load TWI document XIII-2021-04, Institute of Welding, 2004.
14. W. S. Kim and I. Lotsberg, Fatigue test data for welded connections in ship shaped
structures, Journal of offshore and arctic engineering, Vol. 127, November 2005.
15. I. Lotsberg, Assessment of fatigue capacity in the new bulk carrier and tanker rules,
Marine structures, Vol. 19, pp 83-96, January 2006.
16. I. Lotsberg, S. Wstberg, H. Ulle, P. Haagensen and M. E. Hall, Fatigue testing and SN data for fatigue analysis of piles, Journal of offshore and arctic engineering, Vol.
132, November 2010.
17. I. Lotsberg and E. Landet, Fatigue capacity of side longitudinals in floating
structures, Marine structures, Vol. 18, pp. 25-42, 2005.
18. I. Lotsberg, Fatigue design criteria as a function of principal stress direction relative
to the weld toe, OMAE 2008.
19. Y. Sumi, M. Mohri and T. Okawa, Simulation based fatigue crack management for
ship structural details, 9th symposium on practical design of ships and other
floating structures, Vol. 2, pp. 855-862, 2004.
20. A. Hobbacher, Recommendations for fatigue design of welded joints and
components, WRC bulletin 520, IIW document 1823-07, 2009.
21. T. Yoneya, A. Kumano, N. Yamamoto and T. Shigemi, Hull cracking of very large
ship structures, IOS93, 1993.
22. T. R. Gurney, The basis of the revised fatigue design rules, Department of Energy,
Paper 55, 2nd International conference on welded structures, London, 1982.
components, IIW document 1823-07, December 2008.
JANUARY 2014
24. T. Fukuoka and K. Mochizuki, Effect of plate thickness on fatigue strength of typical
welded joints for a ship structure, XIII-2333-10, July 2010.
25. H. Polezhayeva and C. Badger, Effect of plate thickness on fatigue strength of base
material and butt welded specimens made from EH40 steel thick plates, 19th
International offshore and polar engineering conference, Osaka, 2009.
26. IACS, Fatigue assessment of ship structures, Recommendations No.56, July 1999.
27. UK DEn, Offshore installations: guidance on design, construction and certification,
4th edition, January 1990.
28. HSE, Offshore installations: guidance on design, construction and certification, 4th
edition, February 1995.
29. Miner, A. M., "Cumulative Damage in Fatigue", Journal of Applied Mechanics,
September 1945, pp 151-164
30. N. Yamamoto, M. Mouri, T. Okada and T. Mori, Analytical and experimental study
on the thickness effect to fatigue strength, XIII-2434-12, July 2012
31. IACS, "Thickness Effect for Post-Welded", TB Report, Pt 1, Ch 9, Sec 3, 2012.
32. P. J. Haagensen and S. J. Maddox, IIW recommendations on post-weld improvement
of steel and aluminium structures, XIII-2200r4-07, February 2010.
33. IACS, CSR Double Hull Oil Tanker, Consolidated, Effective 1 July 2012.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 4 SIMPLIFIED STRESS ANALYSIS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
Assumptions
1.2.1
1.2.2
HOT SPOT STRESS
2.1
Hot spot stress range
2.1.1
2.2
Hot spot mean stress
2.2.1
HULL GIRDER STRESS
3.1
Stress due to hull girder wave bending moments
3.1.1
The wave induced hull girder stress should be considered in fatigue assessment. The
nominal stress range is determined by beam theory and the stress concentration factor is
considered in determining the hot-spot stress.
3.2
Stress due to still water hull girder bending moments
3.2.1
The hull girder stress due to still water bending moment should be considered as the mean
stress effect in fatigue assessment. Still water bending moment is defined by permissible still
water bending moment by a factor. The stress is determined from beam theory.
To avoid the consequence on fatigue life from changes in actual SWBM during design, still
water bending moment was decided to use a fraction of permissible SWBM, based on the
collected database of actual SWBM from nine societies.
JANUARY 2014
LOCAL STIFFENER STRESS
4.1
4.1.1
Stress due to stiffener bending

Stress due to dynamic pressure
This is a procedure in which the nominal stress is assessed by beam theory, and multiplied
by the stress concentration factor to assess the hot-spot stress. The stress assessment is
performed by determining the stress by beam theory for each load component and
superimposing the stresses. In this case, it should be noted that the sign of the stress varies
with the direction in which the lateral pressure is applied.
When longitudinal stiffeners are connected by flat bars or brackets at the position where they
pass through transverse bulkheads or transverse webs, the stress concentration due to
structural discontinuity at the connections is to be considered. In the simplified procedure,
assessment is performed by multiplying the nominal stress with the stress concentration
factor. Since there have been many instances of design and construction of structural details
of joints of longitudinal stiffener at these locations, stress concentration factors for these
typical detailed joints are given for design assistance.
In the assessment of stress due to local dynamic pressure, the effect of increase in stress
accompanying the tripping of stiffeners of asymmetric cross section is considered separate
from the stress concentration factor due to the shape of the detailed joint, and the stress
concentration factor determined from elastic beam theory is considered.
The wave induced pressure along ship side is modelled as shown in Figure 1. Amplitude of
wave pressure depends on the vertical location and is proportional to the wave height in
general. Therefore, if the subject point is above the waterline level, wave pressure acts when
the wave crest is higher than the position. And, if the subject point is below the waterline
level and is higher than the wave trough, there is the case that the wave pressure does not act.
The important point is that these phenomena depend on the relation between the vertical
position to be evaluated and wave height, and the wave height is stochastic. Therefore,
correction factor for wave induced pressure around the waterline is introduced by means of
expectation considering the pressure and its occurrence probability.
The pressure acting on both sides of the stiffener i.e. applied on the attached plate on
stiffener side or on opposite side to the stiffener, could be simultaneously considered if
relevant in the loading condition. This condition can be used when the loading manual
requests specifically that the tanks on both sides of the stiffener are to be filled
simultaneously. This is for example the case for the longitudinal bulkhead of oil tanker
between oil tanks which must be full in full load conditions. For ballast tanks, the loading
manual has to specify the obligation to have both tanks full at the same time.
beff
: Effective breadth, in mm, of attached plating specified at the ends of the span and in
way of end brackets and supports shall be taken as;
JANUARY 2014
The TB for the formula is given in TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch03_ Sec07_Effective Plate

Breadth.
4.1.2
Stress due to static pressure
4.2
Stress due to relative displacement
4.2.1
General
At positions where longitudinal stiffeners pass through transverse bulkheads, the

deformation of the entire cargo tank is constrained. Thus, secondary bending stress due to
relative displacement occurs at the penetrating position of the bulkhead, and the penetrating
positions of the forward and aft transverse bulkheads.
4.2.2
Relative displacement definition
4.2.3
Sign convention
4.2.4
Oil tankers
The stress factor, Kd, is derived based on cargo tank FEM study, considering the effect on
bending stress in longitudinal stiffeners caused by relative displacement between supports.
4.2.5
Bulk carriers
In the case of bulk carriers, the simplified rule requirement like oil tankers is difficult because
of the variety of tank arrangement, the complicated form of tanks, variety of loading
conditions, etc. Therefore, in order to evaluate the effect of relative displacement, it is
necessary to obtain the amount of displacement by the FE analysis.
4.2.6
Stress due to relative displacement derived using FE method
When the relative displacement of transverse web adjacent to the bulkhead is derived using
FE analysis, an additional stress due to relative displacement can be established based on the
theory of continuous beam.
Since the actual boundary condition of the continuous beam is the intermediate condition
between fixed condition and simply support condition, the coefficient which represent the
effect of boundary condition in the formula has been obtained based on the FE analysis,
reference is given in TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec04_Relative Displacement by FE.
4.2.7
Stress due to relative displacement in still water
STRESS CONCENTRATION FACTORS
5.1
Unsymmetrical stiffener
5.1.1
The stress concentration factors at the flange, Kn takes into account the warping effect due to
unsymmetrical stiffener. When subjected to lateral pressure loads, the flange and web of
JANUARY 2014
panel stiffeners of unsymmetrical cross-section deflect sideways in warping in addition to

the lateral stiffener deflection. The additional stress in the flange by the warping deflection
has been expressed in terms of a warping stress concentration factor to the nominal flange
bending stress, Kn. The warping response of a panel stiffener is reduced by the constraining
stiffness of the attached plate flange.
The warping stress concentration factor, Kn formula that includes the constraint by the
attached plate flange has been derived based on the theory of beams on elastic foundations (5).
Comparison of Kn rule formula with finite element calculations (6), (7) of laterally loaded
panels having stiffeners of unsymmetrical cross-section where the warping deflection is
alternatively permitted/not permitted shows that the Kn analytical rule formula values and
FEM results are in good agreement.
5.1.2
Bulb profiles
5.2
Longitudinal stiffener end connections
5.2.1
The tabulated Stress Concentration Factors, SCF for stiffener end connection is based on the
classification of details found in the CSR OT (3) except for details 1, 2 and 25. The
classification given in Reference (3) and the equivalent SCFs adopted in this Rules are based
on test data, very fine mesh finite element analysis, experience and engineering judgment
performed and agreed upon among the Societies. SCF's for details 1, 2 and 25 are derived
from strain gauge measurements and very fine mesh FE analysis as described in TB Report,
TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec04_SCF for Flatbar Web Stiffener.
The SCFs for longitudinal stiffener end connections presented in this Rules are derived as
follows:
The SCF values, 1.14, 1.34 and 1.52 of Ka (geometrical stress concentration factor due to axial
loading) used on the nominal stress to obtain a hot spot stress, together with the hotspot
design S-N curve D for fatigue assessment is equivalent to use the nominal stress together
with the design E-curve, F-curve and F2-curve of UK DEn (4) also referenced in IACS Rec 56
(July 1999) (2).
The (Ka) SCF values are derived as follow:
SCF equivalent to SN-curve:
SCF equivalent to E-curve:
1.52 10 12 / 1.026 10 12 = 1.14
SCF equivalent to F-curve:
1.52 10 12 / 6.319 10 11 = 1.34
SCF equivalent to F2-curve:
K 2 ( Dcurve ) / K 2 ( SNcurve )
1.52 10 12 / 4.330 10 11 = 1.52
The SCF value of Kb (K-bending) is based on the Ka values with the following addition due to
bending effects:
All non-soft details (toes and heels) has a 10% increase in SCF, Kb = 1.1Ka
Soft details other than detail ID2 have Kb = Ka
At connections where there is less than 8mm clearance between the edge of the stiffener
flange and the face of the attachment (supporting bracket or web-stiffener), using the hot
JANUARY 2014
spot stress approach the SCF should be increased with 1.12, i.e. if the nominal stress
approach is used the S-N curve should be upgraded one class (4). As explained in UK HSE (5),
an edge distance criterion exists to limit the possibility of local stress concentrations
occurring at unwelded edges as a result, for example, of undercut, weld spatter, or accidental
overweave in manual fillet welding.
When the welds are on or adjacent to the edge of the stressed member, the stress
concentration is increased and the fatigue performance is reduced and this must be
separately assessed and included in the calculation of applied stress by increasing the SCF.
5.2.2
Other connection types
5.2.3
Overlapped connection
Very fine mesh finite element analysis using solid elements and recommendations from IIW
(1) shows that the hot spots stress will increase at overlapping end connection compared to
inserted connection. For overlapped connection, IIW recommends to upgrade the S-N class
corresponding to a SCF in the range of 1.13 to 1.43 depending on the type of longitudinal.
Due to this poor fatigue strength of overlapping connections they should not be adopted.
5.2.4
End stiffener without connection to web stiffener
5.2.5
Soft toe of web stiffener and backing bracket
5.2.6
Recommended detail designs
5.3
Alternative design
5.3.1
References:
1. A. Hobbacher, Recommendations for fatigue design of welded joints and components,
IIW XIII-2151-07, June 2007.
2. IACS, Fatigue assessment of ship structures, IACS Recommendation No. 56, July 1999.
4. UK DEn, Offshore Installations: Guidance on design, construction and certification,
Department of Energy, Fourth edition, 1990.
5. Hetenyi, Beams on elastic foundation, University of Michigan Press, 1946.
6. DNV, The elastic bending response of panel stiffeners of unsymmetrical cross-section
subjected to uniform lateral pressure loads, DNV Report No. 2004-1150, September 2004.
7. BV, Warping stress concentration factor of unsymmetrical stiffener - CSRH Rule values
versus FEM results, BV Report No. 3134, February 2011.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 5 FINITE ELEMENT STRESS ANALYSIS
GENERAL
1.1
Applicability
1.1.1
The analysis of potential fatigue cracks at weld toes is according to the so-called hot spot
stress approach. The hot spot stress does take into account the dimensions and geometry of
the structural detail itself while the local non-linear stress caused by the notch at the weld toe
is not accounted for. This notch effect is included in the hot spot S-N curve. The correct
geometry of the actual weld is not known at design stage. To account for variation in the
local weld geometry a lower-bound S-N curve is used as the design curve and the lower
bound quality of the weld toe geometry will be considered in the analysis.
The structural hot spot stress approach applies to welded joints where the fluctuating
principal stress predominately act perpendicular to the weld toe and the fatigue crack will
initiate at the weld toe. The hot spot stress concept is considered to be an efficient
engineering methodology for fatigue analysis of plated structures. During the last years a
methodology for derivation of hot spot stress based on FE analysis has been linked to a hot
spot S-N curve giving a consistent fatigue assessment procedure. The concept has been
supported by full scale measurements. The concept of structural hot spot stress is well
documented trough work by International Institute of Welding, IIW (3), (11) and various
Societies during the last years including the work performed in the FPSO Fatigue capacity
JIP (2), (4), (6), (10).
1.1.2
1.1.3
Two different types of hot spot configurations may occur at structural connections (4), (12), (13).
The two types of hot spots are defined depending on their position on the plate and their
orientation to the weld toe. For hot spot type a, the hot spot stress is transverse to the weld
toe on the plate surface. The stress distribution in front of the weld toe will depend on the
plate thickness and the stress read out position (tn50/2) and element size is made dependent
on the plate thickness. The stress distribution through the plate thickness changes in the
vicinity of the type a hot spot. At a distance 0.4tn50 from the weld toe, on the plate surface,
the non-linear stress component has vanished and the stress distribution through plate
thickness is almost linear. This is exploited in the stress derivation technique used to derive
the structural hot spot stress (12).
For hot spot type b, the hot spot stress is transverse to the weld toe at the plate edge of an
ending attachment (forming in-plane notches). The stress distribution is independent on the
plate thickness and the stress read out points cannot be established as proportions of the
plate thickness. The method adopted, proposed by IIW (12), is to defined the stress read out
point at an absolute distance of 5mm from the weld toe, using a mesh with absolute element
size 1010 mm, independent of actual plate thickness (4), (12), (13).
1.1.4
1.1.5
JANUARY 2014
1.1.6
FE MODELLING
2.1
General
2.1.1
2.1.2
Corrosion model
For fatigue assessment, ideally the cargo tank model is to be based on a thickness obtained
by deduction of a quarter of the corrosion addition thickness from the gross thickness.
However, this will require a cargo tank FE model different from that used for strength
assessment to be built. Alternatively, the analysis may be based on the same cargo tank finite
element model used for strength assessment, i.e. based on deduction of half of the corrosion
addition thickness from the gross thickness in conjunction with a modelling correction factor,
see Ch 9, Sec 1, [5.1.2] of the Rules.
Note that if the cargo tank finite element model for strength assessment is used, all structural
parts, inside or outside of the localised corrosion zone, are to be modelled using a thickness
obtained by deducting half corrosion addition from the gross thickness.
2.1.3
Separate local FE model
Since the stress concentration due to structural discontinuity depends on the surrounding
structural arrangements, area where a very fine mesh is mounted is to be extended so that
the effect of surrounding structural arrangements on stress concentration can be represented.
2.1.4
Since the stress concentration due to structural discontinuity is remarkable in the local area,
the size of very fine mesh is to be determined so that the behaviour of stress concentration
can be represented. The requirements to mesh refinement of the very fine mesh model are in
accordance with guidance of IIW (4).
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
Hopper knuckle welded connection
2.2.1
2.2.2
JANUARY 2014
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
Horizontal stringer heel connection
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
Lower stool inner bottom connection
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
Lower stool corrugated bulkhead connection
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
Side frame bracket to hopper sloping plate connections
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
JANUARY 2014
2.7
Side frame brackets to the upper sloping / flat bottom wing tank connection
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
Hatch corners and hatch coaming end bracket
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
For a rounded hatch corner, 15 elements will generally suffice to describe the curvature of
the hatchway radius plating (1). However, for an elliptical or parabolic corner, it is considered
that finer elements need to be specified in way of the tighter curvature so as to capture the
peak stress.Please refer to Sec 1 of TB Report, TB Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec05_FE Mesh Free Plate
Edge. Furthermore, the expected location of crack initiation for elliptical corners has also
been confirmed by in-service fatigue damage experience described in Sec 2 of TB Report, TB
Rep_Pt1_Ch09_Sec05_FE Mesh Free Plate Edge.
2.9
2.9.1
Boundary conditions
Cargo hold model
The boundary conditions applied to the ends of the cargo tank finite element model are the
same as those used for the strength assessment, see Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.4] of the Rules.
2.9.2
Separate local finite element model
For local finite element models, the most common method used is to apply the nodal
displacements as prescribed boundary condition to the sub-model. Where nodal forces are
applied, it is common to hold the model at certain point(s) on its boundary to prevent rigid
body motion. As the system is itself in equilibrium, the net force at the fixed point(s) should
be negligibly small. Where the sub-model has additional grid points between the common
nodal points, multi-point constraint equations can be used to define the displacements at the
additional grid points. Linear multi-point constraint equation is considered to be sufficient.
It is to be noted that multi-point constraint equations can appear in different forms in
different finite element software. However, as long as the displacements at the nodes on the
JANUARY 2014
primary support members (such as girders and floors) are defined, the exact choice of multi
point constraint equations should not have significant effect on the stresses at the area of
interest, which should be located at adequate distance from the boundary of the model. In
practice, prescribed nodal displacements will usually be applied, as most finite element
software caters for this method.
HOT SPOT STRESS FOR DETAILS DIFFERENT FROM WEB-STIFFENED

CRUCIFORM JOINTS
3.1
Welded details
3.1.1
The procedure for derivation of hot spot stress at weld toes by use of shell elements applies
to all weld toes of structural details found in a ship structure, except for the hot spots at a socalled web-stiffened cruciform joint, see [4] and hot spot at bent hopper knuckle, [3.3].
The procedure used for derivation of hot spot stress is developed based on results from the
FPSO Fatigue Capacity JIP. The JIP was initiated with the objective of obtaining reliable
fatigue design procedures for plated structures on FPSOs and involved 19 participants from
oil companies, designers, shipyards and classification companies.
During the FPSO Fatigue Capacity JIP a proper link between the calculated hotspot stress
and the fatigue capacity was established and recommendations for how to perform the
fatigue assessment based on FE analysis combined with one S-N curve was developed.
A hot spot stress S-N curve for cracking from weld toes of small scale test data was
derived. The tested specimens were analyzed using FE for derivation of hotspot stress.
And this derivation was linked to one S-N curve to obtain a consistent fatigue assessment
procedure (3), (5).
This S-N curve was supported by full scale fatigue test specimens.
Based on the work recommendations to FE modelling and stress extrapolation were

made.
It was found less scatter when the using stress read out at tn50/2 position only, instead of
extrapolating from tn50/2 and 3tn50/2 (5).
Traditionally, the hot spot stress is derived by extrapolating stresses from the position tn50/2
and 3tn50/2 from the intersection line. The hot spot stress derived from an extrapolation is
consistent with use of the D curve. It was concluded from the findings of the FPSO Fatigue
Capacity JIP that use of the surface principal stress at the tn50/2 position alone together with
use of the E curve will give equivalent results to the traditional extrapolation procedure. In
order to link the stress at tn50/2 position to the D curve the stress is multiplied with a factor
1.12. The factor represents the ratio between the E curve and D curve. The main reason for
preferring use of tn50/2 alone without extrapolation is the methods easy use of only one read
out point and no extrapolation. By use of 8 node elements, the method becomes very
convenient since one with a tn50tn50 mesh can directly read out the element stress result at
the element mid-node. Another reason for the preference is the experience from the FPSO
Fatigue Capacity JIP showing less scatter in the hot spot stress results when using the tn50/2
position only. The method is believed to reduce user misinterpretation and give more
consistent results among different users.
The method is also adopted in the DNV CN 30.7 (2). The background for the procedure is
explained by Lotsberg (5). With finite element modelling using shell elements arranged in the
JANUARY 2014
midplane of the structure the distance to stress read out position is to be measured from the
midplane, also denoted intersection line. Since the weld is not modelled using shell elements
it is recommended to measure the stress read out position (tn50/2) from the structural
intersection line (mid-plane) in order to avoid stress underestimation due to missing stiffness
of the weld. In many cases the stress at the actual weld toe position will be too low due to the
stiffness reduction in the shell element model compared with the real structure (2), (4), (5), (12).
The background of the two hotspot types a and b is given in [1.1.3].
3.1.2
Stress read out methods
The stress extrapolation procedure to establish the principal stress at the stress read out point
tn50/2 is dependent on the element type used. The better representation of displacement and
stresses offered by the higher order elements in addition to the mid-node result located at
tn50/2 position is simplifying the procedure when a model is made of 8 node elements. The
stress extrapolation procedure is based on guidance presented in DNV CN 30.7 (2).
3.1.3
3.2
Base material
3.2.1
Hot spots located at the free edge of base material are not affected by a singularity in FE
analysis. The hot spot stress could be read out directly at the hot spot location (peak stress
along free edge) with out any extrapolation. The stress read out point is located at the hot
spot point. In order to ensure that the hot spot stress is actually read out at the element edge
it is required to use dummy beam element that will capture both axial and bending
component at the plate edge (2). The reason is that the stress calculation is generally
performed at the Gaussian integration point and not all FE software has algorithms for
extrapolation of the stresses to the element surface edge.
3.3
Bent hopper knuckle
3.3.1
Comparison study between finite element solid model and shell models shows that use of
the general stress extrapolation procedure described in [3.1.2] will result in unreasonable
conservative results for the bent hopper knuckle. The comparison study indicates that the
use of hot spot stress derived at the so called X-shift position will give results of shell models
more similar to solid model results. The X-shift is defined as the position located tn50/2 away
from the weld toe; X-shift = tn50/2 + X-wt, where X-wt is the weld leg length. The X-shift
position is used to read stresses for hot spots at the flange (inner bottom), at transverse web
and longitudinal girders.
3.3.2
3.3.3
JANUARY 2014
HOT SPOT STRESS FOR WEB-STIFFENED CRUCIFORM JOINTS
4.1
Applicability
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
Calculation of hot spot stress at the flange
4.2.1
The procedure is developed particularly for the plate flange connection of the so-called webstiffened cruciform joints. The procedure is used for web-stiffened cruciform joints to avoid
unreasonable conservative results as shown by Lotsberg et al (9). The FPSO Fatigue capacity
JIP found that fatigue analysis using finite element models with shell elements and
traditional extrapolation procedures showed good agreement with measured test results for
details governed by global force flow through the structural detail. Less good agreement was
found for details governed by local behaviour. The traditional extrapolation procedure is
considered conservative for web-stiffened cruciform joints.
Lotsberg et al (9) developed a procedure for web-stiffened cruciform joints based results from
the FPSO Fatigue Capacity JIP showing that an effective stress can be obtained by reducing
the plate bending stress. The development is based on finite element analysis of stiffened
cruciform joints typically found in ships like, e.g. hopper connections, stringer heels and
joints connecting deck structures to vertical supports. The procedure will derive the hot spot
stress as such connections using shell elements also taking into account the actual weld size
and angle between plate flanges of the cruciform joint.
The main calibration of the procedure (Figure 1) was performed on tested specimens with t1
= t2 = 10mm. The readout position has been made dependent on the plate thickness t1:
x shift =
t1
+ x wt
2
(1)
It has been questioned if the read out point should have been made a function of t2, for
example presented by:
t
x shift = 2 + x wt
(2)
2
It is assessed that it is the stress in plate 1 that is governing for the fatigue capacity at the
weld toe on plate 1 side of Figure 2 at hot spot 1. And it is the stress in the vertical plate 2
that is governing for the fatigue capacity of the weld toe on the transition from the weld to
the plate 2 at hot spot 2. Thus for finite element modeling of the hot spot regions and read
out of hot spot stress it would be the thickness t1 that is governing for the stress at weld toe
to plate 1 and it would be the thickness t2 that is governing for the stress at weld toe to plate
2.
JANUARY 2014
The stress distribution at a 45 deg hopper connection in Figure 2 is shown in Figure 4

without additional weld and in Figure 5 with additional weld. The local bending stress in the
plate 1 is the major contribution to increase in hot spot stress as compared with nominal
membrane. The membrane stresses and the bending stresses are extrapolated back to the
weld toe for illustration (extrapolation from stresses at t1/2 and 3t1/2 to the weld toe is
shown).
The stress distribution at the hot spot 1 is not expected to change significantly even if the
thickness t2 is increased to a large value. However, one would shift the read out point to the
right in the sketch of Figure 1 resulting in a corresponding reduced read out stress from the
shell analysis model. Thus, this would provide a non-conservative hot spot stress. Based on
this the thickness t2 is not considered to be a relevant parameter governing the distance from
the intersection line to the read out point of stress in the shell element analysis.
Figure 1: Illustration of procedure for derivation of hot spot stress using shell
element model
Intersection line
xshift =
t1 +
xwt
2
Shell FEmodel
Figure 2: Plates with hot spot at 90 deg cruciform connection
Hot spot 2
Hot spot 1
JANUARY 2014
Figure 3: Solid element model of tested specimen
Hot spot region
Solid model with t - size weld leg
Figure 4: Stress distribution in plate 1 wihtout additional weld

2.50
Upper surface
Lower surface
Membran stress
Bending stress
Effective stress
Stress (MPa)
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
0.00
0
10
20
30
40
50
Distance from weld toe (mm)
JANUARY 2014
Figure 5: Stress distribution in plate 1 with additional weld leg 10mm

2.00
Upper surface
Lower surface
Membran stress
Bending stress
Effective stress
1.80
1.60
Stress (MPa)
1.40
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
0
10
20
30
40
50
Distance from weld toe (weld toe at 10 mm)
4.2.2
At hot spots with significant plate bending one might derive an effective hot spot stress. The
reduction factor on the bending stress can be explained by redistribution of loads to other
areas during crack growth while the crack tip is growing into a region with reduced stress.
The effect is limited to areas with a localised stress concentration, which occurs for example
at a hopper corner. However, in a case where the stress variation along the weld is small, the
difference in fatigue life between axial loading and pure bending is much smaller. Therefore
it should be noted that it is not correct to generally reduce the bending part of the stress to 60
percent. This has to be restricted to cases with a pronounced stress concentration (where the
stress distribution under fatigue crack development is more similar to a displacement
controlled situation than that of a load controlled development).
Studies show that fatigue test data of web-stiffened cruciform joint specimen is plotting high
in the diagram of one hot spot S-N curve. This is likely due to local plate bending and stress
gradient over plate thickness. This shows a limitation in the concept of hot spot stress in
relation to one hot spot S-N curve. The reason for this is that the stress to be entered into an
S-N curve for fatigue life assessment is that of surface stress without any information about
the stress gradient into the thickness. Thus, details with the same hot spot stress but with
different stress gradient will show the same fatigue lives based on S-N data while the actual
lives might be very different.
This may be illustrated by crack growth analysis using fracture mechanics. Lotsberg and
Sigurdsson (6) has investigated the problem and considering crack growth of a semi-elliptic
crack. An example of a situation with the same hot spot stress, but with different stress
gradients is shown in Figure 6 (6). It is seen from the results plotted in Figure 6 that the
fatigue life is significantly increased in the situation of pure bending stress compared to pure
membrane stress across the thickness. Based on fatigue test data under out of plane loading,
a reduced effective stress was derived by Kang et al (14):
(3)
effective = membrane + 0.592 bending
JANUARY 2014
where the bending stress at the hot spot is reduced by a factor. According to Lotsberg and
Sigurdsson (6), the proposed equation gives results comparable with that of fracture
mechanics.
Figure 6: Crack growth curves for same hot spot stress and different stress gradient (6)
The surface hot spot stress is increased by a plate angle correction factor to account for the
local bending due to presence of an additional weld leg length by the following equation:
(4)
HS = ( x shift )
where,
x
x
= + 1 wt + 2 wt
t1
t1
(5)
where t1 is plate thickness at the considered hot spot region. The actual calculation of the
factor is based on Equation (6) which also includes the effect of reduced crack growth for
bending load effect.
shift = ( membrane ( x shift ) + bending ( x shift ) * 0.60 )*
(6)
The plate angle correction factor for the 90 angle is in the current rule procedure adjusted
compared to the factor originally developed by Lotsberg et al (9). The adjustment is done in
order to calibrate the fatigue results towards experience from CSR (July 2010).
Finite element analysis using shell elements where the welds are not included in the analysis
models do not account for the weld geometry which is considered to be a significant
parameter for details with large stress concentrations. In the work by Lotsberg et al (9), a
number of calibration analyses have been performed using three-dimensional solid elements
that included the weld geometry and shell elements with 4-nodes and 8-nodes. Based on the
results from these analyses a methodology for derivation of hot spot stress at welded
connections using shell finite element models has been developed. The weld size is
accounted for in the analysis procedure even if the weld is not included in the shell finite
element model.
JANUARY 2014
4.2.3
4.3
Calculation of hot spot stress in the web
4.3.1
Comparison study between finite element solid model and shell models shows that use of
the general stress extrapolation procedure described in [3.1.2] will result in unreasonable
conservative results for the bent hopper knuckle. The comparison study indicates that the
use of hot spot stress derived at the so called X-shift position will give results of shell models
more similar to solid model results. The method is based on the procedure given in DNV CN
30.7 (2).
LIMITATIONS OF HOT SPOT STRESS APPROACH
5.1
Scope of application of hot spot stress approach
5.1.1
5.1.2
SCREENING FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
6.1
Screening procedure
6.1.1
Assumptions
The screening procedure assesses fatigue strength by calculating total fatigue damage as
described in Ch 7, Sec 3, [3]. The fatigue damage is based on hot spot stress at weld toe of
specified structural details obtained by multiplying the semi-nominal stresses obtained from
available fine mesh finite element model, Ch 7, Sec 3 by tabulated stress magnification factor
() of the classified detail, Ch 9, Sec 2, [3.1.2]. All correction factors describe in Ch 7, Sec 3
should also be accounted for in the screening assessment. Structural details that do not
comply with the acceptance criteria, Ch 9, Sec 3, [2] should be checked with respect to fatigue
strength assessment using a very fine mesh finite element model as described in Ch 9, Sec 5.
The stress magnification factor is defined as:
txt mesh
50 x 50 mesh
where txt-mesh is the principal stress obtained from tn50tn50 mesh model and 5050-mesh is the
principal stress obtained by average membrane stress components obtained from
50mm50mm mesh model.
6.1.2
Procedure
6.1.3
Screening fatigue criteria
JANUARY 2014
6.2
Stress read out procedure
6.2.1
Bracket toe
6.2.2
Knuckle detail
6.2.3
Read out point stress

References:
1. IACS, Consideration of torsion for fatigue assessment of bulk carrier hatch corners,
draft of HPT06, Sept 2010.
2. DNV, Fatigue assessment of ship structures, Classification Note 30.7, June 2010.
3. W. Fricke, Recommended hot spot analysis procedure for structural details of FPSOs
and ships on round robin FE analysis, 11th ISOPE, Stavanger, March 2002.
components, IIW document XIII-2151-07, June 2007.
5. I. Lotsberg, Fatigue design of plated structures using finite element analysis,
Journal of ship and offshore structures, Vol. 1, pp. 45-54, 2006.
6. I. Lotsberg and G. Sigurdsson, Hot spot S-N curve for fatigue analysis of plated
structures OMAE FPSO04-0014, Houston, 2004.
7. I. Lotsberg, Overview of the FPSO fatigue capacity JIP, OMAE, Rio de Janeiro, 2001.
8. I. Lotsberg, Fatigue design criteria as function of the principal stress direction
relative to the weld toe, OMAE, Portugal, 2008.
9. I. Lotsberg et al, A procedure for fatigue design of web-stiffened cruciform
connections, SAOS, Vol. 3, pp. 113-126, 2008.
10. I. Lotsberg, Fatigue capacity of fillet welded connections subjected to axial and shear
loading, OMAE, Hamburg, June 2006.
11. S. Maddox, Recommended design S-N curve for fatigue assessment of FPSOs, 11th
ISOPE, Stavanger, 2001.
12. Niemi, Fricke and Maddox, Fatigue analysis of welded components designers
guide to the structural hot-spot stress approach, IIW-1430-00.
13. D. Radaj, C. M. Sonsino, W. Fricke, Fatigue assessment of welded joints by local
approaches, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2006.
14. S. W. Kang, W. S. Kim and Y. M. Paik, Fatigue strength of fillet welded steel
structure under out-of-plane bending, International welding conference, Korea, 2002.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 9, SEC 6 DETAIL DESIGN STANDARD
GENERAL
1.1
Purpose
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
Application
1.2.1
STIFFENER-FRAME CONNECTIONS
2.1
Design standard A
2.1.1
Design standard A for stiffener-frame connections, i.e. cut outs for longitudinals in
transverse webs where web stiffeners are omitted or not connected to the longitudinal flange
is adopted from CSR OT (July 2010).
2.1.2
2.2
Equivalent design of stiffener-frame connections
2.2.1
Verification procedure for equivalent alternative design of stiffenerframe connection is
adopted from DNV CN 34.2 (2) also presented in Kaase (1). Modelling of eccentric lug plate by
shell elements is recommended according to DNV-RP-C206 (3).
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
JANUARY 2014
SCALLOPS IN WAY OF BLOCK JOINTS
3.1
Design standard B
3.1.1
Design standard B of scallops in way of block joints is adopted from CSR OT (July 2010).
HOPPER KNUCKLE CONNECTION
4.1
Design standard C to H
4.1.1
Design standards C and D of the welded knuckle between hopper plating and inner bottom
plating for double-hull oil tankers, with and without bracket, respectively, are adopted from
CSR OT (July 2010) except for building tolerances and welding requirements. Building
tolerances are adopted from IACS Recommendations (4) and LR FDA Level 1 (5).
For design standard C where grinding is required recommendations are made for full or
partial penetration welding. Grinding is deemed to be meaningful only if used together with
deep and full penetration welds, see Ch 9, Sec 3, [6]. Recommendations for weld extension
and grinding are adopted from LR FDA Level 1 (5) and based on results of finite element
analysis of stress distributions under fatigue loadcases.
For design standard D, full penetration welding is to be applied at bracket toes to allow for
post weld treatment if necessary.
4.1.2
Design standard E of the welded knuckle between hopper plating and inner bottom plating
for bulk carrier, is adopted from LR FDA Level 1 (5) and Reference (6).
4.1.3
Design standard F of the bent knuckle between hopper plating and inner bottom plating for
double skin oil tanker, except VLCC is adopted from CSR OT (July 2010). Additional
requirements Distance from side girder to centre of knuckle is to be as small as practicable,
but generally not to exceed 70mm is adopted from LR FDA Level 1 (5).
Design standard G of the bent knuckle between hopper plating and inner bottom plating for
double skin oil tanker, VLCC is based on the study in Polezhayeva et.al. (7).
4.1.4
Design standard H of the bent knuckle between hopper plating and inner bottom plating for
bulk carrier, is adopted from LR FDA Level 1 (5) and Reference (6).
4.1.5
Design standard I of the hopper corner connections employing radiused knuckle between
side longitudinal bulkhead and hopper sloping plating is adopted from LR FDA Level 1 (5).
4.1.6
JANUARY 2014
HORIZONTAL STRINGER HEEL
5.1
Design standard I
5.1.1
Detail design improvement given in design standard J is recommended for reducing the
stress level and increasing fatigue strength at the horizontal stringer heel location between
transverse oil-tight and wash bulkhead plating and inner hull longitudinal bulkhead plating.
This recommendation should be considered in association with fine mesh FE analysis as
required in Ch 7, Sec 3.
The recommendation in design standard I is adopted from the CSR OT (July 2010)
recommendation in way of this location. Based on feedback from application to CSR OT (July
2010), some amendments are proposed herewith, mainly the following:
Removal of requirement for grade D thicker insert. Based on the observed stresses, this
reinforcement is not considered necessary when a back bracket is fitted.
Specifying the material grade of the back bracket to be minimum AH, which has an
enhanced life for edge fatigue cracking based on higher material yield strength.
Specifying full penetration weld in way of back bracket ends where high membrane
stresses were observed.
Adding requirement that scallops are to be avoided at bracket toe.
BULKHEAD CONNECTION TO LOWER AND UPPER STOOL
6.1
Design standard J, K and L
6.1.1
Survey on the fatigue damages experienced in bulkhead connection to lower stool was made
and the following remarkable results were found.
Damage occurred entirely in front and behind the corrugated bulkhead in the ballast
hold.
Most of the damage had occurred in the structure where the top plate of lower stool had
a function of shedder plate.
In cases where corrugated bulkheads had gusset plates, the damage accounted for only
5%.
The cause of damage to corrugated bulkheads with gusset plates was due to the
inappropriate shape of gusset plates and poor welding.
6.1.2
Survey on the fatigue damages experienced in bulkhead connection to upper stool was made
and the following remarkable results were found.
Ninety-nine percent of the damage occurred in front and behind the corrugated
bulkhead in the ballast hold.
In cases where corrugated bulkheads had gusset plates, the damage accounted for only
4%.
Damage to corrugated bulkheads with no gusset plates occurred at the connections

between the corners of the corrugated bulkhead and the bottom plate of the upper stool
close to the centre line of the ship.
JANUARY 2014
The cause of damage to corrugated bulkheads with gusset plates was due to scallops in
the stool web or the inappropriate shape of gusset plates or poor welding.
According to the above mentioned remarks and the results of survey of good existing
designs, design standards for these structures are summarised. And the effectiveness of these
designs was verified by the FE analysis.
BULKHEAD CONNECTION TO INNER BOTTOM
7.1
Design standard M
7.1.1
Survey on the fatigue damages experienced in bulkhead connection to inner bottom/hopper
plating without stool was made and the following results were found.
The most damage occurred at the corner of corrugation knuckle. According to the results of
survey of good existing designs which reduce the stress concentration around the corner of
corrugation knuckle, design standards for these structures are summarised. And the
effectiveness of these designs was verified by the FE analysis. The most important thing is to
provide bracket in line with web of corrugation and keep the minimum size as indicated. No
scallop has to be provided.
LOWER AND UPPER TOE OF HOLD FRAME
8.1
Design standard N
8.1.1
Survey on the fatigue damages experienced in end toe of hold frames was made and the
following remarkable results were found.
Damage to hold frames accounted for 6 percent of damage sustained. The most damage
occurred at the face end of the webs of hold frames and not at the connections between the
web end of hold frames and the sloping plate of the hopper tank/top side tank. According to
the results of survey of good existing designs which reduce the stress concentration around
the face plate termination, design standards for these structures are summarised. And the
effectiveness of these designs was verified by the FE analysis.
HATCH CORNER
9.1
Design standard O
9.1.1
The design standard for hatch corners and related formula in Pt 2 are based on IACS internal
investigations. Bulk carriers of sizes from 50,000 dwt to 180,000 dwt have been covered by
investigations using standard Rule assessment as well as spectral fatigue analysis. Design
drivers are torsional load cases i.e. oblique wave loads.
JANUARY 2014
References:
(1) Kaase, G.O., Fatigue strength verification of stiffener-frame connections DNV Class
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
notation PLUS, PRADS 2010.

Det Norske Veritas, DNV Classification Note 34.2, PLUS Extended fatigue analysis of
ship details, Hvik, April 2009.
Det Norske Veritas, DNV-RP-C206, Fatigue Methodology of Offshore Ships, October
2006.
IACS Recommendations, No.47, Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard, 5 October
2010.
Lloyds Register, Fatigue Design Assessment, Level 1 Procedure, Structural Detail
Design Guide, May 2004.
Interpretation of 1.3 of Ch 8, Sec 1, CSR BC Rules, January 2006, drafted by IACS PT1
Rule Maintenance team. (Email Ref: 07C1G0023_PMa, Design detail for members and
locations subjected to fatigue strength assessment, IACS PT1 dated 26 July 2007).
Helena Polezhayeva, Joong-Kyoo Kang, Joo-Ho Heo, Adoption of a radiused hopper
knuckle: Recommendations for design and fabrication, Journal of Offshore and Polar
Engineering, Vol. 18, No. 3, 2008.
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
10
OTHER STRUCTURES
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Fore Part
1 General
2 Structural Arrangement
3 Structure Subjected to Impact Loads
4 Additional Scantling Requirements
SECTION 2
Machinery Space
1 General
2 Machinery Space Arrangement
3 Machinery Foundations
SECTION 3
Aft Part
1 General
2 Aft Peak
3 Stern Frames
4 Special Scantling Requirements for Shell Structure
SECTION 4
Tanks Subject to Sloshing
1 General
2 Scantling Requirements
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 1 FORE PART
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
STRUCTURAL ARRANGEMENT
2.1
2.1.1
Floors and bottom girders

Floors
The requirements contained in this sub-section are derived from the criteria and practice in
portions of existing rule requirements.
2.1.2
Bottom girders
2.1.3
Alternative design verification
This sub-section enables alternative and new double bottom designs and prescribes the
conditions of design verifications by means of FEA.
2.2
Wash bulkheads
2.2.1
2.3
2.3.1
Side shell supporting structure

Web frames
2.3.2
Stringers
2.3.3
2.4
Tripping brackets
2.4.1
The requirements of hold frames in the foremost part of the cargo hold according to IACS
UR, S12 (Rev 5, May 2010) were adopted for the forward part in a transverse framing system.
2.5
Bulbous bow
All requirements in this sub-section are based on long term experience.

JANUARY 2014
2.5.1
General
2.5.2
Diaphragm plates
2.5.3
Special bulbous bow designs
2.5.4
Strengthening for anchor and chain cable contact
If a ship is swinging at anchor during hoisting operation, the chain and the anchor may
scratch over parts of the bulbous bow causing accelerated abrasion.
STRUCTURE SUBJECTED TO IMPACT LOADS
3.1
3.1.1
General
Application
3.1.2
General scantling requirements
3.2
3.2.1
Bottom slamming
Application
3.2.2
Extend for strengthening
The extent of strengthening is based on CSR OT (July 2010). Vertical extent of strengthening
is taken as 500mm based on feedback from ships in operation damage experience.
3.2.3
Design to resist bottom slamming loads
The Rule text is intended to encourage the adoption of built in end constraints in design.
Where arrangements do not achieve equivalent built in end fixity, then correction to the
scantling requirements is required.
Attention is drawn to the need to ensure that the supporting structures provide an adequate
load path to ensure the satisfactory transmission of load. Reference to good design practise is
included.
3.2.4
Shell plating
The plate bending capacity model for slamming loads was developed to be consistent with
the plate bending capacity model adopted elsewhere in Ch 6 of the Rules.
The coefficient Cd implies a slightly increased acceptance level of permanent set in plate
panels subject to impact loads at the bow, reflecting the uncertainty of the frequency of the
slamming loads. The choice of coefficients Cd and Ca assume that the only load acting on the
plate panel is the slamming impact pressure; hence hull girder and other membrane stresses
are neglected in the formulation. Ca is maintained to be consistent with the standard plate
thickness equation used elsewhere.
JANUARY 2014
The value of Cd was finalised based on comparison with the existing plate bending capacity
models used by in the existing slamming requirements introduced in CSR OT (July 2010).
3.2.5
Shell stiffeners
The stiffener bending capacity model was developed from an existing concept used by CSROT (July 2010). The three hinge plastic collapse model was adopted considering the normal
failure modes seen in damage case history related to bottom slamming.
The capacity model features an explicit assumption of end fixity and utilisation factor of
yield stress consistent with the design philosophy.
3.2.6
Bottom slamming load area for primary supporting members
Since impact phenomena is localised, non-stationary and time dependent, the magnitude of
loads acting on a structure depend on the size of the structure being considered, in relation
to its response to the applied load.
The extent of primary supporting members is assumed large in comparison to individual
plating and stiffener components. Hence, the average load on the primary member during a
slam event will be lower than the pressure value assumed to act on the plating or stiffener.
3.2.7
For double skin structures, the ultimate bending capacity of double bottom girders and
floors has been shown by experience to be satisfactory, provided the scantlings of these items
are derived by normal strength criteria. Hence, only an explicit control for shear area of
primary supporting members, together with appropriate buckling control is included.
The Rules include a simplified method of predicting the worst case load distribution. This
simplification is based on the assumption of a patch load, acting on a specific area of the
primary supporting member and carried by on end only. In case of short primary supporting
members (i.e. floors) the patch load is distributed to both ends. For such short primary
supporting members the maximum extend of slamming load lSL is limited to 0.5lshr.
The worst case load distribution can also be derived by direct calculations. Slenderness ratio
for web plate of primary supporting members based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 5,
Table 5.1.1 and adjusted for the net thickness model.
3.3
3.3.1
Bow impact
Application
The area of strengthening is defined based on long term experience.
3.3.2
Design to resist bow impact loads
The Rule text is intended to encourage the adoption of built in end constraints in design.
Longitudinal/horizontal framing is particularly encouraged to be used because of the
superior load response capacity of curved stiffened panels. Further, it is noted that
longitudinal framing generally promotes superior structural details.
Where arrangements do not achieve equivalent built in end fixity, then correction to the
scantling requirements is required.
JANUARY 2014
Attention is drawn to the need to ensure that the supporting structures provide an adequate
load path to ensure the satisfactory transmission of load. Reference to good design practise is
included.
The stiffening direction of decks and bulkheads supporting shell frames is requested to be
parallel to the direction of the compressive plate stress for improved buckling capacity.
3.3.3
Side shell plating
The plate bending capacity model for impact load is consistent with that adopted for
slamming requirements.
In case of bow impact, the coefficient Cd is taken as one and hence not shown in the formula,
reflecting the reduced tolerance of permanent set in plate panels subject to impact loads at
the bow. The choice of coefficients Cd and Ca assume that the only load acting on the plate
panel is the bow impact pressure, hence hull girder and other membrane stresses is
neglected in the formulation. Ca is maintained to be consistent with the standard plate
thickness equation used elsewhere.
The value of Cd was finalised based on:
Comparison with the existing plate bending capacity models used by in the existing
slamming requirements introduced in CSR for oil tankers.
Verification is based on non-linear analysis.
3.3.4
Side shell stiffeners
The stiffener bending capacity model is consistent with that used in slamming. A three hinge
plastic collapse model was adopted considering the normal failure modes seen in damage
case history related to bottom slamming.
The capacity model features an explicit assumption of end fixity and utilisation factor of
yield stress consistent with the design philosophy.
For breast hooks/diaphragm plates a minimum thickness requirement and slenderness ratio
requirement are included based on LR rules and adjusted for the net thickness model, thus
addressing the most common failure mode for these structural items.
3.3.5
Bow impact load area for primary supporting members
Idealised impact load area concept is aligned with that adopted for slamming scantling
criteria for simplicity.
3.3.6
These requirements are taken from CSR OT (July 2010).
Minimum spacing for primary supporting members included in order to limit

deflection of primary supporting members:
Paragraph is intended to encourage good design details which ensure the structure is
adequate for the Rule load.
The primary support member bending capacity model is in the form of applied bending
moment over permissible stress. The factors fbdg-pt and fBI give the maximum bending
resulting from the application of an idealised uniformly distributed impact load anywhere
within the span length of a fixed ended beam.
JANUARY 2014
The primary support member shear capacity model is in the form of applied shear force
divided by permissible stress. The factor fPL gives the maximum shear force at the end of the
shear span, resulting from the application of an idealised uniformly distributed impact load
within the span length of a fixed ended beam.
The minimum web thickness formulation is to ensure that the critical buckling stress of web
plating or deck/bulkhead plating in way or adjacent to the side shell is higher than the axial
stress resulting from application of the idealised impact load.
ADDITIONAL SCANTLING REQUIREMENTS
4.1
Plate stem
4.1.1
The formula is based on experience and considers the impact of floating parts, like containers,
trees or other drifting items and is taken from GL Rules. The minimum scantling
requirement considers the material of the shell plating and the distance between horizontal
supporting structures. The gradually reduction is based on the probability of impact in
rough environmental conditions.
The formula is modified to fit with the net scantling approach.
4.1.2
Breasthooks and diaphragm plating
The requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010).
4.2
Thruster tunnel
4.2.1
This requirement is based on experience and modified for net scantling approach.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 2 MACHINERY SPACE
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
MACHINERY SPACE ARRANGEMENT
2.1
2.1.1
The requirements of [2.1.1] to [2.1.3] are taken from CSR OT (July 2010). In view of the effect
upon the structure of the necessary openings in the machinery space, the difficulty of
securing adequate support for the decks, of maintaining the stiffness of sides and bottom and
of distributing the weight of the machinery, special attention is directed to the need for
arranging for the provision of plated through beams and such casing and pillar supports as
are required to secure structural efficiency.
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010).
2.1.5
The requirements of [2.1.5] to [2.1.7] are taken from CSR BC (July 2010).
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010). Attention is drawn the importance for
submittal of machinery foundation drawings to assure that the foundations for main
propulsion units, reduction gears, shaft and thrust bearings, and the structure supporting
those foundations are adequate to maintain required alignment and rigidity under all
anticipated conditions of loading.
2.2
Double bottom
2.2.1
Double bottom height
CSR OT and BC (July 2010) both require double bottom to be fitted in machinery space. For
bulk carriers double bottom is also required by SOLAS (as amended).
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 2 MACHINERY SPACE
2.2.2
Centreline girder
portions of existing rule requirements, included in CSR OT and BC (July 2010).
2.2.3
Side bottom girders
2.2.4
Girders in way of machinery seatings
2.2.5
Floors in longitudinally stiffened double bottom
2.2.6
Floors in transversely framed double bottom
2.2.7
Manholes and wells
2.2.8
2.2.9
Heavy equipment
MACHINERY FOUNDATIONS
3.1
General
3.1.1
The requirements [3.1.1] to [3.1.3] are taken from CSR OT (July 2010)/LR Rules.
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
Foundations for internal combustion engines and thrust bearings
3.2.1
3.2.2
This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010).
3.3
Auxiliary foundations
3.3.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 3 AFT PART
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
AFT PEAK
2.1
2.1.1
Floors
The requirements are similar in CSR OT and BC (July 2010).
2.1.2
Platforms and side girders
These requirements are taken from CSR BC (July 2010).
2.1.3
Longitudinal bulkheads
2.1.4
The requirements in [2.1.1] to [2.1.3] are based on shipbuilding experience and provide a
good structural arrangement. It is however not the intention to prevent design developments
beyond what given in [2.1.1] to [2.1.3], though in such case more extensive design
verification will be required.
2.2
Stiffening of floors and girders in aft peak
2.2.1
The requirements are taken from CSR OT (July 2010). The requirements have been
introduced as a result of ships experiencing fatigue cracks in AP tanks due to propeller
induced vibration. Typical 80100 rpm for the propeller with 4-6 blades will result in a blade
frequency in the range of 5.310 Hz.
To avoid vibration it is generally recommended to keep the natural frequency 15% above the
2nd harmonic excitation (equals two times the blade frequency). Based on this, a vibration
analysis has been carried out for typical stiffeners (length and scantlings) on floors and
girders, assuming various end constraints (hinged to clamped). From this analysis, the
criteria as given were obtained.
Compared to CSR OT (July 2010) application is further refined to those areas prone to
propeller induced vibration. Vibration is not found critical in empty spaces.
2.2.2
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 3 AFT PART
STERN FRAMES
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
Propeller posts
3.2.1
Gross scantlings of propeller posts
The requirements in [3.2.1] to [3.2.4] are taken from CSR BC (July 2010). However L is
restricted to 250m to adjust to requirement to established stern frame designs for large
tankers.
3.2.2
Section modulus below the propeller shaft bossing
3.2.3
Propeller shaft bossing
3.3
Connections
3.3.1
Connections with hull structure
The requirements in [3.3.1] to [3.3.4] are based on CSR BC (July 2010).
3.3.2
Connection with keel plate
3.3.3
Connection with transom floors
3.3.4
Connection with centre keelson
SPECIAL SCANTLING REQUIREMENTS FOR SHELL STRUCTURE
4.1
4.1.1
Shell plating
Shell plating connected with stern frame
The requirements in [4.1.1] to [4.1.3] are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
4.1.2
Heavy shell plates
4.1.3
Thruster tunnel plating
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 10, SEC 4 TANKS SUBJECT TO SLOSHING
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
The objective of the sloshing requirements given in the Rules is to ensure that tanks carrying
liquid have adequate strength to withstand the pressures arising due to liquid movement in
partially filled tanks.
1.2
1.2.1
Filling heights of cargo and ballast tanks
In accordance with the principles and design basis of the Rules, all tanks are to be designed
for unrestricted filling. The design basis for cargo tanks is unrestricted filling with cargo
density of 1.025 t/m3. In case of higher density than 1.025 t/m3, filling restriction may be
given.
1.2.2
Cargo holds of bulk carriers intended for the carriage of ballast water
1.2.3
Structural details
1.3
1.3.1
Application of sloshing pressure

General
The calculated sloshing pressures, Pslh-lng and Pslh-t are only governing for large open tanks.
For smaller tanks and tanks with a lot of internal structure, e.g. double skin tanks, the
minimum sloshing pressure, Pslh-min will be governing. Hence, only large open tanks are
required assessed based on the calculated pressures.
1.3.2
Minimum sloshing pressure
The cut-off values of 0.03L and 0.32B for calculation of sloshing pressures, Pslh-lng and Pslh-t
respectively are derived from the formulae for the two sloshing pressures. For effective
lengths and breadths below these limit values, the sloshing formulae give pressures that are
less than the minimum sloshing pressure and hence will not be governing.
1.3.3
Structural members to be assessed
The structural elements to be assessed for the event of sloshing are given in Rules. Sloshing is
assumed to be a local load effect and hence only local support members, e.g. plates, stiffeners
on tight boundaries and web plating and web-stiffeners/tripping brackets on primary
supporting members are required assessed based on sloshing.
Sloshing pressures are most significant around the actual filling height and will not act on
the entire bulkhead simultaneously. Consequently, the shear and bending strength of
primary supporting members are not required to be assessed based on sloshing loads.
1.3.4
Application of design sloshing pressure due to longitudinal liquid motion
The sloshing pressure due to longitudinal liquid motion, Pslh-lng does not only act on the
transverse bulkheads but also the panels attached to the bulkhead, e.g. deck, longitudinal
bulkheads and stringers. The reason is that pressure in liquid acts in all directions and hence
JANUARY 2014
the pressure will act on the neighbouring surfaces as the moving liquid hits the transverse
bulkhead. The extension of this effect is limited to the smallest of 0.25lslh from the bulkhead
and first transverse web frame.
Webs and stiffeners of internal transverse web frames close to (within 0.25lslh) the transverse
bulkhead are required assessed for sloshing due to longitudinal liquid motion. This
assessment is required in order to ensure that the web frame can withstand the pressures
arising as the liquid is reflected off the transverse bulkhead.
1.3.5
Application of design sloshing pressure due to transverse liquid motion
The sloshing pressure due to transverse liquid motion, Pslh-t does not only act on the
longitudinal bulkheads but also the panels attached to the bulkhead, e.g. deck, transverse
bulkheads and girders/web frames/stringers. The reason is that pressure in liquid acts in all
directions and hence the pressure will act on the neighbouring surfaces as the moving liquid
hits the transverse bulkhead. The extension of this effect is limited to the smallest of 0.25bslh
from the bulkhead and first longitudinal web frame/girder.
Webs and stiffeners of internal longitudinal web frames close to (within 0.25bslh) longitudinal
bulkhead are required assessed for sloshing due to transverse liquid motion.
1.3.6
Combination of transverse and longitudinal fluid motion
The sloshing pressures due to longitudinal and transverse liquid motion are assumed to be
independent in the sense that one is zero when the other is maximum, and vice versa.
Structural elements in areas subject to both longitudinal and transverse sloshing pressure are
to be evaluated based on the maximum of the two and not the added pressure.
1.3.7
Additional sloshing impact assessment
For tanks with effective breadth and length less than 0.56B and 0.13L respectively, the high
velocity impact pressure is not assumed to be governing and specific impact calculations are
not required. For longer tanks such pressures might be governing for the scantlings,
assessment is required in accordance with the rules of the society to which the actual vessel
is under classification.
SCANTLING REQUIREMENTS
2.1
2.1.1
Plating
Net thickness
The sloshing pressures given in the rules are associated with a normal or typical load
level, e.g. daily maximum. The evaluation of the structure against sloshing loads is covered
by AC-S as shown in Table 1 of the Rules.
The sloshing loads, which are taken from the CSR OT (July 2010), are at a probability level of
10-4 and not 10-8 to which the dynamic loads related to AC-SD acceptance is applied. The
sloshing loads in the Rules are hence given as the daily maximum and are therefore
characterised as being frequent loads. Consequently the acceptance criteria related to
frequent acting loads, AC-S, is more appropriate than AC-SD.
The allowable stress for sloshing assessment in the existing CSR OT (July 2010) is in the order
of 0.67yield and hence similar to that of the Rules. Structural assessment due to sloshing is
done based on combining the stresses due to sloshing pressures and the stresses due to static
hull girder loads.
JANUARY 2014
Internal static and inertia pressures are not added as the sloshing pressure is only significant
just above and below the free surface level where the mentioned other internal pressures are
small. Sloshing is also an effect of the liquid moving towards a barrier while the static and
inertia loads assume that the liquid remains in contact with the boundary.
Hull girder dynamic stresses (hull girder wave bending) are not added as they are assumed
to be small when the sloshing pressure reaches its maximum. The background is that
maximum sloshing occurs in an irregular sea state where the dynamic hull girder stresses are
small. The maximum dynamic hull girder stress will arise in a sea state with regular long
crested waves.
The sloshing assessment in the Rules is based on elastic design and capacity models. The use
of plastic design criteria for assessment of sloshing is typically related to the high velocity
sloshing impact that may occur in large tanks. For oil tankers of standard design with tanks
with limited sloshing length and breadth, this phenomenon is not governing and the tanks
are typically assessed for quasi static loads representing liquid movement in the tanks. The
same is done in the Rules where the mandatory sloshing assessment is a quasi static
approach based on elastic design criteria and a reference is given to each individual
classification societies rules for assessment of high velocity impact loads for large tanks. The
latter is typically related to a localised load and acceptance criteria based on plastic capacity.
2.2
Stiffeners
2.2.1
Net section modulus
A sloshing related shear requirement for the stiffeners is not included in the Rules as this is
not governing for the scantling of the stiffeners. Refer to TB [2.1.1] for other information.
2.3
2.3.1
Web plating
It should be noted that only the local elements of the primary supporting members are
assessed for the event of sloshing as sloshing is a local phenomenon. In other words, web
plating between stiffeners is assessed, web stiffeners are assessed and tripping brackets
supporting the web is assessed while the primary supporting member as a single component
is not assessed for bending and shear assuming sloshing pressures on parts or all of the load
area (span load breadth). Refer to TB [2.1.1] for other information.
2.3.2
Stiffeners on web plating
2.3.3
Tripping brackets supporting primary supporting members
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
11
SUPERSTRUCTURE, DECKHOUSES
AND HULL OUTFITTING
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Superstructures, Deckhouses and Companionways
1 General
2 Structural Arrangement
3 Scantlings
SECTION 2
Bulwark and Guard Rails
1 General Requirements
2 Bulwarks
3 Guard Rails
SECTION 3
Equipment
1 General
2 Equipment Number Calculation
3 Anchoring Equipment
SECTION 4
Supporting Structure for Deck Equipment and Fittings
1 General
2 Anchoring Windlass and Chain Stopper
3 Mooring Winches
4 Cranes, Derricks, Lifting Masts and Life Saving Appliances
5 Bollards and Bitts, Fairleads, Stand Rollers, Chocks and Capstans
6 Miscellaneous Deck Fittings
SECTION 5
Small Hatchways
1 General
2 Small Hatchways Fitted on the Exposed Fore Deck
PT 1, CH 11, SEC 1 SUPERSTRUCTURES, DECKHOUSES & COMPANIONWAYS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
Superstructures located in the middle part of the ship and having a length of more than 0.15L,
which are affected by hull girder loads are not considered within this rules, because such
designs are unusual today and have to be individually considered by the Society.
1.1.3
1.2
Gross scantlings
1.2.1
STRUCTURAL ARRANGEMENT
2.1
2.1.1
Structural continuity
Bulkheads and sides of deckhouses
This requirement is based on CSR OT (July 2010).
2.1.2
Deckhouse corners
2.2
2.2.1
End connections
Deck stiffeners
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010).
2.2.2
Longitudinal and transverse deck girders
2.2.3
End connections of superstructure frames
2.3
Local reinforcement on bulkheads
2.3.1
JANUARY 2014
SCANTLINGS
3.1
3.1.1
Superstructures sides and decks

Exposed sides and exposed deck plating
The side shell structure between main deck and superstructure/forecastle deck is to be
processed in the same way as the side shell located below the main deck. Requirements
regarding sheer strake and deck stringer are not applicable.
3.1.2
Deck plating of unexposed decks
3.2
3.2.1
Deckhouses
Plating
The scantling requirement is based on CSR OT (July 2010).

If a wooden sheathing is laid directly on a tightening and preserving compound on the deck,
forming an effective additional corrosion protection, the required gross plating may be
reduced by 1.5mm up to a minimum thickness of 5mm.
3.2.2
Deck plating of unexposed decks
The scantling requirement is based on CSR OT (July 2010).
3.2.3
Beams and stiffeners
3.2.4
Girders and transverses
3.2.5
Alternative grillage analysis for girders and transverses
Paragraph is included to permit alternative means of analysis strength analyses, i.e. grillage
analysis, to a defined alternative means and is based on CSR OT (July 2010). The allowable
stress levels are based CSR BC (July 2010) and forms the basis for this paragraph.
3.3
3.3.1
Deckhouse walls and end bulkheads of superstructure

Application
The requirements in this section apply to end bulkhead of superstructure and deckhouse
walls forming the only protection for openings, as required by ICLL (as amended) and for
accommodations.
3.3.2
Plate thickness
This requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010) and ICLL (as amended).
3.3.3
Stiffeners
JANUARY 2014
3.4
Companionways
3.4.1
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 11, SEC 2 BULWARK AND GUARD RAILS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
Application
1.1.1
The requirements are based on ICLL (as amended), Reg 25 and 26. The requirement that
guard rails are to be provided at the boundary of first tier deckhouses and ends of
superstructures comes from IACS UI, LL14 (Rev 1, July 2008). On first tier deck house,
bulwark option in LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8, [5.1.1] is considered as being replaced
by IACS UI, LL14 (Rev 1, July 2008).
1.2
Minimum height
1.2.1
Bulwarks or guard rails are to be at least 1.0m in height measured above sheathing, and are
to be constructed as required. The phrase above sheathing is taken from CSR OT (July 2010)
and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8, [5.1.1] as it reflects the ICLL (as amended) intent
(crew protection) more precisely.
BULWARKS
2.1
General
2.1.1
It is realised that these are general requirements for bulwarks amidships and at the aft end of
the ship. Fore end bulwarks are generally designed to be in excess of the rule requirements.
2.1.2
The phrase is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), and similar requirements are found in the
societies rules.
2.1.3
Underdeck supports and reinforcement of bulwarks in way of openings and fittings - The
requirements are taken from CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8,
[5.2].
2.1.4
The requirements come from CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013), Ch 10, Sec 2,
[2.2.2].
2.1.5
[2.2.5].
2.1.6
[2.2.6].
JANUARY 2014
2.1.7
The requirements are taken from CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8,
[5.2.1].
2.2
Construction of bulwarks
2.2.1
Plating
The requirement for minimum thickness comes from CSR OT (July 2010) and DNV Rules
(January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 10, D301 except the ABS minimum of 6.5mm thickness has
been used in lieu of 6.0mm found in the DNV Rules.
2.2.2
Stays
Section modulus at deck - The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010). The
requirements are taken from LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8, [5.2.3] with minor revision,
but no change to the requirements.
2.2.3
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8,
[5.2.1].
2.2.4
[2.2.3].
GUARD RAILS
3.1
General
3.1.1
This regulation is according to CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8,
[5.3.20] and based on Reg 26(7) of the ICLL (as amended).
3.1.2
This regulation is according to CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 8,
[5.3.19] and based on Reg 26(6) of the ICLL (as amended).
3.2
Construction of guard rails
3.2.1
These requirements are in accordance with ICLL (as amended), Reg 25(3) and IACS UI, LL47
(Rev 3, July 2008).
3.2.2
Size of openings - The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010). It is in line with the
intent of ICLL Reg 25(3) (as amended for crew protection) which is believed to specify the
clearance rather than centre to centre distance. The indicated title is chosen to amplify this
intent, as is clear from the reference to opening below the lowest course in the convention.
3.2.3
This regulation is according to CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013), Ch 10, Sec 2,
[3.1.5].
JANUARY 2014
3.2.4
This regulation is according to CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013), Ch 10, Sec 2,
[3.1.6].
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 11, SEC 3 EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
The text is in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.1.1.
1.1.2
The text is in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.1.2 and A1.1.3.
1.1.3
The text is in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.1.4 and A1.1.5.
EQUIPMENT NUMBER CALCULATION
2.1
Requirements
2.1.1
The text is in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.2.
2.1.2
This regulation is according to CSR BC (July 2010) and RINA Rules (January 2013), Pt B,
Ch 10, Sec 4, [2.1.1].
ANCHORING EQUIPMENT
3.1
3.1.1
General
General
Two anchors ready for use with the third anchor being a spare - the text is in accordance
with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.2.
3.1.2
Design
[7.2] and IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.3.1.
3.1.3
Testing
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010) and similar requirements are found in the
societies rules.
3.2
3.2.1
Ordinary anchors
Anchor mass
Anchor mass is in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.1 and Table 1.
JANUARY 2014
3.3
3.3.1
High and Super High Holding power anchors

General
The requirements are in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.1.2. SHHP
anchors in IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.1.3 are not included due to their limitation of
usage up to 1500kg.
3.3.2
HHP or SHHP anchor mass
The requirements are in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.1.
3.3.3
Application
The requirements are in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.1.2.
3.3.4
Testing
The requirements are in accordance with IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.4.3.
3.4
3.4.1
Chain cables
General
The requirements come from CSR BC (July 2010), RINA Rules (January 2013), Pt B, Ch 10,
Sec 4, [3.3] and based on IACS UR (Rev 5, June 2005), A1.5.
3.4.2
Application
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010), ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 5,
Sec 1.1, LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 13, [7.4.5] and Table 1 is based on IACS UR (Rev 5,
June 2005), A1.2.
3.5
3.5.1
Chain lockers
General
The requirements are based on CSR OT (July 2010), DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3,
Sec 3, B104, and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 13, [7.8.4] and [7.8.5]. The use of the term
adequate with respect to the size of the chain locker is noted as ambiguous, but is
consistent with rule text. It may be retained for the present time.
3.5.2
Application
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010). 15~30% of the breaking strength, which is
identical to IACS Rec 10 (Rev 2, June 2005), 1.2.2(a) is used.
3.6
3.6.1
Chain stoppers
General
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010), ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 5,
Sec 1.1 and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 13, [7.8.2].
3.6.2
Application
[7.8.2].
JANUARY 2014
3.7
3.7.1
Windlass
General
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010), LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 13, Sec 7,
[7.6], ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 5, Sec 1, DNV Rules, Pt 3, Ch 3 , Sec 3F and IACS UR
(Rev 5, May 2010), S27.
3.7.2
Application
societies Rules.
3.7.3
Anchor windlass trial
societies Rules.
3.8
3.8.1
Hawse pipes
General
The requirements come from CSR OT and BC (July 2010). Similar requirements are found in
the societies Rules.
3.8.2
Application
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010). Similar requirements are found in the
societies Rules.
3.8.3
Stowage and deployment arrangements for anchors
societies Rules.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 11, SEC 4 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE DECK EQUIPMENT & FITTINGS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
This section covers the most common and important items of deck equipment, commonly
fitted on vessel designs.
1.1.2
Scantling criteria are developed for use with capacity assessment based on simplified
engineering analysis.
1.2
Documents to be submitted
1.2.1
ANCHORING WINDLASS AND CHAIN STOPPER
2.1
General
2.1.1
The requirements in the sub-section are based on existing practice and IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5,
May 2010).
2.1.2
May 2010).
2.1.3
Design loads due to anchoring operation - in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010). Similar
requirements are found in the societies Rules.
2.1.4
May 2010).
2.1.5
Design loads due to anchoring operation - in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010). Similar
requirements are found in the societies Rules.
2.1.6
Design loads due to green seas in the forward 0.25L - taken from IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May
2010).
2.1.7
Calculation for the resultant force in the bolts due to green sea design loads is taken from
IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010). Scope of bolt scantlings limited to green seas in accordance
with scope of IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010).
JANUARY 2014
2.1.8
Forces in supporting structure are based on existing practice of Societies Rules.
2.1.9
Refer to IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010).
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
Allowable stresses for anchoring design load - Allowable stresses for anchoring design loads
consistent with extreme load and allowable stresses for supporting structures in MSC
Circ 1175 (as amended).
2.1.13
Allowable stresses for green sea design loads - Allowable stresses for bolts taken from IACS
UR, S27, 5.2 (Rev 5, May 2010). According to IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010), the safety
factor against bolt proof strength is not to be less than 2.0. While 50% of bolt proof strength
is proposed in the text, 50% of yield strength of bolt material for axial forces.
2.1.14
2.1.15
MOORING WINCHES
3.1
General
3.1.1
The requirements in the sub-section are based on existing practice of societies and based on
IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010) appropriately modified to cater for the particular loads
associated with mooring winches.
3.1.2
Foundation
3.1.3
Rated pull
3.1.4
Holding load
3.1.5
Supporting structure
The requirements are based on IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010) but have been extended to
include a common standard of classification societies for support structures of windlasses are
introduced.
JANUARY 2014
3.1.6
Corrosion model
3.1.7
Design loads due to mooring operation - design load is based on the maximum load for
which the mooring winch rated. Design load with winch brake effective consistent with
requirements for anchor windlass on the assumption that winch brake is designed to be
stronger than the braking strength of the rope.
This requirement reflects 100% of the break holding load, noting that OCIMF guidance
recommends that the brake should be set at 60-80% of the lines breaking strength. The load
of 125% of the breaking strength of the mooring line comes from MSC Circ 1175 (as
amended).
3.1.8
The requirements of IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010) for holding down bolts of windlasses
are applied to mooring winches within the forward 0.25L. It is considered that the
environmental loads proposed within IACS UR, S27 (Rev 5, May 2010) are only applicable to
the fore ship.
3.1.9
CRANES, DERRICKS, LIFTING MASTS AND LIFT SAVING APPLIANCES
4.1
General
4.1.1
Rules in this sub-section are only for the hull structures and not for lifting appliances.
Criteria for application of the strength criteria are taken from CSR OT (July 2010) and DNV
Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3, Sec 5, A100.
4.1.2
The requirements have been developed based on the size and configuration of deck
equipment/fittings typically found on tankers and bulk carriers. For this reason, the
requirements are not suitable for application on other types of ships.
4.1.3
societies Rules. Those requirements limited to the deck attachment of the appliance to the
deck and support structure since treatment of the crane post/pedestal is different between
each of societies.
4.1.4
SWL definition
The definition of SWL is taken from the existing practice of societies.
4.1.5
Self weight
Definition of self weight is defined by CSR OT (July 2010) and is considered consistent with
present practice of societies.
JANUARY 2014
4.1.6
Overturning moment
Definition of overturning moment is taken from the present practice of societies.
4.1.7
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010). Similar definitions are found in the
societies Rules.
4.1.8
4.1.9
Derrick masts and derrick posts - the criteria stated are generally common to modern tanker
lifting appliances presently being used or approved.
Welding of non-continuous crane pedestals and heavily loaded under deck structure in way
or crane pedestals are required to have full penetration welding as required in [4.1.15]. The
requirement come from CSR OT (July 2010), and is required to facilitate NDE of these welds.
4.1.10
societies Rules.
4.1.11
societies Rules.
4.1.12
4.1.13
The requirements come from CSR OT (July 2010) and DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3,
Sec 5, A500.
4.1.14
Sec 5, A500 and are based on International Life-Saving Appliances (LSA) Code Chapter VI
paragraph 6.1.1.5.
4.1.15
Sec 5, A600 and are based on International Life-Saving Appliances (LSA) Code Chapter VI
paragraph 6.1.1.6:
Structural members and all blocks, falls, padeyes, links, fastenings and all other fittings
used in connection with launching equipment shall be designed with a factor of safety on the
basis of the maximum working load assigned and the ultimate strengths of the materials
used for construction. A minimum factor of safety of 4.5 shall be applied to all structural
members, and a minimum factor of safety of 6 shall be applied to falls, suspension chains,
links and blocks.
The safety factor for design load 2.2xSWL together with the maximum permissible normal
stress 0.67ReH and shear stress 0.39 ReH ensure safety factor above 4.5 considering typical
ratios between yield stress and tensile stress.
JANUARY 2014
BOLLARDS AND BITTS, FAIRLEADS, STAND ROLLERS, CHOCKS AND

CAPSTANS
5.1
General
5.1.1
This sub-section covers implements into Rules the requirements related to support structure
in way of deck fittings covered by MSC Circ 1175 (as amended).
5.1.2
General statements have been taken from basic strength and structural continuity
requirements presently contained in CSR OT (July 2010).
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
Design loads are safe working loads as specified in MSC Circ 1175 (as amended).
5.1.7
5.1.8
The load acting point is consistent with MSC Circ 1175 (as amended).
5.1.9
Allowable stresses in supporting structure is based MSC Circ 1175 (as amended).
5.1.10
5.1.11
MISCELLANEOUS DECK FITTINGS
6.1
Support and attachment
6.1.1
JANUARY 2014
6.1.2
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 11, SEC 5 SMALL HATCHWAYS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
Hatches on CSR ships are cargo hatches on bulk carriers or can be categorised as small
hatches. Pt 1, Ch 11 only shown detailed requirements for small hatches and refers to Pt 2,
Ch 1, Sec 5 if other type of hatches need to be considered.
1.2
Materials
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
Height of hatch coamings
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
Small hatchways
1.4.1
Definition of small hatches is taken from IACS UR, S26 (Rev 4, May 2010).
1.4.2
These requirements are taken from CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013).
1.4.3
These requirements are taken from CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013).
1.4.4
The requirement is taken from CSR BC (July 2010) and is based on minimum net thickness
requirement in ICLL, as amended (MSC Res 143(77), Reg 16). The net thickness, in mm, of
the plating forming the top of the hatch cover is not to be less than the greater of the
following values:
t = 10s
t=6
Converting this to a gross scantling requirement as used in Ch 11 and with 2.0mm minimum
corrosion margin, thickness becomes 8.0mm for spacing equal to or below 600mm.
1.4.5
The requirements are taken from CSR BC (July 2010) and BV Rules (January 2013).
JANUARY 2014
1.5
Cargo tank access hatchways
1.5.1
The requirements in [1.5.1] to [1.5.4] are taken from CSR OT (July 2010) and LR Rules
(January 2013). The text about large covers and those configured with our well rounded
shape is based on present practice and was added as a result of comments received from
industry.
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.6
Gaskets
1.6.1
1.6.2
SMALL HATCHWAYS FITTED ON THE EXPOSED FORE DECK
2.1
General
2.1.1
The requirements in [2] are technically the same requirements taken from IACS UR, S26 (Rev
4, May 2010), CSR BC and OT (July 2010).
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
Strength
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
JANUARY 2014
2.2.4
2.3
Primary securing devices
2.3.1
2.4
Requirement to primary securing
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.5
Secondary securing devices
2.5.1
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
12
CONSTRUCTION
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Construction and Fabrication
1 General
2 Cut-Outs, Plate Edges
3 Cold Forming
4 Hot Forming
5 Assembly and Alignment
SECTION 2
Fabrication by Welding
1 General
2 Welding Procedures, Welding Consumables and Welders
3 Weld Joints
4 Non-Destructive Examination (NDE)
SECTION 3
Design of Weld Joints
1 General
2 Tee or Cross Joint
3 Butt Joint
4 Other Types of Joints
5 Connection Details
PT 1, CH 12, SEC 1 CONSTRUCTION AND FABRICATION
GENERAL
1.1
Workmanship
1.1.1
The text was developed based on CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.1.1 (based on ABS Rules
(January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 2, 9) and the statement on defect repairs is in accordance with
CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.1.1 (as amended and based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3,
Ch 1, 8.2.1).
1.2
Fabrication standard
1.2.1
IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010), Shipbuilding and repair quality standard is included as
the basic requirement for an acceptable fabrication standard. However, it is also realised that
other recognised fabrication standards exist that have a proven record of satisfactory
performance. The rules permit continued acceptance of these recognised fabrication
standards.
1.2.2
1.2.3
The scope of items to be included in the fabrication standard was taken from the contents of
IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010).
CUTS-OUTS, PLATE EDGES
2.1
General
2.1.1
This requirement is typical precautions related to forming cut-outs and edge preparation.
2.1.2
The fatigue strength for hatch corner is checked in accordance with Ch 9, Sec 7. The stress
concentration factor depends on the edge treatment as well as hatch corner configuration.
Since the stress concentration factor of hatch corners without machine cut is too large to
comply with the fatigue requirement, hatch corner without machine cut should be accepted.
Furthermore, this practice is in accordance with the practice of shipyards.
COLD FORMING
3.1
Special structural members
3.1.1
Cold forming of special structural members is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec
6/4.2.1 (based on ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 2, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.13 with slight modification to
accommodate LR and DNV practice). A minimum radius of 10 times the thickness, which
corresponds to a cold deformation of approximately 5% is used in the Rules and is based on
DNV acceptance of this for offshore structures.
JANUARY 2014
Additional requirements related to acceptance of lesser radiuses are contained in CSR OT

(July 2010), Sec 6/4.2.3 (which is generally in accordance with DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt
3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C1102). Criteria for stainless steels are not applicable here and are left to the
individual society.
3.2
Corrugated bulkheads and hopper knuckles
3.2.1
Cold forming for corrugated bulkheads and hopper knuckles is in accordance with CSR OT
Sec 6/4.2.2 (based on DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C1100). Additional
requirements related to acceptance of lesser radiuses are contained in CSR OT (July 2010),
Sec 6/4.2.3 (which is generally in accordance with DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec
3, C1102). Criteria for stainless steels are not applicable here and are left to the individual
society.
3.3
Low bending radius
3.3.1
Cold forming for other members is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.2.3 (based
on DNV Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 3, C1002). The criteria have been slightly
modified from the DNV source criteria to satisfy LR and ABS views.
HOT FORMING
4.1
Temperature requirements
4.1.1
General precaution for hot forming is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.3.1
(based on ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 2, Ch 4, Sec 1, 3.13 and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3,
Ch 1, 8.2.1).
4.1.2
The requirements concerning TMCP plates are in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec
6/4.3.1 (based on ABS Rules (January 2013), Pt 2, Ch 4, Sec 1, 1.9).
4.2
Line or spot heating
4.2.1
Line or spot heating is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.3.2 (based on LR
Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 10, 2.12.17).
ASSEMBLY AND ALIGNMENT
5.1
General
5.1.1
5.1.2
Typical misalignment standards for weld joints in IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5, October 2010) are
described here. With regard to this matter, considering that the IACS Recommendations is
not a mandatory requirement, and reflecting the opinion of the industry that reliable
JANUARY 2014
standards such as the Japanese Shipbuilding Quality Standard should be approved, it was
decided that the classification society could approve standards if it deems them appropriate.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 12, SEC 2 FABRICATION BY WELDING
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.2
Limits of application to welding procedures
1.2.1
Weld type, size and materials
1.2.2
Preparation, execution and inspection
WELDING PROCEDURES, WELDING CONSUMABLES AND WELDERS
2.1
General
2.1.1
WELD JOINTS
3.1
General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
For the calculation purpose, the gap in welds is taken equal to 2.0mm (see Ch 12, Sec 3).
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 12, SEC 2 FABRICATION BY WELDING
3.1.9
Arrangements at junctions of welds
3.1.10 Leak stoppers

NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE)
4.1
General
4.1.1
4.1.2
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 12, SEC 3 DESIGN OF WELD JOINTS
GENERAL
Welding requirements in this section are primarily derived from the individual Common
Structural Rules (CSR) for Oil Tankers and those for Bulk Carriers (July 2010). The rules and
procedures related to welding in the aforementioned Rules were in themselves based on
practices of IACS member class societies involved in the development of the specific CSR.
Welding procedures and rules for determining weld sizes of these class societies have
proven reliable through application and historical service performance. The current
harmonised CSR has attempted to adopt the best practices from the individual CSR OT, and
those for Bulk Carriers.
1.1
Application
1.1.1
Text is derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/4.4.2.1.
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
Alternatives
1.2.1
Text is derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.11.
TEE OR CROSS JOINT
2.1
Application
2.1.1
The graphical representation of typical tee or cross joints is given.
2.1.2
Improved welding in high stressed areas is requested.
2.2
Continuous fillet welds
2.2.1
The list of locations where continuous fillet welding is CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.3.2 and
Table 6.5.1 combined with corresponding requirements from CSR BC (July 2010) from Ch 11,
Sec 2, Table 2 and elsewhere from both CSR.
2.3
Intermittent fillet welds
2.3.1
JANUARY 2014
2.3.2
The source of this requirement is mainly CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.3.3.2 adjusted in
accordance with typical shipyard practice.
2.3.3
Dry spaces
Light intermittent weld in dry spaces is acceptable if not affected by significant loads.
2.3.4
Size for one side continuous weld
Strength requirement is taken from intermittent weld requirement.
2.4
2.4.1
Partial and full penetration welds

Definition
The improved welding is required in high stressed areas. The definition of partial
penetration welds is given.
2.4.2
One side partial penetration weld
2.4.3
Extent of full or partial penetration welding
The typical extent of full or partial penetration welds was determined on the basis of existing
Societies rules, plan approval procedures and shipyards practice.
2.4.4
Locations required for full penetration welding
The list of critical locations is the combination of CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.3.4.3, CSR BC
(July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.4.1 and elsewhere in both CSR with input from IACS documents
(Bulk Carrier Repair Guidelines), individual Societies, shipyards and industry input.
2.4.5
Locations required for full or partial penetration welding
2.4.6
Fine mesh finite element analysis
Represents the strong industry demand of having the clear criteria where at least partial
penetration welding should be applied where fine mesh FEM analysis is carried out.
2.4.7
Shedder plates
The source of this rule is CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.4.2.
2.5
Weld size criteria
2.5.1
2.5.2
The scantlings of fillet welds are based on as-built thickness of the abutting members. Asbuilt thickness includes the net thickness of the member, the corrosion addition and the
owners addition. Thus, the strength of welds is checked both in net and in as-built
(corrosion addition adjustment is considered).
The formulas to determine the size of welds are similar to CSR OT (July 2010). The values of
weld factors are adjusted by comparing the welds scantlings of similar structures given by
JANUARY 2014
CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.7.1.2 and Table 6.5.1 with CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.6.1
and Ch 11, Sec 2, Table 1 and Table 2. The weld factors are such that the impact on the
existing CSR is minimised.
The corrosion addition adjustment is included in the formulas implicitly. BC rules give an
explicit corrosion addition refinement. Table 1 gives the values of implicit corrosion addition
adjustment in this Rules. Numbers in bold mean that the BC refinement is satisfied, numbers
in italic mean that the BC refinement is not satisfied, however the difference is negligible.
Table 1: Corrosion addition adjustment and its comparison with BC adjustment

fweld
0.20
0.24
0.30
0.38
0.48
0.51
2.5
0.36
0.43
0.53
0.67
0.85
0.91
3.0
0.43
0.51
0.64
0.81
1.02
1.09
3.5
0.50
0.60
0.75
0.94
1.19
1.27
4.0
0.57
0.68
0.85
1.08
1.36
1.45
tc, mm
4.5
5.0
0.64
0.71
0.77
0.85
0.96
1.07
1.21
1.35
1.53
1.70
1.63
1.81
5.5
0.78/1.0
0.94/1.0
1.17
1.48
1.87
1.99
6.0
0.85/1.0
1.02
1.28
1.62
2.04
2.17
6.5
0.92/1.0
1.11
1.38
1.75
2.22
2.35
The correction factor taking into account the yield strength of the weld deposit is accepted as
presented in CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.7.1.2 in order to meet the strong industry demand.
Minimum weld scantlings requirement was considered necessary and presented in the rules.
The source of this requirement is CSR OT (July 2010), Table 6.5.2 but adjusted in order to be
applicable to both types of ships. The minimum leg length in water and ballast and fresh
water tanks is increased by 0.5mm. The gap in welds is limited to 2mm.
2.5.3
2.5.4
This requirement is applicable for locations not listed in [2.5.2]. This approach is similar to
CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, Table 2. The requirements of CSR OT (July 2010), Table 6.5.4
were considered not appropriate as they give the small leg length for primary supporting
members.
2.5.5
This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.7.1.5.
2.5.6
2.5.7
Shear area of primary supporting member end connections
This criteria is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.7.4.1 but adjusted to clarify the
meaning of rule gross thickness of primary supporting members.
2.5.8
Longitudinals
JANUARY 2014
2.5.9
Deck longitudinals
2.5.10 Longitudinal continuity provided by brackets

2.5.11 Unbracketed stiffeners

2.5.12 Reduced weld size

This requirement is taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.9.3.1 as it is more detailed than
CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.6.4.
2.5.13 Reduced weld size justification

BUTT JOINT
3.1
General
3.1.1
Text and sketches are taken from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.2.1.1.
3.2
Thickness difference
3.2.1
Taper
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.2.2 and CSR OT (July 2010), Sec
6/5.2.2.
OTHER TYPES OF JOINTS
4.1
4.1.1
Lapped joints
Areas
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.7.1.
4.1.2
Overlap width
4.1.3
Overlap for lugs
4.1.4
Lapped end connections
4.1.5
Overlapped seams
JANUARY 2014
4.2
Slot welds
4.2.1
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.8.1.
4.2.2
Text is derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.5.1.2. The figure and the specific
information on the slot geometry and spacing of slots are taken from IACS Rec 47 (Rev 5,
October 2010), Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard.
4.2.3
Closing plates
4.2.4
4.3
Stud welds
4.3.1
CONNECTION DETAILS
5.1
Bilge keels
5.1.1
Text is derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 11/3.3.4.1. Welding requirements for
connections of bilge keels are derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 11/3.3.4.1 and Table
11.3.1. The figures are taken from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 3.1.3 and CSR OT (July
2010), Sec 11/3.3.4.3.
5.1.2
5.1.3
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11/Sec 2, 3.1.3.
5.1.4
5.2
Bulk carrier side frames
5.2.1
5.2.2
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.6.1. The figure is taken from CSR BC
(July 2010), Ch 3, Sec 6, 8.3.1.
5.2.3
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 3, Sec 6, 8.5.1 and Ch 11, Sec 2, Table 2.
JANUARY 2014
5.3
End connections of pillars and cross ties
5.3.1
Text is derived from CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/5.10.1.1. The equation for sizing welds for
pillars and cross-ties is based on a weld area calculation, i.e. effective throat area times weld
length. The equation includes an allowance for the weld deposit material strength as
indicated in the DNV Rules (January 2010), Pt 3, Ch 1, Sec 12, C303 consistent with Sec
6/5.7.1.2 of the CSR OT (July 2010).
5.4
Abutting plate with small angles
5.4.1
Text is derived from CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 11, Sec 2, 2.6.3. And adjustment made such that
for angles over 75 deg no increase in weld is necessary.
5.4.2
The philosophy behind this rule is that it is not possible to ensure the good painting in areas
where the angle is too small.
JANUARY 2014
PART 1 CHAPTER
13
SHIP IN OPERATION - RENEWAL CRITERIA

Table of Contents
SECTION 1
Principles and Survey Requirements
1 Principles
2 Hull Survey Requirements
SECTION 2
Acceptance Criteria
1 General
2 Renewal Criteria
PT 1, CH 13, SEC 1 PRINCIPLES AND SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
PRINCIPLES
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.2
Corrosion allowance concept
1.2.1
Corrosion allowance
1.2.2
Assessment
1.2.3
Steel renewal
1.3
Requirements for documentation
1.3.1
Plans
1.3.2
Hull girder sectional properties
HULL SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
2.1
2.1.1
General
Minimum hull survey requirements
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 13, SEC 2 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
1.2
Definition
1.2.1
Deck zone
The requirement is based on IACS UR, Z10 (July 2011).
1.2.2
Bottom zone
The requirement is based on IACS UR, Z10 (July 2011).
1.2.3
Neutral axis zone
RENEWAL CRITERIA
2.1
2.1.1
Local corrosion
Renewal thickness of local structural elements
The requirement is identical to CSR BC and OT (July 2010).
2.1.2
Renewed area
The requirement is identical to CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 12/1.4.2.5.
2.1.3
Alternative solutions
The requirement is identical to CSR BC (July 2010), Ch 12, Sec 2, 1.2 and CSR OT (July 2010),
Sec 12/1.2.2.3.
2.2
2.2.1
Global corrosion
Application
The requirement, the ships longitudinal strength is to be evaluated, during special surveys,
for ships over 10 years of age is based on IACS UR, Z10.4 (Rev 10, July 2011) for OT, Table
IX(v) and Annex III (as amended).
The requirement identical to CSR for Bulk Carriers is adopted. In these Rules, the term
Special Survey is used in line with IACS UR, Z10 (July 2011). However, according to IACS
UR, Z10 (July 2011), some Societies use the term Renewal Survey instead.
2.2.2
Renewal criteria
(a) Deck and bottom zones:

The global strength assessment may be performed either by the calculation of the hull girder
sections or by the calculation of zone areas which constitute the hull girder flanges and
which provide a simplified, but accurate enough, evaluation of the hull girder section
modulus.
JANUARY 2014
PT 1, CH 13, SEC 2 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The allowable limit of 90% of either the section moduli or the deck and bottom zone areas is
based on CSR BC and IACS UR Z10.4 (Rev 10, July 2011) for oil tankers. The harmonisation
for the 2 ship types is based on CSR BC (July 2010) and no need to request the inertia, Iy and
the hull girder section modulus about the vertical axis.
(b) Neutral axis zone:
The harmonisation is made to allow a pragmatic verification by surveyors for hull girder
shear area through the calculation of the neutral axis zone area. The allowable limit for this
area is the area calculated with the tg-off - 0.5tc on all the platings considered in the neutral axis
zone. This allowable limit is the same as the one considered in the calculations performed at
newbuilding stage for FE analysis and hull girder prescriptive evaluations.
The penultimate sentence of the requirements means that if all items of a transverse section
comply individually with its zone area criteria, the global assessment of the transverse
section is made. There is no need to perform the area calculation on each zone. The criteria
referring to the gross offered thickness are to give the owner the benefit of voluntary
additional thicknesses that he could have requested to the shipbuilder.
JANUARY 2014
PART 2
SHIP TYPES
Table of Contents
Chapter 1:
Bulk Carriers
Chapter 2:
Oil Tankers
PART 2 CHAPTER
BULK CARRIERS
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
1 Forecastle
SECTION 2
1 Application
2 Corrosion Protection
3 Structural Detail Principles
SECTION 3
Hull Local Scantlings
1 Cargo Hold Side Frames of Single Side Bulk Carriers

2 Structure Loaded by Steel Coils on Wooden Dunnage
3 Transverse Vertically Corrugated Watertight Bulkheads Separating Cargo Holds in Flooded Condition
4 Allowable Hold Loading for BC-A & BC-B Ships in Flooded Conditions
SECTION 4
Hull Local Scantlings for Bulk Carriers L<150m
1 General
2 Struts Connecting Stiffeners
3 Transverse Corrugated Bulkheads of Ballast Holds
SECTION 5
Cargo Hatch Covers
1 General
2 Arrangements
3 Width of Attached Plating
4 Load Model
5 Strength Check
6 Hatch Coamings
7 Weathertightness, Closing Arrangement, Securing Devices and Stoppers
8 Drainage
SECTION 6
Additional Class Notation Grab
1 General
2 Scantlings
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 1 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DESIGN
FORECASTLE
1.1
General
1.1.1
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR, S28.1 (Rev 3, May 2010), paragraph 1 and UR,
S28.2 (Rev 3, May 2010), paragraphs 1 and 2 (as amended).
1.1.2
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR, S28.2 (Rev 3, May 2010), paragraph 3.
1.1.3
1.1.4
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES
APPLICATION
1.1
General
1.1.1
CORROSION PROTECTION
2.1
General
2.1.1
Void double side skin spaces
2.1.2
Cargo holds and ballast holds
2.2
Protection of void double side skin spaces
2.2.1
Regulations for structures of void double side skin spaces in the cargo length area for bulk
carriers having a length (LLL) of not less than 150m to be protected against corrosion are
specified based on SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 3-2 (as amended).
2.3
Protection of cargo hold spaces
2.3.1
Coating
This regulation is in accordance with IACS UR, Z9 (Corr. 1, 1997).
2.3.2
Application
2.3.3
Side areas to be coated
2.3.4
Transverse bulkhead areas to be coated
STRUCTURAL DETAIL PRINCIPLES
3.1
3.1.1
Double bottom structure

Application
3.1.2
Girders spacing
This requirement ensures that the spacing between double bottom girders is not too large in
ships the structure of which is not assessed through a finite element calculation. The
formulae in this article are empirical.
JANUARY 2014
3.1.3
Floors spacing
This requirement ensures that the spacing between double bottom floors is not too large in
3.2
3.2.1
Single side structure

Application
All the requirements in this sub-article are base on IACS UR, S12 (Rev 5, May 2010),
considering the net scantling approach.
3.2.2
General arrangement
3.2.3
Side frames
3.2.4
Upper and lower brackets
3.2.5
Tripping brackets
3.2.6
Support structure
3.3
3.3.1
Deck structures
Web frame spacing in topside tanks
This requirement ensures that the spacing between top side tank webs is not too large in
3.3.2
Cross deck between hatches of bulk carriers
3.3.3
Topside tank structures
3.3.4
Openings in strength deck Corner of hatchways
3.3.5
Protection against wire rope protection
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 3 HULL LOCAL SCANTLINGS
CARGO HOLD SIDE FRAMES OF SINGLE SIDE BULK CARRIERS
1.1
1.1.1
Strength criteria
Net section modulus and net shear sectional area
This requirement is based on requirement stated in IACS UR, S12.4.1 (Rev 5, May 2010). This
text considers the net section modulus and the minimum net web thickness under the
following forms:
Net section modulus:
Z = C3
Net web thickness:
tw =
m m P frame h
1000 C s P frame h 2h B
d b sin a
h
These formulae have been expressed in terms of symbols specific to harmonised CSR for
bulk carriers:
Net section modulus:
Z = 1.125 m
Net shear sectional area:
Ash = 1.1 S
Ps SF 2
10 3
f bdg C s R eH
5 Ps SF SF 2 B
C t eH sin SF
The shear force at the lower end of the side frame span is obtained, by assuming that the sum
of the still water and wave pressures is uniform along the span. It is also assumed that the
percentage of total lateral force on the frame that is carried by the lower end support is equal
to:
60%, in general,
66%, for the side frames of holds specified to be empty in ships assigned with the BCA notation, as defined in IACS UR, S25 (which is no more in force). This greater value
is due to the effect of the hopper tank rotation induced by the sea pressure on the
double bottom, not counterbalanced by any internal cargo (see below).
The shear force at section (b) is assumed to be equal to that at section (a) multiplied by a
factor. The factor is equal to the frame span h minus twice the length of the lower bracket
divided by h (it is assumed here that the upper and the lower brackets have the same
length).
The minimum net web thickness of the side frame is evaluated at the section (b), considering
the angle of the inclination of the web to the shell plating. The bending moment acting on the
side frame is obtained by multiplying the total lateral force on the frame by the frame span
and by coefficients mm that gives the factor of the maximum bending moment along the
side frame span.
The mm values depend on the loading condition of the hold to which the frame under
consideration belongs. Finite element calculations have shown that the maximum bending
moment for the side frames of ore holds is at the mid-span; for empty holds the maximum
bending moment is at the lower end.
JANUARY 2014
On the basis of finite element calculations, mm values are assumed to be 70 for BC-A ships,
as defined in IACS UR, S25 (which is no more in force), and 60 for other cases; the value of 70
for the loaded holds of BC-A ships is equivalent to the bending moment of the frame
assumed simply supported inside the brackets.
For the empty holds of BC-A ships, an higher values of the coefficient mm has been
included considering that in non-homogeneous loading conditions (i.e. at the maximum
draft) the sea pressure acting on the double bottom is not counterbalanced by internal cargo.
This induces significant rotation of the hopper tanks and hence of the side frame lower ends,
that increases the bending moment at the lower end.
The required net section modulus of the side frame is evaluated in the elastic domain; a
reduction of 20%, incorporated using coefficient C3 equal to 0.83, was included in the
formula for the required modulus to permit some plastic behaviour under extreme loads.
1.1.2
Side frames in ballast holds
This requirement is based on requirements stated in IACS UR, S12.4 (Rev 5, May 2010). The
requirement to side frame in [1.1.1] considers bulk cargoes and sea loads. For side frames in
ballast holds, ballast pressure may be governing and strength shall be checked the same way
as required for stiffeners on other tank boundaries.
1.1.3
Additional strength requirements
This requirement is based on requirement stated in IACS UR, S12.4.2 (Rev 5, May 2010) and
shown as follows:
Service record of bulk carriers and other type of ships reports that vertical crack occurs on
side shell plating along the line of collision bulkhead. In case where brackets are fitted on
side shell between collision bulkhead and a hold frame abaft the bulkhead, those brackets
crack or side shell plating cracks along the hold frame abaft the brackets fitted.
It is considered that deformation of hold frame due to repeated wave load induces bending
of side shell plating between collision bulkhead and the hold frame thereafter and this
bending of side shell plating induces fatigue crack on side shell plating along the line of
collision bulkhead. Cracks of brackets or of side shell plating abaft brackets are considered to
occur for the same reason.
A formula to require a moment of inertia of hold frame is specified to control the
deformation of the frame within 3/1000 (frame space) at its mid-span where a sea pressure
force, Pframe, acts on the side shell plating.
1.2
Lower bracket of side frame
1.2.1
This requirement is based on requirements of IACS UR, S12.4 (Rev 5, May 2010).
1.2.2
1.2.3
JANUARY 2014
1.2.4
This requirement is based on requirements IACS UR, S12.6 and S12.8 of the IACS UR, S12
(Rev 5, May 2010) and shown as follows:
The limit values for the web depth to thickness ratio are introduced for lower brackets, in
addition to those already specified in IACS UR, S12 (Rev 5, May 2010), which are valid for
the side frames. The limits for the web depth to thickness ratio of lower brackets take into
account that, in order to comply with the requirements for the section modulus of the
brackets in IACS UR, S12.6 (Rev 5, May 2010), the web depth increases more in the lower
bracket than the shear force, with respect to the corresponding value at the top of the lower
bracket. As a consequence, the shear stresses in the lower bracket are lower than in the span
(the highest shear stress values occur at the top of the lower bracket).
When calculating the web depth to the thickness ratio, the web depth of the lower bracket
may be measured from the intersection between the sloped bulkhead of the hopper tank and
the side shell plate, perpendicularly to the face plate of the lower bracket.
The thickness td/t, which satisfies the web dept to thickness ratio, can be reduced to td/t =
3
t d / t 2 t w for the frames immediately abaft the collision bulkheads, which are often
oversized for the purpose of providing a smooth stiffness transition between the fore peak
structure and the hold side structures. For these frames, when the required minimum net
web thickness tw is such that the side frame web works in the elastic domain, the formula for
td/t accounts for the fact that the working shear stress is lower than the admissible one.
The formula for td/t is derived as reported in the following:
The relationship between critical shear stresses and the web plate thickness is given by the
Equation (1).
2
2E t
cr = K
= S f a
12( 1 2 ) b
(1)
where,
t
= td/t, web thickness satisfying the required shear buckling criteria corresponding to the
assumed allowable shear stress a with safety factor.
a = Allowable shear stress (= 0.5y).
Sf = Safety factor.
In case where working shear stress, work is less than the allowable shear stress, a the
corresponding critical shear stress, cr' while maintaining the same safety factor, is given by:
2
2 E t'd / t
= S f work
(2)
cr ' = K
12( 1 2 ) b
where td/t is the web plate thickness giving the critical shear stress cr'. On the other hand, the
working shear stresses work is given by Equation (3).
t
(3)
work = w a
t'd / t
where, tw is as given in IACS UR, S12.4.1 or in S12.5 (Rev 5, May 2010), whichever is the
greater.
JANUARY 2014
The following equation is obtained by substituting work in Equation (2) by that of

Equation (3):
2 E t'd / t
K
12( 1 2 ) b
t
t
= S f w a = S f a w
t'd / t
t'd / t
(4)
Combining Equations (1) and (4) give the following relationship between td/t and td/t:
t'd / t
tw
= t'
d/t
td / t
(5)
Equation (5) gives td/t as follows:

t'd / t =
t d2 / t t w
(6)
td/t given by the Equation (6) gives the web thickness for side frames and lower brackets
satisfying the shear buckling criteria corresponding to the working shear stresses, where td/t is
greater than tw.
The formula for td/t is based on the formulation of the elastic shear buckling stress, which is
valid for shear stress lower than 1 F , that is 0.29 of the material yielding. As tw is based
2 3
on the admissible shear stress equal to 0.5 of the material yielding, when the thickness td/t is
greater than 0.5/0.29 of tw, that is 1.73tw, the side frame web works in the elastic domain and
td/t will be obtained by the following formula:
td/t =
t d / t 2t w
Furthermore, in the requirements for asymmetrically flanged frames the higher strength steel
k factor has been removed, as the same IACS UR, S12 (Rev 5, May 2010) allows such frames
to be adopted only if made in normal strength steel.
1.3
Upper bracket of side frame
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
Provided support at upper and lower connections of side frames

Net section modulus
This requirement is based on requirements stated in IACS UR, S12.7 (Rev 5, May 2010). This
draft text considers the relation ship between net section modulus and distances under the
following form:
1000 C t P frame h 2l
(Z i a i )
16 s F
n
This formula has been then expressed in terms of symbols specific to CSR BC (July 2010):
P 2 2
Z i d i T BC SF 1
16 R eH
n
JANUARY 2014
The section modulus of the longitudinals is required to have sufficient bending strength to
support the end fixing moment of the side frame about the intersection point of the sloping
bulkhead and the side shell.
The end fixing moment of the side frame is that induced by the external sea pressure acting
on the side frame (end brackets excluded) and the deflection and rotation of the end support
due to the loading on the hopper and the double bottom.
The sea pressure loading on the end brackets is not included because the sea pressure
loading on this and on the connecting structure of the hopper and topside tank are assumed
to cancel.
The end fixing moment, Mef, in Nm, of the side frame about the intersection point of the
sloping bulkhead and the side shell in Nm is given as:
M ef = 1000 P frame h C m + h B 1000 P frame C s
h 2h B
h
where,
Cm is the bending moment coefficient at the lower end or at the upper end of the side
frame.
Cs is the fraction of the total sea pressure force, which is carried by the lower end or
the upper end of the side frame.
The end fixing moment, Mef, gives rise to the line loads, qef, in N/m, on the longitudinals of
the side shell and sloping bulkhead that support the lower and upper connecting brackets,
given as:
M ef
1000 P frame h
h B h 2h B
q ef =
=
Cs
C m +
s a
s a
h
h
The line load, qef, gives rise to the plastic bending moments, Mc, in Nm, in the longitudinals
that support the lower and upper connecting brackets, given as:
q ef 2l
1000 P frame h 2l
h B h 2h B
Mc =
Cs
=
C m +
16
16 s a
h
h
Hence, assuming an allowable stress equal to yield, the section modulus requirement for a
connected side or sloping bulkhead longitudinal in cm3 becomes:
1000 P frame h 2l
Mc
h B h 2h B
Z =
=
Cs
C m +
16 s a F
h
h
F
The above expression assumes a single connected longitudinal. For more than one connected
longitudinal, the plastic bending moment, Mc is to be supported by the sum of the connected
longitudinals and the requirement becomes:
1000 P frame h 2l
h h 2h B
(Z i a i ) =
Cs
C m + B
16 s F
h
h
The above expression, assuming,

h h 2h B
CT = C m + B
C s becomes:
h
h
JANUARY 2014
(Zi ai ) =
n
1000 P frame h 2l
16 s F
CT
On the basis of the finite element calculations, Cm is assumed equal to 0.07 for the lower end
and 0.02 for the upper end. For a lower bracket length of 0.125 the side frame span,
considering the value for CS equal to 0.66, as defined in IACS UR, S12 (Rev 5, May 2010).
h B h 2h B
C s is, conservatively assumed equal to 0.08 for the lower brackets;

h
h
hence CT is assumed equal to 0.15 for the longitudinal stiffeners supporting the lower
connecting brackets.
The term
Assuming that the shear force supported by the upper end is 2/3 of that supported by the
h h 2h B
lower end, the term B
C s is, conservatively equal to 0.05 for the upper brackets;
h
h
hence CT is assumed equal to 0.075 for the longitudinal stiffeners supporting the upper
connecting brackets.
1.4.2
Net connection area of brackets
This requirement is based on requirements stated in IACS UR, S12.7 (Rev 5, May 2010).
This draft text considers a specified requirement to ensure that the brackets have a sufficient
net connection area to the longitudinals supporting the brackets. This net connection area Ai
of the bracket to the i-th longitudinal stiffener supporting the bracket is given under the
following form:
Ai = 0.4 Zi s kbkt /(i2 klong,i)
This formula has been then expressed in terms of symbols specific to CSR BC (July 2010):
sk
Ai = 0.4 2i bkt
i k lg ,i
STRUCTURE LOADED BY STEEL COILS ON WOODEN DUNNAGE
2.1
General
2.1.1
In dimensioning the plating and ordinary stiffeners, static and dynamic loads due to dry
bulk cargoes and liquid acting on the plating and ordinary stiffeners are considered as
uniformly distributed loads. On the other hand, as steel coils are loaded on a wooden
support (dunnage) provided on the inner bottom plating and bilge hopper plating, the
concentrated loads due to steel coils act on the plating through the dunnage.
However, as the location of concentrated loads and the distance between concentrated loads
depend on the loading pattern and size of dunnage, it is assumed that the concentrated load
is transformed to a line load with a small breadth (hereinafter referred to as rectangular
load) which acts on the most severe conditions (load point and distance between load
points). Based on this assumption, the specific formulae for dimensioning the plating and
ordinary stiffeners under steel coil loading are given in Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec 3, [2].
The specific requirements for plating are specified in Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec 3, [2.3.1] and [2.4.1], and
those for ordinary stiffeners are specified in Pt 2, Ch 1, Sec 3, [2.3.2] and [2.4.2].
JANUARY 2014
The technical background of loads due to steel coils is common for plating and ordinary
stiffeners and given in the TB related to Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 6, [4].
These requirements are based on the assumption that steel coils are loaded on a wooden
support and secured in the standard manner. These assumptions are given in Figure 2 in Pt 2,
Ch 1, Sec 3.
2.2
2.2.1
Load application
Design load sets
Design load sets for steel coil cargo are defined in the same manner as other load sets as
given in Pt 1, Ch 6, Sec 2, [2].
2.3
2.3.1
Inner bottom
(a) Load model:

Steel coils are usually secured to each other by means of steel wires. Heavier steel coils are
loaded with one or two tiers, and lighter ones are loaded with two or more tiers. Examples of
steel coil loading are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Figure 1:
Loading conditions of one tier

key coil
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
(A) with key coil

Figure 2:
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
(B) without key coil

Loading conditions of two tiers
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
The load due to steel coils acts on an elementary plate panel as a concentrated load through
dunnages. However, it is difficult to treat concentrated loads directly because the location of
concentrated loads and the distance between concentrated loads depend on the loading
pattern and size of dunnages.
Then, the following assumptions regarding the loads due to steel coils are considered:
Loads due to steel coils act along a centreline of a plate panel.
A rectangular load instead of concentrated loads is used in order to be on the safer

side considering the interaction between concentrated loads.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 3:
Convert concentrated loads to rectangular loads
Steel coil
l
x
Floor
Floor
dunnage
Elementary plate panel
l'
As it is the most severe when loads act on the inner bottom vertically, the vertical
acceleration is considered for the scantling formula of inner bottom structures. The position
of the centre of gravity is given by the following.
x
y
z
: (a) For the hold of which the mid position is located forward of 0.45L from AE:
xG_SC = 0.75 lH forward of aft bulkhead, and
(b) For the hold of which the mid position is located afterward of 0.45L from AE:
xG_SC = 0.75 lH afterward of fore bulkhead.
: Bh/4, measured from the centreline.
: h DB + 1 + (n 1) 3 2 d SC 2
where,
:
H
dSC
:
hDB
:
Bh
:
Cargo hold length.

Diameter of steel coil in m.
Height of double bottom in m.
Breadth of hold at the mid of the hold in m.
Figure 4:
The height of steel coils
2 3 dSC
2
3 dSC
2
dSC
2
hDB
dSC
2
Inner bottom
plating
hDB
Bottom plating
(b) Structural model:

JANUARY 2014
As mentioned in item (a) of [2.3.1], the rectangular load acts along the centreline of the panel.
Its length is determined by the panel length , the length of a steel coil S, the number of
load points n2 and the number of dunnages supporting one steel coil n3, and its width 0.3s is
derived from dunnage width based on the actual loading data. Of course, the axial stress due
to hull girder bending is considered in addition to the lateral rectangular load due to the
steel coils. An elementary plate panel is collapsed like Figure 5. The boundary conditions of
an elementary plate panel are that all sides are considered fixed.
Figure 5:
Rectangular load and collapsed mode
0.3s
s
l'
Coefficient K1 and K2:

The coefficients K1 and K2 are derived from the principle of virtual work based on material
physics.
Formula for required thickness of inner bottom plating:
Finally, the scantling formula for inner bottom plating is given as follows.
t = K1
Fsc ib s
, applicable for design load set BC-9.
C a R eH
t = K1
Fsc ib
, applicable for design load set BC-10.
C a R eH
where,
Fsc-ib-s
: Static force, in kN, as defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 6, [4.3.1].
Fsc-ib
: Total force, in kN, as defined in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 6, [4.2.1].
2.3.2
Stiffeners of inner bottom plating
(a) Load model:

The structural model for ordinary stiffeners is based on the simple elastic beam theory.
Therefore, the load model for ordinary stiffeners is based on concentrated loads due to steel
coils acting through the dunnage. The calculation of acceleration is based on the same
assumption for plating. The parameter and coefficients are also the same for plating.
Structural model of ordinary stiffeners is based on the simple beam theory with the
boundary condition that both ends of beams are fixed.
Coefficient K3:
JANUARY 2014
The coefficient K3 is derived from the ratios of moments at ends of stiffeners against n2=1
when load points of the concentrated loads are located evenly between l as shown in
Figure 6. When n2 is over 10, the coefficient K3 is 2/3.
Figure 6:
Load points on an ordinary stiffener
P/2
P/2
l'
n2=2
n2=1
P/3
P/3
P/3
P/4
l'
P/4
P/4
P/4
l'
n2=4
n2=3
2.4
Hopper tank and inner hull
2.4.1
Hopper side plating and inner hull plating
(a) Load model:

This load model is the same for the inner bottom. The vertical component of the load is
supported by the inner bottom directly or by other coils.
Figure 7:
Bilge hopper
sloping plating
The examples of steel coil loading conditions

Inner hull
plating

The structural model for bilge hopper sloping plating and inner hull plating is the same for
inner bottom plating.
2.4.2
Stiffeners of hopper side plating and inner hull plating
(a) Load model:

The concentrated load is considered as specified in item (a) of TB [2.3.2] and the acceleration
due to roll motion is considered as specified in Pt 1, Ch 4, Sec 6, [4.4].
Structural model of an ordinary stiffener is specified in item (b) of TB [2.3.2].
JANUARY 2014
TRANSVERSE VERTICALLY CORRUGATED WATERTIGHT BULKHEADS

SEPARATING CARGO HOLDS IN FLOODED CONDITION
3.1
3.1.1
Net thickness of corrugation

Cold formed corrugations
This requirement specifies the thickness required under flooded condition for plating of
transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds. This
requirement is based on CSR BC (July 2010) and IACS UR, S18.4.7 (Rev 8, May 2010). The
capacity formulas apply for consideration of an accidental load and shall prevent progressive
flooding. The requirements are therefore different from local strength requirements for
corrugation plating in Pt 1, Ch 6, Sec 4 [1.2.1], which shall prevent repeated yielding or
permanent deformations with regular static or dynamic tank loads.
3.1.2
Built-up corrugations
3.1.3
Lower part of corrugation
This part of the Rules is based on CSR BC (July 2010) and IACS UR, S18.4.1 (Rev 8, May 2010).
3.1.4
Middle part of corrugation
3.2
3.2.1
Bending, shear and buckling check

Bending capacity and shear capacity
This part of the Rules is based on CSR BC (July 2010) and IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010).
3.2.2
Shear buckling check of the bulkhead corrugation webs
3.3
3.3.1
Net section modulus at the lower end of the corrugations

Effective flange width
3.3.2
Webs not supported by local brackets
3.3.3
Effective shedder plates
3.3.4
Effective gusset plates
3.3.5
Sloping stool top plate
JANUARY 2014
ALLOWABLE HOLD LOADING FOR BC-A & BC-B SHIPS IN FLOODED

CONDITIONS
4.1
4.1.1
Evaluation of double bottom capacity and allowable hold loading

Shear capacity of the double bottom
4.1.2
Floor shear strength
4.1.3
Girder shear strength
4.1.4
Allowable hold loading
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 4 HULL LOCAL SCANTLING FOR BC L<150M
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
STRUTS CONNECTING STIFFENERS
2.1
2.1.1
Net sectional area and moment of inertia
In case that the two parallel beams are connected by struts at their span, the applied force on
the beam deforms the whole structure and causes a reaction distribution which depends on
the rigidity ratio of each member.
For the treatment of struts between primary supporting members (floors) in a double bottom
structure, CSR BC (July 2010) has been incorporated. Provision of struts is not approved in
ships of length 120m and greater.
TRANSVERSE CORRUGATED BULKHEADS OF BALLAST HOLDS
3.1
Plate thickness
3.1.1
3.2
Net section modulus
3.2.1
This requirement applies to corrugated bulkhead of ballast hold for ships having a length
less than 150m. It indicates the section modulus of corrugation and it is based on CSR BC
(July 2010). For ships longer than 150m, bending capacity of the corrugation of ballast hold is
assessed using direct strength analysis in accordance relevant parts of the Rules.
4.1
Application
4.1.1
For primary supporting members in ships of length below 150m, strength formulae are
specified with the focus on shear and buckling strength.
4.1.2
4.2
4.2.1
Design load sets

Application
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 4 HULL LOCAL SCANTLING FOR BC L<150M
4.2.2
Loading conditions
4.3
4.3.1
Centre girders and side girders

Net web thickness
This regulation is based on CSR BC (July 2010). Required thickness by t1 formula is based on
overall shearing capacity of girders. However, 100% of total corrosion addition is applied
because web height of girders of this size of bulk carriers is so small that corrosion may be
global not localised.
According to Rules principle, full corrosion addition is to be added to required thickness by
t2 formula based on buckling capacity.
4.4
4.4.1
Floors
Net web thickness
4.5
Stringer of double side structure
4.5.1
Net web thickness
4.6
4.6.1
Transverse web in double side structure

Net web thickness
4.7
4.7.1
Primary supporting member in bilge hopper tanks and topside tanks

Boundary conditions
4.7.2
Net section modulus, net shear sectional area and web thickness
Webs of primary supporting members in bilge hopper tanks and topside tanks are generally
stiffened with free-edged flanges. Therefore, bending strength is assessed in addition to
shear and buckling strength. Refer to TB of Pt 1, Ch 6, Sec 5 for the background of bending
and shear formulae.
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 5 CARGO HATCH COVERS
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
The regulations of this section are based on the ICLL (as amended), IACS UR, S21 (Rev 5,
May 2010) and UR, S26 (Rev 4, May 2010). When internal pressure of ballast water in the
ballast hold is considered, the hatch cover is treated as not being acted upon by hydrostatic
pressure from the air vent installed in the hatch coaming.
To consider this, the loads due to ballast in the ballast hold were divided into hydrostatic
pressure and dynamic pressure, the hydrostatic pressure was multiplied by 0 and the
dynamic pressure by 0.9.
1.2
Materials
1.2.1
Steel
1.2.2
Other materials
1.3
Net scantlings
1.3.1
The requirements are based on IACS UR S21 (Rev 5, May 2010).
1.4
Corrosion additions
1.4.1
The requirements are based on IACS UR, S21 (Rev 5, May 2010).
1.5
Allowable stresses
1.5.1
This requirement is in accordance with ICLL, as amended, (MSC Res 143(77), Reg 15.6 and
16.5). The buckling utilisation factor is to be used as a measure of safety margin against
buckling strength failure by using the ratio between the applied loads and the corresponding
ultimate capacity or buckling strength. This definition gives the unified buckling utilisation
factor calculations especially for combined loads, e.g. under the applied loads of both axial
and transverse compressive stresses.
ARRANGEMENTS
2.1
Height of hatch coamings
2.1.1
This requirement is in accordance with ICLL, as amended, (MSC Res 143(77), Reg 14(1.1)).
2.1.2
This requirement is in accordance with ICLL, as amended, (MSC Res 143(77), Reg 14(1.2)).
JANUARY 2014
2.2
Hatch covers
2.2.1
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S21 (Rev 5, May 2010).
2.2.2
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S21.1 (Rev 5, May 2010).
2.2.3
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S21.3.5 (Rev 5, May 2010).
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
Hatch coamings
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
This requirement specifies the structural continuity under transverse coamings.
WIDTH OF ATTACHED PLATING
3.1
Stiffeners
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
LOAD MODEL
4.1
4.1.1
Lateral pressures and forces

General
JANUARY 2014
4.1.2
Sea pressures
4.1.3
Internal pressures due to ballast water
4.1.4
Pressures due to uniform cargoes
4.1.5
Pressures or forces due to special cargoes
4.1.6
Forces due to containers
4.2
Load point
4.2.1
Wave lateral pressure for hatch covers on exposed decks
4.2.2
Lateral pressures other than the wave pressure
STRENGTH CHECK
5.1
5.1.1
General
Application
5.1.2
Hatch covers supporting containers
This requirement specifies that container loads are to be considered, if any. As no container
loads are defined in CSR BC, they are to be determined by each Society.
5.1.3
Hatch covers subjected to special cargoes
5.2
5.2.1
Plating
Net thickness
5.2.2
Minimum net thickness
This requirement is in accordance with ICLL, as amended, (MSC Res 143(77), Reg16(5,c)).
5.2.3
Buckling strength
JANUARY 2014
5.3
Stiffeners
5.3.1
This requirement is based on IACS UR, S21.3.6.2 (Rev 5, May 2010).
5.3.2
Minimum net thickness of web
5.3.3
Net section modulus and net shear sectional area
5.3.4
Buckling strength
5.4
5.4.1
Application
5.4.2
Minimum net thickness of web
5.4.3
Normal and shear stress for isolated beam
5.4.4
Checking criteria
5.4.5
Deflection limit
5.4.6
Buckling strength of the web panels of the primary supporting members
5.4.7
Slenderness criteria
5.5
Stiffeners and primary supporting members of variable cross section
5.5.1
HATCH COAMINGS
6.1
Stiffening
6.1.1
6.1.2
JANUARY 2014
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
Load model
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
Scantlings
6.3.1
Plating
6.3.2
Stiffeners
6.3.3
Coaming stays
6.3.4
Local details
WEATHERTIGHTNESS, CLOSING ARRANGEMENT, SECURING DEVICES

AND STOPPERS
7.1
Weathertightness
7.1.1
This requirement is in accordance with ICLL, as amended, (MSC Res 143(77), Reg 16(1)).
7.1.2
JANUARY 2014
7.2
Gaskets
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.3
7.3.1
Closing arrangement, securing devices and stoppers

General
7.3.2
Arrangements
7.3.3
Spacing
7.3.4
Construction
7.3.5
Area of securing devices
7.3.6
Inertia of edges elements
7.3.7
Diameter of rods or bolts
7.3.8
Stoppers
7.4
Cleats
7.4.1
JANUARY 2014
7.4.2
DRAINAGE
8.1
Arrangement
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 1, SEC 6 ADDITIONAL CLASS NOTATION GRAB
GENERAL
1.1
Application
1.1.1
The regulations corresponding to Ch XII, Reg 6 of the SOLAS convention (as amended) were
set as this section. The regulation for additional class notation assigned when the strength
requirements for grab impact loads are satisfied, has been added. To clearly denote the mass
of the grab considered when assigning the additional class notation, the mass of the grab
considered is affixed after "GRAB".
This regulation is a mandatory requirement for BC-A and BC-B ships according to the
SOLAS convention (as amended) and optional for other kinds of ships.
1.1.2
SCANTLINGS
2.1
2.1.1
Plating
General
2.1.2
A simplified formula using grab mass, material used, and longitudinal spacing was given
after studying regulations related to grabs of IACS Societies. Figure 1 shows a comparison of
inner bottom GRAB requirements. The formulas for inner bottom and hopper plates have
been modified compared to CSR BC as a result of increased design grab weights in CSR-H
for BC with L > 200m. The increased grab weights will reduce the probability that weight of
grab used for discharging is equal to design grab weight and the modified formulas allow
for a higher utilisation of capacity compared to CSR BC when the design weight is above 20t.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1:
Comparison of inner bottom grab requirements
Based on the mandatory minimum grab weights given in Pt 1, Ch 1, Sec 1, [3.2.2], the grab
requirement will normally be the governing rule requirement for inner bottom thickness in
empty hold for vessels with L > 200m. For ore holds the grab requirement will normally not
give increased inner bottom thickness.
Table 1 shows a summary of scantling impacts on 6 different vessels.
Table 1:
Scantling impact
Summary of scantling impact

Vessel ID*
BC-1 BC-2 BC-3 BC-4 BC-5 BC-6
Grab weight according to Pt1 Ch1 Sec1 [3.2.2]
35
35
35
30
30
30
Ore hold thickness [mm] **
Empty hold thickness [mm] ***
+1.5 +0.5 +1.0 +0.5 +1.0 +1.0
* The ID refers to the vessels used in the CSR-H Consequence assessment. See Table 2 for
vessel information.
** Grab requirement is not governing
*** Compared to as built thickness. As built thickness complies with CSR BC.
JANUARY 2014
Table 2:
ID
BC-1
BC-2
BC-3
BC-4
BC-5
BC-6
ID
Capesize 1
Capesize 2
Capesize 3
Baby Cape 1
Baby Cape 2
Panamax 1
Vessel information
Vessel information
Lpp
B
285
46
284
45
293
50
240
43
248
43
225
32
Tsc
18
18
18
15
15
14
D
25
25
25
21
20
20
DWT
180200
180000
205000
114500
115000
82000
Vessels with L < 200m will normally be designed for steel coil loading, and such loading will
be the governing rule requirement.
2.1.3
Vertical and sloped cargo hold boundaries
A simplified formula was given as similar to [2.1.2].
JANUARY 2014
PART 2 CHAPTER
OIL TANKERS
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
1 General
2 Separation of Cargo Tanks
3 Double Hull Arrangement
4 Access Arrangements
SECTION 2
1 Corrosion Protection
SECTION 3
Hull Local Scantling
1 Primary Supporting Members in Cargo Hold Region

2 Vertically Corrugated Bulkheads
SECTION 4
Hull Outfitting
1 Supporting Structures For Components Used In Emergency Towing Arrangements

2 Miscellaneous Deck Attachments
GENERAL
1.1
General
1.1.1
SEPARATION OF CARGO TANKS
2.1
General
2.1.1
The text summarises the main arrangement considerations related to the separation of cargo
tanks from other spaces. Applicable requirements are contained in Ch II-2, Reg 4.5 of the
SOLAS (as amended).
2.1.2
Requirements of a cofferdam to separate the cargo tanks from the machinery space come
from SOLAS, Ch II-2, Reg 4.5.1 (as amended).
DOUBLE HULL ARRANGEMENT
3.1
General
3.1.1
Text is extracted from applicable regulations in MARPOL 73/78 (Reg 19), as amended.
3.1.2
Text provides a general reference to the fact that there are regulations on the limitation of
size and arrangement of cargo tanks. Applicable regulations are located in Annex 1, Ch IV,
Reg 24 to 26 of the MARPOL (as amended).
ACCESS ARRANGEMENTS
4.1
Special requirements for oil tankers
4.1.1
The text incorporates the requirements of SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 3.6 (as amended), as required
by the Flag Administration, for details and arrangements of openings and attachments to
hull structure for access to and within spaces in, and forward of, the cargo tank region,
sometimes referred to as the SOLAS requirements for permanent means of access. The
present rule requirements do not specify strength/scantling requirements for supporting
structure for permanent means of access facilities, except where that supporting structure is a
part of hull structure.
Future updates to the rules will give consideration to specifying or providing guidance for
the application of corrosion margins for supporting structure for permanent means of access.
Additional text is based on LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 9, 13.2 and ABS Rules (January
2013), Pt 5, Ch 1, Sec 1, 5.1.
JANUARY 2014
4.1.2
4.1.3
JANUARY 2014
CORROSION PROTECTION
1.1
1.1.1
General
Cathodic protection systems in cargo tanks
1.1.2
Paint containing aluminium
1.2
Internal cathodic protection systems
1.2.1
This requirement is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/2.1.2.1 (based on DNV
Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 3, Sec 7, B300 and LR Rules (January 2013), Pt 3, Ch 2, 3.3 and
3.4).
1.2.2
3.4).
1.2.3
3.4).
1.2.4
3.4).
1.3
Paint containing aluminium
1.3.1
This requirement is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/2.1.3.1 (based on LR Rules
(January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 9, 2.3.3).
1.3.2
This requirement is in accordance with CSR OT (July 2010), Sec 6/2.1.3.1 (based on LR Rules
(January 2013), Pt 4, Ch 9, 2.3.3).
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 2, SEC 3 HULL LOCAL SCANTLING
PRIMARY SUPPORTING MEMBERS IN CARGO HOLD REGION
1.1
General
1.1.1
1.1.2
This section specifies the structural elements/configurations covered by the requirements for
primary supporting members contained in this Rules. For other structural elements or
configurations, the required scantlings are to be obtained by the direct calculation methods.
Typical structural elements to be calculated by direct calculation methods are deck
transverses fitted above the upper deck and horizontal stringers on transverse bulkheads
fitted with buttresses or other intermediate supports, etc.
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.2
Design load sets
1.2.1
For static plus dynamic sea pressure in seagoing condition (AC-SD), the draught at 0.9Tsc is
used for the double bottom floors and girders and side transverses considering the less
probability of loading up to full draught with the cargo tank empty. However, if a ship is
intended to be operated in seagoing loading condition where the net static upward load on
the double bottom exceeds that given with the combination of an empty cargo tank and a
mean ships draught of 0.9Tsc, such conditions are to be specially approved.
For deck transverse, the draught at 1.0Tsc is used to maximise the green sea pressure.
For static sea pressure in full load condition (AC-S), the draught at 1.0Tsc is used to have the
envelope value. It is considered appropriate to use the envelop value in static condition.
For static sea pressure in harbour or tank test condition (AC-S), the draught at 0.25Tsc (for
ships with one centreline longitudinal bulkhead) or 0.33Tsc (for ships with two inner
longitudinal bulkheads) is used to calculate the net pressure difference between the
internal and external pressures for evaluation of double bottom floors and girders.
JANUARY 2014
1.3
1.3.1
Floors in double bottom

1.3.2
Net shear area
The requirements are based on CSR OT (July 2010). The shear force distribution factors in
Table 2 of the Rules have been adjusted based on the calibration with the sample ships.
1.4
1.4.1
Girders in double bottom

1.4.2
Net shear area of centre girders
1.4.3
Net shear area of side girders
1.5
1.5.1
Deck transverses
Web depth
The requirements of the web depth of deck transverses indicated are based on CSR OT (July
2010).
1.5.2
Net section modulus fitted below the upper deck
The requirements of section modulus of deck transverses indicated in this Rules are based on
CSR OT (July 2010).
Since the phasing between the maximum sea load imposed on the side transverse and the
maximum green sea pressure imposed on the deck transverse may be different, carry-over
bending moment from the side transverse to the deck transverse is not applied for green sea
load.
1.5.3
Net shear area fitted below the upper deck
The requirements of shear area of deck transverses indicated in [1.5.2] of this Rules are based
on CSR OT (July 2010).
Deck transverses in one cross section are forming transverse ring of the hull structure.
Therefore, the required section modulus and shear area for deck transverses in accordance
with [1.5.2] and [1.5.3] of this Rules are to be constantly applied over the clear of end brackets,
i.e. no reduction of the requirements is allowed towards the mid-span.
1.5.4
Deck transverse adjacent to transverse bulkhead
JANUARY 2014
1.6
1.6.1
Side transverses
Net shear area
The requirements of shear area of side transverses of [1.6.1] of the Rules are based on
CSR OT (July 2010). Specific instructions have been added in the definition of effective
length of upper bracket of the side transverse, hu and location to be taken for the design
pressure, Pu for the structure where deck transverses are fitted above deck and the inner hull
longitudinal bulkhead is arranged with a large top wing structure.
1.6.2
Shear area over the length of the side transverse
This section specifies the distribution of the required shear area of side transverse. The same
distribution of the required shear area is also applied for vertical web on longitudinal
bulkhead.
1.7
1.7.1
Vertical web frames on longitudinal bulkhead

Web depth
The requirements of the web depth of vertical web frames on longitudinal bulkheads of the
Rules are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
1.7.2
Net section modulus
The requirements of section modulus of vertical web frames on longitudinal bulkheads

indicated in [1.7.2] of this Rules are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
1.7.3
Section modulus over the length of the vertical web frame
This section specifies the distribution of the required section modulus of vertical web frame
on longitudinal bulkhead. Similar distribution of the required section modulus is also
applied for horizontal stringer on transverse bulkhead.
1.7.4
Net shear area
The requirements of shear area of vertical web frames on longitudinal bulkheads are based
on CSR OT (July 2010).
1.7.5
Shear area over the length of the vertical web frame
This section specifies the distribution of the required shear area of vertical web frame on
longitudinal bulkhead. The same distribution of the required shear area is also applied for
side transverse.
1.8
1.8.1
Horizontal stringers on transverse bulkheads

Web depth
The requirements of the web depth of horizontal stringers on transverse bulkheads indicated
are based on CSR OT (July 2010). The minimum effective bending span for the calculation of
the required web depth has been adjusted based on the calibration with the sample ships.
1.8.2
Net section modulus
The requirements of section modulus of horizontal stringers on transverse bulkheads

indicated in [1.8.2] of this Rules are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
JANUARY 2014
1.8.3
Section modulus over the length of horizontal stringers
This section specifies the distribution of the required section modulus of horizontal stringers
on transverse bulkhead. Similar distribution of the required section modulus is also applied
for vertical web frame on longitudinal bulkhead.
1.8.4
Net shear area
The requirements of shear area of horizontal stringers on transverse bulkheads indicated in

[1.8.4] of this Rules are based on CSR OT (July 2010).
1.8.5
Shear area at mid effective shear span
This section specifies the distribution of the required shear area of horizontal stringers on
transverse bulkhead.
1.9
1.9.1
Cross ties
Maximum applied design axial load
The requirements for cross ties indicated in [1.9.1] of this Rules are based on CSR OT (July
2010). The working compressive loads are to be obtained based on Table 1 of this Rules with
averaging the pressure at both ends of cross tie. The permissible compressive loads are to be
obtained based on the criteria as given in Pt 1, Ch 8, Sec 5, [3] of the Rules.
For the cross tie, torsional buckling mode is generally found most critical, and the utilisation
factors for cross tie have been adjusted based on the calibration with the sample ships. In
order to verify the formula, non-linear finite element analysis has been carried out. A typical
cross tie design was modelled with two different lengths (Figure 1). The longest beam has
same length as the effective span for cross tie on a reference vessel. The torsional buckling
capacity was calculated using prescriptive formula in Pt 1, Ch 8, Sec 5, [3.1.3] and then
compared with result from non-linear FE analysis.
In addition, a non-linear FE analysis was carried out using a model as shown in Figure 2 and
including adjacent structure to an extent found necessary to determine the end constraint of
the cross ties. Pressure loads were gradually applied at bulkhead plates in each end of the
model until axial compression in the cross tie caused failure. The comparison carried out
with fixed and hinged ends gave consistent results and both analyses confirm end constraint
fixed (fend = 4) is found not realistic for this failure. The rules therefore require fend to be taken
2 which is almost hinged.
With the buckling capacity in Pt 1, Ch 8, Sec 5, [3.1.3] and allowable utilisation factors in this
section, the buckling capacity calculations for cross tie provide accurate results and ensure
cross tie which are robust.
JANUARY 2014
Figure 1: Reference beam
Figure 2: Cross tie
JANUARY 2014
Figure 3: Cross tie with additional tripping bracket on stringer
Table 1:
Comparison torsional buckling formula in CSR and non-linear FEA
Model
Full model (Figure 2)
Full model with tripping
brackets (Figure 3)
Reference model, short 15m
Reference model, long 20m
(Figure 1) same as span for
cross tie in Figure 2
JANUARY 2014
fend
2
2
1
4
1
2
4
CSR OT, Sec 10/3.5.1.4

Elastic
Critical
buckling
Stress
149
142
152
520
89
149
271
144
208
89
142
184
Non-linear analysis
Elastic
Critical
buckling
Stress
151
142
171
150
147
469
89
252
131
216
188
Table 2:
AC1
1.9.2
Results obtained for 5 reference ships
Actual stress equal to or less than

allowable according to individual
class society rules before CSR.
Utilisation factor
fend = 2
Allowable column buckling
Allowable torsion buckling
act/allow
5 VLCC reference ships

2
3
4
139
129
113
107
118
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
149
121
114%
147
105
123%
142
85
133%
148
110
97%
149
103
115%
Welded connections
1.9.3
Horizontal stiffeners
VERTICALLY CORRUGATED BULKHEADS
2.1
Application
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
Net plate thickness over the height
The requirements are based on the CSR OT (July 2010). Similar requirements are also
contained in IACS UR, S18.4.1 (Rev 8, May 2010).
2.2.2
Net web plating thickness over the height
The requirements address shear strength, which are based on CSR OT (July 2010). The shear
force is only a concern over the lower portion of the bulkhead, so the application
requirements are limited to the lower 15% of the corrugated bulkhead height, consistent with
the application of similar requirements in IACS UR, S18 (Rev 8, May 2010). These
requirements are not applicable to corrugated bulkheads without a lower stool.
2.2.3
Net thicknesses of the flanges over the height
The requirements are based on the CSR OT (July 2010). The formula for thickness in the
Rules is based on calculations that are performed to check the buckling strength of the
corrugated bulkhead. This is a local buckling strength criterion for the corrugation flange,
which determines the overall buckling strength of the corrugation as a beam column.
The formulas in the Rules are based on results of experimental and theoretical work on
buckling strength of corrugated bulkheads. Of particular note, the plate buckles as a result of
lateral load and not because of in-plane compression.
JANUARY 2014
2.2.4
Net section modulus over the height
The requirements are based on the CSR OT (July 2010). The formula for required section
modulus is based on simple beam theory and the basic understanding that the vertically
corrugated bulkhead can be considered as consisting of separate vertically oriented beamcolumns (i.e. corrugations) working independently. The loading on the corrugated bulkhead
consists of the following three major components:
1. Lateral pressure.
2. Carry-over bending moments due to bending of the double bottom.
3. Vertical axial force in the corrugation due to double bottom bending and loads on
deck.
The formulae explicitly consider the boundary conditions for the two corrugation ends,
which are addressed in the formulations provided in Table 7. The requirements were
calibrated against FEM calculations.
The formulae for corrugated bulkheads without lower stools were derived from the
formulae for corrugated bulkheads with lower stools and deck boxes. After the coefficients,
Ci (for the lower end and mid-span of transverse and longitudinal bulkheads) were
calculated for numerous values of the parameter Rb (lower stool parameter) within the wide
range of the selected Ad/bd ratio, analytical equations for the coefficients Ci as a function of
the parameter Rb have been developed.
A corresponding value of Ci using the analytical equations can be obtained when Rb is 0 (i.e.
no lower stool exists). Then from the derived values of Ci for case when Rb = 0, the
corresponding curves for C1, Cm1, C3 and Cm3 as a function of the ratio Ad/bd were built for
transverse and longitudinal bulkheads.
Figure 4: C1 and Cm1 for corrugated transverse bulkheads without bottom stools
JANUARY 2014
Figure 5: C3 and Cm3 for corrugated longitudinal bulkheads without bottom stools
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 2, SEC 4 HULL OUTFITTING
SUPPORTING STRUCTURES FOR COMPONENTS USED IN EMERGENCY

TOWING ARRANGEMENTS
1.1
General
1.1.1
The requirement in this section is based on SOLAS, Ch II-1, Reg 3.4 (as amended) and
guidelines for emergency towing arrangements for tanks, adopted by the MSC Res 35(63), as
amended.
1.1.2
1.2
Documents to be submitted
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
Continuity of strength
1.3.2
Stress concentrations
1.4
1.4.1

Deck plating
1.5
1.5.1
Loads
Safe working loads
1.5.2
Load case
1.6
1.6.1
General
1.6.2
Calculation procedure
1.6.3
Permissible stresses
JANUARY 2014
PT 2, CH 2, SEC 4 HULL OUTFITTING
MISCELLANEOUS DECK ATTACHMENTS
2.1
2.1.1
Cargo manifolds
Cargo manifold support
JANUARY 2014

TB Rule Reference Original 1st January 2014 Issue Pdf2304

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TB Rule Reference Original 1st January 2014 Issue Pdf2304

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TB Rule Reference Original 1st January 2014 Issue Pdf2304

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Common Structural Rules for

Bulk Carriers and

01 January 2014 Release

General Hull Requirements

GENERAL HULL REQUIREMENTS

Rule General Principles

General Arrangement Design

Structural Design Principles

Hull Girder Strength

Hull Local Scantling

Direct Strength Analysis

Superstructure, Deckhouses and Hull Outfitting

Ship in Operation - Renewal Criteria

RULE GENERAL PRINCIPLES

1 Primary Symbols and Units

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

Scope of application for bulk carriers

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

Figure 1: Typical structural arrangement for Ore Carriers

Scope of application of oil tankers

1.3.1 Length and structural arrangement application

1.3.2 Cargo temperature application

2.1.1 Rule structure

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

2.2.3 Application of the Rules

2.2.4 General criteria

2.3.1 Materials and welding

2.4.2 Fore part

2.4.3 Cargo area

2.4.4 Machinery space

2.4.5 Aft part

2.4.6 Superstructures and deckhouses

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

Limits of application to lifting appliances

2.5.2 Rule application for lifting appliances

2.5.3 Structures supporting fixed lifting appliances

Class notation for bulk carriers

3.2.1 Additional service features BC-A, BC-B and BC-C

3.2.2 Additional class notation GRAB [X]

Extract of information received

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

APPLICATION OF THE RULES OF THE SOCIETY

Structural parts not covered by these Rules

PT 1, CH 1, SEC 2 RULE PRINCIPLES

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

Performance and durability objectives:

Overall safety /reliability

Figure 1: Structural safety and durability

Minimum acceptable safety level

PT 1, CH 1, SEC 2 RULE PRINCIPLES

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

International and national regulations

International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS).

Ch II-1, Construction - structure, subdivision and stability, machinery and electrical

Application and implementation of the Rules

PT 1, CH 1, SEC 2 RULE PRINCIPLES

HARMONISED COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES

3.1.3 Residual strength